1.
State of the Art for the installation of lightning protection systems
1.1 Installation standards
With effect from 1 November 2002,
Parts 1 to 4 of a new series of pre-
standards - VDE V 0185 - for the instal-
lation of lightning protection systems
was published. At the same time, all
obsolete standards, prestandards and
the previously published drafts of the
VDE 0185 lightning protection series
were withdrawn (Table 1.1.1). The new
series of prestandards will be valid in its
present form until at least the middle
of 2006. By then, the work on the
IEC 62305 series of international stan-
dards, whose contents will correspond
to the prestandards, will have been
completed (Table 1.1.2). These meas-
ures were necessary to put the State of
the Art for lightning protection back
on a uniform and up-to-date basis. The
actual protection prestandards (Part 3
and Part 4) are preceded by two gener-
ally valid prestandards (Part 1 and
Part 2).
Classification
DIN 57185-1
(VDE 0185 Part 1): 1982-11
DIN 57185-2
(VDE 0185 Part 2): 1982-11
DIN IEC 81/122/CD
(VDE 0185 Part 10): 1999-02
DIN V ENV 61024-1
(VDE V 0185 Part 100): 1996-08
DIN IEC 61662
(VDE 0185 Part 101): 1998-11
DIN IEC 61024-1-2
(VDE 0185 Part 102): 1999-02
DIN VDE 0185-103
(VDE 0185 Part 103): 1997-09
DIN IEC 81/105A/CDV
(VDE 0185 Part 104): 1998-09
DIN IEC 81/106/CDV
(VDE 0185 Part 105): 1998-04
DIN IEC 81/120/CDV
(VDE 0185 Part 106): 1999-04
DIN IEC 81/121/CD
(VDE 0185 Part 106/A1): 1999-04
DIN IEC 81/114/CD
(VDE 0185 Part 107): 1999-01
DIN V VDE V 0185-110
(VDE 0185 Part 110): 1997-01
Table 1.1.1 Lightning protection standards withdrawn as from 1 November 2002
www.dehn.de
DIN V VDE V 0185-1: remaining risk is reduced and reduced
General principles until it is below the acceptable risk. This
This section contains information
about the risk posed by lightning, light-
ning characteristics, and the parame-
method can be used both for a simple
determination of the type of a light-
ning protection system in accordance
1
with DIN V VDE V 0185-3, and also to
ters derived therefrom for the simula-
establish a complex protection system
tion of the effects of lightning. In addi-
against lightning electromagnetic
tion, an overall view of the
impulse (LEMP) in accordance with
DIN V VDE V 0185 series of standards is
DIN V VDE V 0185-4.
given. Procedures and protection prin-
ciples which form the basis of the fol-
DIN V VDE V 0185-3:
lowing sections are explained.
Physical damage to structures and life
hazard
DIN V VDE V 0185-2:
Risk management This section deals with the protection
of buildings and structures and persons
Risk management in accordance with
from material damage and life-threat-
DIN V VDE V 0185-2 uses risk analysis to
ening situations caused by the effect of
first establish the necessity for light-
lightning current or by dangerous
ning protection. The optimum protec-
sparking, especially in the event of
tive measure from a technical and eco-
direct lightning strokes. A lightning
nomic point of view is then deter-
protection system comprising external
mined. Finally, the remaining residual
lightning protection (air-termination
risk is ascertained. Starting with the
system, down-conductor system and
unprotected state of the building, the
earth-termination system) and internal
Title
Lightning protection system;
General with regard to installation
Lightning protection system;
Erection of especially structures
Protection of structures against lightning
Part 1: General principles
Protection of structures against lightning
Part 1: General principles
Assessment of the risk of damage due to lightning
Protection of structures against lightning -
Part 1-2: General principles
Guide B: Design, installation, maintenance and inspection of
lightning protection systems
Protection against lightning electromagnetic impulse (LEMP) –
Part 1: General principles
Protection against lightning electromagnetic impulse (LEMP) –
Part 2: Shielding of structures, bonding inside structures and earthing
Protection against lightning electromagnetic impulse (LEMP) -
Part 4: Protection for existing structures
Protection against lightning electromagnetic impulse (LEMP) –
Part 3: Requirements of surge protective devices (SPDs)
Protection against lightning electromagnetic impulse (LEMP) –
Part 3: Requirements of surge protective devices (SPDs);
Amendment 1: Coordination of SPDs within existing structures
Test parameters simulating the effects of lightning protection system (L.P.S.)
components
Lightning protection system –
Guide for testing lightning protection systems
LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE 7

Classification
1 DIN V VDE V 0185-1
(VDE V 0185 Part 1): 2002-11
DIN V VDE V 0185-2
(VDE V 0185 Part 2): 2002-11
DIN V VDE V 0185-3
(VDE V 0185 Part 3): 2002-11
DIN V ENV 61024-1
(VDE V 0185 Part 4): 2002-11
Table 1.1.2 Draft lightning protection standards valid since 1 November 2002
lightning protection (lightning equipo-
tential bonding and separation dis-
tance) serves as a protective measure.
The lightning protection system is
defined by its type, Type I being more
effective than Type IV. The type
required is determined with the help of
a risk analysis carried out in accordance
with DIN V VDE V 0185-2, unless other-
wise laid down in regulations (e. g.
building regulations).
DIN V VDE V 0185-4:
Electrical and electronic systems within
structures
This section deals with the protection
of buildings and structures with electri-
cal and electronic systems against the
effects of the lightning electromagne-
tic impulse. Based on the protective
measures according to
DIN V VDE V 0185-3, this prestandard
also takes into consideration the effects
of electrical and magnetic fields, and
induced voltages and currents, caused
by direct and indirect lightning strokes.
The importance and necessity of the
prestandard derives from the increa-
sing use of diverse electrical and elec-
tronic systems which are grouped
together under the heading informa-
tion systems. For the protection of
information systems, the building or
structure is divided up into lightning
protection zones (LPZ). This allows local
differences in the number, type and
sensitivity of the electrical and elec-
tronic devices to be taken into consid-
eration when choosing the protective
measures. For each lightning protec-
tion zone, a risk analysis in accordance
with DIN V VDE V 0185-2 is used to
select those protective measures which
provide optimum protection at mini-
mum cost.
The VDE prestandards VDE V 0185 Parts
1 to 4 can be applied to the design,
8 LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE
Contractors and those placing an order
Title for work regularly agree that the work
Protection against lightning
Part 1: General principles
must conform to the general State of
the Art without the need to make spe-
cific mention of this. If the work shows
a negative deviation from this general
Protection against lightning
State of the Art, it is defective. This can
Part 2: Risk management
result in a claim being made against
Assessment of risk for structures
the contractor for material defect lia-
Protection against lightning bility. The material defect liability only
Part 3: Physical damage to structures exists, however, if the work was already
and life hazard defective at the time of acceptance!
Circumstances which occurring subse-
Protection against lightning
quently - such as a further develop-
Part 4: Electrical and electronic systems
ment of the State of the Art – do not
within structures
belatedly make the previously accept-
ed, defect-free work defective!
For the question of the defectiveness of
installation, inspection and mainte- a works’ management, the state of the
nance of lightning protection systems recognised engineering rules at the
for buildings and structures, their time of the acceptance is the sole
installations, their contents and the deciding factor.
persons within. Since, in future, only the new lightning
protection prestandards will be rele-
vant at the time of completion and
acceptance of lightning protection sys-
1.2 Work contracts tems, have to be installed in accor-
dance with these prestandards. It is not
A work contractor is fundamentally
sufficient that the service conformed to
liable for ensuring that his service is
the engineering rules at the time it was
free from defects. The decisive starting
provided, if, between completion of a
point for a defect-free service is compli-
contract, service provision and accept-
ance with the recognised engineering
ance of the construction work, the
rules. Relevant VDE and DIN standards
technical knowledge and hence the
are used here in order to fill the factual
engineering rules have changed.
characteristic of the “recognised engi-
Hence works which have been previ-
neering rules” with life. If the relevant
ously installed and already accepted
standards are complied with, it is pre-
under the old standards do not become
sumed that the service is free from
defective because, as a result of the
defect. The practical significance of
updating of the standards, a “higher
such a prima facie evidence lies in the
technical standard” is demanded.
fact that a customer who lodges a com-
With the exception of lightning protec-
plaint of defective service by the work
tion systems for nuclear facilities, light-
contractor (for example for the installa-
ning protection systems have only to
tion of a lightning protection system)
conform to the State of the Art at the
has basically little chance of success if
time they are installed, i. e. they do not
the work contractor can show that he
have to be updated to the latest State
complied with the relevant technical
of the Art. Existing systems are
standards. As far as this effect is con-
inspected in the course of maintenance
cerned, standards and prestandards
tests according to the standards in
carry equal weight. The effect of the
force at the time they were installed.
presumption of technical standards is
removed, however, if either the stan-
dards are withdrawn, or it is proven
that the actual standards no longer
represent the State of the Art. VDE or
DIN standards cannot statically lay
down the state of the recognised engi-
neering rules in tablets of stone, as
technical requirements and possibilities
are continually changing. If standards
are withdrawn, therefore, and
replaced with new standards or pre-
standards, then it is primarily the new
standards which then correspond to
the State of the Art.
www.dehn.de
1.3 Product standards
Materials, components and units for
lightning protection systems must be
designed and tested for the electrical,
mechanical and chemical stresses which
have to be expected during their use.
This affects both the components of
the external lightning protection as
well as units of the internal lightning
protection system.
DIN EN 50164-1 (VDE 0185 Part 201):
Requirements for connection compo-
nents
This standard describes inspection and
test procedures for metal connecting
units. Units falling within the scope of
this standard are:
⇒ Clamps
⇒ Connectors
⇒ Terminal components
⇒ Bridging components
⇒ Expansion pieces
⇒ Measuring points
Our clamps and connectors meet the
requirements of this test standard.
DIN EN 50164-2 (VDE 0185 Part 202):
Requirements for conductors and
earth electrodes
This standard specifies the require-
ments on conductors, air-termination
rods, lead-in components and earthing
electrodes. This standard supersedes
the corresponding standards of the DIN
488XX series.
So far
(transition period until 1 October 2004)
E DIN VDE 0675-6
E DIN VDE 0675-6/A1
E DIN VDE 0675-6/A2
Class B
Class C
Class D
Table 1.3.1 Classification of surge protective devices (SPDs)
www.dehn.de
DIN EN 61643-11 (VDE 0675 Part 6-11): DIN EN 61643-21 (VDE 0845 Part 3-1):
Surge protective devices connected to Surge protective devices connected to
low voltage systems
Previously, the development, manufac-
ture, and testing of surge protective
telecommunications and signalling
networks
This standard describes the perform-
1
devices for use in low voltage systems ance requirements, and inspection and
was based on E DIN VDE 0675 Part 6, E test procedures for surge protective
DIN VDE 0675 Part 6/A1 and E DIN VDE devices used for the protection of
0675 Part 6/A2. These standards could telecommunication and signal process-
be used as the basis of conformity tests ing networks including e. g.
for surge protective devices until ⇒ data networks,
1 October 2004. Surge protective
⇒ voice transmission networks,
devices which correspond to this series
of standards are subdivided into Class ⇒ alarm systems,
A, B, C and D arresters. ⇒ automation systems.
Since 1 December 2002, the require-
ments on, and inspections of, surge
protective devices in low voltage sys-
tems have been governed by DIN EN
61643-11 (VDE 0675 Part 6-11). This
product standard is the result of inter-
national standardisation as part of IEC
and CENELEC. While, in many cases, the
inspection and test procedures
described therein meet the require-
ments and inspections of the previous,
authorised draft standards E DIN VDE
0675 Part 6, E DIN VDE 0675 Part 6/A1
and E DIN VDE 0675 Part 6/A2, the DIN
EN 61643-11 (VDE 0675 Part 6-11) nev-
ertheless brings some changes for the
user as well. In the future, the classifi-
cation characteristic for surge protec-
tive devices (SPDs) will be Test Classes .
We will now differentiate between
surge protective devices as SPD Type 1,
SPD Type 2 and SPD Type 3. The corre-
lations between old and new classifica-
tions according to the product stan-
dards for surge protective devices are
shown in Table 1.3.1.
In the future
(in force since 1 December 2002)
DIN EN 61643-11
(VDE 0675 Part 6-11)
SPD Type 1
SPD Type 2
SPD Type 3
LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE 9
1

10 LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE www.dehn.de

9.17 Lightning and surge protection for intrinsically safe circuits
Introduction
In chemical and petrochemical industri-
al plants, potentially explosive areas
develop frequently during the manu-
facture, processing, storage, and trans-
portation of flammable materials (e. g.
gasoline, alcohol, liquid gas, explosive
dust), where any type of sources of
ignition must be avoided to prevent
explosions. Relevant protective provi-
sions refer to the threat of atmospheric
discharges (lightning) to such installa-
tions. Here it has to be considered that
there is a fire risk and explosion hazard
by direct or indirect lightning dis-
charges due to the partially widespread
extension of such installations.
To achieve necessary plant availability
and also the necessary safety of the sys-
tem, a conceptual action is necessary
for protection of process-specific elec-
tric and electronic parts of the plant
against lightning currents and surges.
Lightning Protection Zones Concept
Intrinsically safe circuits are often used
in areas where explosion hazard may
occur. Fig. 9.17.1 shows the principal
design of such a system and the assign-
ment in lightning protection zones (see
chapter 7.2). Due to the necessary, very
high availability of the systems and in
order to meet the high requirements
on safety in the hazardous area, the
following areas were divided into light-
ning protection zone 1 (LPZ 1) and
lightning protection zone 2 (LPZ 2):
⇒ Electronic evaluation unit in the
control room (LPZ 2)
⇒ Temperature transducer at the
tank (LPZ 1)
⇒ Interior of the tank (LPZ 1)
air-termination system
building shield, e.g.
steel reinforcement
conductor to remote potential
Fig. 9.17.1 Division of a hazardous location into lightning protection zones (LPZ)
www.dehn.de
In accordance with the lightning pro-
tection zones concept according to DIN
V VDE V 0185-4, all lines at the LPZ
boundaries must be equipped with cor-
responding surge protective devices as
described below.
External lightning protection
The external lightning protection sys-
tem is the entire equipment installed
and existing outside at or in the instal-
lation to be protected for interception
and conducting the lightning current
into the earth-termination system.
A lightning protection system for
explosive areas corresponds to light-
ning protection system Type II at nor-
mal conditions. In well-founded, indi-
vidual cases and under special condi-
tions (legal provisions), or by the result
of a risk analysis in accordance with DIN
V VDE V 0185-2 it can differ from the
standards. In any case, the following
requirements are based on lightning
protection system Type II. As with all
lightning protection systems, the sepa-
ration distance must also be main-
tained here (Fig. 9.17.2).
air ventilation
intermeshed equipotential bonding
air-termination
conductors air-termination
rod
concrete tub
of the tank
Fig. 9.17.2 Air-termination system for a tank with
air-termination rods and cables
Lightning equipotential bonding out-
side the hazardous area
The application of surge protective
devices in the low voltage installation
and for telecommunication lines out-
side the hazardous area (control room)
shows no peculiarities with respect to
other applications and has already
been described several times (see publi-
cation No. DS 649 E – Red / Line: “…
Easy Choice”). In this context it should
be noted that the surge protective
devices for lines of LPZ 0A to LPZ 1 (Figs.
9.17.3 and 9.17.4) must have a light-
ning current discharge capacity, which
is specified in test waveform 10/350 µs.
The surge protective devices of the dif-
ferent requirement classes must be
metal container
with sufficient
material thickness
9
LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE 227
 lightning equipotential bonding
EB

external lightning protection system

power
supply

water

gas Z heating

cathodic protected tank pipe

foundation earthing electrode

Fig. 9.17.3 Lightning equipotential bonding according to DIN V VDE V 0185-3 based on main equipotential bonding according to DIN VDE 0100 Part 410

Equipotential bonding since the surges are already discharged

Fig. 9.17.4 DEHNventil DV TT 255 in a switchgear
cabinet for protection of the power sup-
ply system
coordinated among each other. DEHN
+ SÖHNE provides a coordinated prod-
uct range of SPDs which fulfils the
above mentioned requirement.
In all areas where explosion hazard
may occur, a consistent equipotential
bonding has to be implemented. Also
building supports and parts of the con-
struction, pipelines, containers, etc.,
must be included in the equipotential
bonding so that a voltage difference
must not be feared, even in the event
of a failure. The connections of the
equipotential bonding conductors
must be secured against self-loosening.
The equipotential bonding must be
carefully realised, installed, and tested
in compliance with parts 410, 540, and
610 of DIN VDE 0100. Using surge pro-
tective devices, the cross section of the
earth conductor for equipotential
bonding must be at least 4 mm2 Cu.
Surge protection in intrinsically safe
circuits
Already during the design process, the
lightning protection zones and haz-
ardous areas shall be harmonised. The
consequence is that the requirements
both for use of surge protective devices
in hazardous areas and at the LPZ
boundaries must be met likewise. Thus,
the installation site of the surge protec-
tive device was determined precisely. It
previously. Also, the availability of the
temperature transmitter, which is
important for the process, is consider-
ably increased in this way. Furthermore,
the requirements according to EN
60079-14 (DIN VDE 0165-1) must be
met (Fig. 9.17.5):
⇒ Use of surge protective devices
with a minimum discharge capacity
of 10 impulses with 10 kA (8/20 µs),
each without malfunction or
impairment of the surge protective
function (Table 9.17.1).
⇒ Mounting of the surge protective
device into a metallic shielded
enclosure and earthing with at
least 4 mm2 Cu.
⇒ Installation of the cables between
the surge protective device and the
equipment in a metal pipe earthed
at both ends or the application of
shielded cables with a maximum
length of 1 m.
In accordance with the definition of
the protection concept, the program-
mable controller in the control room is
defined as LPZ 2. The intrinsically safe
cable leaving the temperature trans-

9 is located at the boundary of LPZ 0B and

LPZ 1. This prevents the penetration of
mitter is also led at the boundary from
LPZ 0B to LPZ 1 via a surge protective
device BLITZDUCTOR CT, BCT MOD MD
dangerous surges into zone 0 or 20,
EX 24. This protective device at the oth-

228 LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE www.dehn.de

 zone 1, 2

BLITZDUCTOR
BCT BAS EX, BCT MOD ...EX

Blitzductor CT
3 OUT 4

1 IN 2

1 IN 2

3 OUT 4
BCT MOD ...
Blitzductor CT BCT MOD ...

zone 0
min. 4 mm2 min. 4 mm2
cable length
max. 1m

EB

Fig. 9.17.5 Surge protective devices in intrinsically safe circuits Fig. 9.17.6 BCT MOD MD EX 24 for intrinsically safe
circuits

er end of the field line between the Type of protection “Intrinsic Safety“ – into consideration. In accordance with
buildings must have the same dis- Category “ia“ or “ib“? the EC type examination certificate
charge capacity as the protective device The transducer and the surge protec- (PTB 99 ATEX 2092), the internal capac-
installed at the tank. After the surge tive device are installed in protection itances and inductances are negligible
protective device, the intrinsically safe zone 1 so that the category ib is suffi- in the surge protective device type BCT
line is led via an isolation amplifier cient for the 4 ... 20 mA current loop. MOD MD EX 24 of DEHN + SÖHNE (Fig.
(Figs. 9.17.5 und 9.17.6). From there, The used surge protection fulfils the 9.17.6) and need not be taken into
the shielded cable is laid to the pro- highest requirements in conformity account when considering the inter-
grammable controller in LPZ 2. Because with certification according to ia and connection conditions.
of the two-sided earth connection of consequently, is also suitable for ib
the cable shield, no protective device is applications. Maximum values for voltage Ui and
required at boundary LPZ 1 to LPZ 2, current Ii
since the residual electromagnetic Permissible maximum values for According to its technical specifications
interference still to be expected is L0 and C0 for intrinsically safe circuits, the trans-
strongly attenuated by the cable shield Before an intrinsically safe circuit is put ducer to be protected has a maximum
earthed at both ends. into operation, the proof of its intrinsic supply voltage Ui and a maximum cur-
safety must be provided. For this pur- rent Ii (Table 9.17.1). The rated voltage
Criteria for the choice of surge protec- pose, the supply unit, the transducer, Uc of the protective device must be at
tive devices in intrinsically safe circuits the used cables, as well as the surge least as high as the open-circuit voltage
The example treating a temperature protective devices must fulfil the inter- of the supply unit. Also the nominal
transducer (Table 9.17.1) shows which connection conditions. If necessary, the current of the protective device must
aspects must be observed for choosing inductances and capacitances of the be at least as high as the short-circuit
surge protective devices (SPD): protective devices must also be taken
Insulation resistance of the equipment Technical Measuring transformer Surge protective device
In order to prevent measuring errors by data TH02 BCT MOD MD EX 30
compensating currents, the sensor sig-
nals from the tank are often isolated Installation site zone 1 zone 1
electrically. The transducer has an insu- Type of protection ib ia
lation resistance of ≥ 500 V ac between
the intrinsically safe 4 ... 20 mA current Voltage Ui max. 29.4 V dc Uc = 34.8 V dc
loop and the earthed temperature sen- Current Ii max. 130 mA IN = 500 mA
sor. Consequently the equipment is
considered as “non-earthed“. The use Frequency fHART = 2200 Hz fG = 6 MHz
of surge protective devices must not frequency-modulated
interfere with this isolation from earth. Immunity acc. to NE 21, e.g. 0.5 kV Discharge capacity 10 kA (8/20 µs)
If the transducer has an insulation line / line Coordination characteristics (X/1)
resistance of < 500 V ac, the intrinsically
Test standards ATEX, CE ATEX, CE, IEC 61643-21
safe circuit is regarded as earthed. This
requires protective devices, the voltage Isolated from Yes Yes
protection level of which is below the earth 500 V
insulation resistance of the “earthed”
Inner capacity Ci Ci = 15 nF negligibly small
transducer (e. g. Up (wire / PG) ≤ 35 V) at
a nominal discharge current of 10 kA
(pulse shape 8/20 µs).
Inner inductance Li Li = 220 µH negligibly small 9
Table 9.17.1 Example for a temperature measuring transformer

www.dehn.de LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE 229

 current Ii of the transducer to be Summary
expected in the event of a failure. If A threat to chemical and petrochemical
these parameters differ from the basic installations by a lightning discharge
conditions when choosing the surge and the electromagnetic influence
arresters, the protective device can be resulting from it, is covered in the rele-
overloaded and, consequently, can fail vant guidelines. During the realisation
or the intrinsic safety of the circuit is of the lightning protection zones con-
eliminated by an impermissible cept in design and implementation of
increase in temperature at the protec- such installations, the risks of a spark-
tive device. ing by a direct stroke or discharging of
conducted interference energies can be
Coordination of the surge protective minimised within a safety-related and
devices with terminal equipment also economically justifiable scope. The
The NAMUR recommendation NE 21 used surge arresters must fulfil the
determines the requirements on the requirements of explosion protection,
immunity against interferences for the coordination to the terminal equip-
process technology and process control ment, as well as the requirements from
equipment and its general application the operational parameters of the
(e. g. transducers). The signal inputs of measuring and control circuits (Table
such equipment must withstand tran- 9.17.2).
sient voltages of 0.5 kV between the
wires (differential-mode interference)
and of 1.0 kV between wire and earth
(common-mode interference). The test
arrangement and the waveform are
described in the EN 61000-4-5 basic
standard. According to the amplitude
of the test pulse, a corresponding surge
immunity is assigned to the terminal
equipment. These immunities of the
terminal equipment are documented
by the surge immunity (1 - 4). 1 means
the lowest and 4 the highest surge
immunity. When there is a risk of light-
ning and surge effects, the conducted
interference pulses (voltage, current
Intrinsically safe SPD type approved Part No.
and energy) must be limited to a value
interface by FISCO1)
that lies within the immunity of the ter-
minal equipment. The coordination 0 – 20 mA, 4 – 20 mA BCT MOD MD EX 24 + BCT BAS EX 919 580 + 919 507
characteristics (e. g. X/1) on the protec- (also with HART) BCT MOD MD EX 30 + BCT BAS EX 919 581 + 919 507
tive devices indicate a direct reference DCO RK MD EX 24 919 960
to the test level of the terminal equip- DPI MD EX 24 M 2 929 960
ment. Number 1 describes the request- Digital I /O BCT MOD MD EX 24 + BCT BAS EX 919 580 + 919 507
ed test level of the terminal equipment BCT MOD MD EX 30 + BCT BAS EX 919 581 + 919 507
and X, the discharge capacity of the DCO RK MD EX 24 919 960
protective device of 10 kA (waveform DPI MD EX 24 M 2 929 960
8/20 µs).
NAMUR signals BCT MOD MD EX 24 + BCT BAS EX 919 580 + 919 507
BCT MOD MD EX 30 + BCT BAS EX 919 581 + 919 507
DCO RK MD EX 24 919 960
DPI MD EX 24 M 2 929 960
PROFIBUS – PA BCT MOD MD EX 24 + BCT BAS EX 919 580 + 919 507
BCT MOD MD EX 30 + BCT BAS EX 919 581 + 919 507
DCO RK MD EX 24 919 960
DPI MD EX 24 M 2 929 960
Foundation Fieldbus BCT MOD MD EX 24 + BCT BAS EX 919 580 + 919 507
BCT MOD MD EX 30 + BCT BAS EX 919 581 + 919 507
DCO RK MD EX 24 919 960
DPI MD EX 24 M 2 929 960
PROFIBUS – DP BCT MOD MD HFD 6 + BCT BAS EX 919 583 + 919 507

9 Fig. 9.17.7 Surge arrester for field devices –

1) FISCO = Fieldbus Intrinsically Safe Concept

Table 9.17.2 Surge protective devices for use in intrinsically safe circuits and bus systems
DEHNpipe, DPI MD EX 24 M2

230 LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE www.dehn.de

2. Characteristics of lightning current
2.1 Lightning discharge and
temporal development
of the lightning current
Every year, an average of around one
million lightning strokes discharge over
Germany. For an area of 357,042 km2
this corresponds to an average flash
density of 2.8 lightning discharges per
square kilometre per year. The actual
lightning density, however, depends to
a large extent on geographic condi-
tions. An initial overview can be
obtained from the lightning density
map contained in DIN V VDE V 0185-2.
The higher the resolution of the light-
ning density map, the more accurate
the information it provides about the
actual lightning frequency in the area
under consideration.
Using the BLIDS lightning location sys-
tem, it is now possible to locate light-
ning to within 200 m in Germany. For
this purpose, twelve measuring out-
posts are spread throughout the coun-
try. They are synchronised by means of
the highly accurate time signal of the
global positioning system (GPS). The
measuring posts record the time the
electromagnetic wave produced by the
lightning discharge arrives at the
receiver. From the differences in the
times of arrival of the electromagnetic
wave recorded by the various receivers,
and the corresponding differences in
the times it takes the electromagnetic
wave to travel from the location of the
lightning discharge to the receivers,
the point of strike is calculated. The
data determined in this way are filed
centrally and made available to the
user in form of various packages. Fur-
ther information about this service can
be obtained from www.blids.de.
Thunderstorms come into existence
when warm air masses containing suffi-
cient moisture are transported to great
altitudes. This transport can occur in a
number of ways. In the case of heat
thunderstorms, the ground is heated
up locally by intense insolation. The
layers of air near the ground heat up
and rise. For frontal thunderstorms, the
invasion of a cold air front causes
cooler air to be pushed below the
warm air, forcing it to rise. Orographic
thunderstorms are caused when warm
air near the ground is lifted up as it
crosses rising ground. Additional physi-
cal effects further increase the vertical
upsurge of the air masses. This forms
updraught channels with vertical speeds
of up to 100 km/h, which create tower-
ing cumulonimbus clouds with typical
www.dehn.de
heights of 5 – 12 km and diameters of
5 – 10 km.
Electrostatic charge separation process-
es, e. g. friction and sputtering, are
responsible for charging water droplets
and particles of ice in the cloud.
Positively charged particles accumulate
in the upper part, and negatively
charged particles in the lower part of
the thundercloud. In addition, there is
2
again a small positive charge centre at
the bottom of the cloud. This origi-
nates from the corona discharge which
emanates from sharp-pointed objects
on the ground underneath the thun-
dercloud (e. g. plants), and is trans-
ported upwards by the wind.
If the space charge densities, which
happen to be present in a thunder-
cloud, produce local field strengths of
several 100 kV/m, leader discharges
(leaders) are formed which initiate a
lightning discharge. Cloud-to-cloud
flashes result in charge neutralisation
between positive and negative cloud
charge centres, and do not directly
strike objects on the ground in the
process. The lightning electromagnetic
Fig. 2.1.1 Downward flash (cloud-to-earth flash)
impulses (LEMP) they radiate must be
taken into consideration, however, charges on the ground. We distinguish
because they endanger electrical and between two types of lightning flashes
electronic systems. to earth:
⇒ Downward flash
Lightning flashes to earth lead to a
neutralisation of charge between the ⇒ Upward flash
cloud charges and the electrostatic
leader leader
cloud-to-earth flash cloud-to-earth flash
(negative downward flash) (positive downward flash)
Fig. 2.1.2 Discharge mechanism of a negative down- Fig. 2.1.3 Discharge mechanism of a positive down-
ward flash (cloud-to-earth flash) ward flash (cloud-to-earth flash)
LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE 11

2 location.
Fig. 2.1.4 Upward flash (earth-to-cloud flash)
In the case of downward flashes, leader
discharges pointing towards the
ground guide the lightning discharge
from the cloud to the earth. Such dis-
charges usually occur in flat terrain and
near low buildings and structures.
Downward flashes can be recognised
by the branching (Fig. 2.1.1) which is
directed earthwards. The most com-
mon type of lightning is negative light-
ning flashes to earth, where a leader
filled with negative cloud charge
pushes its way from the thunder cloud
leader
earth-to-cloud flash
(negative upward flash)
Fig. 2.1.5 Discharge mechanism of a negative
upward flash (earth-to-cloud flash)
12 LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE
to earth (Fig. 2.1.2). This leader propa-
gates in a series of jerks with a speed of
around 300 km/h in steps of a few 10 m.
The interval between the jerks
amounts to a few 10 µs. When the
leader has drawn close to the earth, (a
few 100 m to a few 10 m), it causes the
strength of the electric field of objects
on the surface of the earth in the vicin-
ity of the leader (e. g. trees, gable ends
of buildings) to increase. The increase is
great enough to exceed the dielectric
strength of the air. These objects
leader
earth-to-cloud flash
(positive upward flash)
Fig. 2.1.6 Discharge mechanism of a positive upward
flash (earth-to-cloud flash)
involved reach out to the leader by
growing positive streamers which then
meet up with the leader, initiating the
main discharge.
Positive flashes to earth can arise out of
the lower, positively charged area of a
thundercloud (Fig. 2.1.3). The ratio of
the polarities is around 90 % negative
lightning to 10 % positive lightning.
This ratio depends on the geographic
On very high, exposed objects (e. g.
radio masts, telecommunication
towers, steeples) or on the tops of
mountains, upward flashes (earth-to-
cloud flashes) can occur. It can be
recognised by the upwards-reaching
branches of the lightning discharge
(Fig. 2.1.4). In the case of upward
flashes, the high electric field strength
required to trigger a leader is not
achieved in the cloud, but rather by the
distortion of the electric field on the
exposed object, and the associated
high strength of the electric field. From
this location, the leader and its charge
channel propagate towards the cloud.
Upward flashes occur with both nega-
tive polarity (Fig. 2.1.5) and also with
positive polarity (Fig. 2.1.6). Since, with
upward flashes, the leaders propagate
from the exposed object on the surface
of the earth to the cloud, high objects
can be struck several times by one light-
ning discharge during a thunderstorm.
Objects struck by lightning are subject
to higher stress by downward flashes
(cloud-to-earth flashes) than by
upward flashes (earth-to-cloud flash-
es). The parameters of downward
flashes are therefore taken as the basis
when designing lightning protection
measures.
Depending on the type of lightning
flash, each lightning discharge consists
of one or more partial strokes of light-
ning. We distinguish between short
strokes with less than 2 ms duration
and long strokes with a duration of
more than 2 ms. Further distinctive fea-
tures of partial lightning strokes are
their polarity (negative or positive),
and their temporal position in the
lightning discharge (first, subsequent
or superimposed partial strokes of
lightning). The possible combinations
of partial lightning strokes are shown
in Fig. 2.1.7 for downward flashes, and
Fig. 2.1.8 for upward flashes.
The lightning currents consisting of
both impulse currents and continuing
currents are load-independent cur-
rents, i. e. the objects struck exert no
effect on the lightning currents. Four
parameters important for lightning
www.dehn.de
protection technology can be obtained
from the lightning current profiles
shown in Figs. 2.1.7 and 2.1.8:
⇒ The peak value of lightning current I
⇒ The charge of the lightning current
Qflash, comprising the charge of the
short stroke Qshort and the charge
of the long stroke Qlong
⇒ The specific energy W/R of the
lightning current
⇒ The steepness di/dt of the lightning
current.
The following chapters show which of
the individual efficiency parameters are
responsible for which effects, and how
they influence the dimensioning of
lightning protection systems.
2.2 Peak value of the light-
ning current
Lightning currents are load-independ-
ent currents, i.e. a lightning discharge
can be considered an almost ideal cur-
rent source. If a load-independent
active electric current flows through
conductive components, the amplitude
of the current, and the impedance of

–I –I
the conductive component the current
flows through, help to regulate the
potential drop across the component
2
flown through by the current. In the
first impulse current simplest case, this relationship can be
described using Ohm’s Law.
long-time current
U=I iR
positive or negative t positive or negative t If a current is formed at a single point
on a homogeneously conducting sur-
face, the well-known potential gradi-
ent area arises. This effect also occurs
when lightning strikes homogeneous
−I −I ground (Fig. 2.2.1). If living beings
(people or animals) are inside this
sequential impulse currents potential gradient area, a step voltage
is formed which can cause a shock cur-
rent to flow through the body
(Fig. 2.2.2). The higher the conductivity
of the ground, the flatter the shape of
negative t negative t the potential gradient area. The risk of
dangerous step voltages is thus also
Fig. 2.1.7 Possible components of downward flashes reduced.

±I superimposed ±I
short strokes j
short stroke

long stroke
first long stroke

Positive or negative t Positive or negative t

−I −I r
j Potential
subsequent
r Distance from point of strike
short strokes
Fig. 2.2.1 Potential distribution of a lightning stroke
into homogenous soil

Negative t Negative t

±I

single long
stroke

Positive or negative t Fig. 2.2.2 Animals killed by shock current due to

hazardous step voltage
Fig. 2.1.8 Possible components of upward flashes

www.dehn.de LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE 13

 If lightning strikes a building which is
already equipped with a lightning pro-
tection system, the lightning current air-termination lightning current
system º
flowing away via the earth-termination

Current
system of the building gives rise to a down-conductor
potential drop across the earthing º
system
resistance RE of the earth-termination
system of the building (Fig. 2.2.3). As Time
long as all conductive objects in the
building, which persons can come into

2 contact with, are raised to the same

high potential, persons in the building
cannot be exposed to danger. This is
why it is necessary for all conductive earth-termination system
parts in the building with which per- with earth resistance RE
sons can come into contact, and all
external conductive parts entering the
building, to have equipotential bond-
ing. If this is disregarded, there is a risk
of dangerous shock hazard voltages if remote earth
lightning strikes.
The rise in potential of the earth-termi-
Fig. 2.2.3 Potential rise of the earth-termination system of a building compared to the remote earth due to
nation system as a result of the light-
the peak value of the lightning current
ning current also creates a hazard for
electrical installations (Fig. 2.2.4). In the
example shown, the operational earth
of the low voltage supply network is
located outside the potential gradient
area caused by the lightning current. If substation I = 100 kA
lightning strikes the building, the
potential of the operational earth RB is
therefore not identical to the earth

PEN
potential of the consumer system with-

L1
L2
L3
in the building. In the present example,
there is a difference of 1000 kV. This
endangers the insulation of the electri-
cal system and the equipment connect-
ed to it.

RB RE = 10W UE

1000 kV
UE

distance r

Fig. 2.2.4 Threat to electrical installations by potential rise at the earth-termination system

14 LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE www.dehn.de

2.3 Steepness of lightning
current Î / T1
The steepness of lightning current building
∆i/∆t, which is effective during the
interval ∆t, determines the height of 100% lightning current

Current
1 90%
the electromagnetically induced volt-
ages. These voltages are induced in all 3 Î
open or closed conductor loops located

s1
10%
in the vicinity of conductors through

s3
which lightning current is flowing.
Fig. 2.3.1 shows possible configurations
of conductor loops in which lightning
2
s2
down
conductor
Time
front time T1

induced square-
2
currents could induce voltages. The wave voltage

Voltage
square wave voltage U induced in a
conductor loop during the interval ∆t U
is:
T1 Time
∆i
U = Mi 1 Loop in the down conductor with potential flashover
∆t distance s1
M Mutual inductance of the loop 2 Loop out of down conductor and installation cable
with potential flashover distance s2
∆i/∆t Steepness of lightning current
3 Installation loop with potential flashover distance s3
As already described, lightning dis-
charges comprise a number of partial
strokes lightning. As far as the tempo- Fig. 2.3.1 Induced square-wave voltage in loops via the current steepness ∆i/∆t of the lightning current
ral position is concerned, a distinction is
made between first and subsequent
short strokes within a lightning dis- µH 10
charge. The main difference between
the two types of short strokes consists 1
a = 10 m
in the fact that, because the lightning ∆i
channel has to be built, the gradient of 0.1 ∆t
a=3m
the lightning current of the first short M2
0.01 a=1m
stroke is not as steep as that of the sub-
sequent short stroke, which can use an U

a
0.001 a = 0.1 m
existing, fully conductive lightning
channel. The steepness of lightning 0.1 · 10-3
current of the subsequent lightning a = 0.03 m a = 0.3 m
a = 0.01 m a s
stroke is therefore used to assess the 0.01 · 10-3
0.1 0.3 1 3 10 30
highest induced voltage in the conduc-
s m
tor loops.
An example of how to assess the
induced voltage in a conductor loop is installation loop
shown in Fig. 2.3.2. of an alarm system high requirement
∆i kA
= 150
∆t µs
From the figure beside
10 m

follows:
2.4 Charge of U
lightning current M2 ≈ 4.8 µH
U = 4.8 · 150 = 720 kV
10 m 1m
The charge Qflash of the lightning cur-
rent is made up of the charge Qshort of
the short stroke and the charge Qlong of Fig. 2.3.2 Example for calculation of induced square-wave voltages in squared loops
the long stroke. The charge

Q = ∫ idt
of the lightning current determines the
energy deposited at the precise point
of strike, and at all points where the
lightning current continues in the
shape of an electric arc along an insu-
lated path. The energy W deposited at

www.dehn.de LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE 15

 the base of the electric arc is given by 100 kA (10/350 µs) galvanised steel 100 kA (10/350 µs) copper
the product of the charge Q and the
anode-/cathode drop with values in the
micrometer range UA,K (Fig. 2.4.1). The
average value of UA,K is a few 10 V and
depends on influences such as the
height and shape of the current:

W = Q i U A, K

2 Q Charge of lightning current

UA,K Anode/cathode drop

Q
smelt metal

UA,K

tip of the
down conductor
Fig. 2.4.2 Effect of an impulse current arc on a metal surface

Aluminium: d = 0.5 mm; 200 A, 350 ms Copper: d = 0.5 mm; 200 A, 180 ms

lightning current
Current

Time
long stroke current
Current

Time
Stainless steel: d = 0.5 mm; 200 A, 90 ms Steel: d = 0.5 mm; 200 A, 100 ms
Fig. 2.4.1 Energy conversion at the point of strike by
the load of the lightning current

Hence, the charge of the lightning cur-

rent causes the components of the
lightning protection system struck by
lightning to melt down. The charge is
also relevant for the stresses on isolat-
ing spark gaps and protective spark
gaps and by spark-gap based surge pro-
tective devices.
Recent examinations have shown that, Galvanised steel: d = 0.5 mm; 200 A, 100 ms
as the electric arc acts for a longer time,
it is mainly the continuing charge Qlong
of the continuing current which is able
to melt or vaporise large volumes of
material. Figs. 2.4.2 and 2.4.3 show a
comparison of the effects of the short
stroke charge Qshort and the long stroke
charge Qlong

Fig. 2.4.3 Plates perforated by the effects of long-time arcs

16 LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE www.dehn.de

2.5 Specific energy
The specific energy W/R of an impulse
current is the energy deposited by the
impulse current in a resistance of 1 Ω.
This energy deposition is the integral of
the square of the impulse current over
the time for the duration of the
impulse current:
W
R
= ∫ i 2 dt
The specific energy is therefore often
called the current squared impulse. It is
relevant for the temperature rise in
conductors through which a lightning
impulse current is flowing, as well as
for the force exerted between conduc-
tors flown through by a lightning
impulse current (Fig. 2.5.1).
W/R
power
impulse
on parallel
conductors
For the energy W deposited in a con-
ductor with resistance R we have:
W
W = R i ∫ i 2 dt = R i
R equation:
R (Temperature dependent) dc
resistance of the conductor
W/R Specific energy
The calculation of the temperature rise
of conductors through which a light-
ning impulse current is flowing, can
become necessary if the risks to per-
sons, and the risks from fire and explo-
sion, have to be taken into account
during the design and installation of
lightning protection systems. The calcu-
lation assumes that all the thermal
energy is generated by the ohmic
resistance of the components of the
lightning protection system. Further-
more, it is assumed that, because of the
brevity of the process, there is no per-
ceptible heat exchange with the sur-
roundings. Table 2.5.1 lists the temper-
ature rises of different materials used
in lightning protection, and their cross-
sections, as a function of the specific
energy.
d
The electrodynamic forces F generated
by a current i in a wire with a long, par-
allel section of length l and a separa-
tion d (Fig. 2.5.2) can be calculated as
an approximation using the following
µ0 I
F (t ) = i i 2 (t ) i
2π d
F(t) Electrodynamic force
i Current
2
µ0 Magnetic constant in air
(4π • 10-7 H/m)
l Length of conductor
d Separation between the parallel
conductors
The force between the conductors is
attractive if the two currents flow in
the same direction, and repulsive if the
currents flow in opposite directions. It
is proportional to the product of the
currents in the conductors, and inverse-
ly proportional to the separation of the
conductors. Even in the case of a single,
bent conductor, a force is exerted on
the conductor. Here, the force is pro-
portional to the square of the current
in the bent conductor.

heating
F I

lightning
current

i i i i
Time

Fig. 2.5.1 Heating and force effects by the specific Fig. 2.5.2 Electrodynamic effect between parallel conductors
energy of ligthning current

Material
Cross Aluminium Iron Copper Stainless steel
section W/R [MJ/Ω] W/R [MJ/Ω] W/R [MJ/Ω] W/R [MJ/Ω]
[mm2] 2.5 5.6 10 2.5 5.6 10 2.5 5.6 10 2.5 5.6 10
4 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
10 564 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ 169 542 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
16 146 454 ⎯ 1120 ⎯ ⎯ 56 143 309 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
25 52 132 283 211 913 ⎯ 22 51 98 940 ⎯ ⎯
50 12 28 52 37 96 211 5 12 22 190 460 940
100 3 7 12 9 20 37 1 3 5 45 100 190
Table 2.5.1 Temperature rise ∆T in K of different conductor materials

www.dehn.de LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE 17

 The specific energy of the impulse cur- 2.6 Assignment of lightning ⇒ minimum values (interception cri-
rent thus determines the load which teria necessary to be able to deter-
causes a reversible or irreversible defor-
current parameters to mine the areas with sufficient pro-
mation of components and arrays of a lightning protection tection against direct lightning
lightning protection system. These levels strokes (radius of rolling sphere)).
effects are taken into consideration in
In order to define lightning as a source Table 2.6.1 shows the assignment of the
the test arrangements of the product
of interference, lightning protection lightning protection levels to maximum
standards concerning the requirements
levels I to IV are laid down. Each light- and minimum values of the lightning
made on connecting components for
ning protection level requires a set of current parameters.
lightning protection systems.

2 ⇒ maximum values (dimensioning cri-

teria used to design lightning pro-
tection components to meet the
demands expected to be made of
them) and

Maximum values Minimum values

(Dimensioning criteria) (Interception criteria)
Lightning Max. Probability Min. Probability Radius
protection lightning of the actually lightning of the actually of the
level current upcoming current upcoming rolling sphere
peak value lightning peak value lightning
current current
to be less to be higher
than the max. than the min.
lightning lightning
current current
peak value peak value

I 200 kA 99 % 2.9 kA 99 % 20 m
II 150 kA 98 % 5.4 kA 97 % 30 m
III 100 kA 97 % 10.1 kA 91 % 45 m
IV 100 kA 97 % 15.7 kA 84 % 60 m
Table 2.6.1 Limit values of lightning current parametes and their probabilities

18 LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE www.dehn.de

3. Designing a lightning protection system
3.1 Requirement for a light-
ning protection system –
legal requirements
The purpose of a lightning protection
system is to protect buildings from direct
lightning strokes and possible fire, or
from the consequences of the active
lightning current (non-igniting flash of
lightning).
If national regulations, e. g. building reg-
ulations, special regulations or special
directives require lightning protection
measures, they must be installed.
Unless these regulations contain specifi-
cations for lightning protection meas-
ures, a lightning protection system which
meets the requirements of an LPS Type III
according to DIN V VDE V 0185-3 (VDE V
0185 Part 3) is recommended as mini-
mum.
Otherwise, the need for protection and
the choice of appropriate protection
measures, should be determined by risk
management.
The risk management is described in DIN
V VDE V 0185-2 (VDE V 0185 Part 2) [2]
(see Subclause 3.2.1).
Further information on how to deter-
mine the type of lightning protection sys-
tems for general buildings and structures
can be found in
⇒ the following directive of the VdS:
VdS-Richtlinie 2010 “Risikoorien-
tierter Blitz- und Überspan-
nungsschutz, Richtlinien zur
Schadenverhütung”. [engl.: “Risk-
orientated lightning and surge pro-
tection guideline for prevention of
damage“]
For example, the building regulations of
the State of Hamburg (HbauO §17,
Abs. 3) require a lightning protection sys-
tem to be installed if lightning can easily
strike a building because of
⇒ its length,
⇒ its height or
⇒ the use to which it is put,
or if
⇒ it is expected that a lightning stroke
would have serious consequences.
This means:
“A lightning protection system must be
built even if only one of the require-
ments is met.”
A lightning stroke can have particularly
serious consequences for buildings and
structures owing to their location, type
www.dehn.de
of construction or the use to which they
are put.
A nursery school, for example, is a build-
ing where a lightning stroke can have
serious consequences because of the use
to which the building is put.
The interpretation to be put on this
statement is made clear in the following
court judgement:
Extract from the Bavarian Administrative
Court, decision of 4 July 1984 – No. 2 B 84
A.624-.
1. A nursery school is subject to the
requirement to install effective light-
ning protection systems.
2. The legal requirements of the build-
ing regulations for a minimum of
fire-retardant doors when designing
staircases and exits also apply to a
residential building which houses a
nursery school.
For the following reasons:
According to the Bavarian building regu-
lations (Art. 17 Abs. BayBO), buildings
and structures whose location, type of
construction or the use to which they are
put, make them susceptible to lightning
strokes, or where such a stroke can have
serious consequences, must be equipped
with permanently effective lightning
protection systems. This stipulates the
requirement for effective protective
devices in two cases. In the first case, the
buildings and structures are particularly
susceptible to lightning strokes (e. g.
because of their height or location); in
the other case, any lightning stroke (e. g.
because of the type of construction or
the use to which it is put) can have par-
ticularly serious consequences. The plain-
tiff’s building falls within the latter cate-
gory because of its present use as a nurs-
ery school. A nursery school belongs to
the group of buildings where a lightning
stroke can have serious consequences
because of the use to which the building
is put. It is of no consequence that, in the
annotations to the Bavarian building
regulations, nursery schools are not
expressly mentioned in the illustrative list
of buildings and structures which are
particularly at risk, alongside meeting
places (cf. Simon, Komm. zur BayBO,
Rdnr. 26 zu Art. 17,Koch/ Molodovsky,
Komm. zur BayBO, Erl. 7.1 zu Art. 17).
The risk of serious consequences if light-
ning strikes a nursery school arises
because, during the day, a large number
of children under school age are present
at the same time.
The fact that the rooms where the chil-
dren spend their time are on the ground
floor, and that the children could escape
to the outside through several windows –
as put forward by the plaintiff – is not a
deciding factor. In the event of fire, there
is no guarantee that children of this age
will react sensibly and leave the building
via the windows if necessary. In addition,
the installation of sufficient lightning
protection equipment is not too much to
expect of the operator of a nursery
school. A further section of the Bavarian
building regulations (Art. 34 Abs. 8 Bay-
BO) requires that, amongst other things,
staircases must have entrances to the cel-
lar which have self-closing doors which
are, at least, fire-retardant. The require-
ments do not apply to residential build-
ings with up to two flats (Art. 34 Abs. 10
BayBO). The respondent only made the
demand when the plaintiff converted
3
the building, which was previously resi-
dential, into a nursery school as well, in
accordance with the authorised change
of use. The exemption provision (Art. 34
Abs. 10 BayBO) cannot be applied to
buildings which were built as residential
buildings with up to two flats, but which
now (also) serve an additional purpose
which justifies the application of the
safety requirements (Art. 34 Abs. 1 bis 9
BayBO). This is the case here.
VGH, B.4.7.84, 597 = BRS 42, 290)
[From annotations to Bavarian building
regulations as at 1 August 1994 to Art. 16
Fire protection]
Serious consequences (panic) can also
arise when lightning strikes assembly
rooms, schools, hospitals.
For these reasons, it is necessary that all
buildings and structures which are at risk
of such events are equipped with perma-
nently effective lightning protection sys-
tems.
[Lower Saxony Building Regulations,
annotations to F. Lightning protection
systems. (Abs. 3)]
Lightning protection systems always
required
According to the regulation concerning
the monitoring of technical installations
in buildings, buildings and structures
where a lightning protection system
must always be included because, in
these cases, the law has affirmed the
need, are
1. Assembly places with stages or cov-
ered stage areas and assembly places
for the showing of films, if the
accompanying assembly rooms in
each case, either individually or
together, can accommodate more
than 100 visitors.
LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE 19
 2. Assembly places with assembly
Federal Legal building regulations on lightning protection
rooms which individually or together
state
can accommodate more than 200 vis- Special building regulations and guidelines
Building Test
itors; in the case of schools, museums regulations Multistorey Hospital School Assembly Sales regulation
and similar buildings, this regulation building facility facility TR2)
only applies to the inspection of
technical installations in assembly
rooms which individually can accom- All federal Issue (12/97) (12/87) (12/76) (06/90) draft (09/95)
modate more than 200 visitors, and states (9/01)
their escape routes; (Model Source §17 Par. 5 Pkt. 4.9.5 §26 3.20 §14 Par. 4 §19
3. Sales areas whose sales rooms have regulations)
Test 5.4.3/ §38/ 5.4/ TR
more than 2000 m2 of floor space;
3 years 5 years 5 years
4. Shopping centres with several sales
areas which are connected to each Baden- Issue (12/97) (09/90) (02/82) (02/97)
other either directly or via escape Wurttem-
Source §15 Par. 2 5.2 §19
routes, and whose sales rooms indi- berg
Test §127/
vidually have less than 2000 m2 of
3 floor space but having a total floor
space of more than 2000 m2;
BW

Bavaria Issue (08/97)

1 Jahr

(11/97) (01/02)
5. Exhibition spaces whose exhibition Bay Source Art. 15.(7) §19 §2 (4)
rooms individually or together have
more than 2000 m2 of floor space; Test

6. Restaurants with seating for more Berlin Issue (06/98) (01/98)

than 400 customers, or hotels with Bln Source §19
more than 60 beds for guests;
Test §124/
7. High-rise buildings as defined in the
1 year
Hamburg building regulations (§2
Abs. 2 HbauO); Branden- Issue (03/98) (10/90) (10/90) (10/90) (07/98)
8. Hospitals and other buildings and burg
Source §17 Par. 5 §13 Par. 6 §26 §6 §19
structures having a similar purpose;
Bra Test 3 years §38 A4/ §62/
9. Medium-sized and large-scale 5 years 3 years
garages as defined in the Hamburg
regulations for garages (§1 Abs. 5 Bremen Issue (03/95) (08/79)
Garagenverordnung vom 17. April HB Source §17 Par. 7 Item 4.9.5
1990 Hamburgisches Gesetz- und
Verordnungsblatt, Seite 75); Test 5.4.3/
3 years
10. Buildings and structures
10.1 with explosive materials, such as Hamburg Issue (06/97)
ammunition factories, depots for Hbg Source §17 Par. 3
ammunition and explosives,
Test
10.2 with factory premises which are at
risk of explosion, such as varnish Hesse Issue (02/98) (12/97) (08/91)
and paint factories, chemical facto- HE Source §17 Par. 5 Item 4.9.5
ries, larger depots of combustible
liquids and larger gas holders, Test 5.4.3/ TR < 3 years
3 years
10.3 particularly at risk of fire, such as
– larger woodworking factories, Mecklen- Issue (05/98) (10/90) (10/90) (05/95) (10/90) (09/98)
burg-West-
– buildings with thatched roofs, Source §14 Par. 5 §13 Par. 6 §26 3.20 §6 §19
Pomerania
and
Test 3 years §38 A4/ 5.1.c/ §62/
– warehouses and production MV 5 years 5 years 3 years
plants with a high fire load,
Lower Issue (10/97) (07/78) (01/03) (01/97)
10.4 for larger numbers of people such Saxony
as Source §20 Par. 3 3.20 §19
– schools, Nds Test 5.1d/ §128/
– homes for the elderly and chil- 5 years 5 years
dren’s homes, North Rine- Issue (03/00) (12/95) (12/95) (11/76) (12/95) (03/00) (12/95)
– barracks, Westphalia
Source §17 Par. 4 §13 Par. 6 §26 3.20 §171)
– correctional facilities
NW Test TR TR TR TR TR 3 years
– and railway stations,
10.5 with cultural assests, such as Table 3.1.1 Legal building regulations of the German Federal states on lightning protection (Part 1)

20 LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE www.dehn.de

 General Provisions:
Federal Legal building regulations on lightning protection
state DIN 18384: 2000-12
Special building regulations and guidelines
Building Test Contract procedure for building works
regulations Multistorey Hospital School Assembly Sales regulation (VOB)
building facility facility TR2) Part C: General technical specifications
for building works (ATV);
Rhineland- Issue (11/98) (01/89) (09/82) (07/98) (04/91) Lightning protection systems
Palatinate Standard services book for the construc-
Source §15 Par. 5 10. §19
tion industry (StLB)
RP Test 11.3/ §124/ 5 years Service sector 050, lightning protection
5 years 1year and earth-termination systems
Saarland Issue (07/98) (10/90) (10/90) (01/00) (01/79) (09/77) The purpose of this standard services
book is to ensure conformity of the texts
Srl Source §18 Par. 4 §13 Par. 6 §26 6. §23 used in the service descriptions, and also
Test 3 years §38 A4/ §123/ §34/ to facilitate data processing.
5 years 5 years 3 years The texts are used for public tenders by
Saxony

Sa
Issue

Source
(03/96) (10/90)

§17 Par. 5 §13 Par. 6

(10/90)

§26
(11/99)

Item 2.4
(10/90)

§6
(10/92)

§23
(02/00)

§2 (2) 1.
all building authorities, and by federal,
state and local governments.
DIN 48830: 1985-03
3
Test 3 years §38 A4/ TR §62/ §34/ 5 years Lightning protection system - Description
5 years 3 years 3 years This standard applies when drawing up
the description of a lightning protection
Saxony- Issue (02/01) (09/95) (09/95) (09/95) (09/95)
system which is required as part of the
Anhalt
Source §17 Par. 5 13.6 §25 6. §19 design documentation.
LSA Test < 3 years 37.4/ §62/ DIN V VDE V 0185-1
5 years 3 years (VDE V 0185 Part 3): 2002-11
Part 1: General principles
Schleswig- Issue (02/96) (09/84) (01/76) (07/84) (12/97)
It contains all general principles for the
Holstein
Source §19 Par. 5 Item 4.9.5 3.20 §19 lightning protection of buildings and
SH Test 5.4.3/ 5.4/ §124/ structures including their installations/
3 years 5 years 3 years content, persons and all utility lines

Thuringia Issue (06/94) (10/90) (10/90) (08/99) (10/90) (06/97) (04/93) DIN V VDE V 0185-2
(VDE V 0185 Part 2): 2002-11
Th Source §17 Par. 5 §13 Par. 6 §26 6. §6 §19 Part 2: Risk management
Test 3 years §38 A4/ 3 years §62/ TR 3 years Assessment of risk for structures
5 years 3 years Applicable to the assessment of the risk
of damage from cloud-to-earth flashes
Update 07/02 for buildings
1) Commercial building regulations
2) Individual Federal states provide test intervals in special test regulations (TR) DIN V VDE V 0185-3
TR in He = Building test regulations for sales facilities only (VDE V 0185 Part 3): 2002-11
TR in HH, RP, Sa, Th = State regulations on the test of “Building installations and facilities...” Part 3: Physical damage to structures and
TR in NW = Technical Test Regulations life hazard
TR in Bay = Regulations on testing safety related installations and facilities The basis for the design, installation,
(test regulation on safety installations – SPrüfV) inspection and maintenance of lightning
protection systems for general buildings
Remark 1: VDI 3819 Part 1 “Fire protection for building technology“ and structures
comprises all titles of regulations with date of issue
Remark 2: If there is no information given in the table, there are either no legal building regulations DIN V VDE V 0185-4
or there are no exact regulations on lightning protection and corresponding tests. (VDE V 0185 Part 4): 2002-11
Part 4: Electrical and electronic systems
Table 3.1.1 Legal building regulations of the German Federal states on lightning protection (Part 2)
within structures
Contains information about the design,
– buildings of historic interest, Table 3.1.1 contains the sources of the installation, inspection, maintenance and
– museums and archives, respective definitions in the state build- testing of systems which protect against
ing regulations of the German states. LEMP effects for buildings and structures
10.6 towering above their surroundings, with electrical and particularly sensitive
such as The following list provides an overview electronic systems (lightning protection
– high chimneys, of the relevant "General Provisions" in zones concept)
– towers and Germany which deal with the issue of DIN 48801 ... 48852
high buildings. requirement, design and inspection of Components for external lightning pro-
lightning protection systems. tection
[Kommentar zur HbauO, Stand
This series of standards specifies dimen-
Juni 1999 zu § 17 RNr. 23]
sions and material thicknesses.

www.dehn.de LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE 21

 It is being replaced step by step by the
following standard.
DIN EN 50164-1
(VDE 0185 Part 201): 2000-02
Lightning protection components
Part 1: Requirements for connection
components
Defines the requirements which metal
connection components such as connec-
tors, terminal and bridging components,
expansion pieces and measuring points
for lightning protection systems have to
meet.
DIN EN 50164-2
(VDE 0185 Part 202): 2003-05 Part 2:
Requirements for conductors and earth
3 electrodes
This standard describes, for example,
dimensions and tolerances for metal con-
ductors and earthing electrodes as well
as the test requirements of the electrical
and mechanical values of the materials.
Special standards for earth-termination
systems:
DIN 18014: 1994-02
Foundation earth electrode
This directive provides information about
the arrangement and the installation of
foundation earthing electrodes with
practical application examples.
DIN VDE 0151: 1986-06
Material and minimum dimensions of
earthing electrodes with respect to cor-
rosion
This VDE guideline applies to corrosion
protection when installing and extend-
ing earthing electrodes and earthing-ter-
mination systems. It provides informa-
tion on how to avoid or reduce the risk of
corrosion to earthing electrodes and
with earthing electrodes of other systems
installed. Moreover, it provides informa-
tion to assist in making the correct choice
of earthing electrode materials, and also
about special anticorrosion measures.
DIN VDE 0150: 1983-04
Protection against corrosion due to stray
currents of d.c. installation
Subclause 4.1.4.2 requires that, for
underground storage tanks electrically
separate from domestic installations by
virtue of their being fitted with insulat-
ing parts, the connection between the
tank and the lightning protection system
must be effected by means of an isolat-
ing spark gap.
DIN VDE 0101: 2000-01
Power installations exceeding 1 kV
Subclauses 5.2.5 and 7.5 deal with surge
protection and lightning protection.
22 LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE
DIN VDE 0141: 2000-01
Earthing system for special power instal-
lations with nominal voltages above 1 kV
Section 6 "Earthing to protect against
the effects of lightning”, gives special
consideration to the requirements of
lightning protection.
Reference is made to the risk of back
flashover, and a relationship is estab-
lished between the impulse earthing
resistance of the mast or structure earth-
ing, the impulse withstand voltage of the
insulation and the peak value of the
lightning current.
Section 6.3 draws attention to the fact
that it is more effective to install several
individual earthing electrodes (meshed
or star-type earthing electrodes) than a
single, very long earth rod or surface
earthing electrode.
Special standards for internal lightning
and surge protection, equipotential
bonding
In the VDE 0100 series of standards, the
following parts have to be taken into
consideration:
DIN VDE 0100 Part 410: 1997-01
Erection of power installations with
nominal voltages up to 1000 V –
Part 4: Protection for safety
Subclauses 413.1.2 and 413.1.6 describe
protective measures in the event of indi-
rect contact (equipotential bonding).
DIN VDE 0100 Teil 540: 1991-11
Erection of power installations with
nominal voltages up to 1000 V
Selection and erection of equipment
Earthing arrangements, protective
conductors, equipotential bonding con-
ductors.
Contains the provisions for the installa-
tion of earth-termination systems and
the measures for equipotential bonding
(main earthing busbar, supplementary
equipotential bonding).
DIN VDE 0100 Part 534: 1999-04
Electrical installations of buildings – Part
534: Selection and erection of equipment
– Devices for protection against overvolt-
ages
This standard deals with the use of surge
protective devices Type I, II and III in low
voltage consumer is installations in accor-
dance with the protection in the event of
indirect contact.
DIN VDE 0100 Part 443: 2001-02
Erection of low voltage installations–
Protection for safety – Protection against
overvoltages of atmospheric origin or
due to switching
DIN VDE 0110: 1997-04
Isolation coordination for equipment
within low-voltage systems
Part 1: Principles, requirements and tests
This standard defines the minimum insu-
lation distances, their selection and the
rated impulse voltages for overvoltage
categories I to IV. These values form the
basis for the use of surge protective
devices in accordance with E DIN VDE
0675 Part 6: 1989-11.
VDEW Directive: 1998-01
Surge protective devices Class B
Directive for the use in main distribution
systems
Describes the use and the installation of
surge protective devices Type I in the
upstream area of the meter
Especially for electronic systems such as
television, radio, data systems tech-
nology (telecommunications systems)
DIN VDE 0800 Part 1: 1989-05
General concepts; requirements and tests
for the safety of facilities and apparatus
DIN VDE 0800 Part 2: 1985-07
Earthing and equipotential bonding
Part 2 summarises all requirements on
the function of a telecommunications
system with respect to earthing and
equipotential bonding.
DIN VDE 0800 Part 10: 1991-03
Transitional requiremenets on erection
and operation of installations
Part 10 contains requirements for the
installation, extension, modification and
operation of telecommunications sys-
tems. Section 6 of this part lays down the
requirements for surge protective meas-
ures.
DIN VDE 0845 Part 3-1: 2002-03
Surge protective devices connected to
telecommunications and signalling net-
works – Performance requirements and
testing methods
DIN VDE 0855 Part 1: 1994-03
Cable networks for television signals,
sound signals and interactive services;
Safety requirements
Section 10 of Part 1 lays down the
requirements for measures to protect
against atmospheric discharges (earthing
of the antenna mounting, equipotential
bonding).
VDE 0855 Part 300: 2002-07
Transmitting/ receiving systems for trans-
mitter RF output power up to 1 kW;
Safety requirements
Section 12 of Part 300 describes the light-
ning and surge protection and the earth-
ing of antenna systems.
www.dehn.de
DIN EN 61663-1 (VDE 0845 Part 4-1):
2000-07
Telecommunication lines, Part 1: Fibre
optic installations
On this subject, the standard describes a
method for calculating the possible num-
ber of incidences of damage for selecting
the protective measures which can be
used, and gives the permissible fre-
quency of incidences of damage. Only
primary faults (interruption of opera-
tions) and not secondary faults (damage
to the cable sheath (formation of holes)),
however, are considered.
DIN EN 61663-2 (VDE 0845 Part 4-2):
2002-07
Telecommunication lines, Part 2: Lines
using metallic conductors.
This standard must only be applied to the
lightning protection of telecommunica-
tion and signal lines with metal conduc-
tors which are located outside buildings
(e. g. access networks of the landline
providers, lines between buildings).
Inspection of lightning protection sys-
tems
DIN V VDE V 0185-3 (VDE V 0185 Part 3):
2002-11
Physical damage to structures and life
hazard
Main section 3: Inspection and mainte-
nance of lightning protection systems
This describes the procedure for inspec-
tions and maintenance. This standard
applies to new and old installations,
which are considered in a general sense.
Special installations
DIN EN 1127-1: 1997-10
Explosion prevention and protection -
Part 1: Basic concepts and methodology
This standard is a guide on how to pre-
vent explosions, and protect against the
effects of explosions by employing meas-
ures during the drafting and design of
devices, protection systems and compo-
nents.
Sections 5.3.8 and 6.4.8 basically lay
down the requirement for protection
against the effects of a lightning stroke
which put the installations at risk.
DIN EN 60079-14/VDE 0165 Part 1:
1998-08
Electrical apparatus for explosive gas
atmospheres
Section 6.5 draws attention to the fact
that the effects of lightning strokes must
be taken into consideration.
Section 12.3 describes the detailed stipu-
lations for installations for the ex zone 0.
Extremely extensive equipotential bond-
ing is required in all ex zones.
www.dehn.de
DIN 50281-1-2 VDE 0165 Part 2: 1999-11
Electrical apparatus for use in the pres-
ence of combustible dust
Electrical apparatus protected by enclo-
sures; Selection, installation and mainte-
nance
VDE document series 65: “Electrical
Explosionsschutz nach DIN VDE 0165”;
VDE Verlag Berlin [engl.: “Electrical
explosion protection according to DIN
VDE 0165”], Annex 9: „PTB-Merkblatt für
den Blitzschutz an eigensicheren
Stromkreisen, die in Behälter mit
brennbaren Flüssigkeiten eingeführt
sind” [engl.: “PTB bulletin for protection
of intrinsically safe circuits installed in
containers with flammable liquids
against lightning“]
Standards can be obtained from the fol-
lowing address:
VDE VERLAG GMBH
Bismarckstraße 33
10625 Berlin
Germany
Phone: +49 30 34 80 01-0
Fax: +49 30 341 70 93
eMail: vertrieb@vde-verlag.de
Internet: www.vde-verlag.de
or
Beuth-Verlag GmbH
Burggrafenstraße 4-10
10787 Berlin
Germany
Phone: +49 30 2601-2240
Fax: +49 30 2601-1724
Internet: www.din.de/beuth
3.2 Assessment of the risk of
damage and selection of
protective components
3.2.1 Risk management
Risk management with foresight includes
calculating the risks for the company. It
provides the basis on which decisions can
be made in order to limit these risks, and
it makes clear which risks should be cov-
ered by insurance. When considering the
management of insurances, it should be
borne in mind, however, that insurance is
not always a suitable means of achieving
certain aims (e. g. maintaining the ability
to deliver). The probabilities that certain
risks will occur cannot be changed by
insurance.
Companies which manufacture or pro-
3
vide services using extensive electronic
installations (and nowadays this applies
to most companies), must also give spe-
cial consideration to the risk presented
by lightning strokes. It must be borne in
mind that the damage caused by the
non-availability of electronic installa-
tions, production and services, and also
the loss of data, is often far greater than
the damage to the hardware of the
installation affected.
In the case of lightning protection, inno-
vative thinking about damage risks is
slowly gaining in importance. The aim of
risk analysis is to objectify and quantify
the risk to buildings and structures, and
their contents, as a result of direct and
indirect lightning strokes. This new way
of thinking has been embodied in the
new German prestandard
DIN V VDE V 0185-2.
The risk analysis presented here ensures
that it is possible to draw up a lightning
protection concept which is understood
by all parties involved, and which meets
optimum technical and economic
requirements, i. e. the necessary protec-
tion can be guaranteed with as little
expenditure as possible. The protective
measures which result from the risk
analysis are then described in detail in
the later parts of the standard, in the
new DIN V VDE V 0185 series.
LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE 23
3

Fig. 3.2.3.1 Grid pattern 50 km x 50 km for the lightning densities according to Table 3.2.3.1
(Elaborated by Dr.-Ing. E.U. Landers)

24 LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE www.dehn.de

 The values stated in the table have to be converted with the factor 10–6 in 1/(m2 · year).
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N
1 0.38
2 0.75 0.38 0.38 0.75 0.75
3 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 1.13 0.75 1.13 1.13
4 0.75 0.75 1.13 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.13 1.13
5 1.13 1.13 1.13 1.5 1.88 1.88 1.5 1.88 1.5 1.13 1.13
6 1.13 1.5 1.5 1.13 1.88 1.88 1.5 1.5 1.13 1.13 1.13
7 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.88 1.88 1.88 1.88 1.5 1.5 1.13 1.5 1.13
8 1.13 1.88 1.5 1.88 2.25 2.25 2.25 1.88 2.25 1.88 1.5 1.5 1.5
9 1.13 1.88 1.88 2.25 3.00 2.25 2.63 2.25 2.63 2.63 1.88 1.88 2.25 1.13
10 1.13 1.88 2.25 2.63 3.00 2.63 2.63 2.25 2.63 2.63 2.25 1.88 1.5 1.13
11
12
1.13 2.25
2.25
2.63
2.63
3.00
3.38
3.38
4.50
4.13
4.13
3.38
3.75
2.63
2.63
2.25
2.25
2.25
1.5
2.25
2.25
2.25
3
13 2.63 3.38 4.13 4.50 3.75 3.38 3.00 2.63 1.88 1.5
14 3.00 3.00 3.38 4.13 3.75 3.00 3.00 2.25 2.25 1.88 1.5
15 3.00 4.13 4.50 3.75 2.63 2.25 1.88 1.88 1.5 1.13
16 3.00 3.38 3.75 3.38 2.63 2.25 1.88 1.88 1.5 1.5
17 2.25 2.63 2.63 2.25 2.25 2.25 1.88 1.5 1.5
18 1.88 1.88 2.25 2.25 2.63 2.63 2.63 2.25

Table 3.2.3.1 Earth lightning density Ng per km2 and year in Germany: Lightning statistics by BLIDS for the years 1992 to 2000 in a grid pattern 50 km x 50 km.
Reproduction with the kind authorisation by BLIDS (www.blids.de)

3.2.2 Fundamentals of risk
assessment
According to DIN V VDE V 0185-2, risk R
of lightning damage can generally be
found using the relationship:
R=N iP iδ
where:
N Frequency of lightning strokes in the
area under consideration (How
many lightning strokes occur per
year in the area under consid-
eration?);
P Probability of damage (What is the
probability that a lightning stroke
causes a quite specific type of dam-
age?);
δ Damage factor for the quantitative
evaluation of the damage (What are
the effects and consequences of a
very specific type of damage, and
what is the value and extent of the
damage?).
The task of the risk assessment therefore
involves the determination of the three
parameters N, P and δ for all relevant risk
components. This involves establishing
and determining many individual para-
meters. A comparison of the risk R thus
established with an acceptable risk Ra
then enables a statement to be made
about the requirements and the dimen-
sioning of lightning protection measures.
3.2.3 Frequency of lightning
strokes
We distinguish between the following
frequencies of lightning strokes which
can be relevant for a building or struc-
ture:
ND Frequency of direct lightning strokes
to the building or structure;
NM Frequency of close lightning strokes
with electromagnetic effects;
NL Frequency of direct lightning strokes
in utility lines entering the building
or structure;
NI Frequency of lightning strokes adja-
cent to utility lines entering the
building or structure.
The calculation of the frequencies of
lightning strokes is given in detail i
Annex A of DIN V VDE V 0185-2. One
begins with the annual density of cloud-
to-earth flashes Ng for the region under
consideration (Fig. 3.2.3.1, in combina-
tion with Table 3.2.3.1, taken from
Annex E of DIN V VDE V 0185-2).
If a finer grid is used, the local values of
the lightning densities can still deviate
noticeably from these averages. Owing
to the relatively short time of nine years
the map has been being recorded, and to
the limited locational efficiency of the
lightning location systems at the begin-
ning (currently around 95 % in the mid-
dle and 90 % on the fringes of the loca-
tion area), it is recommended to apply a
safety factor of 25 % to the values given
in Table 3.2.3.1.
For the frequency of direct lightning
strokes ND to the building or structure we
have:
N D = N g i Ad i Cd
Ad is the equivalent collection area of the
isolated building or structure (Fig.
3.2.3.2), Cd an environmental coefficient
so that the influence of the surroundings
(built-up, terrain, trees, etc.) can be taken
into account (Table 3.2.3.2). The calcula-
tion of ND thus corresponds to the
method already known from VDE V 0185
Part 100.

www.dehn.de LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE 25

 1:3
H
3H
W
L 500 m
3 Fig. 3.2.3.2 Equivalent collection area Ad for direct
lightning strokes into a stand-alone
structure
Similarly, the frequency of close lightning
strokes NM can be calculated:
N M = N g i Am
Am is arrived at by drawing a line at a dis-
tance of 500 m around the building or
structure (Fig. 3.2.3.3). The equivalent
collection area Ad Cd of the building or
structure estimated using the environ-
mental coefficients is then subtracted
from the area thus enclosed. Lightning
strokes on the area Am lead exclusively to
magnetically induced surges in installa-
tion loops in the interior of the building
or structure.
HC Height (m) of the line above ground
level;
ρ Earth resistivity (Ωm) in, or on, which
the line is laid, up to a maximum val-
ue of ρ = 500 Ωm;
LC Length (m) of the line, measured
from the building or structure to the
first distribution junction, or to the
first location where surge protective
devices are installed, up to a maxi-
mum length of 1000 m;
H Height (m) of the building or struc-
ture;
Ha Height (m) of the neighbouring
building or structure connected via
the line.
The frequency of direct lightning strokes
in a utility line entering a building or
structureL is:
N L = N g i ( Al i Cs + Aa i Cd ) i Ct
The area Al (Fig. 3.2.3.3) is a function of
the type of line (overhead line, cable),
26 LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE
Relative location of the structure Cd
Structure situated in a wide are with buildings or objects with the 0.25
same or greater height (towers, forests, ...)
Structure surrounded by smaller buildings 0.5
Stand-alone structure, no further buildings or objects with a distance 1
of 3H from the facility
Stand-alone structure situated on the top of a mountain or a rounded 2
hilltop
Table 3.2.3.2 Environment factor Cd
Am
Ai
3H
Ad
3Ha
Aa
Al Ha
La
H
L
Wa
W W
Lc
Fig. 3.2.3.3 Equivalent interception areas Am, Al, Ai for indirect lightning strikes close to the structure
Overhead line Underground cable
Al ⎡⎣ LC − 3 i ( H + H a )⎤⎦ i 6 i H C ⎡⎣ LC − 3 i ( H + H a )⎤⎦ i 0, 4 i ρ
Ai LC i 100 i ρ LC i 50 i ρ
Table 3.2.3.3 Equivalent interception areas Al and Ai in m2
the length LC of the line; in the case of the building or structure. In the building
cables, it is a function of the earth resis- or structure under consideration, light-
tivity ρ; and for overhead lines it is a func- ning strokes within the area (Al+Aa) lead,
tion of height HC of the line above as a rule, to a high energy discharge
ground level (Table 3.2.3.3). If the length which can generate a fire, an explosion, a
of the line is not known, or if it is very mechanical or chemical reaction. The fre-
time-consuming to ascertain it, then, as a quency NL, therefore, does not comprise
worst-case scenario, a value of pure surges which result in faults or dam-
LC = 1000 m can be set. If necessary, the age to the electrical and electronic sys-
value for Al can be increased by the value tems, but mechanical and thermal effects
of the equivalent capture area Aa of the which arise when lightning strikes.
neighbouring building or structure con- Surges to utility lines entering the build-
nected via the line under consideration. ing or structure are described by the fre-
If, within the area Al, there is a medium quency of lightning strokes next to such
voltage line rather than a low voltage a utility line NI:
one, then a transformer reduces the
intensity of the surges at the entrance to N l = N g i ( Ai − Al ) i Ct i Cs
the building or structure. In such cases,
this is taken into account by the correc-
tion factor Ct = 0.25. The correction fac-
tor Cs is ultimately a function of the
building density. In urban areas (Cs = 0.2),
utility lines entering buildings and struc-
tures are not as exposed to the effects of
lightning as those in rural areas (Cs = 1).
The frequency NL must be determined
individually for each utility line entering
www.dehn.de
The area Ai (Fig. 3.2.3.3) is again a func-
tion of the type of line (overhead line,
cable), the length LC of the line; in the
case of cables, it is a function of the earth
resistivity ρ; and for overhead lines it is a
function of the height HC of the line
above ground level (Table 3.2.3.3). The
same worst-case scenario applies. The
area Ai is usually significantly larger than
Al. This makes allowance for the fact that
surges resulting in faults or damage to
electrical and electronic systems can also
be caused by lightning strokes further
away from the line.
The correction factors Ct and Cs corres-
pond to those already stated above. The
frequency Nl must then also be deter-
mined individually for each utility line
entering the building or structure.
3.2.4 Damage probabilities
The damage probability parameter gives
the probability that a supposed lightning
stroke will cause a quite specific type of
damage. It is therefore assumed that
there is a lightning stroke on the relevant
area; the value of the damage probabili-
ty can then have a maximum value of 1.
We differentiate between the following
eight damage probabilities:
PA Electric shock suffered by living
beings as a result of a direct light-
ning stroke to the building or struc-
ture;
PB Fire, explosion, mechanical and
chemical reactions as a result of a
direct lightning stroke to the build-
ing or structure;
Source
of damage
Direct
S1
Direct lightning
stroke into
structure
Cause of
damage
C1
Electrical shock PA = pa • ra • ps • rs
to creatures
C2
Fire, explosions PB = pf • rf • [1 – (1 – ps • rs )
mechanical and • (1-pe • re )]
chemical effects
C3
Interferences on PC = 1 – (1 – pi • ps • rs • pw • rw)
eletrical and • (1 – pe • re • pw • rw )
electronic
systems
Table 3.2.4.1 Calculation of probabilities of damage Py from the simple probabilities px and the reduction factor rx
www.dehn.de
PC Failure of electrical/ electronic sys-
tems as a result of a direct lightning
stroke to the building or structure;
PM Failure of electrical/ electronic sys-
tems as a result of a lightning stroke
to the ground next to the building or
structure;
PU Electric shock suffered by living
beings as a result of a direct light-
ning stroke to the utility lines enter-
ing the building or structure;
PV Fire, explosion, mechanical and
chemical reactions as a result of a
direct lightning stroke to a utility
line entering the building or struc-
ture;
PW Failure of electrical/ electronic sys-
tems as a result of a direct lightning
stroke to a utility line entering the
building or structure;
PZ Failure of electrical/ electronic sys-
tems as a result of a lightning stroke
to the ground next to a utility line
entering the building or structure.
The damage probabilities result from dif-
ferent combinations of simple (basic)
probabilities px and reduction factors rx.
The equations and the required parame-
ter values are presented in detail in
Annex B of DIN V VDE V 0185-2. Table
3.2.4.1 provides an overview.
The simple probabilities are determined
by means of the characteristics which are
technically relevant for lightning protec-
tion in, on and outside the building or
structure, but they do not yet represent
protective measures in the literal sense.
Lightning stroke (with regard to the structure)
S2
Lightning stroke
into the earth
next to the
structure
PM = pi • ps • rs • pw • rw
The following simple probabilities are
applied:
pa for contact and step voltages out-
side the building or structure
(ground condition);
pu for contact and step voltages inside
the building or structure
(floor condition);
ps to take into consideration the shield-
ing characteristics of the building or
structure (wood, roof tiles, concrete,
steel structure, structures mounted
on the roof, etc.);
pi to take into consideration the char-
acteristics of the internal lines and
installations (unshielded lines,
shielded lines, cable channels, optical
fibres);
pe to take into consideration the char-
3
acteristics of the utility lines entering
from outside (unshielded lines,
shielded lines, cable channels, optical
fibres);
pf for the probability that a dangerous
discharge causes a fire or another
physical reaction (explosion,
mechanical or chemical reaction)
inside the building or structure;
pw to take into consideration the dielec-
tric strength of the installations
inside the building or structure;
Indirect
S3 S4
Direct lightning Lightning stroke
stroke into into the earth
the entering next to the
supply line entering
supply line
PU = pu • pe • re
PV = pe • re • pf • rf
PW = pe • re • pw • rw PZ = pe • re • pw • rw
LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE 27
 Concrete protective measures reduce the
simple probabilities stated (reduction
factors). The following are assessed:
rs Lightning protection system in accor-
dance with DIN V VDE V 0185-3;
re Surge protection (surge protective
devices, insulating transformers) at
the location where the utility lines
enter the building or structure;
rw Surge protection (surge protective
devices, insulating transformers) for
the internal installations;
ra Measures to prevent contact and
step voltages;
rf Measures for containing the effects
of fire.
correct relationship according to the
probability calculation [1 – (1 – ps rs) (1 –
pe re)] must be used.
So far, we have calculated the probability
that a hazardous discharge strikes the
building or structure. Not all of these
hazardous discharges result in a fire,
explosion, mechanical or chemical reac-
tion. This is now described using the
exact simple probability defined by pf
and the corresponding protective meas-
ures for containing a fire (parameter rf).
The product pf rf is incorporated into the
damage probability PB in a strictly multi-
plicative way since, although the two
events “incidence of a hazardous dis-
3.2.6 Damage factor
If a particular type of damage has
occurred in a building or structure, then
the effect of this damage must be
assessed. It is possible, for example, for a
fault or damage to a DP system (D4 type
of damage: economic losses) to have very
different consequences. If no data apper-
taining to the business is lost, then the
claim will only be for the damage to the
hardware to the value of a few thousand
euro. If, however, the complete business
of a company is dependent on the per-
manent availability of the DP system (call
centre, bank, automation engineering)
then, in addition to the hardware dam-
age, there is also disproportionately high

3 To illustrate the combination of the sim-

ple probabilities and reduction factors,
we analyse the example of the damage
probability PB of fire, explosion, mechan-
ical and chemical reactions as a result of a
direct lightning stroke to the building or
structure:
⎡1 − (1 − ps i rs )
⎤ fundamentals of the calculation for the
PB = p f i rf i ⎢ ⎥
⎢⎣i (1 − pe i re )
⎦⎥
In the event of a direct lightning stroke,
hazardous discharges can occur any-
where within the building or structure
(ps rs), and at the locations where the util-
ity lines (pe re) enter the buildling or
structure.
⇒ The probability of a hazardous dis-
charge occuring in the inside of the
building or structure is mainly deter-
mined by its design (parameter ps).
This value can be reduced by a light-
ning protection system as a protec-
tive measure (parameter rs).
⇒ The (external) lightning protection
system, however, has no influence on
the sparking at the locations where
the utility lines enter the building or
structure (Note: this always assumes
a direct lightning stroke to the build-
ing or structure itself). This sparking
is a function of the characteristic of
the utility lines entering the building
or structure (parameter pe) and is
reduced by the “surge protection”
measures (parameter re).
The two individual from probabilities ps
rs and pe re are independent of each oth-
er; but the existence of only one haz-
ardous discharge is sufficient to require
their superpositioning (OR operation).
However, this cannot be achieved by sim-
ply adding them together. Instead, the
charge” and “fire, etc. as a result of a
hazardous discharge” are again inde-
pendent from each other, both must be
consequential damage as a result of cus-
tomer dissatisfaction, customers going to
other suppliers, overlooked business
present simultaneously before the dam- processes, loss of production, etc.).
age can occur (AND operation). The effects of the damage are assessed
using the damage factor δ. Depending
on the relevant type of damage, this
3.2.5 Types of damage and causes enables the extent of the damage, its val-
of damage ue or the consequences to be assessed.
Depending on the construction, use and Annex C of DIN V VDE V 0185-2 gives the
substance of the building or structure,
the relevant types of damage can be very damage factors of the four types of dam-
different. DIN V VDE V 0185-2 recognises age. It is frequently the case, how-ever,
the following four types of damage: that it is extremely time-consuming to
D1 Loss of human life (injury to, or apply the equations. For usual cases, the
death of, persons); aforementioned Annex C therefore also
provides suggestions for typical values
D2 Loss of services for the public; for the damage factor δ, depending on
D3 Loss of irreplaceable cultural assets; the underlying causes of the damage.
D4 Economic losses;
The types of damage stated can arise as a
result of the following causes of damage:
C1 Electric shock to humans or animals
as result of contact and step volt-
ages;
C2 Physical damage (fire, explosion,
mechanical or chemical reaction), as
a result of the effect of the lightning
current, including sparking;
C3 Malfunctioning of electrical and
electronic systems as a result of
surges.
The causes of damage thus literally rep-
resent the “cause” in a causal relation-
ship, the types of damage the “effect”
(Table 3.2.5.1). The possible causes of
damage for one type of damage can be
manifold. It is therefore necessary to first
define the relevant types of damage for
a building or structure. It is then subse-
quently possible to stipulate the causes
of damage to be determined.

28 LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE www.dehn.de

 Point of strike Example Source of Cause of Type of
damage damage damage

Structure S1 C1 D1, D4b

C2 D1, D2, D3, D4
C3 D1a, D2, D4

Earth next to
the structure S2 C3 D1a, D2 , D4

Entering
supply line S3 C1 D1
C2 D1, D2, D3, D4
C3 D1a, D2, D4

Earth next
to entering S4 C3 D1a, D2, D4
supply line

a For hospitals and explosive structures

b For agricultural properties (loss of animals).
Table 3.2.5.1 Damage causes and types of damage depending on the point of strike

Explanations on Table 3.2.5.1:

Source of damage in relation to the Cause of damage

point of strike
S1 Lightning flash to a structure
S2 Lightning flash near a structure
S3 Lightning flash to an entering supply
line
S4 Lightning flash close to a supply line
Type of damage
C1 Electric shock to living beings as a
D1 Injury to, or death of, persons
result of contact and step voltages
D2 Loss of services for the public
C2 Fire, explosion, mechanical and
chemical reactions as a result of the D3 Loss of irreplaceable cultural assets
physical effects of the lightning dis- D4 Economic losses
charge
C3 Malfunctioning of electrical and
electronic systems as a result of
surges.

www.dehn.de LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE 29

 Source Lightning stroke (with regard to the structure)
of damage
Direct Indirect
S1 S2 S3 S4
Direct lightning Lightning stroke Direct lightning Lightning stroke
stroke into into the earth stroke into the into the earth
the structure next to entering next to the
Cause the structure supply line entering
of damage supply line

C1
Electrical shock RA = ND • PA • δa RU = NL • PU • δu Rs = RA + RU
of creatures

C2
Fire, explosions, RB = ND • PB • h • δf RV = NL • PV • h • δf Rf = RB + RV

3 mechanical and
chemical
effects
C3
Interferences on RC = ND • PC • δo RM = NM • PM • δo RW = NL • PW • δo RZ = NI • PZ • δo Ro = RC + RM
electrical and + RW + RZ
electronic
systems

Table 3.2.7.1 Risk components for different points of strike (damage sources) and causes of damage

3.2.7 Relevant risk components for
different lightning strokes
There is close correlation between the
cause of the damage, the type of dam-
age and the resulting relevant risk com-
ponents. Initially, it serves to represent
the dependence on the point of strike of
the lightning discharge, and the risk
components which are derived from this.
If lightning directly strikes a building or
structure, the following risk components
arise (Table 3.2.7.1):
RA Risk component for electric shocks to
living beings as a result of direct
lightning strokes;
RB Risk component for physical damage
as a result of direct lightning strokes;
RC Risk of malfunctioning of electrical
and electronic systems as a result of
surges caused by direct lightning
strokes.
If lightning strikes the earth near a build-
ing or structure, or neighbouring build-
ings, the following risk components are
created:
RM Risk of malfunctioning of electrical
and electronic systems as a result of
surges caused by direct lightning
strokes to the ground next to the
building or structure.
If lightning directly strikes utility lines
entering a building or structure, the fol-
lowing risk components arise:
RU Risk components for electric shocks
to living beings in the event of direct
lightning strokes to utility lines
entering the building or structure;
RV Risk components for physical dam-
age in the event of direct lightning
strokes to utility lines entering the
building or structure;
RW Risk of failure of electrical and elec-
tronic systems as a result of surges
caused by direct lightning strokes to
utility lines entering the building or
structure.
If lightning eventually strikes the ground
next to the utility lines entering a build-
ing or structure, the following risk com-
ponents are created:
RZ Risk of failure of electrical and elec-
tronic systems as a result of surges
caused by direct lightning strokes to
the ground next to the utility lines
entering the building or structure.
The eight risk components in total (which
basically must be determined individually
for each type of damage) can now be
combined according to two different cri-
teria: the point of strike of the lightning
stroke and the cause of the damage.
If the combination according to the point
of strike is of interest, then the risk is:
⇒ As a result of a direct lightning
stroke to the building or structure is
Rd = RA + RB + RC
⇒ As a result of an indirect lightning
stroke next to the building or struc-
ture is
Ri = RM + RU + RV + RW + RZ
If, on the other hand, it is desired to
investigate the cause of the damage,
then the risks can be combined as fol-
lows:
⇒ For electric shock to humans or ani-
mals as a result of contact and step
voltages:
RS = RA + RU
⇒ For fire, explosion, mechanical and
chemical reaction, caused by
mechanical and thermal effects of a
lightning stroke:
R f = RB + RV

30 LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE www.dehn.de

⇒ For failure of electrical und electro-
nic systems due to surges:
RO = RC + RM + RW + RZ
3.2.8 Acceptable risk of
lightning damage
When making a decision on the choice of
lightning protection measures, one has
to examine whether the damage risk R
determined for each relevant type of
damage exceeds an acceptable (i.e. a still
tolerable) value Ra or not. For a building
or structure which is sufficiently protect-
ed against the effects of lightning, then
R ≤ Ra
must hold, where R represents the sum
over all risk components which are rele-
vant for each respective type of damage:
R = ∑ RV
Here, DIN V VDE V 0185-2 distinguishes
between events which can result in losses
which are of interest to the public (injury
or death of persons, loss of services, loss
of cultural assets – D1, D2, D3 types of
damage) and events damaging only pri-
vate or business property (D4 type of
damage). In the former, acceptable maxi-
mum values Ra have to be laid down by
national authorities or organisations;
DIN V VDE V 0185-2 provides typical val-
ues for this purpose. In the second case,
the determination of Ra is the responsi-
bility of the owner or operator of the
building or structure in collaboration
with the designer of the lightning pro-
tection system.
www.dehn.de
3.2.9 Choice of lightning protection for external and internal lightning pro-
measures tection must be installed. If Rd is suffi-
ciently small, the second step is to exam-
The measures for protection against
lightning are intended to lead to the
ine whether the risk presented by an
indirect lightning stroke Ri (still) exceeds
limiting of the damage risk R to values
the acceptable damage risk Ra. If this is
below the acceptable risk of damage Ra.
the case, (further) protective measures
Using a detailed calculation of the dam-
age risks for the types of damage which
(in particular surge protective devices)
must be installed to reduce Ri.
are relevant to a specific building or
structure in each case, i. e. by dividing
It is thus possible to choose those protec-
them into the individual risk components
tive measures which lead to a reduction
RA, RB, RC, RM, RU, RV, RW and RZ, it is pos-
in the risk components which have rela-
sible to choose lightning protection
tively high values in each case, i. e. pro-
measures in an extremely targeted way.
tective measures whose degrees of effec-
The flow chart in DIN V VDE V 0185-2
tiveness in the case under inspection are
(Fig. 3.2.9.1) illustrates the procedure. In
comparatively high.
particular, the first thing to be examined
here is whether the risk caused by a
direct lightning stroke to the building or
structure Rd exceeds the acceptable dam-
3
age risk Ra. If this is the case, a complete
lightning protection system with suitable
Identify the structure to be protected
Identify the relevant types of damage
For every relevant types of damage:
- Identify the acceptable damage risk Ra
- Identify and calculate the risk components
RA, RB, RC, RM, RU, RV, RW, RZ
Calculate Rd and Ri
Calculate R = Rd + Ri
Structure sufficiently
No
R > Ra protected against this
type of damage
Yes
No
Rd > Ra
Yes No
Ri > Ra
Yes
Install sufficient type of lightning protection system
or other protective measures
for reduction of RA, RB, RC
Install surge protective devices at the boundary of a
lightning protection zone and eventually other pro-
tective measures for reduction of RM, RU, RV, RW, RZ
Install
special
protective
measures
Fig. 3.2.9.1 Flow chart for selection of protective measures
LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE 31
 3.2.10 Design aids
For practical applications, the time-con-
suming and not always simple applica-
tion of the procedure for assessing the
risk of damage for buildings and struc-
tures can be noticeably improved by the
use of a PC-aided solution. AIXTHOR has
converted the procedures and data from
DIN V VDE V 0185-2 into user-friendly
software (www.aixthor.com).
It is also possible to carry out an initial,
much simplified assessment using the
VDS Directive on risk orientated lightn
ing and surge protection
(VDS 2010:2002-07„Risikoorientierter
Blitz- und Überspannungsschutz“ [engl.:
„Risk-orientated lightning and surge
3 protection]).
3.2.11 Summary
DIN V VDE V 0185-2 contains procedures
and data for calculating the damage risk
as a result of lightning strokes to build-
ings and structures, and choosing light-
ning protection measures. In practice, it is
time-consuming and not always easy to
apply the procedures and data given.
This should not prevent the experts in
the field of lightning protection and, in
particular, those at the sharp end, from
studying this material. The quantitative
assessment of the risk of lightning dam-
age for a building or structure is a con-
siderable improvement on the situation
often encountered before, where deci-
sions for or against lightning protection
measures were frequently made solely
on the basis of subjective considerations
which were not always understood by all
parties.
A quantitative assessment of this type is
therefore an important pre-requirement
for the decision whether to designate
lightning protection measures for a
building or structure and, if so, to what
extent and which ones. In the long term
it will thus make a contribution to the
acceptance of lightning protection and
damage prevention.
Author of Chapter 3.2:
Prof. Alexander Kern
Aachen Technical College, Jülich, Germany
Ginsterweg 1
52428 Jülich
Germany
Phone: 0049 (0)2461/99-3042
Fax: 0049 (0)2461/99-3262
a.kern@fh-aachen.de
32 LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE
3.3 Inspection and main-
tenance
3.3.1 Types of inspection and quali-
fication of the inspectors
To guarantee that the building or struc-
ture, the persons therein, and the electri-
cal and electronic systems have perma-
nent protection, the mechanical and
electrical characteristics of a lightning
protection system must remain com-
pletely intact for the whole of its service
life. To ensure this case, a coordinated
programme of inspection and mainte-
nance of the lightning protection system
shall be laid down by an authority, the
designer of the lightning protection sys-
tem, or the person installing the light-
ning protection system, and the owner of
the building or structure. If faults are
found during the inspection of a light-
ning protection system, the operator/
owner of the building or structure is
responsible for the immediate remoral of
the faults. The inspection of the light-
ning protection system must be carried
out by a lightning protection specialist.
Since the term “lightning protection spe-
cialist” is not clearly defined, the first
question to be answered when the issue
of the qualification of the inspector
arises, is whether the relevant provisions
of the property to be inspected require a
competent person or an expert.
A competent person has sufficient
knowledge because of his training and
experience in the field of technical work
equipment which requires testing. He is
familiar with the relevant safety equip-
ment regulations, directives and stan-
dards to the extent that he is in a position
to judge if technical work equipment is
in a safe working condition. Competent
persons are, for example, after-sales serv-
ice engineers. A training course leading
to recognition as a competent person for
lightning and surge protection, as well as
for electrical installations conforming to
EMC (EMC approved engineer), is offered
by the Association of Damage Prevention
(VdS), which is part of the Joint Associa-
tion of German Insurers (GDV e. V.), in
cooperation with the Committee for
Lightning Protection and Lightning
Research of the Association of German
Electrical Engineers (ABB of the VDE).
Note: A competent person is not an
expert!
An expert has special knowledge because
of his training and experience in the field
of technical work equipment which
requires testing. He is familiar with the
relevant safety equipment regulations,
directives and standards to the extent
that he is in a position to judge if com-
plex technical work equipment is in a
safe working condition. He shall be able
to inspect technical work equipment and
provide an expert opinion. An expert is a
specially trained, officially approved
competent person. Persons who are eligi-
ble to be experts are, for example, engi-
neers at the German Technical Inspec-
torate or other specialist engineers.
Installations which are subject to moni-
toring requirements generally have to be
inspected by experts.
Regardless of the qualifications required
by the inspectors, the inspections shall
ensure that the lightning protection sys-
tem fulfils its protective function of pro-
tecting living beings, stock, technical
equipment in the building or structure,
operational technology, safety technolo-
gy, and the building or structure, against
the effects of direct and indirect light-
ning strokes when combined with any
maintenance and service measures which
may be necessary. A design report of the
lightning protection system containing
the design criteria, design description
and technical drawings shall therefore be
available to the inspector. The inspec-
tions which need to be carried out are
distinguished as follows:
Inspection of the design
The inspection of the design shall ensure
that all aspects of the lightning protec-
tion system with its components corre-
spond to the State of the Art in force at
the time the designing is undertaken. It
must be carried out before the service is
provided.
Inspections during the construction
phase
Sections of the lightning protection sys-
tem which will not be accessible when
the building work is complete must be
inspected as long as this is possible. These
include:
⇒ Foundation earthing electrodes
⇒ Earth-termination systems
⇒ Reinforcement connections
⇒ Concrete reinforcements used as
room shielding
⇒ Down-conductor systems and their
connections laid in concrete
The inspection comprises the control of
the technical documentation, and on-site
inspection and assessment of the work
carried out.
www.dehn.de
Acceptance inspection
The acceptance inspection is carried out
when the lightning protection system
has been completed. The following must
be thoroughly inspected:
⇒ Compliance with the protection plan
conforming to the standards
(design),
⇒ The work done (technical correct-
ness)
taking into consideration
⇒ the type of use,
⇒ the technical equipment of the
building or structure and
⇒ the site conditions.
Repeat inspection
Regular repeat inspections are the pre-
condition for a permanently effective
lightning protection system. They shall
be carried out every 2 to 6 years. Table
3.3.1.1 contains recommendations for
the intervals between the full inspections
of a lightning protection system under
average environmental conditions. If
official instructions or regulations with
inspection deadlines are in force, these
deadlines have to be considered as mini-
mum requirements. If official instructions
prescribe that the electrical installation in
the building or structure must be regu-
larly inspected, then the functioning of
the internal lightning protection meas-
ures shall be inspected as part of this
inspection.
Visual inspection
Lightning protection systems Type I or II
in buildings and structures, and critical
sections of lightning protection systems
(e. g. in cases where there is considerable
influence from aggressive environmental
conditions) have to undergo a visual
inspection between repeat inspections.
These shall be carried out at intervals of
1 to 3 years (Table 3.3.1.1).
Additional inspection
In addition to the repeat inspections, a
lightning protection system must be
inspected if
⇒ fundamental changes in use,
⇒ modifications to the building or
structure,
⇒ restorations,
⇒ extensions or
⇒ repairs
on a protected building or structure have
been carried out.
These inspections shall also be carried
out when it is known that a stroke of
www.dehn.de
lightning has struck the lightning protec-
tion system.
3.3.2 Inspection measures
The inspection comprises the control of
the technical documentation, on-site
inspection and measurement.
Control of the technical documentation
The technical documentation must be
inspected to ensure it is
⇒ complete and
⇒ in accordance with the standards.
On-site inspection
The on-site inspection shall examine
whether
⇒ the complete system corresponds to
the technical documentation,
⇒ the complete system of external and
internal lightning protection is in an
acceptable condition,
⇒ there are any loose connections and
interruptions in the lines of the light-
ning protection system,
⇒ all earthing connections (if visible)
are in order,
⇒ all lines and system components are
correctly secured, and units with a
mechanical protective function are
in working order,
⇒ modifications requiring additional
protective measures have been
made at the protected building or
structure
⇒ the surge protective devices installed
in power supply systems and infor-
mation systems are correctly
installed,
⇒ there is any damage, or whether
there are any disconnected surge
protective devices,
⇒ upstream overcurrent protection
devices of surge protective devices
have tripped
⇒ in the case of new supply connec-
tions or extensions which have been
installed in the interior of the build-
ing or structure since the last inspec-
tion, the lightning equipotential
bonding was carried out,
Type of LPS
between the complete
I 2 years
II
III, IV
Table 3.3.1.1 Temporal intervals between the repeat inspections of a lightning protection system
⇒ equipotential bonding connections
within the building or structure are
in place and intact,
⇒ the measures required for proximi-
ties of the lightning protection sys-
tem to installations have been car-
ried out.
Note: For existing earth-termination sys-
tems which are more than 10 years old,
the condition and quality of the earth
conductor line and its connections can
only be assessed by exposing it at certain
points.
Measurements
Measurements are used to inspect the
conductivity of the connections and the
condition of the earth-termination sys-
tem.
3
⇒ Conductivity of the connections
Measurements must be made to exa-
mine whether all the conductors and
connections of air-termination sys-
tems, down-conductor systems, equi-
potential bonding lines, shielding
measures etc. have a low-impedance
conductivity. The recommended
value is < 1 Ω.
⇒ Condition of the earth-termination
system
The contact resistance to the earth-
termination system at all measuring
points must be measured to establish
the conductivity of the lines and con-
nections (recommended value < 1 Ω).
Further, the conductivity with res-
pect to the metal installations (e. g.
gas, water, ventilation, heating), the
total earthing resistance of the light-
ning protection system, and the
earthing resistance of individual
earthing electrodes and partial ring
earthing electrodes must be measu-
red.
The results of the measurements must be
compared with the results of earlier
measurements. If they deviate consider-
ably from the earlier measurements,
additional examinations must be per-
formed.
Temporal intervals Temporal intervals
between the
maintenance tests visual inspection
1 year
4 years 2 years
6 years 3 years
LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE 33
 3.3.3 Documentation
A report must be compiled for each
inspection. This must be kept together
with the technical documentation and
reports of previous inspections at the
installation/system operator’s premises or
at the offices of the relevant authority.
The following technical documentation
must be available to the inspector when,
for example, he carries out his assess-
ment of the lightning protection system:
⇒ Design criteria
⇒ Design descriptions
⇒ Technical drawings of the external
and internal lightning protection
3 ⇒ Reports of previous services and
inspections
According to DIN V VDE V 0185-3, an
inspection report must contain the fol-
lowing information:
⇒ General
a) Owner, address
b) Installer of the lightning protection
system, address
c) Year of construction
⇒ Information about the building or
structure
a) Location
b) Use
c) Type of construction
d Type of roofing
e) Type of lightning protection system
⇒ Information about the lightning pro-
tection system
a) Material and cross section of the
lines
b) Number of down conductors, e. g.
inspection joints (designation corre-
sponding to the information in the
drawing)
c) Type of earth-termination system
(e. g. ring earthing electrode, earth
rod, foundation earthing electrode)
d) Design of the lightning equipoten-
tial bonding to metal installations, to
electrical installations and to existing
earthing busbars
⇒ Inspection fundamentals
a) Description and drawings of the
lightning protection system
b) Lightning protection standards and
provisions at the time of the installa-
tion
c) Further inspection fundamentals
(e. g. regulations, instructions) at the
time of the installation
34 LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE
⇒ Type of inspection
a) Inspection of the design
b) Inspections during the construction
phase
c) Acceptance inspection
d) Repeat inspection
e) Additional inspection
f) Visual inspection
⇒ Result of the inspection
a) Any modifications to the building or
structure and/or the lightning pro-
tection system determined
b) Deviations from the standards, regu-
lations, instructions and application
guidelines applicable at the time of
the installation
c) Defects determined
d) Earthing resistance or loop resistance
at the individual inspection joints,
with information about the measur-
ing method and the type of measur-
ing device
e) Total earthing resistance (measure-
ment with or without protective
conductor and metal building instal-
lation)
⇒ Inspector
a) Name of inspector
b) Inspector’s company /organisation
c) Name of person accompanying
d) Number of pages in inspection
report
e) Date of inspection
f) Signature of the inspector’s
company /organisation
There is a sample inspection report meet-
ing the requirements laid down in DIN V
VDE V 0185-3. It can be downloaded
from our website www.dehn.de.
3.3.4 Maintenance
The maintenance and inspection of light-
ning protection systems must be coordi-
nated.
In addition to the inspections, regular
maintenance routines should therefore
also be established for all lightning pro-
tection systems. How frequently the
maintenance work is carried out depends
on the following factors:
⇒ Loss of quality related to weathering
and the ambient conditions
⇒ Effects of direct lightning strokes
and possible damage arising there-
from
⇒ Type of lightning protection system
required for the building or structure
under consideration
The maintenance measures should be
determined individually for each light-
ning protection system and become an
integral part of the complete mainte-
nance programme for the building or
structure.
A maintenance routine should be drawn
up. This allows a comparison to be made
between results recorded now, and those
from an earlier service. These values can
also be used for comparison with a sub-
sequent inspection.
The following measures should be
included in a maintenance routine:
⇒ Inspection of all conductors and
components of the lightning protec-
tion system
⇒ Measuring of the electrical conduc-
tivity of installations of the lightning
protection system
⇒ Measuring of the earthing resistance
of the earth-termination system
⇒ Visual inspection of all surge protec-
tive devices (relates to surge protec-
tive devices on the lines of the
power supply system and informa-
tion system entering the building or
structure) to determine if there has
been any damage or if any discon-
nections are present
⇒ Refastening of components and con-
ductors
⇒ Inspection to ascertain that the
effectiveness of the lightning protec-
tion system is unchanged after instal-
lation of additional fixed equipment
or modifications to the building or
structure
Complete records should be made of all
maintenance work. They should contain
modification measures which have been,
or are to be, carried out.
These records serve as an aid when
assessing the components and installa-
tions of the lightning protection system.
They can be used to examine and update
a maintenance routine. The maintenance
records should be kept together with the
design and the inspection reports of the
lightning protection system.
www.dehn.de
4. Lightning protection system
Lightning protection systems shall pro-
tect buildings and structures from fire or
mechanical destruction, and persons in
the buildings from injury or even death.
A lightning protection system comprises
an external and an internal lightning Lightning Protection
protection (Figure 4.1). System (LPS)
The functions of the external lightning
protection are: according to DIN V VDE V 0185
⇒ Directing direct lightning strokes
into an air termination
⇒ Safe conduction of the lightning cur-

Earth-termination system
Down-conductor system
Air-termination system
rent to the earth by means of a

equipotential bonding
Separation distances
down-conductor system
⇒ Distribution of the lightning current
in the earth via an earth-termination

Lightning
system
The function of the internal lightning
protection is
⇒ To prevent hazardous sparking
inside the building or structure.
This is achieved by means of equipo- Fig. 4.1 Components of a lightning protection system
tential bonding or a safety distance
between the components of the
lightning protection system and oth-
The four types of lightning protection
systems (LPS) - I, II, III and IV - are deter-
mined using a set of construction rules
To ensure the continuous availability of
complex information technology installa-
tions even in the event of a direct light-
4
er conductive elements inside the
building or structure. which are based on the corresponding ning stroke, it is necessary to have con-
lightning protection level. Each set com- tinuing measures for the surge protec-
The protection equipotential bonding prises type dependent (e. g. radius of the tion of electronic installations which sup-
reduces the potential drops caused by rolling sphere, mesh size) and type inde- plement the lightning protection system.
the lightning current. This is achieved by pendent (e. g. cross-sections, materials) This extensive catalogue of measures is
connecting all separate, conductive parts construction rules. described in Chapter 7 under the concept
of the installation directly by means of of lightning protection zones.
conductors or surge protective devices
(SPDs) (Figure 4.2).

separation
distance
air-termination
system

lightning
equipotential bonding

lightning current
arrester for lightning current down-conductor
service 230/400 V, 50 Hz arrester for system
entrance telephone line
box
earth-termination system

equipotential bonding
for heating,
air-conditioning, sanitation

foundation earthing electrode

Fig. 4.2 Lightning protection system

www.dehn.de LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE 35

4

36 LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE www.dehn.de

5. External lightning protection
5.1 Air-termination systems
The function of the air-termination sys-
tems of a lightning protection system is
to prevent direct lightning strokes from
damaging the volume to be protected.
They must be designed to prevent uncon-
trolled lightning strokes to the structure
to be protected.
By correct dimensioning of the air-termi-
nation systems, the effects of a lightning
stroke to a structure can be reduced in a
controlled way.
Air-termination systems can consist of
the following components and be com-
bined with each other as required:
⇒ Rods
⇒ Spanned wires and cables
⇒ Intermeshed conductors
When determining the siting of the air-
termination systems of the lightning pro-
tection system, special attention must be
paid to the protection of corners and
edges of the structure to be protected.
This applies particularly to air-termina-
tion systems on the surfaces of roofs and
the upper parts of façades. Most impor-
tantly, air-termination systems must be
mounted at corners and edges.
Three methods can be used to determine
the arrangement and the siting of the
air-termination systems:
⇒ Rolling sphere method
⇒ Mesh method
⇒ Protective angle method
The rolling sphere method is the univer-
sal method of design particularly recom-
If there are external areas of the structure situated
in heights which are higher than the radius of the
corresponding rolling sphere (Tab. 5.1.1.3), an air-
termination system has to be installed applying e.g.
the mesh method.
mesh size and air-termination system
rolling sphere
radius corresp. to
the type of LPS
height acc. to
type of LPS
r starting
α
protective angle
acc. to type of LPS
Fig. 5.1.1 Air-termination system for high buildings
(h ≥ 60 m) – Mesh method
www.dehn.de
mended for geometrically complicated earth wires and high voltage towers
applications. were used as the basis for the so-called
“geometric-electrical model“.
The three different methods are This is based on the hypothesis that the
described below. head of the downward leader approach-
es the objects on the ground in an arbi-
trary way, unaffected by anything, until
5.1.1 Installation methods and types it reaches the final striking distance.
The point of strike is then determined by
of air-termination systems
the object closest to the head of the
The rolling sphere method – “geometric-
downward leader. The upward leader
electrical model“
starting from this point “forces its way
For lightning flashes to earth, a down- through“ (Fig. 5.1.1.2).
ward leader grows step-by-step in a
series of jerks from the cloud towards the
earth. When the leader has got close to
the earth within a few tens, to a few
hundreds of metres, the electrical insu-
lating strength of the air near the
ground is exceeded. A further “leader“
discharge similar to the downward
leader begins to grow towards the head
of the downward leader: the upward
leader. This defines the point of strike of
the lightning stroke (Fig. 5.1.1.1).
The starting point of the upward leader
and hence the subsequent point of strike
is determined mainly by the head of the
downward leader. The head of the
downward leader can only approach the
earth to within a certain distance. This
distance is defined by the continuously
increasing electrical field strength of the
ground as the head of the downward
leader approaches. The smallest distance
5
between the head of the downward
leader and the starting point of the
upward leader is called the final striking Fig. 5.1.1.2 As this model examination shows, a rol-
ling sphere can touch not only the stee-
distance hB (corresponds to the radius of
ple, but also the nave of the church at
the rolling sphere).
several points. All points touched are
Immediately after the electrical insulat-
potential points of strike
ing strength is exceeded at one point, Ref.: Prof. Dr. A. Kern, Aachen
the upward leader which leads to the
final strike and manages to cross the final
striking distance, is formed. Observations
of the protective effect of overhead
rolling sphere
downward leader
head of the downward leader
point afar from
the head of the starting
downward leader upward leader
fin istan
closest point to
al ce
d
str h B
the head of the
iki
ng
downward leader
upward leader
Fig. 5.1.1.1 Starting upward leader defining the point of strike
LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE 37
 Classification of the type of lightning
protection system and radius of the
rolling sphere
As a first approximation, a proportionali-
ty exists between the peak value of the
lightning current and the electrical
charge stored in the downward leader.
Furthermore, the electrical field strength
of the ground as the downward leader
approaches is also linearly dependent on
the charge stored in the downward
leader, to a first approximation.
There is therefore a proportionality
between the peak value I of the light-
ning current and the final striking dis-
tance R/radius of the rolling sphere:
R = 10 i I 0 , 65
R in m
I in kA
The protection of structures against
lightning is described in DIN V VDE V
0185-1. Among other things, this stan-
dard defines the classification into indi-
vidual types of lightning protection sys-
tem and stipulates the resulting light-
ning protection measures.
It differentiates between four types of
lightning protection system. A Type I
lightning protection system provides the
5 most protection and a Type IV, by com-
parison, the least. The interception effec-
tiveness Ei of the air-termination systems
is concomitant with the type of lightning
protection system, i. e. which percentage
of the prospective lightning strokes is
safely controlled by the air-termination
systems. From this results the final strik-
ing distance and hence the radius of the
“rolling sphere“. The correlations
between type of lightning protection sys-
tem, interception effectiveness Ei of the
air-termination systems, final striking dis-
tance/radius of the “rolling sphere“ and
current peak value are shown in
Table 5.1.1.1.
Taking as a basis the hypothesis of the
“geometric-electrical model“ that the
head of the downward leader approach-
Lightning Interception
protection level criterion
Ei
IV 0.84
III 0.91
II 0.97
I 0.99
Table 5.1.1.1 Relations between ligtning protection level, interception criterion Ei, final striking distance R
and min. peak value of current I
Ref.: Table 5 and 6 of DIN V VDE V 0185-1
38 LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE
es the objects on the earth in an arbitrary
way, unaffected by anything, until it
reaches the final striking distance, a gen-
eral method can be derived which allows
the volume to be protected of any
arrangement to be inspected. Carrying
out the rolling sphere method requires a
scale model (e. g. on a scale of 1:100) of
the building/structure to be protected,
which includes the external contours
and, where applicable, the air-termina-
tion systems. Depending on the location
of the object under investigation, it is
also necessary to include the surrounding
structures and objects, since these could
act as a “natural protective measure “ for
the object under examination.
Furthermore, a true-to-scale sphere is
required according to the type of light-
ning protection system with a radius
corresponding to the final striking dis-
tance (depending on the type of light-
ning protection system, the radius R of
the “rolling sphere“ must correspond
true-to-scale to the radii 20, 30, 45 or
60 m). The centre of the “rolling sphere“
used corresponds to the head of the
downward leader formed by the respec-
tive upward leader.
The “rolling sphere“ is now rolled
around the object under examination
and the contact points representing
potential points of strike are marked in
each case. The “rolling sphere“ is then
rolled over the object in all directions. All
contact points are marked again. All
potential points of strike are thus shown
on the model; it is also possible to deter-
mine the areas which can be hit by later-
al strokes. The naturally protected zones
resulting from the geometry of the
object to be protected and its surround-
ings can also be clearly seen. Air-termina-
tion conductors are not required at these
points (Fig. 5.1.1.3).
It must be borne in mind, however, that
lightning footprints have also been
found on steeples in places not directly
touched as the “rolling sphere“ rolled
over. This is traced to the fact that,
Radius of the rolling Min. peak
sphere (final striking value of current
distance hB)
R in m I in kA
60 15.7
45 10.1
30 5.4
20 2.9
rolling sphere
R
R R
R
R
R
building
Fig. 5.1.1.3 Schematic application of the “rolling
sphere” method at a building with con-
siderably structured surface
among other things, in the event of mul-
tiple lightning flashes, the base of the
lightning flash moves because of the
wind conditions. Consequently, an area
of approx. one metre can come up
around the points of strike determined
where lightning strokes can also occur.
Example 1: New administration building
in Munich
During the design phase of the new
administration building, the complex
geometry led to the decision to use the
rolling sphere method to identify the
areas threatened by lightning strokes.
This was possible because an architectur-
al model of the new building was avail-
able on a scale of 1:100.
It was determined that a Iightning pro-
tection system Type I was required, i. e.
the radius of the rolling sphere in the
model was 20 cm (Fig. 5.1.1.4).
Fig. 5.1.1.4 Construction of a new administration
building: Model with “rolling sphere”
acc. to lightning protection system Type I
Ref.: WBG Wiesinger
The points where the “rolling sphere“
touches parts of the building, can be hit
by a direct lightning stroke with a corres-
ponding minimum current peak value of
2.9 kA (Fig. 5.1.1.5). Consequently, these
points required adequate air-termin-
ation systems. If, in addition, electrical
installations were localised at these
points or in their immediate vicinity (e. g.
on the roof of the building), these loca-
www.dehn.de
tions were equipped with additional air
termination measures.
The application of the rolling sphere
method meant that air-termination sys-
tems were not installed where protection
was not required. On the other hand,
locations in need of more protection
could be equipped accordingly, where
necessary. (Fig. 5.1.1.5).
Fig. 5.1.1.5 Construction of a DAS administration
building: Top view (excerpt) on the
zones threatened by lightning strokes
for lightning protection system type I
Ref.: WBG Wiesinger
Example 2: Aachen Cathedral
The cathedral stands in the midst of the
old town of Aachen surrounded by sev-
eral high buildings.
Adjacent to the cathedral there is a scale
model (1:100) whose purpose is to make
it easier for visitors to understand the
geometry of the building.
The buildings surrounding the Aachen
Cathedral provide a partial natural pro-
tection against lightning strokes.
Therefore, and to demonstrate the effec-
tiveness of lightning protection meas-
ures, models of the most important ele-
ments of the surrounding buildings were
made according to the same scale (1:100)
(Fig. 5.1.1.6).
Fig. 5.1.1.6 also shows “rolling spheres“
for lightning protection systems Types II
and III (i. e. with radii of 30 cm and 45 cm)
on the model.
The aim here was to demonstrate the
increasing requirements on the air-termi-
nation systems as the radius of the rolling
www.dehn.de
Fig. 5.1.1.7 illustrates this consideration.
Air-termination rods are frequently used
to protect the surface of a roof, or instal-
lations mounted on the roof, against a
direct lightning stroke. The square
arrangement of the air-termination rods,
over which no cable is normally spanned,
means that the sphere does not “roll on
rails“ but “sits deeper“ instead, thus
Fig. 5.1.1.6 Aachen Cathedral: Model with environ-
ment and “rolling spheres” for lightning
protection systems type II and III
Ref.: Prof. Dr. A. Kern, Aachen
sphere decreases, i. e. which areas of
R
Aachen Cathedral had additionally to be
considered at risk of being hit by light-
ning strokes, if a lightning protection sys-
tem Type II with a higher degree of pro-
tection was used.
The “rolling sphere“ with the smaller
p
radius (according to a type of lightning
protection system with a higher light-
∆h
ning protection level) naturally touches cuboidal protective area bet-
ween four air-termination rods
also the model at all points already
touched by the “rolling sphere“ with the
larger radius. Thus, it is only necessary to Type of LPS
determine the additional contact points. I II III IV
As demonstrated, when dimensioning R 20 30 45 60
the air-termination system for a struc-
ture, or a structure mounted on the roof,
the sag of the rolling sphere is decisive.
The following formula can be used to cal- 5
d
culate the penetration depth p of the
rolling sphere when the rolling sphere
rolls “on rails“, for example . This can be
achieved by using two spanned wires, for
example . Fig. 5.1.1.8 Air-termination system for installations
mounted on the roof with their protec-
2 tive area
⎛ d⎞
p= R− R −⎜ ⎟ 2
⎝ 2⎠ increasing the penetration depth of the
sphere (Fig. 5.1.1.8).
R Radius of the rolling sphere The height of the air-termination rods ∆h
d Distance between two air-termina- should always be greater than the value
tion rods or two parallel air-termina- of the penetration depth p determined,
tion conductors and hence greater than the sag of the
rolling sphere. This additional height of
the air-termination rod ensures that the
air-termination rolling sphere does not touch the struc-
conductor
R
ture to be protected.
Another way of determining the height
of the air-termination rods is using Table
penetration
depth p
5.1.1.2. The penetration depth of the
∆h
rolling sphere is governed by the largest
distance of the air-termination rods from
each other. Using the greatest distance,
the penetration depth p (sag) can be
taken from the table. The air-termina-
d tion rods must be dimensioned according
to the height of the structures mounted
Fig. 5.1.1.7 Penetration depth p of the rolling sphere on the roof (in relation to the location of
LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE 39
 d Sag of the rolling sphere [m] (rounded up)
By using the ridge and the outer edges of
Distance Type of LPS with rolling sphere radius in metres the structure, as well as the metal natural
between air- parts of the structure serving as an air-
termination rods I (20 m) II (30 m) III (45 m) IV (60 m) termination system, the individual cells
can be sited as desired.
2 0.03 0.02 0.01 0.01
The air-termination conductors on the
4 0.10 0.07 0.04 0.03 outer edges of the structure must be laid
6 0.23 0.15 0.10 0.08 as close to the edges as possible.

8 0.40 0.27 0.18 0.13 A metal attic can serve as an air-termina-

10 0.64 0.42 0.28 0.21 tion conductor and/or a down-conductor
system if the required minimum dimen-
12 0.92 0.61 0.40 0.30 sions for natural components of the air-
14 1.27 0.83 0.55 0.41 termination system are complied with
(Fig. 5.1.1.10).
16 1.67 1.09 0.72 0.54
18 2.14 1.38 0.91 0.68
20 2.68 1.72 1.13 0.84
23 3.64 2.29 1.49 1.11
26 4.80 2.96 1.92 1.43
29 6.23 3.74 2.40 1.78
32 8.00 4.62 2.94 2.17
35 10.32 5.63 3.54 2.61
Table 5.1.1.2 Sag of the rolling sphere over two air-termination rods or two parallel air-termination e.g. gutter
conductors

5 d di
ago nal
∆h

domelight installed Fig. 5.1.1.10 Meshed air-termination system

on the roof

Protective angle method

Fig. 5.1.1.9 Calculation ∆h for several air-termination rods according to rolling sphere method
the air-termination rod) and also the
penetration depth (Fig. 5.1.1.9).
If, for example, a total height of an air-
termination rod of 1.15 m is either calcu-
lated or obtained from the table, an air-
termination rod with a standard length
of 1.5 m is normally used
Mesh method
A “meshed“ air-termination system can
be used universally regardless of the
height of the structure and shape of the
roof. A reticulated air-termination net-
work with a mesh size according to the
The protective angle method is derived
from the electric-geometrical lightning
model. The protective angle is deter-
Type of LPS Mesh size
mined by the radius of the rolling sphere.
I 5 x 5m The comparable protective angle with
the radius of the rolling sphere is given
II 10 x 10 m
when a slope intersects the rolling sphere
III 15 x 15 m in such a way that the resulting areas
IV 20 x 20 m have the same size (Fig. 5.1.1.11).
This method must be used for structures
Table 5.1.1.3 Mesh size with symmetrical dimensions (e. g. steep
type of lightning protection system is roof) or roof-mounted structures (e. g.
arranged on the roofing (Table 5.1.1.3). antennas, ventilation pipes).
To simplify matters, the sag of the rolling The protective angle depends on the
sphere is assumed to be zero for a type of lightning protection system and
meshed air-termination system. the height of the air-termination system

40 LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE www.dehn.de

 angle α can be different. In Fig. 5.1.1.16,
α α2
the roof surface is the reference plane 1

h1

h1
for protective angle α1. The ground is the
reference plane for the protective angle
R rolling sphere α2. Therefore the angle α2 according to

h2
Fig. 5.1.1.12 and Table 5.1.1.4 is less than

h
α1.

equal surface areas Table 5.1.1.4 provides the corresponding

air-termi-
nation rod
protective angle base
Fig. 5.1.1.11 Protective angle and comparable radi-
us of the rolling sphere
above the reference plane (Fig. 5.1.1.12).
Air-termination conductors, air-termina-
tion rods, masts and wires should be
arranged to ensure that all parts of the
building to be protected are situated
within the volume of protection of the
air-termination system.
The protection zone can be “cone-
shaped“ or “tent-shaped“, if a cable, for
example, is spanned over it (Figs. 5.1.1.13
to 5.1.1.15).
If air-termination rods are installed on
the surface of the roof to protect struc-
tures mounted thereon, the protective
protective angle for each type of light-
h1: Physical height of the air-termination rod
angle α
angle α Note:
Protective angle α1 refers to the
height of the air-termination system
h1 above the roof surface to be pro-
tected (reference plane);
Protective α2 refers to the height
h2 = h1 + h,while the earth surface
is the reference plane.
angle α angle α Fig. 5.1.1.16 External lightning protection system,
volume protected by a vertical air-ter-
mination rod
ning protection system and the corres-
ponding distance (zone of protection).
Protective angle method for isolated
air-termination systems on
Fig. 5.1.1.14 Expamle of air-termination systems roof-mounted structures
with protective angle α
Special problems may occur when roof-
mounted structures, which are often
air-termination
conductor
installed at a later date, protrude from
zones of protection, e. g. the mesh. If, in
addition, these roof-mounted structures
5
contain electrical or electronic equip-
ment, such as roof-mounted fans, anten-
α° nas, measuring systems or TV cameras,
ht

additional protective measures are

a° a° required.
ht

Angle α depends on the type of lightning protection If such equipment is connected directly
system and the height of the air-termnation con- to the external lightning protection sys-
ductor above ground tem, then, in the event of a lightning
stroke, partial currents are conducted
Fig. 5.1.1.15 Area protected by an air-termination
into the structure. This could result in the
Fig. 5.1.1.13 Cone-shaped protection zone
conductor destruction of surge sensitive equipment.
Direct lightning strokes to such structures
protruding above the roof can be pre-
Protective angle method
vented by having isolated air-termina-
αϒ 80 tion systems.
70 Air-termination rods as shown in Fig.
5.1.1.17 are suitable for protecting
60 smaller roof-mounted structures (with
50 electrical equipment).
They form a “cone-shaped“ zone of pro-
40 tection and thus prevent a direct light-
30 ning stroke to the structure mounted on
I II III IV the roof.
20
10 The separation distance s must be taken
0
into account when dimensioning the
0 2 10 20 30 40 50 60 height of the air-termination rod (see
h (m) Chapter 5.6).
Fig. 5.1.1.12 Protective angle α as a function of height h depending on the type of lightning protection system

www.dehn.de LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE 41

 Height of the air- Type of LPS I Type of LPS II Type of LPS III Type of LPS IV
termination rod Angle Distance Angle Distance Angle Distance Angle Distance
h in m α a in m α a in m α a in m α a in m
1 67 2.36 71 2.90 74 3.49 78 4.70
2 67 4.71 71 5.81 74 6.97 78 9.41
3 67 7.07 71 8.71 74 10.46 78 14.11
4 65 6.43 69 10.42 72 12.31 76 16.04
5 59 6.66 65 10.72 70 13.74 73 16.35
6 57 7.70 62 11.28 68 14.85 71 17.43
7 54 8.26 60 12.12 66 15.72 69 18.24
8 52 8.96 58 12.80 64 16.40 68 19.80
9 49 9.20 56 13.34 62 16.93 66 20.21
10 47 9.65 54 13.76 61 18.04 65 21.45
11 45 10.00 52 14.08 59 18.31 64 22.55
12 42 9.90 50 14.30 58 19.20 62 22.57
13 40 10.07 49 14.95 57 20.02 61 23.45
14 37 9.80 47 15.01 55 19.99 60 24.25
15 35 9.80 45 15.00 54 20.65 59 24.96
16 33 9.74 44 15.45 53 21.23 58 25.61
17 30 9.24 42 15.31 52 21.76 57 26.18
18 28 9.04 40 15.10 50 21.45 56 26.69
19 25 8.39 39 15.39 49 21.86 55 27.13
20 23 8.07 37 15.07 48 22.21 54 27.53
21 36 15.26 47 22.52 53 27.87
22 35 15.40 46 22.78 52 28.16
23 33 14.94 45 23.00 51 28.40
24 32 15.00 44 23.18 50 28.60
25 30 14.43 43 23.31 49 28.76
26 29 14.41 42 23.41 49 29.91
27 27 13.76 40 22.66 48 29.99
28 26 13.66 39 22.67 47 30.03

5 29
30
31
25
23
13.52
12.73
38
37
36
22.66
22.61
22.52
46
45
44
30.03
30.00
29.94
32 35 22.41 44 30.90
33 35 23.11 43 30.77
34 34 22.93 42 30.61
35 33 22.73 41 30.43
36 32 22.50 40 30.21
37 31 22.23 40 31.05
38 30 21.94 39 30.77
39 29 21.62 38 30.47
40 28 21.27 37 30.14
41 27 20.89 37 30.90
42 26 20.48 36 30.51
43 25 20.05 35 30.11
44 24 19.59 35 30.81
45 angle α
α 23 19.10 34 30.35
46 33 29.87
47 32 29.37
48 32 29.99
49 31 29.44
50 30 28.87
51 30 29.44
52 29 28.82
53 height h 28 28.18
54 of the 27 27.51
55 air-termination rod 27 28.02
56 26 27.31
57 25 26.58
58 25 27.05
59 distance a 24 26.27
60 23 25.47
Table 5.1.1.4 Protective angle α depending on the types of lightning protection system

42 LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE www.dehn.de


Fig. 5.1.1.17 Protection of small-sized installations on roofs against direct lightning strokes by means of air-
termination rods
Isolated and non-isolated air-termina-
tion systems
When designing the external lightning
protection system of a structure, we dis-
tinguish between two types of air-termi-
nation system:
⇒ isolated
⇒ non-isolated
The two types can be combined.
Air-termination systems of a non-isol-
ated external lightning protection sys-
tem for protection of a structure can be
installed in the following ways:
If the roof is made of non-flammable
material, the conductors of the air-termi-
nation system can be installed on the sur-
face of the structure (e. g. gable or flat
roof). Normally non-flammable building
materials are used. The components of
the external lightning protection system
can therefore be mounted directly on the
structure (Figs. 5.1.1.18 and 5.1.1.19).
Fig. 5.1.1.18 Gable roof with conductor holder
If the roof is made of easily inflammable
material (building material class B 3, see
Annex E of DIN V VDE V 0185-3) e. g.
thatched roofs, then the distance
www.dehn.de
between the flammable parts of the roof
and the air-termination rods, air-termi-
nation conductors or air-termination
meshes of the air-termination system
must not be less than 0.4 m.
Easily inflammable parts of the structure
to be protected must not be in direct
contact with parts of the external light-
ning protection system. Neither may they
be located under the roofing, which can
be punctured in the event of a lightning
stroke (see also Chapter 5.1.5 Thatched
roofs).
With isolated air-termination systems,
the complete structure is protected
against a direct lightning stroke via air-
termination rods, air-termination masts
or masts with cables spanned over them.
When installing the air-termination sys-
tems, the separation distance s to the
structure must be kept.
Fig. 5.1.1.19 Flat roof with conductor holder
Figs. 5.1.1.20 and 5.1.1.21 illustrate one
type of air-termination system which is
isolated from the structure
α α
s 4 s
2
1 1
1 Air-termination mast
2 Protected structure
3 Reference plane
4 Separation distance s corresponding to 5.3,
main section 1 of DIN V VDE V 0185-3
α Protective angle acc. to Table 5.1.1.3
Fig. 5.1.1.20 Isolated external lightning protection
system with two separate air-termina-
tion masts according to the protective
angle method; Projection on a vertical
area
2
s1
s2
3
s2 5
1 1
1 Air-termination mast
2 Horizontal air-termination conductor
3 Protected structure
s1, s2 separation distance
acc. to DIN V VDE V 0185-3
Fig. 5.1.1.21 Isolated external lightning protection
system, consisting of two separate air-
termination masts, connected through
a horizontal air-termination conductor:
Projection on a vertical surface via the
two masts (vertical section)
The separation distance s between the
air-termination system and the structure
must be kept.
Air-termination systems isolated from
the structure are frequently used, when
the roof is covered with inflammable
material, e. g. thatch or also for ex-instal-
lations, e. g. tank installations.
See also Chapter 5.1.5 “Air-termination
system for structures with thatched
roofs“.
LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE 43
 A further method of designing isolated
air-termination systems consists in secur-
ing the air-termination systems (air-ter-
mination rods, conductors or cables) with
electrically insulating materials such as
GRP (glass fibre-reinforced plastic).
This form of isolation can be limited to
local use or applied to whole parts of the
installation. It is often used for roof-
mounted structures such as fan systems
or heat exchangers with an electrically
conductive connection into the structure
(see also chapter 5.1.8).
Natural components of air-termination
systems
Metal structural parts such as attics, gut-
tering, railings or cladding can be used as
natural components of an air-termina-
tion system.
If a structure has a steel skeleton con-
struction with a metal roof and façade
made of conductive material, these can
be used for the external lightning protec-
tion system, under certain circumstances.
Sheet metal cladding on the walls or roof
of the structure to be protected can be
used if the electrical connection between
the different parts is permanent.
These permanent electrical connections
5 can be made by e.g. brazing, welding,
pressing, screwing or riveting, for exam-
ple.
If there is no electrical connection, a sup-
plementary connection must be made
for these elements e. g. with bridging
braids or bridging cables.
If the thickness of the sheet metal is not
less than the value t' in Table 5.1.1.5, and
if there is no requirement to take
account of a through-melting of the
sheets at the point of strike or the igni-
tion of flammable material under the
cladding, then such sheets can be used as
an air-termination system.
Material Thickness t‘
Fe 0.5 mm
Cu 0.5 mm
Al / StSt 0.7 mm
Table 5.1.1.5 Min. thickness of metal plates (if
melt-through is allowed)
The material thicknesses are not distin-
guished according to the type of light-
ning protection system.
It is, however, necessary to take precau-
tionary measures against through-melt-
ing or intolerable heating-up at the
point of strike, if the thickness of the
44 LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE
sheet metal shall not be less than value t protective angle method. An air-termina-
in Table 5.1.1.6. tion system with a mesh size according to
the type of lightning protection system
used can be installed if the whole
Material Thickness t
arrangement is isolated (elevated) from
Fe 4 mm the structure to be protected by at least
Cu 5 mm the required separation distance s.
Al / StSt 7 mm A universal system of components for the
installation of isolated air-termination
Table 5.1.1.6 Min. thickness of metal plates (if
melt-through is not allowed)
systems is described in chapter 5.1.8.
The required thickness t of the materials 5.1.2 Air-termination systems for
can generally not be complied with, for structures with gable roofs
example, for metal roofs,
Air-termination systems on roofs are the
For pipes or containers, however, it is
metal components in their entirety, e. g.
possible to meet the requirements for
air-termination conductors, air-termina-
these minimum thicknesses (wall thick-
tion rods, air-termination tips.
ness). If, though, the temperature rise
The parts of the structure usually hit by
(heating-up) on the inside of the pipe or
lightning strokes, such as the top of the
tank represents a hazard for the medium
gable, chimneys, ridges and arrises, the
contained therein (risk of fire or explo-
edges of gables and eaves, parapets and
sion), then these must not be used as air-
antennas and other protruding struc-
termination systems (see also chapter
tures mounted on the roof, must be
5.1.4).
equipped with air-termination systems.
Normally, a reticulated air-termination
If the requirements on the appropriate
network is installed on the surface of
minimum thickness are not met, the com-
gabled roofs, said network corres-
ponents, e. g. conduits or containers,
ponding to the mesh size of the appro-
must be situated in an area protected
priate type of lightning protection sys-
from direct lightning strokes. These natu-
tem (e. g. 15 m x 15 m for a lightning pro-
ral components can nevertheless still be
in a position to conduct lightning cur-
rents and can therefore be used as an
tection system Type III) (Fig. 5.1.2.1).
interconnecting conductor or down-con-
ductor system.
A thin coat of paint, 1 mm bitumen or
0.5 mm PVC cannot be regarded as insu-
lation in the event of a direct lightning
stroke. Such coatings break down when
subjected to the high energies deposited
during a direct lightning stroke.
There must be no coatings on the joints
of the natural components of the down-
conductor systems.
If conductive parts are located on the sur-
face of the roof, they can be used as a Fig. 5.1.2.1 Air-termination system on a gable roof
natural air-termination system if there is
no conductive connection into the struc-
By using the ridge and the outer edges of
ture.
the structure, as well as the metal parts
By connecting, e.g., pipes or electrical
of the structure serving as an air-termina-
conductors into the structure, partial
tion system, the individual meshes can be
lightning currents can enter the structure
sited as prefered. The air-termination
and affect or even destroy sensitive elec-
conductors on the outer edges of the
trical/electronic equipment.
structure must be installed as close to the
In order to prevent these partial light-
edges as possible.
ning currents from penetrating, isolated
Generally, the metal gutter is used for
air-termination systems shall be installed
closing the “mesh“ of the air-termin-
for the aforementioned roof-mounted
ation system on the roof surface. If the
structures.
gutter itself is connected so as to be elec-
The isolated air-termination system can
trically conductive, a gutter clamp is
be designed using the rolling sphere or
www.dehn.de
mounted at the crossover of the air-ter-
mination system and the gutter.
Roof-mounted structures made of elec-
trically non-conductive material (e. g.
PVC vent pipes) are considered to be suf-
ficiently protected if they do not pro-
trude more than h = 0.3 m from the plane
of the mesh (Fig. 5.1.2.2).
h An air-termination system for structures
Fig. 5.1.2.2 Height of a roof superstructure made of
electrically non-conductive material
(e.g. PVC), h ≤ 0.3 m
If the protrusion is h > 0.3 m, the struc-
ture must be equipped with an air-termi-
nation system (e. g. interception tip) and
connected to the nearest air-termination
conductor. One way of doing this would
be to use a wire with a diameter of 8 mm
up to a maximum free length of 0.5 m, as
shown in Fig. 5.1.2.3.
Fig. 5.1.2.3 Additional air-termination system for
ventilation pipes
Metal structures mounted on the roof
without conductive connection into the
structure do not need to be connected to
the air-termination system if all the fol-
lowing conditions are met:
⇒ Structures mounted on the roof may
protrude a maximum distance of
0.3 m from the plane of the mesh.
⇒ Structures mounted on the roof may
have a maximum enclosed area of
1 m2, (e. g. dormer windows)
⇒ Structures mounted on the roof may
have a maximum length of 2 m (e. g.
sheet metal roofing parts)
Only if all three conditions are met, no
terminal is required.
Furthermore, with the conditions stated
above, the separation distance to the air-
termination conductors and down-
www.dehn.de
conductor systems must be maintained
(Fig. 5.1.2.4).
Fig. 5.1.2.4 Building with photovoltaic system
Ref.: Wettingfeld Lightning Protection,
Krefeld, Germany
Air-termination rods for chimneys must
be erected to ensure that the whole
chimney is in the zone of protection. The
protective angle method is applied when
dimensioning the air-termination rods.
If the stack is brick-built or constructed
with preformed sections, the air-termina-
tion rod can be mounted directly on the
stack.
If there is a conductive pipe in the interior
of the stack, e. g. as found when redevel-
oping old buildings, the separation dis-
tance to this conductive component must
be kept. This is an example where isol-
ated air-termination systems are used
and the air-termination rods are erected
with distance holders.
The assembly to protect parabolic anten-
nas in particular is similar to that to pro-
tect stacks with an internal stainless steel
pipe.
In the event of a direct lightning stroke
to antennas, partial lightning currents
can enter the structure to be protected
via the shields of the coaxial cables and
cause the effects and destruction previ-
ously described. To prevent this, anten-
nas are equipped with isolated air-termi-
nation systems (e. g. air-termination rods)
(Fig. 5.1.2.5).
Fig. 5.1.2.5 Antenna with air-termination rod
Ref.: Upper Austrian Lightning Protec-
tion, Linz, Austria
Air-termination systems on the ridge
have a tent-shaped zone of protection
(according to the protective angle
method). The angle depends on the
height above the reference plane (e. g.
surface of the earth) and the type of
lightning protection system chosen.
5.1.3 Air-termination systems for
flat-roofed structures
with flat roofs (Figs. 5.1.3.1 and 5.1.3.2) is
designed using the mesh method. A
mesh-type air-termination system with a
mesh size corresponding to the type of
lightning protection system is installed
on the roof (Table 5.1.1.3).
Fig. 5.1.3.3 illustrates the practical appli-
cation of the meshed air-termination sys-
tem in combination with air-termination
rods to protect the structures mounted
on the roof, e. g. domelights, photovolta-
ic cells or fans. Chapter 5.1.8 shows how
to deal with these roof-mounted struc-
tures.
Roof conductor holders on flat roofs are
laid at intervals of approx. 1 m. The air-
termination conductors are connected
with the attic, this being a natural com-
ponent of the air-termination system. As
the temperature changes, so does the
5
length of the materials used for the attic,
and hence the individual segments must
be equipped with “slide plates“. If the
attic is used as an air-termination system,
these individual segments must be per-
manently interconnected so as to be elec-
trically conductive without restricting
their ability to expand. This can be
achieved by means of bridging braids,
straps or cables (Fig. 5.1.3.4).
The changes in length caused by changes
in temperature must also be taken into
account with air-termination conductors
and down-conductor systems
(see Chapter 5.4).
A lightning stroke to the attic can cause
the materials used to melt through. If
this is unacceptable, a supplementary air-
termination system, e. g. with air-termi-
nation tips, must be installed, its location
being determined by using the rolling
sphere method.
LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE 45
 Conductor holders for flat roofs,
homogeneously welded
In the wind, roof sheetings can move
across the roof surface horizontally, if
they are only fixed mechanically/laid on
the surface. A special position fixing is
Roof conductor holder Bridging braid
Type FB2 Part No. 377 015 required for the air-termination conduct-
Part No. 253 050 or for preventing the conductor holders
for air-termination systems from being
displaced on the smooth surface. Con-
expansion piece ventional roof conductor holders cannot
be permanently bonded to roof sheet-
ings since the latter do not usually permit
flexible connection
the application of adhesives.
A simple and safe way of fixing the posi-
Roof conductor holder tion is to use roof conductor holders Type
Type FB distance between the
Part No. 253 015 KF in combination with straps (cut the
roof conductor holders
approx. 1 m strips to fit) made of the roof sheeting
material. The strap is clamped into the
plastic holder and both sides are welded
onto the seal. Holder and strap should be
positioned immediately next to a roof
sheeting joint at a distance of approx.
1 m. The strip of foil is welded to the roof
sheeting according to the manufacturer
of the roof sheeting. This prevents air-
termination conductors on flat roofs
from being displaced.

If the slope of the roof is greater then 5°,

Fig. 5.1.3.1 Air-termination system each roof conductor holder must be
equipped with a position fixing element.

5 If the synthetic roof sheetings are

secured by mechanical means, the roof
conductor holders must be arranged in
the immediate vicinity of the mechanical
fixing elements.

When carrying out this work, it must be

considered that welding and bonding
work on the seal affect the guarantee
provided by the roofer.
The work to be carried out must there-
fore only be done with the agreement of
the roofer responsible for the particular
roof, or be carried out by him himself
(Fig. 5.1.3.5).
Fig. 5.1.3.2 Air-termination system on a flat roof

Fig. 5.1.3.3 Use of air-termination rods Fig. 5.1.3.4 Bridged attic

46 LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE www.dehn.de


00
~3
~9
0
distance between the
roof conductor holders
approx. 1 m
Roof conductor holder
Type KF
Part No. 253 030
Fig. 5.1.3.5 Highly polymeric roof sheetings for flat roofs - Roof conductor holder Type KF / KF2
5.1.4 Air-termination systems on
metal roofs
Modern industrial and commercial pur-
pose-built structures often have metal
roofs and façades. The metal sheets and
plates on the roofs are usually 0.7 –
1.2 mm thick.
Fig. 5.1.4.1 shows an example of the con-
struction of a metal roof.
Fig. 5.1.4.1 Types of metal roofs, e.g. roofs with
round standing seam
When the roof is hit by a direct lightning
stroke, melting through or vaporisation
can cause a hole formed at the point of
strike. The size of the hole depends on
the energy of the lightning stroke and
the characteristics of the material, (e. g.
thickness). The biggest problem here is
the subsequent damage, e. g. water
entering at this point. Days or weeks can
pass before this damage is noticed. The
www.dehn.de
~70
~3
00
flexible connection
roof insulation becomes damp and/or the
ceiling becomes wet.
Protection against the rain is no longer
guaranteed to be provided.
One example of damage, assessed using
the Lightning-Information Service from
Siemens (BLIDS) illustrates this problem
(Fig. 5.1.4.2). A current of approx.
20,000 A struck the sheet metal roof and
made a hole (Fig. 5.1.4.2: Detail A). Since
the sheet metal roof was not earthed
with a down-conductor system,
flashovers to natural metal components
in the wall occurred in the area around
the fascia (Fig. 5.1.4.2: Detail B), which
also caused a hole.
To prevent such kind of damage, a suit-
able external lightning protection system
with wires and clamps capable of carry-
ing lightning currents must be installed
even on a “thin“ metal roof. The DIN V
Detail B
Evaluation: BLIDS – SIEMENS
I = 20400 A
Fig. 5.1.4.2 Example of damage: Metal plate cover
VDE V 0185-3 lightning protection stan-
dard clearly illustrates the risk of damage
to metal roofs. Where an external light-
ning protection system is required, the
metal sheets must have the minimum val-
ues stated in Table 5.1.4.1.
The thicknesses t are not relevant for
roofing materials. Metal sheets with a
thickness t’ may only be used as a natural
air-termination system if puncturing,
overheating and melting is tolerated.
The owner of the structure must agree to
tolerate this type of roof damage, since
there is no longer any guarantee that the
roof will offer protection from the rain.
Also the Rules of the German Roofing
Trade concerning lightning protection on
and attached to roofs require the agree-
ment of the owner.
If the owner is not prepared to tolerate
damage to the roof in the event of a
lightning stroke, then a separate air-ter-
mination system must be installed on a
metal roof. The air-termination system
must be installed to ensure that the
rolling sphere (radius R which corre-
sponds to the type of lightning protec-
tion system chosen) does not touch the
metal roof (Fig. 5.1.4.3).
When mounting the air-termination sys-
tem it is recommended to install a so-
called “hedgehog roof“ with longitudi-
5
nal cables and air-termination tips.
In practice, the heights of air-termination
tips according to Table 5.1.4.2 are tried
and tested, regardless of the type of
lightning protection system involved.
Holes must not be drilled into the metal
roof when fixing the conductors and air-
termination tips. Various conductor hold-
ers are available for the different types of
metal roofs (round standing seam, stand-
ing seam, trapezoidal). Fig. 5.1.4.4a
shows one possible design for a metal
roof with round standing seam.
Detail A
Residential building
LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE 47
 Metal sheetings can be used as “natural” components of the air-termination Suitable for all types of
system, if the thickness t / t’ of the metal plate is not less than: lightning protection systems

Materials If the melting through or the ignition of adjacent Distance of the Height of the air-
material below the sheeting is horizontal termination tip*)
impermissible: permissible: conductors
Thickness t Thickness t’
3m 0,15 m
Galvanised steel 4 mm 0.5 mm
4m 0.25 m
Copper 5 mm 0.5 mm
5m 0.35 m
Aluminium / StSt 7 mm 0.7 mm
6m 0.45 m
Table 5.1.4.1 Natural components of an air-termination system
*) recommended values

Table 5.1.4.2 Lightning protection for metal roofs -

Height of the air-termination tips

rolling sphere with a When installing the cables, care must be

radius acc. to type of LPS taken that the conductor holder located
air-termination tip at the highest point of the roof must be
designed with a fixed conductor leading,
whereas all other conductor holders
must be designed with a loose conductor
leading because of the linear compensa-
tion caused by changes in temperature
(Fig. 5.1.4.4b).

air-termination tip

conductor holder with

loose conductor leading

5 bridging braid

Fig. 5.1.4.3 Air-termination system on a metal roof - Protection against holing

KS connector

Parallel connector

1 St/tZn Part No. 307 000

roof connection
Roof conductor holder
for metal roofs, loose conductor
leading, DEHNgrip conductor holder bridging cable
2
StSt Part No. 223 011 Fig. 5.1.4.4b Conductor holder for metal roofs with
1 3 Al Part No. 223 041 round standing seam

Roof conductor holder for metal

roofs fixed conductor leading with The conductor holder with fixed con-
2 clamping frame ductor leading is illustrated in Fig. 5.1.4.5
3
using the example of a trapezoidal sheet
StSt Part No. 223 010
roof.
Al Part No. 223 040
Fig. 5.1.4.5 also shows an air-termination
tip next to the conductor holder. The
conductor holder must be hooked into
the fixing screw above the covering plate
for the drill hole to prevent any entering
of water.

Fig. 5.1.4.6 uses the example of a round

standing seam roof to illustrate the loose
conductor leading.
Fig. 5.1.4.6 also shows the connection to
Fig. 5.1.4.4a Conductor holders for metal roofs - Round standing seam
the roof with round standing seam at the

48 LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE www.dehn.de

 5.1.5 Principle of an air-termination Ideally, ridge conductors should have
system for structures with spans up to around 15 m, and down-con-
thatched roof ductor systems up to around 10 m with-
out additional supports.
The design of lightning protection sys-
tems Type III generally meets the require-
Fastening posts must be tightly connect-
ments of such a structure. In particular
ed to the roof structure (rafters and rails)
individual cases, a risk analysis based on
by means of bolts and washers.
DIN V VDE V 0185-2 can be carried out.
Metal components situated above the
Subclause 3.1.2 of DIN V VDE V 0185-3
roof surface (such as weather vanes, irri-
stipulates a special installation procedure
gation systems, conductors) must be
for an air-termination system for a struc-
secured, e. g. on non-conductive supports
ture with thatched roof.
so that a large enough separation dis-
The air-termination conductors on such
tance s is maintained, in accordance with
roofs (made of thatch, straw or rushes)
5.3 Clause 1. Irrigation system feeds in
must be fastened across isolating sup-
the vicinity of the duct through the skin
ports to be free to move. Certain dis-
Fig. 5.1.4.5 Model construction of a trapezoidal of the roof, which are at least 0.6 m
tances must also be maintained around
sheet roof, conductor holder with clam- above and below it, may only be made of
the eaves.
ping frame plastic (Figs. 5.1.5.1 to 5.1.5.3).
When a lightning protection system is
The previously described system for pro-
installed on a roof at a later date, the dis-
tection against lightning is not effective
tances must be increased. This allows
for thatched roofs covered with a metal
maintain the necessary minimum dis-
wire mesh. The metal wire meshwork
tances when re-roofing is carried out.
must be removed or substituted with a
UV-resistant plastic mesh. Similarly, effec-
For a lightning protection system Type III,
tive protection against lightning is not
the typical distance of the down-con-
possible if metal covers, irrigation sys-
ductor system is 15 m.
tems, vent pipes, chimney skirtings,
The exact distance of the down-conduct-
dormer windows, skylights and the like
or systems from each other resuslts from
are present. In such cases, effective pro-
calculating the separation distance s in
Fig. 5.1.4.6 Model construction of a roof with stan-
ding seam
accordance with DIN V VDE V 0185-3
Clause 1, Subclause 5.3.
tection against lightning can only be
achieved with an isolated external light-
ning protection system with air-termina-
5
tion rods near the structure, or with air-
Chapter 5.6 explains how to calculate the
roof edge, which is capable of carrying termination nets between masts adja-
separation distance.
currents. cent to the structure.
Unprotected installations projecting
above the roof, e. g. domelights and
chimney covers, are exposed points of
strike for a lightning discharge. In order Signs and symbols
Air-termination conductor
to prevent these installations from being Connecting point
struck by a direct lightning stroke, air-ter- Isolating point /
mination rods must be installed adjacent Measuring point
Earth conductor
to the installations projecting above the
Down conductor
roof. The height of the air-termination
rod results from the protective angle α. Important distances (min. values)
a 0.6 m Air-term. conductor / Gable
b 0.4 m Air-term. conductor / Roofing
c 0.15 m Eaves / Eaves support
d 2.0 m Air-termination conductor /
Branches of trees

Fig. 5.1.4.7 Air-termination rod for a domelight on a Fig. 5.1.5.1 Air-termination system for buildings with thatched roofs
roof with round standing seam

www.dehn.de LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE 49

 1 If a thatched roof borders onto metal
2 6
Pos Description
1 Clamping cap with
air-termination rod
2 Wood pile
3 Support for roof conductors
4 Eaves support
5 Tensioning block
6 Air-term. conductor, e.g. Al cable
1 2
3 4
5 solution is to install the air-termination
5 6
Fig. 5.1.5.2 Components for thatched roofs
Fig. 5.1.5.3 Thatched roof
50 LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE
tection system (see Chapter 5.1.1, Table
roofing material, and if the structure has 5.1.1.3).
to be equipped with an external light-
ning protection system, then an electri- If it can be guaranteed that no persons
cally non-conductive roofing material at will be on this area during a thunder-
3
least 1 m wide, e. g. in plastic, must be storm, then it is sufficient to install the
inserted between the thatched roof and measures described above.
the other roof. Persons who can go onto this storey of
Tree branches must be kept at least 2 m the car park must be informed by means
away from a thatched roof. If trees are of a sign that they must immediately
very close to, and higher than, a struc- clear this storey when a thunderstorm
ture, then an air-termination conductor occurs, and not return for the duration of
4
must be mounted on the edge of the the storm (Fig. 5.1.6.1).
roof facing the trees (edge of the eaves,
5
gable) and connected to the lightning If it is also possible that persons are on
DIN Part No. protection system. The necessary dis- the roof during a thunderstorm, then the
48811 A 145 309 tances must be maintained. air-termination system must be designed
A further way of protecting structures to protect these persons, assuming they
48812 145 241 with thatched roofs against a stroke of have a height of 2.5 m (with outstretched
− 240 000 lightning is to erect air-termination masts arm) from direct lightning strokes.
48827 239 000
so that the whole structure is in the pro-
48827 B 241 002
tected volume. The air-termination system can be
− 840 050
This method can be found in Chapter dimensioned using the rolling sphere or
5.1.8 Isolated air-termination system the protective angle method according
(steel telescopic lightning protection to the type of lightning protection sys-
masts). tem (Fig. 5.1.6.2).
5.1.6 Walkable and trafficable These air-termination systems can also be
roofs constructed from spanned cables or air-
termination rods. These air-termination
It is not possible to mount air-termina-
rods are secured to structural elements
tion conductors (e. g. with concrete
such as parapets or the like, for example .
blocks) on drive-over roofs. One possible
conductors in either concrete or the
Furthermore, lighting masts, for exam-
ple, can also act as air-termination rods
to prevent life hazards. With this version,
joints between the sections of the road-
however, attention must be paid to the
way. If the air-termination conductor is
partial lightning currents which can be
installed in these joints, mushroom-type
conducted into the structure via the
collectors are installed at the intersec-
power lines. It is imperative to have light-
tions of the mesh as defined points of
ning equipotential bonding measures for
strike.
these lines.
The mesh size must not exceed the value
according to the type of lightning pro-
Mushroom-type
collector after
asphalting
Mushroom-type collector
Part No. 108 001
conductors installed within
concrete or the joints of the
roadway (plates)
Warning!
Keep off the car park
down conducting via during thunderstorms
steel reinforcement
Fig. 5.1.6.1 Lightning protection for car park roofs - Building protection
www.dehn.de
 additional air-
termination cable

h
height of the air-termination rod
dimensioned according to the
required protective angle

h = 2.5 m + s

Fig. 5.1.6.2 Lightning protection for car park roofs - Building and life protection

5.1.7 Air-termination system for tion system chosen (see Chapter 5.1.1,
planted and flat roofs Table 5.1.1.3). An air-termination con-
ductor installed inside the covering layer
A planted roof can make economic and
is difficult to inspect after a number of
ecological sense. This is because it pro-
years because the air-termination tips or
vides noise insulation, protects the roof
mushroom-type collectors are over-
skin, suppresses dust from the ambient
grown and no longer recognisable, and
air, provides additional heat insulation,
frequently damaged by maintenance
filters and retains rainwater and is a nat-
ural way of improving the living and
working conditions. Moreover, in many
regions it is possible to obtain grants
work. Moreover, air-termination conduc-
tors installed inside the covering layer are
more susceptible to corrosion. Conduc-
Fig. 5.1.7.1 Planted roof
5
tors of air-termination meshes installed
from public funds for cultivating plants
uniformly on top of the covering layer
on the roof. A distinction is made
are easier to inspect even if they become
between so-called extensive and inten-
overgrown, and the height of the inter-
sive cultivation. An extensive planted
ception system can be lifted up by means
area requires little care, in contrast to an
of air-termination tips and rods and
intensive planted area which requires
“grown“ with the plants on the roof. Air-
fertiliser, irrigation and cutting. For both
termination systems can be designed in
types of planted area, either earth sub-
different ways. The usual way is to install
strate or granulate must be laid on the
a meshed air-termination net with a
roof.
mesh size of 5 x 5 m (lightning protection
system Type I) up to a max. mesh size of
It is even more expensive if the granulate
15 x 15 m (lightning protection system
or substrate has to be removed because
Type III) on the roof surface, regardless of
of a direct lightning stroke.
the height of the structure. It is prefer- Fig. 5.1.7.2 Air-termination system on a planted roof
able to determine the installation site of
If there is no external lightning protec-
the mesh considering the external edges
tion system, the roof seal can be dam-
of the roof and any metal structures act-
aged at the point of strike.
ing as an air-termination system.
Stainless steel (Material No. 1.4571) has
Experience has shown that, regardless of
proven to be a good material for the con-
the type of care required, the air-termi-
ductors of air-termination systems on
nation system of an external lightning
planted roofs.
protection system can, and should, also
Aluminium wire must not be used for
be installed on the surface of a planted
installing conductors in the covering
roof.
layer (in the earth substrate or granu-
late), (Figs. 5.1.7.1 to 5.1.7.3).
For a meshed air-termination system, the
DIN V VDE V 0185-3 lightning protection
standard prescribes a mesh size which
depends on the type of lightning protec- Fig. 5.1.7.3 Conductor leading on the covering layer

www.dehn.de LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE 51

 5.1.8 Isolated air-termination sys- affect or even destroy electrical or elec- If an air-termination rod is higher than
tems tronic installations inside the structure. 2.5 m to 3.0 m, the air-termination rods
The only way of preventing these must be secured to the property to be
Roof-mounted structures such as air con-
coupled currents is to use isolated air-ter- protected with distance holders made of
ditioning and cooling systems, e. g. for
mination systems which maintain the electrically insulating material (e. g.
mainframes, are nowadays used on the
separation distance, previously also DEHNiso distance holder) (Fig. 5.1.8.3).
roofs of larger office blocks and indus-
known as safety distance.
trial structures. Antennas, electrically
Fig. 5.1.8.1 shows a partial lightning
controlled domelights, advertising signs
current penetrating the inside of the
with integrated lighting and all other
structure.
protruding roof-mounted structures hav-
These widely different roof-mounted
ing a conductive connection, e. g. via
structures can be protected by various
electrical cables or ducts, into the struc-
designs of isolated air-termination sys-
ture, must be treated in a similar way.
tems.
According to the State of the Art for
lightning protection, such roof-mounted
Air-termination rods
structures are protected against direct
For smaller roof-mounted structures (e. g
lightning strokes by means of separately
small fans) the protection can be
mounted air-termination systems. This
achieved by using individual, or a combi-
prevents partial lightning currents from
nation of several, air-termination rods.
entering the structure, where they would
Air-termination rods up to a height of
affect or even destroy the sensitive elec-
2.0 m can be fixed with one or two con-
trical/electronic installations.
crete bases piled on top of each other
In the past, these roof-mounted struc-
(e. g. Part No. 102 010) to be isolated
tures were connected directly.
(Fig. 5.1.8.2). Fig. 5.1.8.3 Air-termination rod with distance holder
This direct connection meant that parts
of the lightning current were conducted
Angled supports are a practical solution
into the structure. Later, “indirect con-
when air-termination rods also have to
nection“ via a spark gaps was intro-
be secured against the effects of side
duced. This meant that direct lightning
winds (Figs. 5.1.8.4 and 5.1.8.5).
strokes to the roof-mounted structure
could also flow away via the “internal
conductors“ to some extent, and in the
5 event of a more distant lightning stroke
to the structure, the spark gap should
not operate. The operating voltage of
approx. 4 kV was almost always attained
and hence a partial lightning current was
also carried into the structure via the
electrical cable, for example . This can Fig. 5.1.8.2 Isolated air-termination system, protec-
tion provided by an air-termination rod
Fig. 5.1.8.4 Angled support for air-termination rods

connection via
direct connection isolating spark gap
Roof

1st Floor

Fig. 5.1.8.5 Supporting element for the

air-termination rod
Ground floor
data lines
If higher air-termination rods are
required, e. g. for larger roof-mounted
structures, which nothing can be secured
to, the air-termination rods can be
Basement installed by using special supports.
EB Self-supporting air-termination rods up
to a height of 8.5 m can be installed by
using a tripod. These supports are
secured to the floor with standard con-
crete bases (one on top of another).
Fig. 5.1.8.1 Connection of roof mounted structures

52 LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE www.dehn.de

Additional guy lines are required above a
free height of 6 m in order withstand the
stresses caused by the wind.
These self-supporting air-termination
rods can be used for a wide variety of
applications (e. g. antennas, PV installa-
tions). The special feature of this type of
air-termination system is its short installa-
tion time as no holes need to be drilled
and only few elements need to be
screwed together (Figs. 5.1.8.6 to 5.1.8.7).
Fig. 5.1.8.6 Isolated air-termination system for pho-
tovoltaic system
Fig. 5.1.8.7 Isolated air-termination system for terre-
strial antenna
For protecting complete structures or
installations (e. g. PV installations,
ammunition depots) with air-termina-
tion rods, lightning protection masts are
used. These masts are installed in natural
soil or in a concrete foundation. Free
heights of 19 m above ground level can
be achieved, even higher, if custom-
made ones are used. It is also possible to
span a cable between these masts if they
are especially designed for this purpose.
The standard lengths of the steel tele-
scopic lightning protection masts are
supplied in sections of 2 m, offering enor-
mous advantages for transportation.
Further information (e. g. installation,
assembly) about these steel telescopic
lightning protection masts can be found
in installation instructions No. 1489 (Figs.
5.1.8.8 and 5.1.8.9).
www.dehn.de
Fig. 5.1.8.8 Additional corrosion protection in the
transition area by anticorrosive band for Fig. 5.1.8.10 Installed air-termination system,
underground application Ref.: Wettingfeld Lightning Protection,
Krefeld, Germany
tective angle, mesh) is provided by the
DEHNiso-Combi programme of products.
The aluminium insulating pipes with “iso-
lating distance“ (GRP – glass-fibre-rein-
forced plastic), which are fixed to the
object to be protected, provide an indirect
way of guiding the cables. The cables are
subsequently guided separately to the
down-conductor systems or supplemen-
tary air-termination systems (e. g. mesh)
by means of GRP distance holders.
Fig. 5.1.8.9 Installation of a steel telescopic light-
ning protection mast
Spanned over by cables or conductors
According to DIN V VDE V 0185-3, air-ter-
Further information about the applica-
tion is contained in the publications
DS 123E “DEHNiso-Combi System for isol-
5
mination conductors can be installed ated Air-termination Systems“, DS 111
above the structure to be protected. “DEHNiso Distance Holder: The Modular
The air-termination conductors generate Lightning Protection System“ and in the
a tent-shaped zone of protection at the set of installation instructions No. 1475.
sides, and a cone-shaped one at the ends. The types of design described can be
The protective angle α depends on the combined with each other as desired to
type of lightning protection system and adapt the isolated air-termination sys-
the height of the air-termination system tems to the local conditions (Fig. 5.1.8.11
above the reference plane. to 5.1.8.14).
The rolling sphere method with its
corresponding radius (according to the
type of lightning protection system) can
also be used to dimension the conductors
or cables.
The “mesh“ type of air-termination sys-
tem can also be used if an appropriate
separation distance s between the com-
ponents of the installation and the air-
termination system must be maintained.
In such cases, isolating distance holders in
concrete bases are installed vertically, for
example, for guiding the “mesh“ on an
elevated level (Fig. 5.1.8.10).
DEHNiso-Combi
A user-friendly way of installing conduc-
tors or cables in accordance with the
three different design methods for air-
termination systems (rolling sphere, pro-
Fig. 5.1.8.11 Tripod support for self-supporting insula-
ting pipes
LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE 53
 5.1.9 Air-termination system for
steeples and churches
External lightning protection system
According to DIN V VDE V 0185-3, Sub-
clause 7.1 a, lightning protection systems
Type III meet the normal requirements
for churches and steeples. In particular
individual cases, for example in the case
of culturally significant structures, a spe-
cial risk analysis in accordance with DIN V
VDE V 0185-2 must be carried out.

Nave
According to DIN V VDE V 0185-3, Sub-
clause 7.5, the nave must have its own
lightning protection system and, if a
steeple is attached, this system must be
connected by the shortest route with a
down-conductor system of the steeple. In
the transept, the air-termination con-
ductor along the transverse ridge must
be equipped with a down-conductor sys-
tem at each end.

Fig. 5.1.8.12 Isolated air-termination systems with DEHNiso-Combi Steeple

Steeples up to a height of 20 m must be
equipped with a down-conductor sys-
tem. If steeple and nave are joined, then
this down-conductor system must be con-
nected to the external lightning protec-
tion system of the nave by the shortest
route (Fig. 5.1.9.1). If the down-conduct-
5 or system of the steeple coincides with a
down-conductor system of the nave,
then a common down-conductor system
can be used at this location. According to
DIN V VDE V 0185-3, Subclause 7.3,
steeples above 20 m in height must be
provided with at least two down
conductors. At least one of these down
conductors must be connected with the
external lightning protection system of
the nave via the shortest route.

Fig. 5.1.8.13 Detail picture of DEHNiso-Combi

Fig. 5.1.8.14 Isolated air-termination system with

DEHNiso-Combi

Fig. 5.1.9.1 Installing the down-conductor system at

a steeple

54 LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE www.dehn.de

Down-conductor systems on steeples
must always be guided to the ground on
the outside of the steeple. They must not
be installed inside the steeple (DIN V VDE
V 0185-3, Subclause 7.2). Further, the sep-
aration distance s to metal components
and electrical installations in the steeple
(e. g. clock mechanisms, belfry) and
under the roof (e. g. air conditioning,
ventilation and heating systems) must be
maintained by suitable arrangement of
the external lightning protection system.
The required separation distance can
become a problem especially at the clock.
In this case, the conductive connection
into the structure can be replaced with
an isolating connector (e. g. a GRP pipe)
to prevent hazardous sparking in parts of
the external lightning protection system.
In more modern churches built with rein-
forced concrete, the reinforcement steels
can be used as down-conductor systems
if it can be ensured that they provide a
continuous conductive connection. If
pre-cast reinforced concrete parts are
used, the reinforcement may be used as a
down-conductor system if terminals to
connect the reinforcement continuously
are provided on the pre-cast concrete
parts.
5.1.10 Air-termination systems for
wind turbines (WT)
Requirement for protection against
lightning
E DIN VDE 0127-24 describes measures to
protect wind turbines against lightning.
Lightning protection measures are car-
ried out in accordance with the DIN V
VDE V 0185 series of standards. In its VdS
2010 directive “Risk-orientated lightning
and surge protection“, the VdS recom-
mends that a lightning protection system
Type II to be installed for wind turbines.
This can control lightning strokes with
currents measuring up to 150,000 A. This
recommendation results from the assess-
ment of the risk of damage from a light-
ning stroke for structures, as described in
DIN V VDE V 0185-2.
Principle of an external lightning protec-
tion system for wind turbines
The external lightning protection system
comprises air-termination systems,
down-conductor systems and an earth
termination system and protects against
mechanical destruction and fire. Light-
ning strokes to wind turbines usually
affect the rotor blades. Hence, receptors,
for example, are integrated to determine
defined points of strike (Fig. 5.1.10.1).
www.dehn.de
receptor
wire meshwork
Fig. 5.1.10.1 WT with integrated receptors in the
rotor blades
In order to allow the coupled lightning
currents to flow to earth in a controlled
way, the receptors in the rotor blades are
connected to the hub with a metal inter-
connecting conductor (often flat line
St/tZn 30 x 3.5 mm). Carbon fibre brushes
or air spark gaps then, in turn, bridge the
ball-bearings in the head of the nacelle
in order to avoid the welding of the
revolving parts of the structure.
In order to protect structures on the
nacelle, such as anemometers in the
event of a lightning stroke, air-termina-
tion rods or “air-termination cages“ are
installed (Fig. 5.1.10.2).
Fig. 5.1.10.2 Lightning protection for wind speed
indicators at WT
The metal tower or, in case of a pre-
stressed concrete version, the down-con-
ductor systems embedded in the con-
crete (round conductor St/tZn Ø8...10 mm
or tape conductor St/tZn 30 x 3.5 mm) is
used as the down-conductor system. The
wind turbine is earthed by a foundation
earthing electrode in the base of the
tower and the meshed connection with
the foundation earthing electrode of the
operation building. This creates an
“equipotential surface“ which prevents
potential differences in the event of a
lightning stroke.
5.1.11 Wind load stresses on light-
ning protection air-termina-
tion rods
Roofs are being used more and more as
areas for technical installations.
Especially when extending the technical
equipment in the structure, extensive
installations are being sited more than
ever on the roofs of larger office blocks
and industrial structures. It is essential to
protect roof-mounted structures such as
air conditioning and cooling systems,
transmitters for cell sites on host build-
ings, lamps, flue gas vents and other
apparatus connected to the electrical low
voltage system (Fig. 5.1.11.1).
5
Fig. 5.1.11.1 Protection against direct lightning
strokes by self-supporting air-termina-
tion rods
In accordance with the relevant lightning
protection standards contained in the
DIN V VDE V 0185 series, these roof-
mounted structures can be protected
from direct lightning strokes with isol-
ated air-termination systems. This
requires an isolation of both the air-ter-
mination systems, such as air-termination
rods, air-termination tips or air-termina-
tion meshes, and the down-conductor
systems, i. e. to be installed with suffi-
cient separation distance from the roof-
mounted structures within the zone of
protection. The construction of an isol-
ated lightning protection system creates
a zone of protection in which direct light-
ning strokes cannot occur. It also pre-
vents partial lightning currents from
entering the low voltage system and
hence the structure. This is important as
the entering of partial lightning currents
LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE 55
 into the building can affect or destroy
sensitive electrical/electronic installa-
tions.
Extended roof-mounted structures are
also equipped with a system of isolated
air-termination systems. These are con-
nected with each other and also with the
earth-termination system. Among other
things the magnitude of the zone of pro-
tection created depends on the number
and the height of the air-termination sys-
tems installed.
A single air-termination rod is sufficient
to provide the protection required by
smaller roof-mounted structures. The
procedure involves the application of the
rolling sphere method in accordance
with DIN V VDE V 0185-3 (Fig. 5.1.11.2).
With the rolling sphere method, a rolling
sphere whose radius depends on the type
of lightning protection system chosen is
rolled in all possible directions on and
over the structure to be protected. Dur-
ing this procedure, the rolling sphere
must touch the ground and/or the air-
termination system only.
This method produces a protection vol-
ume where direct lightning strokes are
not possible.
To achieve the largest possible zone of
protection, and also to be able to protect
larger roof-mounted structures against
5 direct lightning strokes, the individual
air-termination rods should ideally be
erected with a corresponding height.
This requires to prevent self-supporting
Max. height of the building
Type Radius of the Mesh size M
of LPS rolling sphere R
I 20 m 5x5m
II 30 m 10 x 10 m
III 45 m 15 x 15 m
IV 60 m 20 x 20 m
mesh size M
air-termination
air-termination rod conductor
protective angle
h2
α2
h1
Fig. 5.1.11.2 Procedure for installation of air-termination systems according to DIN V VDE V 0185-3
56 LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE
air-termination rods from tilting and
breaking by a suitably designed base and
supplementary guys (Fig. 5.1.11.3).
The requirement for the self-supporting
air-termination rods to be built as high as
possible must be balanced against the
higher stress exerted by the active wind
loads. A 40% increase in wind speed, for
example, doubles the active tilting air-termination rod
moment. At the same time, from the with air-termination tip
application point of view, users demand
a lightweight system of “self-supporting
air-termination rods“, which are easier to
transport and install. To ensure that it is
safe to use air-termination rods on roofs,
their mechanical stability must be
bracing
proven.
Stress caused by wind loads
Since self-supporting air-termination
rods are installed at exposed sites (e. g. variable
on roofs), mechanical stresses arise tripod
which, owing to the comparable location
and the upcoming wind speeds, corre-
spond to the stresses suffered by antenna
frames. Self-supporting air-termination
rods must therefore basically meet the
same requirements concerning their Fig. 5.1.11.3 Self-supporting air-termination rod
mechanical stability as set out in DIN with variable tripod
4131 for antenna frames.
DIN 4131 divides Germany up into 4 wind structure and the local conditions (struc-
zones with zone-dependent wind speeds ture standing alone in open terrain or
(Fig. 5.1.11.4).
When calculating the prospective actual
wind load stresses, apart from the zone-
embedded in other buildings) must also
be included. From Fig. 5.1.11.4 it can be
seen that around 95% of Germany’s sur-
dependent wind load, the height of the face area lies within Wind Zones I and II.
Air-termination rods are therefore gen-
erally designed for Wind Zone II. The use
of self-supporting air-termination rods in
Wind Zone III and Wind Zone IV must be
assessed for each individual case taking
the arising stresses into account.
According to DIN 4131 a constant dynam-
ic pressure over the height of a structure
can be expected for structures up to a
height of 50 m. For the calculations, the
maximum height of the structure was
considered 40 m, so that a total height
rolling sphere
(height of the structure plus length of
R the air-termination rods) is kept below
the 50 m mark.
When designing self-supporting air-
termination rods, the following require-
ments must be met for the wind load
stress:
down conductor
⇒ Tilt resistance of the air-termination
earth-termination system rods
⇒ Fracture resistance of the rods
⇒ Maintaining the required separation
distance to the object to be protect-
ed even under wind loads (preven-
tion of intolerable deflections)
www.dehn.de
 and the lever arm of the air-termina-
zone IV tion rod.
⇒ Load torque formed from the
Kiel Rostock weight of the post, the weight of the
air-termination rod and the guy
Schwerin
Hamburg lines, and the length of the tilt lever
zone III zone II through the tripod.
Bremen

Berlin Stability is achieved when the ratio of

Hannover Potsdam
load torque to the tilting moment
Magedburg
assumes a value >1. Basically: the greater
the ratio of load torque to tilting
Essen Halle
Dortmund moment, the greater the stability.
Düsseldorf
Leipzig
Dresden The required stability can be achieved in
Köln
Erfurt Chemnitz the following ways:
Bonn
Zone Dynamic pressure Wind velocity Wind ⇒ In order to keep the wind contact
zone I q [kN/m2] v [km/h] strength surface of the air-termination rod
Frankfurt
Wiesbaden
I 0.8 126.7 small, the cross sections used have to
Würzburg
II 1.05 145.1 be as small as possible. The load on
Nürnberg 12 - 17 the air-termination rod is reduced,
Saarbrücken Mannheim III 1.4 161.5
but, at the same time, the mechani-
IV 1.7 184.7
Stuttgart Regensburg cal strength of the air-termination
Augsburg
rod decreases (risk of breaking). It is
München
therefore crucial to make a compro-
Freiburg
mise between a smallest possible
cross section to reduce the wind load
and a largest possible cross section to
achieve the required strength.
Fig. 5.1.11.4 Division of Germany into wind load zones and corresponding values of dynamic pressure and ⇒ The stability can be increased by
max. wind velocity using larger base weights and/or
Ref.: DIN 4131: 1991-11. Steel radio towers and masts, Berlin: Beuth-Verlag GmbH larger post radii. This often conflicts

Determination of the tilt resistance

The dynamic pressure arising (depends
around the circumference. The wind
contact surface of these cables corre-
with the limited areas for erection
and the general requirement for low
weight and easy transport.
5
on the wind speed), the resistance coeffi- sponds to the area projected by
cient cw and the contact surface of the these cables onto a plane in a right Implementation
wind on the air-termination rod, gener- angle to the direction of the wind, In order to provide the smallest possible
ate a uniform load q‘ on the surface i. e. the cable lengths are shortened wind contact surface, the cross sections
which generates a corresponding tilting accordingly when considered in the of the air-termination rods were opti-
moment MT on the self-supporting air- calculation. mised in accordance with the results of
termination rod. To ensure that the self- ⇒ Weight of the air-termination rod the calculation. For ease of transporta-
supporting air-termination rod is stable, and the guy lines: the dead weight tion and installation, the air-termination
the tilting moment MT must be opposed of the air-termination rod and the rod comprises an aluminium tube (in sec-
by a load torque MO, which is generated guy lines is taken into account in the tions, if so desired) and an aluminium air-
by the post. The magnitude of the load calculation of the load torque. termination rod. The post to hold the air-
torque MO depends on the standing termination rod is available in two ver-
⇒ Weight of the post: the post is a tri-
weight and the radius of the post. If the sions. One fixed version for lower rod
pod weighted down with concrete
tilting moment is greater than the load heights and an adjustable post version
blocks. The weight of this post is
torque, the wind load pushes the air-ter- for higher rod heights. With this version,
made up of the dead weight of the
mination rod over. the radius of the post is adjusted to the
tripod and the individual weights of
The proof of the stability of self-support- height of the air-termination rod to min-
the concrete blocks used.
ing air-termination rods is also obtained imise the space required.
from static calculations. Besides the ⇒ Tilting lever of the post: the tilting
mechanical characteristics of the mater- lever denotes the shortest distance Determination of the fracture resistance
ials used, the following information is between the centre of the tripod Not only the stability of the air-termina-
included in the calculation: and the line or point around which tion rod must be proven, but also the
the whole system would tilt.
⇒ Wind contact surface of the air-ter- fracture resistance, since the occuring
mination rod: determined by length wind load exerts bending stresses on the
The proof of stability is obtained by com- self-supporting air-termination rod. The
and diameter of the individual sec-
paring the following moments: bending stress in such cases must not
tions of the air-termination rod.
⇒ Tilting moment formed from the exceed the max. permissible stress. The
⇒ Wind contact surface of the guy:
wind-load-dependent force on the bending stress occuring is higher for
very high self-supporting air-termi-
air-termination rod or the guy lines longer air-termination rods. The air-ter-
nation rods are anchored with 3
mination rods must be designed to
cables mounted equidistantly

www.dehn.de LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE 57

 ensure that wind loads as can arise in Implementation In addition to the bending moments, the
Wind Zone II cannot cause permanent Guy cables create an additional “bearing FEM calculation also provides the tensile
deformation of the rods. point“ which significantly reduces the forces occuring in the guy cables, whose
Since both the exact geometry of the air- bending stresses occuring in the air-ter- strength must also be proven.
termination rod and the non-linear per- mination rod. Without supplementary
formance of the materials used must be guys, the air-termination rods would not Determination of the wind-load-
taken into account, the proof of the frac- cope with the stresses of Wind Zone II. dependent deflection of the air-termina-
ture resistance of self-supporting air-ter- Therefore, air-termination rods higher tion rod
mination rods is obtained using an FEM than 6 m are equipped with guy cables. A further important value calculated
calculation model. The finite elements with the FEM model is the deflection of
method, FEM for short, is a numerical Bending the tip of the air-termination rod. Wind
method for calculation of stresses and moment loads cause the air-termination rods to
deformations of complex geometrical [Nm] bend. The bending of the rod results in a
structures. The structure under examina- 1200 change to the zone of protection.
tion is broken down into so-called “finite Objects to be protected are no longer
air-termination rod
elements“ using imaginary surfaces and without guy cables situated in the zone of protection and/or
lines which are interconnected via nodes. (length = 8.5 m) proximities can no longer be maintained.
The calculation requires the following 1000 The application of the calculation model
information: on a self-supporting air-termination rod
⇒ FEM calculation model: without and with guys produces the fol-
800 lowing results (Figs. 5.1.11.6 and
The FEM calculation model corres-
5.1.11.7).
ponds to the simplified geometry of
the self-supporting air-termination
rod. 600
⇒ Material characteristics:
The performance of the material is
represented by the details of cross- 400
sectional values, modulus of elastici-
ty, density and lateral contraction.
⇒ Loads: 200
The wind load is applied to the geo-
5 metric model as a pressure load.
0
0 2 4 6 8
The fracture resistance is determined by Height of air-termination rod [m]
comparing the permissible bending stress
(material parameter) and the max. bend-
Bending
ing stress which can occur (calculated moment
from the bending moment and the effec- [Nm]
tive cross section at the point of maxi-
mum stress).
air-termination rod Fig. 5.1.11.6 FEM model of a self-supporting air-ter-
Fracture resistance is achieved if the ratio mination rod without guy cables
200 with guy cables
of permissible to actual bending stress is (length = 8.5 m) (length = 8.5 m)
> 1. Basically, the same principle also
applies here: the greater the ratio of per- 150
missible to actual bending stress, the
greater the fracture resistance.
Using the FEM calculation model, the 100
actual bending moments for two air-ter-
mination rods (length = 8.5 m) were cal- 50
culated as a function of their height with
and without guys (Fig. 5.1.11.5). This
clearly illustrates the effect of a possible 0
guy on the course of the moments.
Whereas the max. bending moment of
-50
the air-termination rod without a guy in
the fixed-end point is around 1270 Nm,
the guy reduces the bending moment to -100
around 270 Nm. This guy cable makes it
possible to reduce the stresses in the air-
termination rod to such an extent that, -150
0 2 4 6 8
for the max. expected wind loads, the Height of air-termination rod [m]
strength of the materials used is not
exceeded and the air-termination rod is Fig. 5.1.11.5 Comparison of bending moment cour- Fig. 5.1.11.7 FEM model of a self-supporting air-ter-
not destroyed. ses at self-supporting air-termination mination rod with guy cables
rods with and without guy cables (length = 8.5 m)
(length = 8.5 m)

58 LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE www.dehn.de

For the example chosen, the calculation
gives a displacement of the tip of the air-
termination rod with guy of around
390 mm. Without guy there would be a
deflection of around 3740 mm, a theoret-
ical value which exceeds the breaking
point of the air-termination rod under
consideration.
Implementation
Above a certain rod height, supplemen-
tary guys reduce this deflection signifi-
cantly. Furthermore, this also reduces the
bending load on the rod.
Conclusion
Tilting resistance, fracture resistance and
deflection are the decisive factors when
designing air-termination rods. Base and
air-termination rod must be coordinated
to ensure that the loads occuring as a
result of the wind speeds of Zone II do
not cause a tilting of the rod, nor dam-
age it.
It must still be borne in mind that large
deflections of the air-termination rod
reduce the separation distance and thus
intolerable proximities can arise. Higher
air-termination rods require a supple-
mentary guy to prevent such intolerable
deflections of the tips of the air-termina-
tion rods.
The measures described ensure that self-
supporting air-termination rods can cope
with Zone II wind speeds according to
DIN 4131.
5.2 Down-conductor system
The down-conductor system is the elec-
trically conductive connection between
the air-termination system and the earth-
termination system. The function of
down-conductor systems is to conduct
the intercepted lightning current to the
earth-termination system without intol-
erable temperature rises, for example, to
damage the structure.
To avoid damage caused during the
lightning current discharge to the earth-
termination system, the down-conductor
systems must be mounted to ensure that
from the point of strike to the earth,
⇒ Several parallel current paths exist,
⇒ The length of the current paths is
kept as short as possible (straight,
vertical, no loops),
⇒ The connections to conductive com-
ponents of the structure are made
wherever required (interval < s;
s = separation distance).
www.dehn.de
5.2.1 Determination of the number
of down conductors
The number of down conductors
depends on the perimeter of the external
edges of the roof (perimeter of the pro-
jection on the ground surface).
The down conductors must be arranged
to ensure that, starting at the corners of
the structure, they are distributed as uni-
formly as possible to the perimeter.
Depending on the structural features
(e. g. gates, precast components), the dis-
tances between the various down con-
ductors can be different. These possibly
different distances, e. g. from 12 m to
18 m for a lightning protection system
Type III (typically 15 m) must also be tak-
en into account when calculating the
separation distance. In each case, there
must be at least the total number of
down conductor required for the respec-
tive type of lightning protection system.
The DIN V VDE V 0185-3 standard gives
typical distances between down conduc-
tors and ring conductors for each type of
lightning protection system (Table
5.2.1.1).
Type of LPS Typical distance
I 10 m
II
III
10 m
15 m
IV 20 m
Table 5.2.1.1 Distance between down conductors
according to DIN V VDE V 0185-3
The exact number of down conductors
can only be determined by calculating
the separation distance s. If the calculat-
ed separation distance cannot be main-
tained for the intended number of down
conductors of a structure, then one way
of meeting this requirement is to
increase the number of down conduc-
tors. The parallel current paths improve
the current splitting coefficient kc. This
measure reduces the current in both
down conductors, and the required sepa-
ration distance can be maintained.
Natural components of the structure
(e. g. reinforced concrete supports, steel
skeleton) can also be used as supplemen-
tary down conductors if continuous elec-
trical conductivity can be ensured.
By interconnecting the down conductors
at ground level (base conductor) and
using ring conductors for higher struc-
tures, it is possible to symmetrise the dis-
tribution of the lightning current which,
in turn, reduces the separation distance s.
The latest DIN V VDE V 0185 series of
standards attaches great significance to
the separation distance. The measures
specified can change the separation dis-
tance positively for structures and thus
the lightning current can be safely dis-
charged.
If these measures are not sufficient to
maintain the required separation dis-
tance, it is also possible to use a new type
of high voltage-resistant insulated con-
ductors (HVI). These are described in
Chapter 5.2.4.
Chapter 5.6 describes how the exact sep-
aration distance can be determined.
5.2.2 Down-conductor system for a
non-isolated lightning protec-
tion system
The down-conductor systems are primari-
ly mounted directly onto the structure
(with no distance). The criterion for
installing them directly on the structure is
the temperature rise in the event of
lightning striking the lightning protec-
tion system.
If the wall is made of flame-resistant
material or material with a normal level
of flammability, the down-conductor sys-
tems may be installed directly on or in
the wall.
Owing to the specifications in the build-
ing regulations of the German federal
states, highly flammable materials are
generally not used. This means that the
5
down-conductor systems can usually be
mounted directly on the structure.
Wood with a bulk density greater than
400 kg/m2 and a thickness greater than
2 mm is considered to have a normal level
of flammability. Hence the down-con-
ductor system can be mounted on wood-
en poles, for example .
If the wall is made of highly flammable
material, the down conductors can be
installed directly on the surface of the
wall, provided that the temperature rise
when lightning currents flow is not haz-
ardous.
The maximum temperature rises ∆ T in K
of the various conductors for each type
of lightning protection system are stated
in Table 5.2.2.1. These values mean that,
generally, it is even permissible to install
down conductors underneath heat insu-
lation because these temperature rises
present no fire risk to the insulation
materials.
This ensures that the fire retardation
measure is also provided.
When installing the down-conductor sys-
tem in or underneath heat insulation,
the temperature rise (on the surface) is
reduced if an additional PVC sheath is
used. Aluminium wire sheathed in PVC
can also be used.
LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE 59
 Aluminium Iron Copper Stainless steel
q
mm2 Type of lightning protection system
III+IV II I III+IV II I III+IV II I III+IV II I
16 146 454 * 1120 * * 56 143 309 * * *
50
12 28 52 37 96 211 5 12 22 96 460 940
(Ø8 mm)

78
4 9 17 15 34 66 3 5 9 78 174 310
(Ø10mm)

* melting / vaporising Fig. 5.2.2.1.3 Air-termination system with connec-

tion to the gutter
Table 5.2.2.1 Max. temperature rise ∆ T in K of different conductor materials

If the wall is made of highly flammable
material, and the temperature rise of the
down-conductor systems presents a haz-
ard, then the down conductors must be
mounted to ensure that the distance
between the down-conductor systems
and the wall is greater than 0.1 m. The
mounting elements may touch the wall.
The erector of the structure must state
whether the wall, where a down-con-
ductor system is to be installed, is made
of flammable material.
The precise definition of the terms flame-
resistant, normal level of flammability
and highly flammable can be taken from
The separation distance s is calculated
using the total length l = l1 + l2 + l3.
Down-conductor systems must not be
installed in gutters and downpipes, even
if they are sheathed in an insulating
material. The damp in the gutters would
badly corrode the down-conductor sys-
tems.
If aluminium is used as a down conduct-
or, it must not be installed directly (with
no distance) on, in or under plaster, mor-
tar, concrete, neither should it be
installed in the ground. If it is equipped
with a PVC sheath, then aluminium can
be installed in mortar, plaster or con-
The base of metal downpipes must be
connected to the equipotential bonding
or the earth-termination system, even if
the pipe is not used as a down conductor.
Since it is connected to the eaves gutter,
through which the lightning current
flows, the downpipe also takes a part of
the lightning current which must be con-
ducted into the earth-termination sys-
tem. Fig. 5.2.2.1.4 illustrates one possible
design.

5
Annex E of DIN V VDE V 0185-3. crete, if it is possible to ensure that the StSt wire
sheath will not be mechanically dam- Ø10 mm
aged, nor will the insulation fracture at
5.2.2.1 Installation of low temperatures.
down-conductor systems It is recommended to mount down con-
ductors to maintain the required separa-
The down conductors must be arranged
tion distance s to all doors and windows
to be the direct continuation of the air- Fig. 5.2.2.1.4 Earthed downpipe
(Fig. 5.2.2.1.2).
termination conductors. They must be
Metal gutters must be connected with
installed straight and vertically so as to
the down conductors at the points where
represent the shortest possible direct
they intersect (Fig. 5.2.2.1.3).
connection to the earth.
Loops, e. g. overprojecting eaves or struc-
tures, must be avoided. If this is not pos-
sible, the distance measured where two
points of a down-conductor system are
closest, and the length l of the down-con-
ductor system between these points,
must fulfil the requirements on separa-
tion distance s (Fig. 5.2.2.1.1).

l1

the connection downpipes may

s

l2

must be as only be used as

short as pos- down conductor, if
sible, straight they are soldered or
l3 and installed riveted
vertically

Fig. 5.2.2.1.1 Loop in the down conductor

Fig. 5.2.2.1.2 Down-conductor system

60 LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE www.dehn.de

5.2.2.2 Natural components of a
down-conductor system
When using natural components of the
structure as a down-conductor system,
the number of down conductors to be
installed separately can be reduced or, in
some cases, they can be dispensed with
altogether.
The following parts of a structure can be
used as “natural components“ of the
down-conductor system:
⇒ Metal installations, provided that
the safe connection between the
various parts is permanent and their
dimensions conform to the minimum
requirements for down conductors.
These metal installations may also be
sheathed in insulating material. The
use of conduits containing flamma-
ble or explosive materials as down
conductors is not permitted if the
seals in the flanges/couplings are
non-metallic or the flanges /cou-
plings of the connected pipes are not
otherwise connected so as to be elec-
trically conductive.
⇒ The metal skeleton of the structure
If the metal frame of structures with
a steel skeleton or the interconnect-
ed reinforced steel of the structure is
used as a down-conductor system,
then ring conductors are not
required since additional ring con-
ductors would not improve the split-
ting of the current.
⇒ Safe interconnected reinforcement
of the structure
The reinforcement of existing struc-
tures cannot be used as a natural
component of the down-conductor
system unless it can be ensured that
the reinforcement is safely intercon-
nected. Separate external down con-
ductors must be installed.
⇒ Precast parts
Precast parts must be designed to
provide terminal connections for the
reinforcement. Precast parts must
have an electrically conductive con-
nection between all terminal con-
nections. The individual components
must be interconnected on site dur-
ing installation (Fig. 5.2.2.2.1).
www.dehn.de
that they are continuously conduc-
tive from the connection on the air-
termination system to the connec-
expansion joint tion on the earth-termination sys-
tem, then they can be used as a
down-conductor system (Figs.
5.2.2.2.2 and 5.2.2.2.3).
vertical box section
expansion joint
wall fixing
Fixed earthing terminal Bridging braid
Part No. 478 200 Part No. 377 115
Fig. 5.2.2.2.1 Use of natural components - new buil-
dings made of ready-mix concrete
Note:
In the case of prestressed concrete, atten-
tion must be paid to the particular risk of
possible intolerable mechanical effects
arising from lightning current and result-
ing from the connection to the lightning
horizontal support
protection system.
For prestressed concrete, connections to
tensioning rods or cables must only be
effected outside the stressed area. The Bridging braid
permission of the person responsible for
erecting the structure must be given
before using tensioning rods or cables as
Part No. 377 015
Fig. 5.2.2.2.2 Metal subconstruction, conductively
5
a down conductor. bridged
If the reinforcement of existing struc-
tures is not safely interconnected, it can-
not be used as a down-conductor system.
In this case, external down conductors
must be installed.
Furthermore, façade elements, mount-
ing channels and the metal substructures
of façades can be used as a natural
down-conductor system, provided that
⇒ the dimensions meet the minimum
requirements of down-conductor
systems. For sheet metal, the thick-
ness must not be less than 0.5 mm.
Their electrical conductivity in verti-
cal direction must be ensured. If
metal façades are used as a down-
conductor system, they must be
interconnected to ensure that the
individual plates are safely intercon-
nected with each other by means of
screws, rivets, or bridging connec-
tions. There must be a safe connec-
tion capable of carrying currents to
the air-termination system and also
to the earth-termination system. Fig. 5.2.2.2.3 Earth connection of a metal façade
⇒ If plates are not interconnected in
accordance with the above require-
ment, but the substructure ensures
LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE 61
 Metal downpipes can be used as natural
down conductors, as long as they are
safely interconnected (brazed or riveted
joints) and comply with the minimum
wall thickness of the pipe of 0.5 mm.
If a downpipe is not safely interconnect-
ed, it can serve as a holder for the sup-
plementary down conductor. This type of
application is illustrated in Fig. 5.2.2.2.4.
The connection of the downpipe to the
earth-termination system must be capa-
ble of carrying lightning currents since
the conductor is held only along the
pipe.
5 Fig. 5.2.2.3.1 Isolating point with number plate
Fig. 5.2.2.2.4 Down conductor installed along a
downpipe
5.2.2.3 Measuring points
There must be a measuring point at every
connection of a down conductor with
the earth-termination system (above the
lead-in, if possible).
Measuring points are required to allow
the inspection of the following charac-
teristics of the lightning protection sys-
tem:
⇒ Connections of the down conductors
via the air-termination systems to
the next down conductor
⇒ Interconnections of the terminal lugs
via the earth-termination system,
e. g. in the case of ring or foundation
earthing electrodes (earthing elec-
trode Type B)
⇒ Earthing electrode resistance of sin-
gle earthing electrodes (earthing
electrode Type A)
Measuring points are not required if the
structural design (e. g. reinforced con-
crete structure or steel skeleton) allows
no “electrical“ disconnection of the “nat-
ural“ down-conductor system to the
62 LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE
earth-termination system (e. g. founda-
tion earthing electrode).
The measuring point may only be
opened with the help of a tool for the
purpose of taking measurements, other-
wise it must be closed.
Each measuring point must be able to be
clearly assigned to the design of the
lightning protection system. Generally,
all measuring points are marked with
numbers (Fig. 5.2.2.3.1).
5.2.2.4 Internal down-conductor
systems
If the edges of the structure (length and
width) are four times as large as the dis-
tance of the down conductor which cor-
responds to the type of lightning protec-
tion system, then supplementary internal
down conductors must be installed
(Fig. 5.2.2.4.1).
The grid dimension for the internal
down-conductor systems is around 40 x
40 m.
roofing
heat insulation
wood insulation
metal construction
If the separation distance is too short, the conductive parts of the building construction
have to be connected to the air-termination system. The effects from the currents
have to be taken into account.
Fig. 5.2.2.4.1 Air-termination system installed on large roofs - Internal down-conductor system
Large structures with flat roofs, such as
large production halls or also distribution
centres, frequently require internal
down-conductor systems. In such cases,
the ducts through the surface of the roof
should be installed by a roofer because
he is responsible for ensuring that the
roof provides protection against rain.
The consequences of the partial light-
ning currents through internal down-
conductor systems within the structure
must be taken into account. The result-
ing electromagnetic field in the vicinity
of the down conductors must be taken
into consideration when designing the
internal lightning protection system (pay
attention to inputs to electrical/elec-
tronic systems).
5.2.2.5 Courtyards
Structures with enclosed courtyards hav-
ing a perimeter greater than 30 m must
have down-conductor systems installed
with the distances shown in Table 5.2.1.1.
At least 2 down conductors must be
installed (Fig. 5.2.2.5.1).
metal attic
45 m
15 m
courtyard
7.5 m
circumference > 30 m
30 m
Courtyards with circumferences of more than 30 m
must be furnished with min. 2 down conductors.
Typical distances according to type of LPS.
Fig. 5.2.2.5.1 Down-conductor systems for
courtyards
roof bushing
separation
distance s
internal down
conductor
www.dehn.de
5.2.3 Down conductors of an isol-
ated external lightning pro-
tection system
If an air-termination system comprises
air-termination rods on isolated masts (or
one mast), then this is both air-termina-
tion system and down-conductor system
at the same time (Fig. 5.2.3.1).
s s
Fig. 5.2.3.1 Air-termination masts isolated from the
building
Each individual mast requires at least one
down conductor. Steel masts or masts
with an interconnected steel reinforce-
ment require no supplementary down-
conductor system.
For optical reasons, a metal flag pole, for
example can also be used as an air-termi-
nation system.
The separation distance s between the
air-termination and down-conductor sys-
tems and the structure must be main-
tained.
If the air-termination system consists of
one or more spanned wires or cables,
each end of the cable which the conduc-
tors are attached to requires at least one
down conductor (Fig. 5.2.3.2).
s
Fig. 5.2.3.2 Air-termination masts spanned with
cables
If the air-termination system forms an
intermeshed network of conductors, i. e.
the individual spanned wires or cables
are interconnected to form a mesh
(being cross-linked), there must be at
least one down conductor at the end of
each cable the conductors are attached
to (Fig. 5.2.3.3).
mechanical fixing
down
conductor
Fig. 5.2.3.3 Air-termination masts spanned with
cables with cross connection (meshing)
www.dehn.de
5.2.4 High-voltage resistant, isol-
ated down-conductor system
– HVI®conductor
A multitude of structures is used in order
to create an exhaustive network of cell
sites. Some of these structures have light-
ning protection systems. In order to
design and implement the mast infra-
structure in accordance with the stan-
dards, the actual situation must be taken
into account during the design phase
while the relevant standards have to be
strictly differentiated. Owing to the dif-
ferent protection objectives (protection
against lightning or earthing of the cell
site), it is not permissible to mix DIN V
VDE V 0185-3 and DIN VDE 0855 Part 300.
For the operator of a mobile phone net-
work there are basically three different
situations:
⇒ Structure has no lightning protection
system
⇒ Structure is equipped with a light-
ning protection system which is no
longer capable of functioning
⇒ Structure is equipped with a funtion-
ing lightning protection system
Structure has no lightning protection
system
The cell site is constructed in accordance
with DIN VDE 0855 Part 300. This deals
with the earthing of the cell site. In accor-
dance with the concept for protection
against surges of the mobile phone net-
work operators, supplementary protec-
tion against surges is integrated into the
meter section.
Structure is equipped with a lightning
protection system which is no longer
capable of functioning
The cell site must be connected to the
external lightning protection system
(LPS) as required by the type of lightning
protection system determined. The light-
ning current paths required for the cell
site are investigated and assessed. This
involves replacing non-functional com-
ponents of the existing installation which
are required to discharge the lightning
current, such as air-termination conduct-
or, down-conductor system and connec-
tion to the earth-termination system.
Any observed defects to parts of the
installation which are not required must
be notified in writing to the owner of the
structure.
Structure is equipped with a functioning
lightning protection system
Experience has shown that most light-
ning protection systems are designed
according to lightning protection sys-
tems Type III. Regular inspections are pre-
scribed for certain structures. It must be
planned to integrate the cell site installa-
tion in accordance with the type of light-
ning protection system determined. For
installations with lightning protection
systems Type I and II, the surroundings of
the installation must be recorded photo-
graphically to ensure that, if problems
subsequently arise with proximities, the
situation at the time of construction can
be proven. If a cell site is erected on a
structure with a functional external light-
ning protection system, its erection is
governed by the latest lightning protec-
tion standard (DIN V VDE V 0185). In this
case, DIN VDE 0855 Part 300 can only be
used for the equipotential bonding of
the antenna cable. Proximities must be
calculated as appropriate to the type of
lightning protection system. All mechan-
ical components used must be able to
cope with the prospective partial light-
ning currents. For reasons of standardisa-
tion, all the steel fixing elements and
structures for holding antennas of many
mobile phone network operators must
be designed for lightning protection sys-
tems Type I. The connection should be
done via the shortest route, which is not
a problem, however, as the air-termina-
tion conductors on flat roofs are usually
designed to be meshed. If there is a func-
tional lightning protection system on the
5
host building, this has a higher priority
than an antenna earthing installation.
Because of how it is designed, the type of
lightning protection system to be effect-
ed must be laid down at the discussion
stage of the project:
⇒ If other system components are also
situated on the roof, it is preferable
to install the electrical cable on the
exterior side of the structure.
⇒ If other system components are
situated on the roof, and if it is
intended to erect a central mast, the
installation must be equipped with
an isolated lightning protection sys-
tem.
⇒ If the system technology is located
within the structure, it is preferable
to have an isolated lightning protec-
tion embedment. Care must be tak-
en that the cell site infrastructure is
designed to be geometrically small
so that the costs of the isolated light-
ning protection system are economi-
cally viable.
Experience has shown that, in many
cases, existing lightning protection sys-
tems have old defects which adversely
affect the effectiveness of the installa-
LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE 63
 tion. These defects mean that even if the
cell site is correctly “tied-in“ to the exter-
nal lightning protection system, damage
can still be caused within the structure.
In order to enable a designer of mobile
phone networks to erect antenna instal-
lations in accordance with the standards
even in difficult situations, the only thing
available to him used to be the isolated
lightning protection system with hori-
zontal distance holders. In such cases,
however, the design of the antenna
installation, could really not be consid-
ered architecturally aesthetic
(Fig. 5.2.4.1).
Air-termination systems as shown in
Fig. 5.2.4.1 are not applicable for loca-
tions where the antennas have to be
pleasing to look at.
5 Fig. 5.2.4.1.2 Components of HVI Conductor
Fig. 5.2.4.1 Isolated air-termination system with
distance holder
The isolated HVI conductor is an innova-
tive solution which provides the installer
of lightning protection systems with
novel possibilities for design and for easy
maintaining of the separation distance.
5.2.4.1 Installation of a HVI®
isolated down conductor
If no additional measures are provided,
impulse voltages > 250 kV cause flash-
overs along the surface of insulating
materials. This effect is known as creep-
ing flashover. Fig. 5.2.4.1.1 shows how a
creepage discharge is caused.
To prevent creepage discharges, the new
HVI conductor has been equipped with a
specially doped special external coating
64 LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE
which enables the high “impulse volt-
ages“ caused by the lightning to be
“directed“ to a reference potential. In
order to achieve this, a connection
between the special external coating and
the equipotential bonding must be creat-
ed at a defined distance (1.40 m – 1.60 m
from the supply point) (Figs. 5.2.4.1.2 to
5.2.4.2.3). There must be no connection
between components of the air-termina-
tion system and the down conductor.
head piece
sealing
KS connector unit range
supporting clamp
connection to
the equipotential
bonding
EB terminal
earth connection HVI¤ conductor
element
The coaxial HVI conductor consists of a
19 mm2 copper wire, thick-walled high-
voltage-resistant insulation, and a special
external weatherproof coating.
The prefabricated HVI conductor sup-
plied by the manufacturer is equipped
with a matched terminal on the supply
side. The earth side is also designed for a
terminal. This can be mounted on the
HVI conductor on site (delivered: mount-
ed on the earth side). This allows the
inner conductor
insulation
Fig. 5.2.4.1.1 Basic development of a creepage discharge at an isolated down conductor without special
coating
length of the HVI conductor to be short-
ened on site.
To avoid low energy flashovers arising as
a result of the capacitive displacement
currents, the HVI conductor can be addi-
tionally connected to the equipotential
bonding as the conductor is being
installed. These terminals do not have to
be capable of conducting lightning cur-
rents since the capacitive displacement
currents are low in energy and do not
lead to dangerous sparking. The HVI con-
ductor with its high dielectric strength
can be assigned an equivalent separation
distance in air of s = 0.75 m.
Specifying an equivalent separation dis-
tance in air of s = 0.75 m, one obtains
max. cable lengths as a function of the
lightning protection level provided by
the lighting protection system and the
current splitting coefficient kc.
By improving the current splitting to sev-
eral down conductors (reducing cc) it is
possible to further increase the max.
cable length for a given lightning protec-
tion level for a structure.
5.2.4.2 Installation example
Application for cell sites
Cell site installations are frequently erect-
ed on host structures. There is usually an
agreement between the operator of the
cell site installation and the owner of the
structure that the erection of the cell site
installation must not increase the risk to
the structure. For protection against
lightning, this particularly means that no
partial lightning currents must enter the
structure if there is a lightning stroke to
the frame structure. A partial lightning
current within the structure would
especially put the electrical and elec-
tronic apparatus at risk.
Fig 5.2.4.2.1 shows one possible solution
for the “isolated air-termination system“
on the frame structure of an antenna.
proximity
www.dehn.de
 HVI¤ If several structures are mounted on the
α α conductor roof then, according to the basic illustra-
air-termination rod tion in Fig. 5.2.4.2.3, several isolated air-
insulating termination systems must be installed.
sealing unit pipe This must be done to ensure that all
range structures protruding above the roof
supporting clamp must be arranged in an area protected
GRP/Al earth connection from lightning strokes (lightning protec-
earthing clamp feeding point
tion zone 0B).
HVI¤ conductor

5.2.4.3 Project example: Training

antenna
s = separation distance
Fig. 5.2.4.2.1 Isolated air-termination sytem with
voltage-controlled isolated down
conductor
The air-termination tip must be fixed to
the frame structure of the antenna by
means of an insulating pipe in non
conductive material so that it is isolated.
The height of the air-termination tip is
governed by the requirement that the
structure of the frame and any electrical
devices which are part of the cell site
installation (BTS) must be arranged in the
zone of protection of the air-termination
tip. Structures with several antenna sys-
tems must be equipped with multiple
“isolated air-termination systems“.
Figs.5.2.4.2.2a and b illustrate the instal-
lation on an antenna post.
air-termination tip
feeding point
HVI¤ conductor
insulating pipe earth connection
Fig. 5.2.4.2.2b Connection to the antenna construc-
tion for directing potential
Roof-mounted structures
Metal and electrical roof-mounted struc-
tures protrude above roof level and are
exposed points for lightning strokes. The
risk of partial lightning currents flowing
within the structure is also existing
because of conductive connections with
conduits and electrical conductors lead-
ing into the structure. To prevent this and
to set up the necessary separation dis-
tance for the complete structure easily,
the air-termination system must be
installed with a terminal to the isolated
down-conductor system, as shown in
Fig. 5.2.4.2.3.
isolated air-
termination system metal attic cover in the pro-
tective area of the isolated
α air-termination system
sealing unit range
EB terminal
metal earthed roof-
mounted structure
cable duct
reinforcement
cable duct
foundation earthing electrode
and residential building
Structure
The structure in Fig. 5.2.4.3.1 was built
conventionally from the ground floor to
the 6th floor.
At a later date, the 7th floor was
attached to the existing roof surface. The
external façade of the 7th floor consists
of metal sheets.
The media centre is situated on the 3rd
floor, the ground floor is used for admin-
istration. All other floors up to the 7th
floor are used for appartments.
The roof surface of the 6th and 7th floors
was finished off with a metal attic whose
components are interconnected so as to
be non-conductive.
The complete structure is 25.80 m high
(without attic) up to the roof level (- 7th
floor).
5
Subsequently, five antenna systems for
mobile phone systems and microwaves
were installed by different operators of
mobile phone networks on the roof sur-
face of the 7th floor. The antennas were
erected both in the corners and in the
middle of the roof surface.
The cables (coax cables) from the four
antennas in the corners of the roof sur-
face were installed in the vicinity of the
attic to the south-west corner. From this
point, the cables are led through a metal
cable duct which is connected to the attic
of the roof surfaces of the 7th and 6th
floors to the BTS room on the 6 th floor.
The cables from the antenna in the mid-
dle are also installed by means of a metal
separation cable duct directly to the 2nd BTS room
distance s on the north-east side of the structure to
the 6th floor. This cable duct is also con-
HVI® nected to the surrounding attics.
conductor I The structure was equipped with a light-
ning protection system. The new installa-
tion of the external lightning protection
system to protect against damage to the
structure and life hazards was designed
in accordance with lightning protection
standard DIN V VDE V 0185-3.

Fig. 5.2.4.2.3 Keeping the required separation
Fig. 5.2.4.2.2a Insulating pipe within the antenna
distance with voltage-controlled isola-
area
ted down conductor (HVI)
During the installation of the antennas,
the equipotential bonding and earthing
measures of the system were carried out
in accordance with DIN VDE 0855 Part
300.

www.dehn.de LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE 65

 The earthing of the systems, however,
was not isolated from the existing exter-
nal lightning protection system at the
earth-termination system at ground
level, but directly at the air-termination
system.
Hence, in the event of a lightning dis-
charge, partial lightning currents are
conducted directly into the structure via
the coax cable shields. These partial light-
ning currents do not only present a life
hazard, they also present a hazard to the
existing technical equipment of the
structure.
New concept
A lightning protection system was
required, which prevents partial light-
ning currents from being conducted
directly into the structure via the
antenna components (frame structures,
cable shields and installation systems). At
the same time, the required separation
distance s between the frame structures
of the antennas and the air-termination
system on the roof surface of the 7th
floor must be realised.
This cannot be effected with a lightning
protection system of a conventional
design.
By installing the HVI conductor, a light-
ning protection system was constructed
5 with an isolated air-termination system.
This required the following components:
⇒ Air-termination tips on insulating
pipes in GRP material, secured
directly to the antenna pole
(Fig. 5.2.4.2.2a).
⇒ Down conductor from the air-
termination tip by means of an
HVI conductor with connection to
the isolated ring conductor
(Fig. 5.2.4.3.2).
⇒ Field-controlled feeding point to
ensure the resistance against
creeping flashovers at the input
(Figs. 5.2.4.2.2a and 5.2.4.2.2b).
⇒ Isolated ring conductor on insulating
supports made of GRP, supports as
high as according to the calculation
of the required separation distance
⇒ Down conductors installed separate-
ly from the isolated ring conductor
via the respective metal attics and
metal façade to the bare metal
down conductors on the 6th floor
with the required separation dis-
tance s to the lower attic
(Fig. 5.2.4.3.3).
66 LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE
⇒ Supplementary ring conductor, all
down-conductor systems intercon-
nected at a height of approx. 15 m
to reduce the required separation
distance s of the interception and
down-conductor system
(Figs. 5.2.4.3.4 and 5.2.4.4.1).
The various implementation stages
explained in detail are summarised in
Fig. 5.2.4.3.4. It is also important to note
that the proposed design concept was
discussed in detail with the system erec-
tor in order to avoid mistakes when car-
rying out the work.
When designing the external lightning
protection system, care was taken that
the deck on the 6th floor (Fig. 5.2.4.3.1)
and the lower attachments (Fig. 5.2.4.3.4)
were also arranged in the zone of pro-
tection/protective angle of the air-termi-
nation system.
Antennas of the cell site operators (1 - 5)
5
4
3 cable tray
1 2
Fig. 5.2.4.3.1 Total view
HVI¤
conductor
isolated
ring conductor
HVI-Leitung
cable tray
connection to
equipotential bonding
HVI® conductor
isolated ring conductor
Fig. 5.2.4.3.2 Isolated air-termination system and Fig. 5.2.4.3.3 Down conductor of isolated ring con-
isolated ring conductor ductor
Ref.: H. Bartels GmbH, Oldenburg,
Germany
www.dehn.de

attic
ring conductor
bare down
conductor
Fig. 5.2.4.3.4 Total view on a new installed external lightning protection system
5.2.4.4 Separation distance
When calculating the required separa-
tion distance s, not only the height of the
structure but also the heights of the indi-
vidual antennas with the isolated air-ter-
mination system had to be taken into
consideration.
Each of the four corner antennas pro-
trudes 3.6 m above the surface of the
roof. The antenna in the middle pro-
trudes 6.6 m above the roof surface.
Considering the height of the structure
,result the following total heights to be
taken into account when calculating the
installation:
⇒ 4 corner antennas to the base of the
air-termination tip + 29.40 m
⇒ 1 antenna in the middle of the roof
surface to the base of the air-termi-
nation tip + 32.40 m
⇒ Three further, isolated separate air-
termination rods on the west side of
the roof surface and two isolated air-
termination masts on the balcony
6th floor, south side, realise the zone
of protection of the complete roof
surface.
A special cable, DEHNconductor, Type
HVI, was used as the isolated down con-
ductor, allowing an equivalent separa-
tion distance of s = 0.75 m (air) / 1.5 m
(solid building materials) to be main-
tained.
The calculation of the required separa-
tion distances was done as shown in
Fig. 5.2.4.4.1 for three partial areas :
1. Partial section with height + 32.4 m
and height + 29.4 m (antennas) to +
www.dehn.de
air-termination tip The complete down-conductor system
comprises six down conductors from the
HVI¤ conductor isolated ring conductor at a height of +
27.3 m to the supplementary ring con-
ductor at ground level + 15.0 m. The ring
isolated ring conductor conductor at ground + 15.0 m is connect-
ed with the earthing ring conductor via
the six down conductors of the residen-
bare down tial structure and four further down con-
cable duct
condductor ductors on attached parts of the struc-
ture.
This produces a different splitting of the
current in the individual partial areas
which had to be taken into consideration
for the design of the lightning protection
system.
The equipotential bonding required and
the earthing of the antenna components
on the roof surface (including the cable
ducts, metal façades and the attics on
both roof levels) was done using two
supplementary earthing cables NYY
1x25 mm2 connected to the equipoten-
tial bonding of the individual BTS sta-
tions.
27.3 m (isolated ring conductor) on The erection of this isolated air-termina-
the roof. tion system on the surface of the roof
2. Partial section of + 27.3 m to + 15.0 m and on the antenna systems, as well as
(isolated ring conductor on roof up the isolated down conductors around
to lower supplementary ring con- metal parts of the structure, prevent par-
ductor). tial lightning currents from entering the
3. Partial section of + 15.0 to ± 0 m structure.
(lower ring conductor to ground
level). 5
kc1
L1
7th floor
6th floor
kc2
L2
5th floor
EB conductor
4th floor
3rd floor
ring conductor
down conductor
2nd floor
kc3
L3
1st floor
ground floor
Fig. 5.2.4.4.1 Calculation of the required separation distance
LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE 67
 5.3 Materials and minimum Material Form Min. cross- Remarks
dimensions for air-termi- section
nation conductors and mm2
down conductors Copper tape 50 min. thickness 2 mm
round 50 Ø8 mm
Table 5.3.1 gives the minimum cross sec-
cable 50 min. diameter per wire 1.7 mm
tions, form and material of air-termina- c, d
round 200 Ø16 mm
tion systems.
Tin-coated tape 50 min. thickness 2 mm
These requirements arise from the elec- copper a round 50 Ø8 mm
trical conductivity of the materials to car- cable 50 min. diameter per wire 1.7 mm
ry lightning currents (temperature rise) Aluminium tape 70 min. thickness 3 mm
and the mechanical stresses when in use. round 50 Ø8 mm
cable 50 min. diameter per wire 1.7 mm
When using a round conductor Ø8 mm as
an air-termination tip, the max. free Aluminium tape 50 min. thickness 2.5 mm
height permitted is 0.5 m. The height alloy round 50 Ø8 mm
limit for a round conductor Ø10 mm is cable 50 min. diameter per wire 1.7 mm
1 m in free length. round c 200 Ø16 mm
Hot-dip tape 50 min. thickness 2.5 mm
Note: galvanised round 50 Ø8 mm
According to DIN V VDE V 0185-3 steel b cable 50 min. diameter per wire 1.7 mm
Clause 1, Table 9, the minimum cross sec- round c, d 200 Ø16 mm
tion for an interconnecting conductor
between two equipotential bonding Stainless tape f 60 min. thickness 2 mm
bars is 16 mm2 Cu. steel e tape 105 min. thickness 3 mm
Tests with a PVC-isolated copper con- round f 50 Ø8 mm
ductor and short strokes of 100 kA cable 70 min. diameter per wire 1.7 mm
(10/350 µs) determined a temperature round c 200 Ø16 mm
rise of around 56 K. Thus, a cable NYY round d 78 Ø10 mm
1 x 16mm2 Cu can be used as a down con- a Tin-coated or galvanised, mean value 2 µm.
ductor or as a surface and underground
5 interconnecting cable, for example.
b The zinc coating should be smooth, continuous and free of residual flux,
mean value 50 µm.
c For air-termination rods only. For applications where mechanical loads, like
wind loads, are not critical, a max. 1 m long rod can be used, which is made
of 10 mm round material.

d For lead-in earthing rods only.

e Chromium ≥ 16 %, nickel ≥ 8 %, carbon max. 0.03 %

f For stainless steel in concrete and/or in direct contact with flammable mate-
rial, the min. cross section for round material has to be increased to 75 mm2
(Ø10 mm) for round material and to 75 mm2 (thickness 3 mm) for flat mate-
rial
Table 5.3.1 Material, form and min. cross sections of air-termination conductors, air-termination rods and
down conductors

68 LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE www.dehn.de

 0.15 m
max. 1.2 m

0.3 m
0.2 m

1.5 m
m
. 1.2

1.2 m
ma x

max.

0.5 m
0.4 m 0.5 m

Fig. 5.4.1 Detail examples of an external lightning protection system at a building with an inclined tiled roof

5.4 Assembly dimensions
for air-termination and
down-conductor systems
The following dimensions (Fig. 5.4.1)
have been tried and tested in practice
and are primarily determined by the
mechanical forces acting on the compo-
nents of the external lightning protec-
tion system.
These mechanical forces arise not so
much as a result of the electrodynamic
forces generated by the lightning cur-
rents, but more as a result of the com-
pression forces and the tensile forces,
e. g. due to temperature-dependent
changes in length, wind loads or the
weight of snow.
The information concerning the max. dis-
tances of 1.2 m between the conductor
holders primarily relates to St/tZn (rela-
tively rigid). For using aluminium, dis-
tances of 1 m have become the norm in
practice.
DIN V VDE V 0185-3 gives the following
assembly dimensions for an external
lightning protection system (Fig. 5.4.2).
Fig. 5.4.3 illustrates the application on a
flat roof.
» 1m
Fig. 5.4.3 Application on a flat roof
If possible, the separation distances to
windows, doors and other openings
should be maintained when installing
down conductors.
Further important assembly dimensions
are:
Installation of surface earthing elec-
trodes (e. g. ring earthing electrodes)
around the structure at a depth of
> 0.5 m and a distance of approx. 1 m
from the structure (Fig. 5.4.4).
When driving in several earth rods next
to each other (necessitated by ground
conditions), the earth rods should be sep-
arated by at least the pile depth. The
individual earth rods must be intercon-
nected.
For the earth entries or terminals on the
foundation earthing electrode (ring
earthing electrodes), corrosion protec-
tion must be considered. Measures such
as anticorrosive bands or wires with PVC
sheath at a min. of 0.3 m above and
below the turf (earth entry) must be
employed (Fig. 5.4.5) for protection.
5
An optically acceptable and corrosion-
free connection possibility is provided by
a stainless steel fixed earthing terminal
set to be laid in concrete.
Moreover, there must also be corrosion
protection for the terminal lug for
equipotential bonding inside the build-
ing in damp and wet rooms.

a building

e
0.5 m

0.3 m corrosion protection

1m 0.3 m

Fig. 5.4.4 Dimensions for ring earthing electrodes

e = 0.2 m
appropriate distance Fig. 5.4.5 Points threatened by corrosion

Fig. 5.4.2 Air-termination rod for chimneys

www.dehn.de LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE 69

 The material combinations below (within
Steel Alu- Copper StSt Titanium Tin
air-termination systems, down conduc-
(tZn) minium
tors and with parts of the structure) have
been tried and tested, provided that no Steel (tZn) yes yes no yes yes yes
particularly corrosive environmental con-
Aluminium yes yes no yes yes yes
ditions must be taken into consideration.
These are values obtained from experi- Copper no no yes yes no yes
ence (Table 5.4.1). StSt yes yes yes yes yes yes
Titanium yes yes no yes yes yes
5.4.1 Change in length of metal Tin yes yes yes yes yes yes
wires
Table 5.4.1 Material combinations
In practice, the temperature-dependent
changes in length of air-termination and
down conductors are often underesti- Material Surface under the fixing of the Distance
mated. air-termination system or down conductor between the
The older regulations and stipulations expansion
recommended an expansion piece about soft, hard, pieces
every 20 m as a general rule in many e.g. flat roof with e.g. pantiles in m
cases. This stipulation was based on the bitumen- or or
use of steel wires, which used to be the synthetic roof sheetings brickwork
usual and sole material employed. The Steel X ≈ 15
higher values for the coefficients of lin- X ≤ 20
ear expansion of stainless steel, copper
and especially aluminium materials were StSt / X ≈ 15
not taken into account. Copper X ≤ 15
In the course of the year, temperature Aluminium X X ≤ 10
changes of 100 K must be expected on
Use of expansion pieces, if no other length compensation is provided
and around the roof. The resulting
changes in length for different metal Table 5.4.1.2 Expansion pieces in lightning protection - Recommended application
wire materials are shown in Table 5.4.1.1.
It is noticeable that, for steel and alu-
5 minium, the temperature-dependent
changes in length differ by a factor of 2.
When using expansion pieces, care must
be taken that they provide flexible
length equalisation. It is not sufficient to
To compensate for the temperature-
dependent changes in length of the air-
termination conductors, expansion
The stipulations governing the use of
expansion parts in practice are thus as bend the metal wires into an S shape pieces must be used to equalise the
shown in Table 5.4.1.2. since these “expansion pieces”, hand- expansion (Fig. 5.4.1.1).
made on site, are not sufficiently flexible.
When connecting air-termination sys-
tems, for example to metal attics sur-
Material Coefficient of linear rounding the edges of roofs, care should
expansion α be taken that there is a flexible connec-
tion to suitable components or measures.
1 1
⎯⎯ ⎯ If this flexible connection is not made,
106 K there is a risk that the metal attic cover
will be damaged by the temperature-
Steel 11
dependent change in length.
Stainless steel 16
Copper 17
Aluminium 24 Fig. 5.4.1.1 Air-termination system - Compensation
of expansion with bridging braid
Calculation formula:

∆L = α i L i ∆T

Assumed change in temperature on the roof: ∆T = 100 K

Steel ∆L = 11 • 10-6 • 100 cm • 100 = 0.11 cm = 1.1 mm/m
Stainless steel ∆L = 16 • 10-6 • 100 cm • 100 = 0.16 cm = 1.6 mm/m
Copper ∆L = 17 • 10-6 • 100 cm • 100 = 0.17 cm = 1.7 mm/m
Aluminium ∆L = 24 • 10-6 • 100 cm • 100 = 0.24 cm ≈ 2.4 mm/m
Table 5.4.1.1 Calculation of the temperature-related change in length ∆L of metal wires in lightning protec-
tion

70 LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE www.dehn.de

 17
18

3
4
1
11

6 8
7
5

10 9
16
13
15
EB 12

14
21

19

20

Fig. 5.4.2.1 External lightning protection of a residential building

5.4.2 External lightning protection

system for a residential house
DEHNsnap
conductor holder
5
Fig. 5.4.2.1 illustrates the design of the
external lightning protection system for
a residential house with attached
garage.
Fig. 5.4.2.1 and Table 5.4.2.1 show exam-
ples of the components in use today.
No account is taken of the measures cap
required for an internal lightning protec- base part
tion system such as lightning equipoten-
tial bonding and surge protection (see DEHNgrip
also Chapter 6). conductor holder

Particular attention is drawn to DEHN’s

DEHNsnap and DEHNgrip programme of
holders.
The DEHNsnap generation of synthetic
holders (Fig. 5.4.2.2) is suitable as a basic
component (roof and wall). The cap sim-
ply snaps in to fix the conductor in the
holder while still being loosely guided.
Fig. 5.4.2.2 DEHNsnap und DEHNgrip conductor holders
The special snap-in technique exerts no
mechanical load on the fastening. This screwless system of holders can also
DEHNgrip (Fig. 5.4.2.2) is a screwless be used as both a roof and a wall con-
stainless steel system of holders which ductor holder for Ø8 mm conductors.
was put into the programme to supple- Simply press in the conductors and the
ment the DEHNsnap system of synthetic conductor is fixed in DEHNgrip
holders. (Fig. 5.4.2.2).

www.dehn.de LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE 71

 Pos. in Part description Part No. Pos. in Part description Part No.
Fig. 5.4.2.1 Fig. 5.4.2.1
Round conductor Ø8 mm – 840 008 Bridging bracket
1 11
DEHNALU, medium-hard, 840 018 made of aluminium 377 006
soft-twistable
Bridging braid
Steel strip 30 x 3.5 mm – St/tZn 810 335
2
made of aluminium 377 015
Round conductor Ø10 mm – 860 010
Lead-in earthing rod Ø16 mm 480 150
StSt V4A 12
complete 480 175
Roof conductor holders 202 020
3
for ridge and hip tiles 204 109
Rod holder with flange 275 116
204 249 13
275 260
204 269
206 109
206 239
Parallel connector 305 000
14
Roof conductor holders 204 149 306 020
4
for conductors within 204 179 Cross unit 319 201
roof surfaces 202 010 SV clamps made of St/tZn 308 220
202 050 SV clamps made of StSt 308 229
202 080
Rod holder
206 209
with cleat and flange 275 260
206 309 15
for heat insulation 273 730
DEHNsnap 204 006
5
DEHNgrip 207 009
conductor holder
Number plate for 480 006
with cleat and flange 275 160 16
marking isolating points 480 005
for heat insulation 273 740
Gutter clamp for beads 339 050
6 Air-termination rod
made of stainless steel 339 059
with forged tab 100 075

5 Single-screw gutter glamp

made of stainless steel
MV clamp made of Al
339
339
100
109
390 050
17
with rounded ends

Rod clamp
483 075

380 020
7
MV clamp made of StSt 390 059
Rod holder with tip 262 130
18
Gutter board clamp 343 000
8
Earth rod St/tZn 620 150
19
sectional unit with bolt 625 150
Downpipe clamp
and hole 620 151
adjustable for Ø60-150 mm 423 020
9 625 151
for any cross sections 423 200
Impact tip for deep-driven 620 001
20
earth rods 625 001
KS connector
for connecting conductors 301 000
Connecting clamp
made of StSt 301 009
for earth rods 620 011
21
unilateral 625 011
MV clamp 390 051
10 for earth rods 620 015
625 015
Table 5.4.2.1 Components for external lightning protection of a residential builiding

72 LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE www.dehn.de

5.4.3 Application tips for mounting For dry ridges, the DEHNsnap conductor Smooth tiles (Fig. 5.4.3.5):
roof conductor holders holder (1) (Fig. 5.4.3.3) is put on the ridge
clamp already on the structure (2) and
Ridge and hip tiles:
tightened manually (only turn DEHN-
Adjust roof conductor holders with
snap).
adjusting screw to suit the dimension of
the ridge tile (Fig. 5.4.3.1).

Fig. 5.4.3.5 Roof conductor holder with preformed

2 brace - Used on smooth tiles,
e.g. plain tiles

Fig. 5.4.3.1 Conductor holder with DEHNsnap for Slate roofs:

ridge tiles
The conductor leading can, in addition,
be gradually adjusted by means of con-
ductor holders from the top centre to the
bottom side.
(conductor holder can be loosened by
either turning the holder or opening the
fixing screw.)
SPANNsnap roof conductor holder with
DEHNsnap synthetic conductor holder or
DEHNgrip stainless steel conductor hold-
er (Fig. 5.4.3.2).
When using it on slate roofs, the internal
hook system is bent (Fig. 5.4.3.6) or
equipped with a supplementary clamp
(Part No. 204 089).
Fig. 5.4.3.3 FIRSTsnap for mounting on existing rid-
ge clamps
Grooved pantiles:
The roof conductor holder with pre-
5
formed struts is used for the roof sur-
faces. The conductor holder is bent by
hand before being hooked into the bat-
tens. Additionally, it can also be secured
with nails (Fig. 5.4.3.4).

angle the inner latching

for use on slate roofs

Fig. 5.4.3.2 SPANNsnap with plastic DEHNsnap con-

Fig. 5.4.3.6 Roof conductor holder with preformed
ductor holder
brace - Used on slate roofs
Permanent tension due to stainless steel angled by hand
tension spring. Universal tension range
from 180-280 mm with laterally
adjustable conductor leading for Rd
8 mm conductors.

FIRSTsnap conductor holder with DEHN-

snap synthetic conductor holder for put-
Fig. 5.4.3.4 Roof conductor holder with preformed
ting on existing ridge clamps for dry
brace - Used on grooved pantiles
ridges.

www.dehn.de LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE 73

 Grooved tiles: Overlapped constructions:
FLEXIsnap roof conductor holder for In case of overlapped constructions (3)
lift tile
grooved tiles, for direct fitting on the (e. g. slabs and natural slates), DEHNsnap
groove (Fig. 5.4.3.7). conductor holder (1) (Fig. 5.4.3.10) with
insert the holder clamping terminals (2) is pushed on from
underneath the side and secured with a screw driver
when the holder is open.
lift tile For slabs laid on a slant, DEHNsnap can
also be turned to allow a plumb conduct-
or leading.
insert the holder
underneath

1 3
2

press tile
on it

1
DEHNsnap
press tile
on it

Fig. 5.4.3.8 Roof conductor holder for hanging into

the bottom seam of pantile roofs

Flat tiles or slabs:

Fig. 5.4.3.7 Conductor holder for direct fitting on the DEHNsnap conductor holder (1) 2
(Fig. 5.4.3.9) and its clamping device (2) is
5 seams

The flexible stainless steel strut is pushed

pushed in between the flat tiles (3) (e. g.
plain tile) or slabs and tightened manual-
Fig. 5.4.3.10 PLATTENsnap roof conductor holder
for overlapped constructions
ly (only turn DEHNsnap).
between the grooved tiles.
By pressing on the top grooved tile, the
stainless steel strut is deformed and
adapts itself to the shape of the groove.
Thus it is fixed tightly under the tile. 1
This application with an aluminium strut 2
makes it easy to adapt to the shape of
the groove.
A notch is provided for an eventually
existing window hook.
3
The strut of the holder can also be nailed
down (holes in the strut).

Roof conductor holders with preformed 1

strut, for hooking into the bottom
groove for pantile roofs (Fig. 5.4.3.8). ap
Nsn
DEH

Fig. 5.4.3.9 ZIEGELsnap, for fixing between flat tiles

or plates

74 LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE www.dehn.de

5.5 Earth-termination sys-
tems
A detailed explanation of the terms used
in earth-termination technology is con-
tained in DIN V VDE V 0185-3 "Lightning
protection – physical damage to struc-
tures and life hazards", DIN VDE 0101
"Power supply systems for nominal ac
voltages above 1 kV", DIN VDE 0100
"Erection of power supply systems with
nominal voltages up to 1000 V" (Part 200
and Part 540). Below, we repeat only the
terminology which is required to under-
stand the following designs.
Terminology
Earth
is the conductive ground whose electrical
potential at each point is set equal to
zero as agreed. The word "earth" is also
the designation for both the earth as a
place as well as earth as a material, e. g.
the type of soil: humus, loam, sand,
gravel and rock.
Reference earth
(neutral earth) is the part of the earth,
especially the surface of the earth out-
side the sphere of influence of an
earthing electrode or an earth-termina-
tion system, in which, between two arbi-
trary points, no perceptible voltages aris-
ing from the earthing current occur
(Fig. 5.5.1).
Earthing electrode
is a conductive component or several
conductive components in electrical con-
tact with the earth and forming an elec-
UE Earth potential
UB Shock hazard voltage
UB1 Shock hazard voltage without poten-
tial control (at the foundation earthing
electrode)
UB2 Shock hazard voltage with potential
control (foundation and control
earthing electrode)
CE
FE
1m
ϕ
UB2
ϕFE
UB1
US
Fig. 5.5.1 Earth surface potential and voltages at a foundation earthing electrode FE and control earthing
electrode CE flown through by currents
www.dehn.de
trical connection with it (includes also
foundation earthing electrodes).
Earth-termination system
is a localised entirety of interconnected
conductive earthing electrodes or metal
components acting as such, (e. g. rein-
forcements of concrete foundations,
cable metal sheaths in contact with the
earth, etc.).
Earthing conductor
is a conductor connecting a system com-
ponent to be earthed to an earthing
electrode and which is installed above
the ground or insulated in the ground.
Lightning protection earthing
is the earthing installation of a lightning
protection system to discharge lightning
currents into the earth.
Below some types of earthing electrodes
and their classification are described
according to location, form and profile.
Classification according to location
Surface earthing electrode
is an earthing electrode generally driven
in at a shallow depth down to 1 m. It can
consist of round material or flat strips
and be designed as a star-type, ring or
meshed earthing electrode or a combina-
tion thereof.
Earth rod
is an earth rod generally driven in plumb
down to greater depths. It can consist of
round material or material with another
profile, for example.
US Step voltage
ϕ Earth surface potential
FE Foundation earthing
electrode
CE Control earthing electrode
(ring earthing electrode)
ϕFE + SE
UE
reference earth
Classification according to form and
profile
One distinguishes between:
flat strip earthing electrodes, cruciform
earthing electrodes and earth rods.
Natural earthing electrode
is a metal component in contact with the
earth or with water either directly or via
concrete, whose original function is not
as an earthing electrode but which acts
as an earthing electrode (reinforcements
of concrete foundations, conduits, etc.).
Foundation earthing electrode
is a conductor embedded in concrete
which is in contact with the earth over a
wide area.
Control earthing electrode
is an earthing electrode whose form and
arrangement serves more to control the
potential than to maintain a certain
earthing electrode resistance.
Types of resistance
Specific earth resistance
ρE is the specific electrical resistance of
the earth. It is given in Ωm and repre-
sents the resistance between two oppo-
site sides of a cube of earth with edges of
1 m in length.
Earthing electrode resistance
RA of an earthing electrode is the resist-
ance of the earth between the earthing
5
electrode and reference earth. RA is prac-
tically a resistance.
Impulse earthing resistance
Rst is the resistance as lightning currents
traverse from one point of an earth-ter-
mination system to the reference earth.
Voltages at current carrying earth-termi-
nation systems, control of potential
Earth potential
UE is the voltage arising between an
earth-termination system and reference
earth (Fig. 5.5.1).
Potential of the earth’s surface
ϕ is the voltage between one point of the
earth’s surface and reference earth
(Fig. 5.5.1).
Shock hazard voltage
UB is the part of the potential of the
earth’s surface which can be bridged by
humans (Fig. 5.5.1), the current path via
the human body running from hand to
foot (horizontal distance from touchable
part around 1 m) or from one hand to the
other.
LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE 75
 Step voltage
US is the part of the potential of the
earth’s surface which can be bridged by
humans taking one step 1 m long, the
current path via the human body run-
ning from one foot to the other
(Fig. 5.5.1).
Potential control
is the effect of the earthing electrodes on
the earth potential, particularly the
potential of the earth’s surface
(Fig. 5.5.1).
Equipotential bonding
for lightning protection systems is the
connection of metal installations and
electrical systems to the lightning protec-
tion system via conductors, lightning cur-
rent arresters or isolating spark gaps.
earthing electrode resistance / Specific
earth resistance
earthing electrode resistance RA
The conduction of the lightning current
via the earthing electrode into the
ground does not happen at one point
but rather energises a particular area
around the earthing electrode.
The type of earthing electrode and the
way it is installed must now be chosen to
ensure that the voltages affecting the
surface of the earth (shock hazard and
5 step voltages) do not assume hazardous
values.
The earthing electrode resistance RP of
an earthing electrode can best be
explained with the help of a metal
sphere buried in the ground.
If the sphere is buried deep enough, the
current discharges radially to be equally
distributed over the surface of the
sphere. Fig. 5.5.2a illustrates this case; as
a comparison, Fig. 5.5.2b illustrates the
case of a sphere buried just under the
earth’s surface.
The concentric circles around the surface
of the sphere represent surfaces of equal
voltage. The earthing electrode resist-
ance RA is composed of the partial resist-
ances of individual layers of the sphere
connected in series.
equipotential lines
a) Spherical earthing b) Spherical earthing
electrode deep in electrode close to the
the ground earth surface
Fig. 5.5.2 Current distribution from the spherical
earthing electrode
76 LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE
The resistance of such a layer of the
sphere is calculated using
I
R = ρE i
q 120
where ρE is the specific earth resistance of
the ground, assuming it is homogeneous,
l the thickness of an imaginary layer
of the sphere
and
q the medial surface of this layer of the
sphere
To illustrate this, we assume a metal
sphere 20 cm in diameter buried at a
depth of 3 m at a specific earth resistance
of 200 Ωm.
If now the increase in earthing electrode
resistance for the different layers of the
sphere is calculated, then as a function of
the distance from the centre of the
sphere, a curve as shown in Fig. 5.5.3 is
obtained.
The earthing electrode resistance RA for
the spherical earthing electrode is calcu-
lated using:
rK
ρE i 100 1 + 2 t
RA =
2π i rK
i
2
ρE Specific earth resistance in Ωm
t Burial depth in cm
rK Radius of the spherical earthing elec-
trode in cm
This formula gives a earthing electrode
resistance of RA = 161 Ω for the spherical
earthing electrode.
The trace of the curve in Fig. 5.5.3 shows
that the largest fraction of the total
earthing electrode resistance occurs in
the immediate vicinity of the earthing
electrode. Thus, for example, at a dis-
tance of 5 m from the centre of the
sphere, 90 % of the total earthing elec-
0.1 1 10
Fig. 5.5.4 Specific earth resistance ρE of different ground types
RA = 161 Ω
Earthing electrode resistance RA (Ω)
160
140 approx. 90%
100
80
60
40
20
1 2 3 4 5
Distance x (m)
Fig. 5.5.3 Earthing electrode resistance RA of a sphe-
rical earthing electrode with Ø20 cm, 3 m
deep, at ρE = 200 Ωm as a function of the
distance x from the centre of the sphere
trode resistance RA has already been
achieved.
Specific earth resistance ρE
The specific earth resistance ρE, which
determines the magnitude of the
earthing electrode resistance RA of an
earthing electrode, is a function of the
composition of the soil, the amount of
moisture in the soil and the temperature.
It can fluctuate between wide limits.
Values for various types of soil
Fig. 5.5.4 gives the fluctuation ranges of
the specific earth resistance ρE for various
types of soil.
Seasonal fluctuations
Extensive measurements (literature) have
shown that the specific earth resistance
varies greatly according to the burial
depth of the earthing electrode. Owing
to the negative temperature coefficient
of the ground (α = 0.02 ... 0.004), the spe-
cific earth resistances attain a maximum
in winter and a minimum in summer. It is
therefore advisable to convert the meas-
ured values obtained from earthing elec-
trodes to the maximum prospective val-
ues, since even under unfavourable con-
ditions (very low temperatures), permissi-
ble values must not be exceeded. The
curve of the specific earth resistance ρE as
Concrete
Boggy soil, turf
Farmland, loam
Humid sandy soil
Dry sandy soil
Rocky soil
Gravel
Lime
River and lake water
Sea water
100 1000 10000 ρE in Ωm
www.dehn.de
a function of the season (ground temper- measured resistance R one can determine Straight surface earthing electrode
ature) can be represented to a very good the specific earth resistance ρE of the Surface earthing electrodes are generally
approximation by a sine curve having its ground: embedded horizontally in the ground at
maximum around the middle of February a depth of 0.5...1 m. Since the layer of soil
and its minimum around the middle of ρE = 2π i e i R covering the earthing electrode dries out
August. Investigations have further in summer and freezes in winter, the
R measured resistance in Ω
shown that, for earthing electrodes earthing electrode resistance RA of such a
e probe distance in m
buried not deeper than around 1.5 m, surface earthing electrode is calculated
the maximum deviation of the specific ρE average specific earth resistance in as if it lays on the surface of the ground:
earth resistance from the average is Ωm down to a depth corresponding
around ± 30 % (Fig. 5.5.5). to the probe distance e ρE 2il
RA = i In
By increasing the probe distance e and π iI d
+ ρE in % burial depth < 1.5 m re-tuning the earthing measuring bridge,
the curve of the specific earth resistance RA earthing electrode resistance of a
30 burial depth > 1.5 m
can be determined ρE as a function of the stretched surface earthing electrode
20
10 depth. in Ω
June July Aug. Sept. Oct. Nov.
0 ρE Specific earth resistance in Ωm
Jan. Feb. March April May Dec. Calculation of earthing electrode resist-
10
20 ances l Length of the surface earthing elec-
30 trode in m
Table 5.5.1 gives the formulae for calcu-
− ρE in % lating the earthing electrode resistances d Half the width of steel strip in m or
of the most common types of earthing diameter of the round wire in m
Fig. 5.5.5 Specific earth resistance ρE as a function
electrode. In practice, these approximate
of the seasons without influencing of rain-
formulae are quite sufficient. The precise
fall (burial depth of the earthing electrode
< 1.5 m) formulae for the calculations must be
taken from the following sections.
For earthing electrodes buried deeper
(particularly for earth rods), the fluctua-
tion is merely ± 10 %. From the sine-
shaped curve of the specific earth resist-
ance in Fig. 5.5.5, the earthing electrode Earthing electrode resistance Rough estimate Auxiliary
resistance RA of an earth-termination sys-
tem measured on a particular day can be
converted to the maximum prospective Surface earthing electrode RA =
2 i ρE
⎯
5
value. (star-type earthing electrode) l
Measurement ρE
The specific earth resistance ρE is deter- earth rod RA = ⎯
mined using an earthing measuring (earth rod) l
bridge with 4 clamps which operates
2 i ρE
according to the null method. Ring earthing electrode RA = D = 1.13 i 2
A
Fig. 5.5.6 illustrates the measuring 3iD
arrangement of this measuring method
named after WENNER. The measurement ρE
is carried out from a fixed central point Meshed earthing electrode RA = D = 1.13 i 2
A
M which is retained for all subsequent
2iD
measurements. Four measuring probes
ρE
(earthing spikes 30 ... 50 cm long) are Earth plate RA = ⎯
driven into the soil along a line a – a' 4.5 i a
pegged out in the ground. From the
ρE
e e e Hemispherical earthing electrode RA = D = 1.57 i 3
V
π iD
RA Earthing electrode resistance (Ω)
ρE Specific earth resistance (Ωm)
a M a’
I Length of the earthing electrode (m)
D Diameter of a ring earthing electrode, of the area of the equivalent circuit
or of a hemispherical earthing electrode
A Area (m2) of the enclosed area of a ring or meshed earthing electrode
measuring
device a Edge length (m) of a square earth plate, for rectangular plates value:
b i c , while b and c are the two sides of the rectangle
Fig. 5.5.6 Determination of the specific earth resi-
V Content (m3) of a single foundation element
stance ρE with a four-terminal measuring
bridge acc. to the WENNER method Table 5.5.1 Formulae for calculating the earthing electrode resistance RA for different earthing electrodes

www.dehn.de LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE 77

 The earthing electrode resistance RA as a Combination of earthing electrodes

Max. step voltage in %

function of the length of the earthing %
The earthing electrode resistances calcu-

of the total voltage

electrode can be taken from Fig. 5.5.7. 100
80
60
Fig. 5.5.8 shows the transverse and longi-
40
tudinal earthing potential UE for an 8 m 20
long flat strip earthing electrode.
0.5 1 1.5
The effect of the burial depth on the
Burial depth
earthing potential can be clearly seen.
Fig. 5.5.9 Max. step voltage US as a function of the
Fig. 5.5.9 illustrates the step voltage US as burial depth for a stretched earth strip
a function of the burial depth.
In practice, the calculation is done using
the approximate formula in Table 5.5.1:
Earthing electrode resistance RA (Ω)
2 i ρE
lated using the formulae and the meas-
urement results given in the diagrams
apply to low frequency dc current and ac
current provided that the expansion of
2m the earthing electrode is relatively small
(a few hundred metres). For longer
lengths, e. g. for surface earthing elec-
trodes, the ac current also has an induc-
tive part.
Furthermore, the calculated earthing
electrode resistances do not apply to
lightning currents. This is where the
inductive part plays a role, which can

100
RA = lead to higher values of the impulse
l earthing resistance for larger expansion
of the earth-termination system.
Earth rod
Increasing the length of the surface
The earthing electrode resistance RA of a
ρE = 100 Ωm earthing electrodes or earth rods above
earth rod is calculated using:
30 m reduces the impulse earthing elec-
ρE = 200 Ωm
trode resistance by only an insignificant
50 ρE = 500 Ωm ρE 2il
RA = i ln amount. It is therefore expedient to com-
2π i l d bine several shorter earthing electrodes.
In such cases, because of their interac-
RA Earthing electrode resistance in Ω tion, care must be taken that the actual
ρE Specific earth resistance in Ωm total earthing electrode resistance is
l Length of the earth rod in m greater than the value calculated from
50 100 the individual resistances connected in
d Diameter of the earthing rod in m
Length I of the stretched surface parallel.
earthing electrode (m)
As an approximation, the earthing elec- Star-type earthing electrodes

5 Fig. 5.5.7 Earthing electrode resistance RA as a func-

tion of length I of the surface earthing
electrode at different specific earth resi-
trode resistance RA can be calculated
using the approximate formula given in
Table 5.5.1:
Star-type earthing electrodes in the form
of cruciform surface earthing electrodes
are important when relatively low
stance ρE earthing electrode resista nces shall be
ρE created in poorly conducting ground at
RA = an affordable price.
l The earthing electrode resistance RA of a
LONGITUDINAL DIRECTION cruciform surface earthing electrode
UE Fig. 5.5.10 shows the earthing electrode whose sides are at 90° to each other is
Earth potential UE (%)

resistance RA as a function of the rod calculated using:

100
length l and the specific earth resistance
80
100 cm
a
ρE. ρE ⎛ 2il ⎞
RA = i ⎜ ln + 2.5⎟
4π i l ⎝ ⎠
60 V
Earthing electrode resistance RA d
40
50 cm
t

20 t = 0 cm RA Earthing electrode resistance of the

100
a cruciform surface earthing electrode
Distance a (m) from earthing electrode in Ω
80
TRANSVERSE DIRECTION
ρE Specific earth resistance in Ωm
ρE = 500 Ωm
UE 60 l Side length in m
Earth potential UE (%)

100 d Half a bandwidth in m or diameter

a 40 of the round wire in m
80 ρE = 200 Ωm
60 100 cm V As a rough approximation, for longer
50 cm 20
40 lengths of the star arrangement
ρE = 100 Ωm
(l > 10 m), the earthing electrode resist-
t

20 t = 0 cm
ance RA can be determined using the
a 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 total length of the star obtained from
Distance a (m) from earthing electrode Drive-in depth l of the earth rod the equations in Table 5.5.1.

Fig. 5.5.8 Earth potential UE between supply con-
ductor and earth surface as a function of
the distance from the earthing electrode,
at an earth strip (8 m long) in different
depths
Fig. 5.5.10 Earthing electrode resistance RA of earth
rods as a function of their length l at dif-
ferent specific earth resistances ρE

78 LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE www.dehn.de

Fig. 5.5.11 shows the curve of the Where D is the diameter of the analo-
earthing electrode resistance RA of cruci- ρ gous hemisphere having the same vol-
form surface earthing electrodes as a RA = E ume as the foundation
function of the burial depth;
2iD
Where D is the diameter of the analo- D = 1.57 i V
gous circle having the same area as the
Earthing electrode resistance RA (Ω) V Volume of the foundation
meshed earthing electrode, which is
% determined as follows:
ρE = 200 Ωm When calculating the earthing electrode
14 For rectangular or polygonal dimensions
resistance, one must be aware that the
of the meshed earthing electrode:
12 foundation earthing electrode can only
l = 10 m be effective if the concrete body has a
10 Ai4
D= large contact area with the surrounding
8
π ground. Water repellent, isolating shield-
6 ing significantly increases the earth
l = 25 m A Area of the meshed earthing elec- earthing electrode resistance.
4
trode
2
Earth rods connected in parallel
For square dimensions (edge length b): To keep the interactions within accept-
0.5 1 1.5
l able limits, the distances between the
Burial depth (m)
D = 1.1 i b individual earthing electrodes and earth
rods connected in parallel should not be
Fig. 5.5.13 illustrates the curve of the less than the pile depth, if possible.
l = Side length
impulse earthing electrode resistance of If the individual earthing electrodes are
Fig. 5.5.11 Earthing electrode resistance RA of surface earthing electrodes with single arranged roughly in a circle and if they all
crossed surface earthing electrodes (90°) and multiple stars for square-wave volt- have about the same length, then the
as a function of the burial depth earthing electrode resistance can be cal-
ages.
As can be seen from this diagram, for a culated as follows:
given length, it is more expedient to
Fig. 5.5.12 shows the curve of the RA '
earthing voltage.
install a radial earthing electrode than
one single arm.
RA =
p
Voltage
% Ω
Z
RA
= 150 Ω
= 10 Ω
n=4 Where RA' is the average earthing elec-
trode resistance of the individual
5
100 160 n = 1 ... 4
n·l = 300 m earthing electrode. The reduction factor
Impulse earth resistance Rst

80 140 p as a function of the length of the

120 earthing electrode, the distance of the
l

60
100 individual earthing electrodes and the
40 n=1
80 number of earthing electrodes can be
20 2
60 taken from Fig. 5.5.14.
3
10 20 30 m 40 RA = 10 Ω
Distance from the centre of the intersection 20 4
0 20
tI

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 Time µs
re of
en
su n

n = 20
ea io
m
m irect

Z Surge impedance of the earth conductor 10

d

RA Earthing electrode resistance

45 °

10
n Quantity of the parallel connected earthing p
l Mean length of the earthing electrodes 5
direction of 5
measurement II Side length 25 m
Fig. 5.5.13 Impulse earth resistance Rst of single or 3 3
Fig. 5.5.12 Earth potential UE between the supply multiple star-type earthing electrodes 2
with equal length 2
conductor of the earthing electrode and
earth surface of crossed surface earthing 1
electrodes (90°) as a function of the Foundation earthing electrode 0.5 1 2 5 10
distance from the cross centre point The earthing electrode resistance of a a
(burial depth 0.5 m) metal conductor in a concrete founda- l
tion can be calculated as an approxi- p Reduction factor
For star-type earthing electrodes, the mation using the formula for hemispher- n Quantity of the parallel connected earthing
angle between the individual arms ical earthing electrodes: electrodes
should be greater than 60°. a Mean distance of the earthing electrodes
According to Fig. 5.5.12 the earthing ρE l Mean length of the earthing electrodes
electrode resistance of a meshed RA = Fig. 5.5.14 Reduction factor p for calculating the
earthing electrode is given by the formu- π iD total earthing electrode resistance RA of
la: earth rods connected in parallel

www.dehn.de LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE 79

 Combination of flat strip earthing
electrodes and earth rods
If sufficient earthing electrode resistance
is provided by earth rods, for example
from deep water carrying layers in sandy
soil, then the earth rod shall be as close as
possible to the object to be protected. If
a long feed is required, it is expedient to
install a radial multiple star-type earthing
electrode in parallel to this in order to
reduce the resistance as the current rises.
As an approximation, the earthing elec-
trode resistance of a flat strip earthing
electrode with earth rod can be calculat-
ed as if the flat strip earthing electrode
were extended by the drive-in depth of
the earth rod.
ρE
RA ≈
I flat strip + I earth rod
Ring earthing electrode
For circular ring earthing electrodes with
large diameters (D > 30 m), the earthing
electrode resistance is calculated as an
approximation using the formula for the
flat strip earthing electrode (where the
circumference π • D is used for the length
of the earthing electrode):
ρE 2π i D
5 RA =
π iD
2
i ln
d
For non-circular ring earthing electrodes,
the earthing electrode resistance is calcu-
lated by using the diameter D of an anal-
ogous circle with the same area:
2 i ρE
RA =
3iD
Ai4
D=
π meshed earthing electrode and, in spe-
A Area enclosed by the ring earthing
electrode
Implementation
According to the DIN VDE standards,
each installation to be protected must
have its own earth-termination system
which must be fully functional in itself
without requiring metal water pipes or
earthed conductors of the electrical
installation.
The magnitude of the earthing electrode
resistance RA is of only secondary impor-
tance for protecting a structure or instal-
lation against physical damage. It is
important that the equipotential bond-
ing at ground level is carried out system-
80 LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE
atically and the lightning current is safely
distributed in the ground.
The lightning current i raises the struc-
ture to be protected to the earthing
potential UE
1 di
U E = i i RA + iLi
2 dt
with respect to the reference earth.
The potential of the earth’s surface
decreases with increasing distance from
the earthing electrode (Fig. 5.5.1).
The inductive voltage drop across the
earthing electrode during the lightning
current rise must only be taken into
account for extended earth-termination
systems (e. g. as required for long surface
earthing electrodes in poorly conducting
soils with bedrock). In general, the
earthing electrode resistance is deter-
mined only by the ohmic part.
If isolated conductors are led into the
structure, the earthing potential UE has
its full value with respect to the conduct-
or.
In order to avoid the risk of punctures
and flashovers here, such conductors are
connected via isolating spark gaps or
with live conductors via surge protective
devices (see DEHN main catalogue for
Surge Protection) to the earth-termina-
tion system as part of the lightning
equipotential bonding.
In order to keep contact and step volt-
ages as low as possible, the magnitude of
the earthing electrode resistance must be
limited.
The earth-termination system can be
designed as a foundation earthing elec-
trode, a ring earthing electrode and, for
structures with large surface areas, as a
cial cases, also as an individual earthing
electrode.
Foundation earthing electrodes must be
designed in accordance with DIN 18014.
The foundation earthing electrode must
be designed as a closed ring and
arranged in the foundations of the exter-
nal walls of the structure, or in the foun-
dation slab, in accordance with DIN
18014. For larger structures, the founda-
tion earthing electrode should contain
interconnections to prevent an exceed-
ing of the max. mesh size 20 m x 20 m.
The foundation earthing electrode must
be arranged to be enclosed by concrete
on all sides. For steel strips in non-rein-
forced concrete, the earthing electrode
must be installed on edge.
In the service entrance room, a connec-
tion must be established between foun-
dation earthing electrode and equipo-
tential bonding bar. According to DIN V
VDE V 0185-3, a foundation earthing
electrode must be equipped with termi-
nal lugs for connection of the down-con-
ductor systems of the external lightning
protection system to the earth-termina-
tion system.
Due to the risk of corrosion at the point
where a terminal lug comes out of the
concrete, supplementary corrosion pro-
tection should be considered (with PVC
sheath or by using stainless steel with
Material No. 1.4571).
The reinforcement of plate and strip
foundations can be used as a foundation
earthing electrode if the required termi-
nal lugs are connected to the reinforce-
ment and the reinforcements are inter-
connected via the joints.
Surface earthing electrodes must be
installed in a depth of at least 0.5 m.
The impulse earthing resistance of
earthing electrodes is a function of the
maximum value of the lightning current
and of the specific earth resistance. See
also Fig. 5.5.13. The effective length of
the earthing electrode for the lightning
current is calculated as an approximation
as follows:
Surface earthing electrode:
I eff = 0.28 î i ρE
earth rod:
I eff = 0.2 î i ρE
Ieff Effective length of the earthing elec-
trode in m
î Peak value of the lightning current
in kA
ρE Specific earth resistance in Ωm
The impulse earthing resistance Rst can
be calculated using the formulae in
(Table 5.5.1), where the effective length
of the earthing electrode Ieff is used for
the length I.
Surface earthing electrodes are always
advantageous when the upper soil layers
have less specific resistance than the sub-
soil.
If the ground is relatively homogeneous
(i.e. if the specific earth resistance at the
surface is roughly the same as it is deep
down) then, for a given earthing elec-
trode resistance, the construction costs of
surface earthing electrodes and earth
rods are roughly the same.
www.dehn.de
According to Fig. 5.5.15, a earth rod must
have only around half the length of a
surface earthing electrode.
If the conductivity of the ground is better
deep down than it is on the surface, e. g.
90
Earthing electrode resistance RA (Ω)
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
15
10
5
0
0 5 10 15 20
Fig. 5.5.15
because of ground water, then an earth
rod is generally more cost-effective than
the surface earthing electrode.
The issue of whether earth rods or sur-
face earthing electrodes are more cost-
effective in a particular case, can often
only be decided by measuring the specif-
ic earth resistance as a function of the
depth.
Since earth rods are easy to assemble and
achieve excellent constant earthing elec-
trode resistances without the need to dig
a trench and without damaging the
ground, these earthing electrodes are
also suitable for improving existing
earth-termination systems.
5.5.1 Earth-termination systems in
accordance with DIN V VDE V
0185-3
Earth-termination systems are the con-
tinuation of air-termination and down-
conductor systems to discharge the light-
ning current into the earth. Further func-
tions of the earth-termination system are
to create equipotential bonding
between the down conductors and a
potential control in the vicinity of the
walls of the structure.
It must be borne in mind that a common
earth-termination system for the various
electrical systems (lightning protection,
low voltage systems and telecommunica-
tions systems) is preferable. This earth-
termination system must be connected to
the equipotential bonding (MEB – main
equipotential bonding bar).
Since DIN V VDE V 0185-3 assumes a sys-
tematic lightning equipotential bonding,
no particular value is required for the
earth earthing electrode resistance. Gen-
erally, however, a low earth resistance
(less than 10 Ω, measured with low fre-
quency) is recommended.
The standard classifies earthing electrode
arrangements into Type A and Type B.
For both Type A and B earthing electrode
surface earthing electrode arrangements, the minimum earthing
earth rod
electrode length I1 of the earthing con-
ductor is a function of the type of light-
ning protection system (Fig. 5.5.1.1)
ρE = 400 Ωm
The exact specific earth resistance can
only be determined by on-site measure-
ρE = 100 Ωm ments using the “WENNER method”
(four-conductor measurement).
Earthing electrode Type A
30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
l1 (m)
Length of the earthing electrode l (m)
80
Earthing electrode resistance RA of surface
70
and earth rods as a function of the length of
the earthing electrode I
60
LPS
50 e of
typ
40 fL
30 type o
20
10 type of LPS III-IV
0
0 500 1000 1500 2000
Fig. 5.5.1.1 Min. lengths of earthing electrodes
Earthing electrode arrangement Type A
describes individually arranged horizon-
tal star-type earthing electrodes (surface
earthing electrodes) or vertical earthing
electrodes (earth rods), each of which
must be connected to a down-conductor
system.
There must be at least 2 earthing elec-
trodes Type A.
Lightning protection systems Type III and
IV require a minimum length of 5 m for
earthing electrodes. For lightning protec-
tion systems, Type I and II the length of
the earthing electrode is determined as a
function of the specific ground resist-
ance. The minimum length for earthing
electrodes I1 can be taken from
Fig. 5.5.1.1.
Minimum length of each earthing elec-
trode is:
I1 x 0.5 for vertical or slanted earthing
electrodes
I1 for star-type earthing electrodes
The values determined apply to each
individual earthing electrode.
For combinations of the various earthing
electrodes (vertical and horizontal) the
equivalent total length should be taken
into account.
The minimum length for the earthing
electrode can be disregarded if an earth
www.dehn.de
earthing electrode resistance of less than
10 Ω is achieved.
earth rods are generally driven in verti-
cally down to greater depths into natural
soil which is generally initially encoun-
tered below the foundations. Earthing
electrode lengths of 9 m have proved to
be advantageous. earth rods provide the
advantage of lying at greater depths in
soil layers whose specific resistance is
generally lower than in the areas closer
to the surface.
In frosty conditions, it is recommended to
consider the first 50 cm of a vertical
earthing electrode as ineffective.
Earthing electrodes Type A do not fulfil
the equipotential bonding requirements
between the down conductors and the
potential control.
I
Earthing electrodes Type B
I
PS I Earthing electrodes of the Type B
arrangement are ring earthing elec-
trodes around the structure to be pro-
tected, or foundation earthing elec-
2500 3000 trodes. The requirements on these
ρE (Ωm) earthing electrodes are described in DIN
18014.
If it is not possible to have a closed ring
outside around the structure, the ring
must be completed using conductors
inside the structure. Conduits or other
metal components which are perma-
5
nently electrically conductive can also be
used for this purpose. At least 80% of the
length of the earthing electrode must be
in contact with the earth to ensure that,
when calculating the separation dis-
tance, the earthing electrode Type B can
be used as the base.
The minimum lengths of the earthing
electrodes corresponding to the Type B
arrangement are a function of the type
of lightning protection system. For light-
ning protection systems Type I and II, the
minimum length for earthing electrodes
is also determined as a function of the
area A1 to be
considered
A = A1 = A2
A
r =
π
r l1
With respect to ring
or foundation
earthing electrodes,
r
the mean radius r of
the area enclosed by
circular area A2,
the earthing electro-
mean radius r de must not be shor-
ter than l1.
Fig. 5.5.1.2 Earthing electrode Type B - Determination
of the mean radius - example calculation
LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE 81
 12 m
area A1 5m
to be considered
A = A1 = A2
12 m
5m
r =
7m
r l1
7m
Example:
Residential building.
Sk III. l1 = 5 m
r
A1 = 109
circular area A2 109 m2
r =
mean radius r 3.14
r = 5.89 m
No further earthing
electrodes required!
Fig. 5.5.1.3 Earthing electrode Type B -
Determination of the mean radius
specific ground resistance (see also
Fig. 5.5.4).
For earthing electrodes Type B, the aver-
age radius r of the area enclosed by the
earthing electrode must be not less than
the given minimum length l1.
To determine the average radius r, the
area under consideration is transferred
into an equivalent circular area and the
5
radius is determined as shown in
Figs.5.5.1.2 and 5.5.1.3.
Below a calculation example:
If the required value of l1 is greater than
the value r corresponding to the struc-
ture, supplementary star-type earthing
electrodes or vertical earthing electrodes
(or slanted earthing electrodes) must be
added, their respective lengths lr (ra-
dial/horizontal) and lv (vertical) being giv-
en by the following equations:
lr = l1 − r
l1 − r
lv =
2 min. 1.5 m long, noticeably marked
The number of supplementary earthing
electrodes must not be less than the
number of down conductors, but a mini-
mum of 2. These supplementary earthing
electrodes shall be connected to the ring
earthing electrode so as to be equidis-
tant around the circumference.
If supplementary earthing electrodes
have to be connected to the foundation
earthing electrode, care must be taken
with the materials of the earthing elec-
trode and the connection to the founda-
tion earthing electrode. It is preferable to
82 LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE
use stainless steel with Material No.
1.4571 (Fig. 5.5.2.1).
The following systems can make addi-
tional demands on the earth-termination
A system, for example:
π
⇒ Electrical systems – conditions of dis-
connection from supply with respect
to the type of network (TN, TT, IT sys-
tems) in accordance with VDE 0100
Part 410
⇒ Equipotential bonding in accor-
dance with VDE 0100 Part 540
m2
⇒ Electronic systems – data informa-
tion technology
⇒ Antenna earthing installation in
accordance with VDE 0855
⇒ Electromagnetic compatibility
⇒ Substation in or near the structure in
accordance with VDE 0101 and 0141
5.5.2 Earth-termination systems,
foundation earthing elec-
trodes and foundation
earthing electrodes for spe-
cial structural measures
Foundation earthing electrodes –
Earthing electrodes Type B
DIN 18014 "Foundation earth electrode"
specifies the requirements on foundation
earthing electrodes.
Many national and international stan-
dards specify foundation earthing elec-
trodes as a preferred earthing electrode
because, when professionally installed, it
is enclosed in concrete on all sides and
hence corrosion-resistant. The hygro-
scopic characteristics of concrete general-
ly produce a sufficiently low earth
earthing electrode resistance.
The foundation earthing electrode must
be installed as a closed ring in the strip
foundation or the bedplate (Fig. 5.5.2.1)
and thus also acts primarily as the
equipotential bonding. The division into
Terminal lug
− steel strip 30 x 3.5 mm
− StSt round steel bar 10 mm
− round steel bar 10 mm with PVC coating
− fixed earthing point
Foundation
earthing electrode
− steel strip 30 x 3.5 mm
− round steel bar 10 mm
Fig. 5.5.2.1 Foundation earthing electrode with ter-
minal lug
additional terminal conductor
for forming meshes ≤ 20 m x 20 m
≤ 20 m
20 m
terminal lug
Recommendation:
Several terminal lugs e.g.
in every technical centre
Fig. 5.5.2.2 Mesh of a foundation earthing electrode
meshes ≤ 20 m x 20 m and the terminal
lugs to the outside required to connect
the down conductors of the external
lightning protection system, and to the
inside for equipotential bonding, must
be considered (Fig. 5.5.2.2).
According to DIN 18014, the installation
of the foundation earthing electrode is
an electrical engineering measure to be
carried out or monitored by a recognised
specialist electrical engineer.
The question of how to install the foun-
dation earthing electrode must be de-
cided according to the measure required
to ensure that the foundation earthing
electrode is enclosed on all sides as the
concrete is being poured in.
Fig. 5.5.2.3 Foundation earthing electrode
Installation in non-reinforced concrete
Non-reinforced foundations, e. g. strip
foundations of residential structures
(Fig. 5.5.2.3), spacers requires the use of.
Only by using the spacers at distances of
approx. 2 m, is it possible to ensure that
the foundation earthing electrode is
"lifted up" and can be enclosed on all
sides by concrete.
Installation in reinforced concrete
When using steel mats, reinforcement
cages or reinforcement irons in founda-
tions, it is not only possible to connect
the foundation earthing electrode to
these natural iron components. Further-
more, this should be done. The function
www.dehn.de
of the foundation earthing electrode is
thus made even more favourable. There
is no need to use spacers. The modern
methods of laying concrete and then
vibrating it, ensure that the concrete also
“flows” under the foundation earthing
electrode enclosing it on all sides.
Fig. 5.5.2.4 illustrates one possible appli-
cation for the horizontal installation of a
flat strip as a foundation earthing elec-
trode. The intersections of the founda-
tion earthing electrode must be connect-
ed so as to be capable of carrying cur-
rents. Galvanised steel is sufficient as
material of the foundation earthing elec-
trode.
Perimeter / Base insulation
The magnitude of the specific resistance
of the perimeter insulating plates is a
decisive factor when considering the
effect of perimeter insulation on the
earthing electrode resistance of founda-
tion earthing electrodes in conventional
arrangements in the foundation (strip
foundation, foundation slab). Thus, for a
polyurethane rigid foam with bulk densi-
ty 30 kg/m2, for example , a specific resist-
ance of 5.4 • 1012 Ωm is given. In contrast,
the specific resistance of concrete lies
between 150 Ωm and 500 Ωm. This alone
shows that, in the case of continuous
perimeter insulation, a conventional
foundation earthing electrode arranged
in the foundations has practically no
effect. The perimeter insulation also acts
as an electrical insulator.
The diagrams below illustrate the various
ways of insulating the foundations and
walls for structures with perimeter and
base insulation.
The arrangement of the foundation
earthing electrodes for each design is
shown in Figs.5.5.2.5 to 5.5.2.7 .
The exact arrangement of the earthing
electrode in the strip foundation with
insulated sides towards the outside and
the bedplate is not important
(Fig. 5.5.2.6).

terminal lug
concrete
soil

perimeter / MV Terminal Fixed earthing terminal for EB

base insulation Part No. 390 050 Part No. 478 800

Cross unit
Part No. 318 201
Fig. 5.5.2.4 Foundation earthing electrode in use insulation
moisture barrier
Terminal lugs to the outside into the
ground must have supplementary corro-
sion protection at the outlet point. Suit-
Distance holder
Part No. 290 001 basement floor

foundation slab
5
able materials are, for example, plastic
sheathed steel wire (owing to the risk of granular sub-grade course
fracture of the plastic sheath at low tem-
foundation earthing electrode
peratures, special care must be taken
during the installation), high-alloy stain- drainage Ref.: VDE series 35
less steel, Material No. 1.4571, or fixed
earthing terminals. Fig. 5.5.2.5 Arrangement of a foundation earthing electrode in a strip foundation (insulated basement wall)
If professionally installed, the earthing
electrode is enclosed on all sides by con- terminal lug
crete and hence corrosion-resistant. concrete
When designing the foundation
soil
earthing electrode, meshes no bigger
than 20 m x 20 m must be created. This perimeter /
mesh size bears no relation to the type of base insulation
lightning protection system of the exter- MV Terminal Fixed earthing terminal for EB
nal lightning protection system. Part No. 390 050 Part No. 478 800
Modern building techniques employ vari-
ous types of foundations in a wide vari-
ety of designs and sealing versions. Cross unit insulation
The thermal insulation regulations have Part No. 318 201 moisture barrier
also influenced the design of the strip insulating layer
foundations and foundation slabs. Distance holder
Part No. 290 001 basement floor
For foundation earthing electrodes
installed in new structures in accordance foundation slab
with DIN 18014, the insulation affects
their installation and arrangement.
granular sub-grade course
foundation earthing electrode
drainage Ref.: VDE series 35

Fig. 5.5.2.6 Arrangement of a foundation earthing electrode in a strip foundation

www.dehn.de LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE 83


concrete
soil
terminal lug
Mat No. 1.4571
perimeter /
base insulation
ring earthing electrode
Mat No. 1.4571
Fig. 5.5.2.7 Arrangement of a foundation earthing electrode in case of a closed floor slab (fully insulated)
If the foundation slab is completely insu-
lated, the earthing electrode must be
installed below the bedplate. Material
V4A (Material No. 1.4571) should be used
(Fig. 5.5.2.7).
5 It is efficient to install fixed earthing ter-
minals, especially for reinforced struc-
tures. In such cases, care must be taken
that the installation during the construc-
tion phase is carried out professionally
(Fig. 5.5.2.8).
Fig. 5.5.2.8 Fixed earthing point
Black, white tank
In structures erected in regions with a
high groundwater table, or in locations,
e. g. on hillsides, with “pressing” water,
the cellars are equipped with special
measures to prevent moisture penetrat-
ing. The outer walls surrounded by earth,
and the foundation slab are sealed
against the penetration of water to
84 LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE
against life hazards in accordance with
DIN VDE 0100 Part 410, and as a lightning
protection earthing electrode in accor-
dance with DIN V VDE V 0185.
MV Terminal Fixed earthing terminal for EB Foundation earthing electrodes for
Part No. 390 050 Part No. 478 800 structures with white tank
The name "white tank" is used to express
the opposite of "black tank": a "white
tank" receives no additional treatment
on the side facing the earth, hence it is
"white".
insulation The "white tank" is manufactured from a
Cross unit
Part No. 318 209 moisture barrier special type of concrete. The concrete
foundation slab body is waterproof, which, however,
does not mean that the concrete cannot
basement floor absorb any water. The concrete tank
being waterproof means that, if water
acts upon one side of it over a long peri-
od of time, it does not penetrate the con-
crete of the tank. On the side of the tank
granular sub-grad course away from the water, no water leaks
through nor become any damp patches
reinforcement Ref.: VDE series 35
evident.
If the concrete is manufactured correctly
and the "white tank" is 10 - 40 cm thick,
the maximum permissible value of
ensure that no troublesome moisture can water/concrete is 0.6 (W/C < 0.6). The
form on the inside of the wall. penetration depth of the water for this
Modern building techniques apply both concrete is then a maximum of 5 cm.
above mentioned processes for sealing If a closed round or steel strip ring is laid
against penetrating water. in the lowest layer of the concrete plate
One particular issue in this context is
whether the efficiency of a foundation
earthing electrode is still provided for
as a foundation earthing electrode, a suf-
ficient effect of the earthing electrode
can be expected.
maintaining the measures to protect
terminal lug
concrete
soil
MV Terminal Fixed earthing terminal for EB
Part No. 390 050 Part No. 478 800
insulation
Cross unit
Part No. 318 201 moisture barrier
foundation plate
basement floor
granular sub-grade course
foundation foil
drainage earthing electrode
reinforcement
Ref.: VDE series 35
Fig. 5.5.2.9 Arrangement of a foundation earthing electrode in case of a closed floor slab “white tank”
www.dehn.de
If a specific value of the earth earthing concrete
electrode resistance is required in order
soil
to maintain the protection against elec- terminal lug min. 150 cm
trical shock, e. g. in the TT system (auto- lead-in above ground water level
matic disconnection by means of RCDs or e.g. StSt (Mat. No. 1.4571)
fuses), this must be proved via corres-
ponding earthing measurements.

If the requirements on the earthing elec-

trode resistance to protect against life Max. ground
hazards (automatic disconnection of sup- water level
ply, shock hazard voltage) are not met, tank seal
supplementary earthing electrodes (star-
type earthing electrodes, earth rods, ring
earthing electrodes) must be installed.
Fig. 5.5.2.9 illustrates the arrangement of
the foundation earthing electrode in a
white tank.
foundation plate
Earthing electrodes for structures with
black tank granular sub-grade course
The name "black tank" derives from the
multi-layered strips of black bitumen ring earthing electrode soil
applied to the sections of the structure Ref.: VDE series 35
which are outside in the ground. The
body of the structure is coated with bitu- Fig. 5.5.2.10 Arrangement of the earthing electrode outside of the tank seal “black tank”
men/tar which is then covered by gener-
ally up to 3 layers of bitumen strips. concrete
A ring conductor set into the foundation soil
slab above the seal can act as the poten-
tial control in the structure. Due to the
high-impedance insulation to the out-
side, however, the earthing electrode is
ineffective.
In order to comply with the earthing
tank seal
5
requirements stipulated in the various
standards, an earthing electrode, e.g. a Bushing between earthing electrode and building
Max. ground Part No. 478 600
ring earthing electrode, must be installed water level
externally around the structure or below
all seals in the granular sub-grade course.
Wherever possible, the external earthing
electrode should be led into the structure
above the seal of the structure
(Fig. 5.5.2.10), in order to ensure the tank seal
tightness of the tank also in the long
term. A waterproof penetration of the foundation plate
"black tank" is only possible using a spe-
cial bushing between earthing electrode
granular sub-grade course
and building (Fig. 5.5.2.11).
ring earthing electrode soil
Fibre concrete foundation slabs
Ref.: VDE series 35
Fibre concrete is a type of concrete which
forms a heavy-duty concrete slab with Fig. 5.5.2.11 Arrangement of the earthing electrode outside of the tank seal “black tank”
steel fibres added to the liquid concrete
before hardening.
with reinforcement, it also provides a earthing conductor can be set in the con-
The steel fibres are approx. 6 cm long and
considerably higher elasticity. crete and, if it is made of galvanised
have a diameter of 1 –2 mm. The steel
The liquid concrete is discharged on site. material, it must be enclosed on all sides.
fibres are slightly wavy and are admixed
This allows to create large areas with a This is very difficult to do on site.
equally to the liquid concrete. The pro-
smooth surface and no joints. It is therefore recommended to install a
portion of steel fibres is around 20 –
It is used for bedplates in the founda- corrosion-resistant high-alloy stainless
30 kg/m3 concrete.
tions of large halls, for example. steel, Material No. 1.4571, below the sub-
The admixture gives the concrete slab
Fibre concrete has no reinforcement. This sequent concrete bedplate. The corres-
both a high compression strength and
requires a supplementary ring conductor ponding terminal lugs have to be consid-
also a high tensile strength and, com-
or a meshed network to be constructed ered.
pared to a conventional concrete slab
for installing earthing measures. The

www.dehn.de LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE 85

 Note:
A specialist must install the earthing con-
ductors and connecting components in
concrete. If this is not possible, the build-
ing contractor can undertake the work
only if it is supervised by a specialist.
5.5.3 Earth rod –
Earthing electrode Type B
DIN 18014 stipulates that all new struc-
tures must have foundation earthing
electrodes. The earth-termination system
of existing structures can be designed in
the form of a ring earthing electrode
(Fig. 5.5.3.1).
This earthing electrode must be installed
in a closed ring around the structure or, if
this is not possible, a connection to close
the ring must be made inside the struc-
ture.
80 % of the conductors of the earthing
electrode shall be installed so as to be in
contact with the earth. If this 80 % can-
not be achieved, it has to be checked if
supplementary earthing electrodes Type
A are required.
The requirements on the minimum
length of earthing electrodes according
to the type of lightning protection sys-
tem must be taken into account (see
Chapter 5.5.1).
5 When installing the ring earthing elec-
trode, care must be taken that it is
installed at a depth > 0.5 m and a dis-
tance of 1 m from the structure.
If the earthing electrode is driven in as
previously described, it reduces the step
voltage and thus acts as a potential con-
trol around the structure.
This earthing electrode should be
installed in natural soil. Setting it in
gravel or ground filled with construction
waste worsens the earth earthing elec-
trode resistance.
EB
Fig. 5.5.3.1 Ring earthing electrode around a residential building
86 LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE
When choosing the material of the no increase in diameter so that the
earthing electrode with regard to corro- earth rod is in close contact with the
sion, the local conditions must be taken ground along the whole of its length
into consideration. It is advantageous to ⇒ Self-closing when driving in the rods
use stainless steel. This earthing elec-
⇒ Simple to drive in with vibration
trode material does not corrode nor does
hammers (Fig. 5.5.4.2) or mallets
it subsequently require the earth-termi-
nation system to be refurbished with ⇒ Constant resistance values are
time-consuming and expensive measures achieved since the earth rods pene-
such as removal of paving, tar coatings or trate through the soil layers which
even steps, for installing a new flat strip. are unaffected by seasonal changes
in moisture and temperature
In addition, the terminal lugs must be
particularly protected against corrosion. ⇒ High corrosion resistance as a result
of hot-dip galvanising (zinc coating
70 µm thick)
5.5.4 Earth rods – Earthing elec-
trodes Type A
type S type Z type AZ
The sectional earth rods, System DEHN,
are manufactured from special steel and
hot-dip galvanised, or they consist of
high-alloy stainless steel with Material
No. 1.4571 (the high-alloy stainless steel
earthing electrode is used in areas
especially at risk from corrosion). The
particular feature of these earth rods is
their coupling point, which allows the
earth rods to be connected without
increasing their diameter.
Each rod has a bore at its lower end,
while the other end of the rod has a
corresponding spigot (Fig. 5.5.4.1).
With earthing electrode Type “S”, the
soft metal insert deforms as it is driven
into the bore, creating an excellent elec-
trical and mechanical connection.
With earthing electrode Type “Z”, the
high coupling quality is achieved with a
Fig. 5.5.4.1 Couplings of DEHN earth rods
multiply knurled spigot.
With earthing electrode Type “AZ”, the
high coupling quality is achieved with a
multiply knurled and shouldered spigot.
The advantages of the DEHN earth rods
are:
⇒ Special coupling:
Fig. 5.5.4.2 Driving the earth rod in with a work
scaffolding and a vibrating hammer
www.dehn.de
⇒ Galvanised earth rods also provide
hot- galvanised coupling points
⇒ Easy to store and transport since
individual rods are 1.5 or 1 m long.
5.5.5 Earthing electrodes in rocky
ground
In bedrock or stony ground, surface
earthing electrodes such as ring earthing
electrodes or star-type earthing elec-
trodes are often the only way of creating
an earth-termination system.
When installing the earthing electrodes,
the flat strip or round material is laid on
the stony ground or on the rock. The
earthing electrode should be covered
with gravel, wet-mix slag aggregate or
similar.
It is advantageous to use stainless steel
Material No. 1.4571 as earthing electrode
material. The clamped points should be
installed with particular care and be pro-
tected against corrosion (anticorrosive
band).
www.dehn.de
5.5.6 Intermeshing of earth-termi- environment and also on the characteris-
nation systems tics of the electronic installation. If a
larger structure comprises more than one
An earth-termination system can serve a
building, and if these are connected by
wide variety of purposes.
electrical and electronic conductors, then
The purpose of protective earthing is to
combining the individual earthing sys-
safely connect electrical installations and
tems can reduce the (total) earth resist-
equipment to earth potential and to pre-
vent life hazards and physical damage to
ance. In addition, the potential differ-
ences between the structures are also
property in the event of an electrical
reduced considerably. This diminishes
fault.
noticeably the voltage load of the electri-
The lightning protection earthing system
cal and electronic connecting cables. The
takes over the current from the down
interconnection of the individual earth-
conductors and discharges it into the
termination systems of the structure
ground.
should produce a meshed network. The
The functional earthing installation
meshed earthing network should be con-
serves to ensure that the electrical and
structed to contact the earth-termination
electronic installations operate safely
systems at the points where the vertical
and trouble-free.
down conductors are also connected. The
The earth-termination system of a struc-
smaller the mesh size of the network of
ture must be used for all earthing tasks
the earthing installation, the smaller the
together, i. e. the earth-termination sys-
potential differences between the struc-
tem deals with all earthing tasks. If this
tures in the event of a lightning stroke.
were not the case, potential differences
This depends on the total area of the
could arise between the installations
structure. Mesh sizes from 20 m x 20 m up
earthed on different earth-termination
to 40 m x 40 m have proved to be cost-
systems.
effective. If, for example, high vent stacks
Previously, a “clean earth” was some-
(preferred points of strike) are existing,
times applied in practice for functional
then the connections around this part of
earthing of the electronic equipment,
the plant should be made closer, and, if
separately from the lightning protection
possible, radial with circular interconnec-
and the protective earth. This is extreme-
tions (potential control). When choosing
ly disadvantageous and can even be dan-
gerous. In the event of lightning effects,
great potential differences up to a few
the material for the conductors of the
meshed earthing network, the corrosion
and material compatibility must be taken
5
100 kV occur in the earth-termination
into account.
system. This can lead to destruction of
electronic installations and also to life
hazards. Therefore, DIN V VDE V 0185-3
and -4 require continuous equipotential
bonding within a structure.
The earthing of the electronic systems
can be constructed to have a radial, cen-
tral or intermeshed 2-dimensional design
within a structure, (Fig. 5.5.6.1). This
depends both on the electromagnetic
workshop stock administration
power centre gate
production
production
production
Fig. 5.5.6.1 Intermeshed earth-termination system of an industrial facility
LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE 87
 5.5.7 Corrosion of earthing elec-
trodes
5.5.7.1 Earth-termination systems
with particular considerati-
on of corrosion
Metals in immediate contact with soil or
water (electrolytes) can be corroded by
stray currents, corrosive soils and the for-
mation of voltaic cells. It is not possible to
protect earthing electrodes from corro-
sion by completely enclosing them, i. e.
by separating the metals from the soil,
since all the usual sheaths employed until
now have had a high electrical resistance
and therefore negate the effect of the
earthing electrodes.
Earthing electrodes made of a uniform
material can be threatened by corrosion
from corrosive soils and the formation of
concentration cells. The risk of corrosion
depends on the material and the type
and composition of the soil.
Corrosion damage due to the formation
of voltaic cells is being increasingly
observed. This cell formation between
different metals with widely different
metal/electrolyte potentials has been
known for many years. What is not wide-
ly realised, however, is that the reinforce-
ments of concrete foundations can also
become the cathode of a cell and hence
accordance with DIN VDE 0101. Further-
more, DIN VDE 0100 Part 410 requires the
integration of conduits and other instal-
lations into the shock hazard protective
measures. Thus, the only way of prevent-
ing or at least reducing the risk of corro-
sion for earthing electrodes and other
installations in contact with them is
choosing suitable materials for the
earthing electrodes.
DIN VDE 0151 "Material and minimum
dimensions of earth electrodes with
respect to corrosion" has been available
since June 1986 as a white paper. Apart
from decades of experience in the field
of earthing technology, the results of
extensive preliminary examinations have
also been embodied in this standard.
Many interesting results are available
which are important for the earthing
electrodes, including those of lightning
protection systems.
The fundamental processes leading to
corrosion are explained below.
Practical anticorrosion measures
especially for lightning protection
earthing electrodes shall be derived from
this and from the wealth of material
already acquired by the VDE task force
on "Earthing electrode materials".
Terms used in corrosion protection and
Copper sulphate/Electrode
is a reference electrode which can hardly
be polarised, made of copper in satur-
ated copper sulphate solution.
The copper sulphate electrode is the
most common form of reference elec-
trode for measuring the potential of sub-
terranean metal objects (Fig. 5.5.7.1.1).
Corrosion cell
is a voltaic cell with different local partial
current densities for dissolving the metal.
Anodes and cathodes of the corrosion
cell can be formed
⇒ on the material
due to different metals (contact cor-
rosion) or different structural com-
ponents (selective or intercrystalline
corrosion).
⇒ on the electrolyte
caused by different concentrations
of certain materials having stimula-
tory or inhibitory characteristics for
dissolving the metal.
Potentials
Reference potential
Potential of a reference electrode with
respect to the standard hydrogen elec-
trode.

5 cause corrosion to other installations.

With the changes to the way buildings
are constructed – larger reinforced con-
crete structures and smaller free metal
areas in the ground – anode/cathode sur-
face ratio is becoming more and more
unfavourable, and the risk of corrosion
of the more base metals is inevitably
increasing.
In many cases it was previously suspected
that the corrosion was caused by other
influences, e. g. ac currents. By means of
extensive measurements it could be
proved, however, that ac currents with
the technical frequencies of 16 2/3 and
50 Hz at the current densities occurring
in practice could not be neglected as a
reason for the corrosion of bare metals
usually used in the ground nowadays.
An electrical isolation of installations act-
ing as anodes to prevent this cell forma-
tion is only possible in exceptional cases.
The aim nowadays is to integrate all
earthing electrodes including those
metal installations connected to the
earth in order to achieve equipotential
bonding and hence maximum safety
against shock hazard voltages at faults or
lightning strokes.
In high voltage installations, high volt-
age protective earthing electrodes are
increasingly being connected to low volt-
age operating earthing electrodes in
corrosion protection measurements
Corrosion
Electropotential
is the electrical potential of a metal or an
electron-conducting solid in an elec-
is the reaction of a metal material to its
trolyte.
environment which leads to impairment
of the characteristics of the metal mater-
ial and/or its environment. The reaction is
usually of electrochemical character.
Electrochemical corrosion
is corrosion during which electrochemical
processes occur. They take place exclu- 1
sively in the presence of an electrolyte. 2
Electrolyte
3
is an ion-conducting corrosive medium 4
(e. g. soil, water, fused salts).
Electrode
5
is an electron-conducting material in an
electrolyte. The system of electrode and 6
electrolyte forms a half-cell.
Anode
is an electrode from which a dc current
1 Electrolyte copper bar with hole for
enters the electrolyte. measurements
2 Rubber plug
Cathode
3 Ceramic cylinder with porous base
is an electrode from which a dc current 4 Glaze
leaves the electrolyte. 5 Saturated Cu/CuSO4 solution
6 Cu/CuSO4 crystals
Reference electrode
is a measuring electrode for determining Fig. 5.5.7.1.1 Application example of a non-polaris-
the potential of a metal in the elec- able measuring electrode (copper/cop-
trolyte. per sulphate electrode) for tapping a
potential within the electrolyte (cross-
sectional view)

88 LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE www.dehn.de

5.5.7.2 Formation of voltaic cells,
corrosion
The corrosion processes can be clearly
explained with the help of a voltaic cell.
If, for example, a metal rod is dipped into
an electrolyte, positively charged ions
pass into the electrolyte and conversely,
positive ions are absorbed from the elec-
trolyte from the metal band. In this con-
text one speaks of the “solution pres-
sure” of the metal and the "osmotic pres-
sure" of the solution. Depending on the
magnitude of these two pressures, either
more of the metal ions from the rod pass
into the solution (the rod therefore
becomes negative compared to the solu-
tion) or the ions of the electrolyte collect
in large numbers on the rod (the rod
becomes positive compared to the elec-
trolyte). A voltage is thus created
between two metal rods in the elec-
trolyte.
In practice, the potentials of the metals in
the ground are measured with the help
of a copper sulphate electrode. This con-
sists of a copper rod dipped into a satur-
ated copper sulphate solution (the refer-
ence potential of this reference electrode
remains constant).
Consider the case of two rods made of
different metals dipping into the same
electrolyte. A voltage of a certain magni-
tude is now created on each rod in the
electrolyte. A voltmeter can be used to
measure the voltage between the rods
(electrodes); this is the difference
between the potentials of the individual
electrodes compared with the elec-
trolyte.
How does it now come that current flows
in the electrolyte and hence that mater-
ial is transported, i.e. corrosion occurs?
If, as shown here, the copper and iron
electrodes are connected via an ammeter
outside the electrolyte, for example, the
following (Fig 5.5.7.2.1) is ascertained: in
the outer circuit, the current i flows from
+ to –, i.e. from the “nobler” copper elec-
trode according to Table 5.5.7.2.1 to the
iron electrode.
In the electrolyte, on the other hand, the
current i must therefore flow from the
"more negative" iron electrode to the
copper electrode to close the circuit. As a
generalisation, this means that the more
negative pole passes positive ions to the
electrolyte and hence becomes the
electrode I electrode II
Fe Cu
i
i
electrolyte
Fig. 5.5.7.2.1 Galvanic cell: iron/copper
anode of the voltaic cell, i.e. it dissolves.
The dissolution of the metal occurs at
those points where the current enters
the electrolyte.
A corrosion current can also arise from a
concentration cell (Fig 5.5.7.2.2). In this
case, two electrodes made of the same
metal dip into different electrolytes. The
electrode in electrolyte II with the higher
concentration of metal ions becomes
electrically more positive than the other.
Connecting the two electrodes enables
the current i to flow and the electrode,
which is electrochemically more nega-
tive, dissolves.

Definition Symbol(s) Measuring Copper Lead Tin Iron Zinc

unit
1 Free corrosion
potential in the soil1)
UM-Cu/CuSO
4
V 0 to – 0.1 – 0.5 to
– 0.6
– 0.4 to
– 0.6 2)
2)
– 0.5 to
– 0.8 3)
4)
– 0.9 to
– 1.1 5)
5)
5
2 Cathodic protective UM-Cu/CuSO V – 0.2 – 0.65 – 0.65 – 0.85 – 1.2
4
potential in the soil1)
3 Electrochemical K= ∆m kg / (A • year) 10.4 33.9 19.4 9.1 10.7
equivalent It
4 Linear corrosion rate Wlin = ∆ s/t mm/year 0.12 0.3 0.27 0.12 0.15
at J = 1 mA/dm2
1) Measured to saturated copper/copper sulphate electrode (Cu/Cu SO4).
2) Values are verified in presently performed tests. The potential of tin-coated copper depends on the thickness of the
tin coating. Common tin coatings up to now have amounted up to a few µm and are thus between the values of tin
and copper in the soil.
3) These values do also apply to lower alloyed types of iron. The potential of steel in concrete (reinforcing iron of
foundations) depends considerably on external influences. Measured to a saturated copper/copper sulphate electro-
de it generally amounts to – 0.1 to – 0.4 V. In case of metal conductive connections with wide underground installa-
tions made of metal with more negative potential, it is cathodically polarised and thus reaches values up to approxi-
mately
– 0.5 V.
4) In anaerobic soils the protective potential should be – 0.95 V.
5) Hot-dip galvanised steel, with a zinc coating according to the above mentioned table, has a closed external pure
zinc layer. The potential of hot-dip galvanised steel in the soil corresponds therefore to approximately the stated
value of zinc in the soil. In case of a loss of the zinc layer, the potential gets more positive. With its complete corro-
sion it can reach the value of steel.
The potential of hot-dip galvanised steel in concrete has approximately the same initial values. In the course of
time, the potential can get more positive. Values more positive than approx. – 0.75 V, however, have not been
found yet. Heavily hot-dip galvanised copper with a zinc layer of min. 70 µm has also a closed external pure zinc
layer. The potential of hot-dip galvanised copper in soil corresponds therefore to approx. the stated value of zinc in
soil. In case of a thinner zinc layer or a corrosion of the zinc layer, the potential gets more positive. Limit values
have still not been defined yet.
Table 5.5.7.2.1 Potential values and corrosion rates of common metal materials

www.dehn.de LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE 89

 i
electrode I
permeable to ions
i ments the extent of the available "polar-
electrolyte I electrolyte II
Fig. 5.5.7.2.2 Concentration cell
A concentration cell of this type can be
formed, for example, by two iron elec-
trodes, one of which is fixed in concrete
while the other lies in the ground
(Fig. 5.5.7.2.3).
i
electrode I
Fe
i
concrete
soil
Fig. 5.5.7.2.3 Concentration cell:
5 Iron in soil / Iron in concrete
Connecting these electrodes, the iron in
the concrete becomes the cathode of the
concentration cell and the one in the
ground becomes the anode; the latter is
therefore destroyed by ion loss.
For electrochemical corrosion it is gener-
ally the case that, the larger the ions and
the lower their charge, the greater the
transport of metal associated with the
current flow i, (i. e. i is proportional to
the atomic mass of the metal).
In practice, the calculations are carried
out with currents flowing over a certain
period of time, e. g. over one year. Table
5.5.7.2.1 gives values which express the
effect of the corrosion current (current
density) in terms of the quantity of metal
dissolved. Corrosion current measure-
ments thus make it possible to calculate
in advance how many grammes of a
metal will be eroded over a specific peri-
od.
Of more practical interest, however, is
the prediction if, and over which period
of time, corrosion will cause holes or pit-
ting in earthing electrodes, steel tanks,
pipes etc. So it is important whether the
prospective current attack will take place
in a diffuse or punctiform way.
For the corrosive attack, it is not solely
the magnitude of the corrosion current
90 LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE
which is decisive, but also, in particular,
its density, i.e. the current per unit of
electrode II area of the discharge area.
It is often not possible to determine this
current density directly. In such cases, this
is managed with potential measure-
isation" can be taken from. The polarisa-
tion behaviour of electrodes is discussed
only briefly here.
Let us consider the case of a galvanised
steel strip situated in the ground and
connected to the (black) steel reinforce-
ment of a concrete foundation (Fig
5.5.7.2.4). According to our measure-
ments, the following potential differ-
ences occur here with respect to the cop-
per sulphate electrode:
i electrodes decreases as well. The magni-
electrode I
electrode II
St/tZn
Fe
i potentials for a split circuit. The circuit is
soil concrete
Fig. 5.5.7.2.4 Concentration cell:
Galvanised steel in soil / steel (black)
in concrete
steel, (bare) in concrete: – 200 mV
steel, galvanised, in sand: – 800 mV
Thus there is a potential difference of
600 mV between these two metals. If
they are now connected above ground, a
current i flows in the outer circuit from
reinforced concrete to the steel in the
sand, and in the ground from the steel in
the sand to the steel in the reinforce-
ment.
The magnitude of the current i is now a
function of the voltage difference, the
conductance of the ground and the
polarisation of the two metals.
Generally, it is found that the current i in
the ground is generated by changes in
the material.
But a change to the material also means
that the voltage of the individual metals
changes with respect to the ground. This
potential drift caused by the corrosion
current i is called polarisation. The
strength of the polarisation is directly
proportional to the current density.
Polarisation phenomena now occur at
the negative and positive electrodes.
However, the current densities at both
electrodes are mostly different.
For illustration, we consider the follow-
ing example:
A well-insulated steel gas pipe in the
ground is connected to copper earthing
electrodes.
If the insulated pipe has only a few small
spots where material is missing, there is a
higher current density at these spots
resulting in rapid corrosion of the steel.
In contrast, the current density is low
over the much larger area of the copper
earthing electrodes where the current
enters.
Thus the polarisation is greater at the
more negative insulated steel conductor
than at the positive copper earthing elec-
trodes. The potential of the steel con-
ductor is shifted to more positive values.
Thus, the potential difference across the
tude of the corrosion current is therefore
electrode II also a function of the polarisation char-
St
acteristics of the electrodes.
The strength of the polarisation can be
estimated by measuring the electrode
split in order to avoid the voltage drop in
the electrolyte. Recording instruments
are usually used for such measurements
since there is frequently a rapid depolari-
sation immediately after the corrosion
current is interrupted.
If strong polarisation is now measured at
the anode (the more negative electrode),
i.e. if there is an obvious shift to more
positive potentials, then there is a high
risk that the anode will corrode.
Let us now return to our corrosion cell -
steel (bare) in concrete/steel, galvanised
in the sand (Fig. 5.5.7.2.4). With respect
to a distant copper sulphate electrode, it
is possible to measure a potential of the
interconnected cells of between – 200
and – 800 mV. The exact value depends
on the ratio of the anodic to cathodic
area and the polarisability of the elec-
trodes.
If, for example, the area of the rein-
forced concrete foundation is very large
compared to the surface of the gal-
vanised steel wire, then a high anodic
current density occurs at the latter, so
that it is polarised to almost the potential
of the reinforcement steel and destroyed
in a relatively short time.
High positive polarisation thus always
indicates an increased risk of corrosion.
In practice it is, of course, now important
to know the limit above which a positive
potential shifting means an acute risk of
corrosion. Unfortunately, it is not possi-
ble to give a definite value, which applies
in every case; the effects of the soil con-
ditions alone are too various. It is, how-
www.dehn.de
ever, possible to stipulate fields of poten-
tial shifting for natural soils.
Summary:
A polarisation below + 20 mV is generally
non-hazardous. Potential shifts exceed-
ing + 100 mV are definitely hazardous.
Between 20 and 100 mV there will always
be cases where the polarisation causes
considerable corrosion phenomena.
To summarise, one can stipulate:
The precondition for the formation of
corrosion cells (voltaic cells) is always the
presence of metal and electrolytic
anodes and cathodes connected to be
conductive.
Anodes and cathodes are formed from
⇒ Materials
• different metals or different surface
conditions of a metal (contact corro-
sion),
• different structural components
(selective or intercrystalline corro-
sion),
⇒ Electrolytes:
different concentration (e. g. salinity,
ventilation).
In corrosion cells, the anodic fields always
have a more negative metal/electrolyte
potential than the cathodic fields.
The metal/electrolyte potentials are
measured using a saturated copper sul-
phate electrode mounted in the immedi-
ate vicinity of the metal in or on the
ground. If there is a metal conductive
connection between anode and cathode,
then the potential difference gives rise to
a dc current in the electrolyte which pass-
es from the anode into the electrolyte by
dissolving metal before entering again
the cathode.
The “area rule” is often applied to esti-
mate the average anodic current density
IÄ:
U C − U A AK
IÄ = i in A/m 2
ϕC AA
UA, UC Anode or
cathode potentials in V
ϕK Specific polarisation resistance
of the cathode in Ωm2
AA, AC Anode or cathode
surfaces in m2
www.dehn.de
The polarisation resistance is the ratio of
the polarisation voltage and the total
current of a mixed electrode (an elec-
trode where more than one electrode
reaction takes place).
In practice, it is indeed possible to deter-
mine the driving cell voltages UA – UC and
the size of the areas AC and AA as an
approximation for estimating the rate of
corrosion. The values for ϕA (specific
polarisation resistance of the anode) and
ϕC, however, are not available to a suffi-
cient degree of accuracy. They depend on
the electrode materials, the electrolytes
and the anodic and cathodic current den-
sities.
The results of examinations available
until now allow the conclusion that ϕA is
much smaller than ϕC.
To ϕC applies:
steel in the ground approx. 1 Ωm2
copper in the ground approx. 5 Ωm2
steel in concrete approx. 30 Ωm2
From the area rule, however, it is clear,
that powerful corrosion phenomena
occur both on enclosed steel conductors
and tanks with small spots in the sheath
where material is missing, connected to
copper earthing electrodes, and also on
earthing conductors made of galvanised
steel connected to extended copper
earth-termination systems or extremely
large reinforced concrete foundations.
By choosing suitable materials it is possi-
ble to avoid or reduce the risk of corro-
sion for earthing electrodes. To achieve a
satisfactory service life, material mini-
mum dimensions must be maintained
(Table 5.5.8.1).
5.5.7.3 Choice of earthing electrode
materials
Table 5.5.8.1 is a compilation of the
earthing electrode materials and mini-
mum dimensions usually used today.
Hot-dip galvanised steel
Hot-dip galvanised steel is also suitable
for embedding in concrete. Foundation
earthing electrodes, earthing electrodes
and equipotential bonding conductors
made of galvanised steel in concrete may
be connected with reinforcement iron.
Steel with copper sheath
In the case of steel with copper sheath,
the comments for bare copper apply to
the sheath material. Damage to the cop-
per sheath, however, creates a high risk
of corrosion for the steel core, hence a
complete closed copper layer must
always be present.
Bare copper
Bare copper is very resistant due to its
position in the electrolytic insulation rat-
ing. Moreover, in combination with
earthing electrodes or other installations
in the ground made of more “base”
materials (e. g. steel), it has additional
cathodic protection, albeit at the
expense of the more "base" metals.
Stainless steels
Certain high-alloy stainless steels accord-
ing to DIN 17440 are inert and corrosion-
resistant in the ground. The free corro-
5
sion potential of high-alloy stainless
steels in normally aerated soils is mostly
close to the value of copper.
Stainless steels shall contain at least 16 %
chrome, 5 % nickel and 2 % molybde-
num.
Extensive measurements have shown
that only a high-alloy stainless steel with
the Material No. 1.4571, for example, is
sufficiently corrosion-resistant in the
ground.
Other materials
Other materials can be used if they are
particularly corrosion-resistant in certain
environments or are at least equally as
good as the materials listed in Table
5.5.8.1.
LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE 91
 5.5.7.4 Combination of earthing
electrodes made of different
materials
The cell current density resulting from
the combination of two different metals
installed in the earth to be electrically
conductive, leads to the corrosion of the
metal acting as the anode (Table
5.5.7.4.1). This essentially depends on the
ratio of the magnitude of the cathodic
area AC to the magnitude of the anodic
area AA.
The "Corrosion behaviour of earthing
electrode materials" research project has
found the following with respect to the
choice of earthing electrode materials,
particularly regarding the combination
of different materials:
A higher degree of corrosion is only to be
expected if the ratio of the areas is
AC
> 100
AA
Generally, it can be assumed that the
material with the more positive potential
will become the cathode. The anode of a
corrosion cell actually present can be
recognised by the fact that it has the
more negative potential when opening
the metal conductive connection.
5 Connecting steel installations in the
ground, the following earthing electrode
materials always behave as cathodes in
(covering) soils:
– bare copper,
– tin-coated copper,
– high-alloy stainless steel.
Steel reinforcement of concrete founda-
tions
The steel reinforcement of concrete
foundations can have a very positive
potential (similar to copper). Earthing
electrodes and earthing conductors con-
nected directly to the reinforcement of
large reinforced concrete foundations
Material with Galvanised
small area
Galvanised steel
Steel
Steel in concrete
Steel with Cu coating
Copper / StSt
Table 5.5.7.4.1 Material combinations of earth-termination systems for different area ratios (AK > 100 x AA)
92 LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE
should therefore be made of stainless Generally, bitumen coatings are not suffi-
steel or copper. cient. Sheathing not absorbing moisture
This also applies particularly to short con- offers protection, e. g. butyl rubber strips
necting cables in the immediate vicinity or heat-shrinkable sleeves.
of the foundations.
Underground terminals and connections
Installation of isolating spark gaps Cut surfaces and connection points in the
As already explained, it is possible to ground must be designed to ensure that
interrupt the conductive connection the corrosion resistance of the corrosion
between systems with very different protection layer of the earthing elec-
potentials installed in the ground by trode material is the same for both. Con-
integrating isolating spark gaps. Normal- nection points in the ground must there-
ly, then it is no longer possible for corro- fore be equipped with a suitable coating,
sion currents to flow. At upcoming e. g. sheathed with an anticorrosive
surges, the isolating spark gap operates band.
and interconnects the installations for
the duration of the surges. However, iso- Corrosive waste
lating spark gaps must not be installed When filling ditches and pits to install
for protective and operating earthing earthing electrodes, pieces of slag and
electrodes, since these earthing elec- coal must not come into immediate con-
trodes must always be connected to the tact with the earthing electrode mater-
plant. ial; the same applies to construction
waste.
5.5.7.5 Other anticorrosion meas-
ures
Galvanised steel connecting cables from
foundation earthing electrodes to down
conductors
Galvanised steel connecting cables from
foundation earthing electrodes to down
conductors shall be laid in concrete or
masonry up to above the surface of the
earth.
If the connecting cables are led through
the ground, galvanised steel must be
equipped with concrete or synthetic
sheathing or, alternatively, terminal lugs
with NYY cable, stainless steel or fixed
earthing terminals must be used.
Within the masonry, the earth conduc-
tors can also be led upwards without cor-
rosion protection.
Earth entries made of galvanised steel
Earth entries made of galvanised steel
must be protected against corrosion for a
distance of at least 0.3 m above and
below the surface of the earth.
Material with great area
Steel Steel Copper
steel in concrete StSt
+ + –– ––
+ + + +
+ + + +
+ + + +
+ + + +
www.dehn.de
 Min. dimension
5.5.8 Materials and minimum
dimensions for earthing elec-
Material Form Earth rod Earthing Earth plate Notes trodes
Ø conductor
Table 5.5.8.1 illustrates the minimum
Copper cable f 50 mm2 min. wire cross sections, shape and material of
Ø1,7 mm earthing electrodes.
round f 50 mm2 Ø8 mm
strip 50 mm2 min. thickness
2 mm 5.6 Electrical isolation of
round 20 mm the external lightning
pipe 20 mm min. wall protection system –
thickness 2 mm Separation distance
plate 500 x 500 mm min. thickness There is a risk of uncontrolled flashovers
2 mm between components of the external
grid-type 600 x 600 mm 25 x 2 mm lightning protection system and metal
plate cross section and electrical installations within the
structure, if there is insufficient distance
Steel galvanised 20 mm Ø10 mm between the air-termination or down-
round a,b conductor system on one hand, and
galvanised 25 mm min. wall metal and electrical installations within
pipe a,b thickness 2 mm the structure to be protected, on the
other.
galvanised 100 mm2 min. thickness
strip a 3 mm Metal installations such as water and air
galvanised 500 x 500 mm min. thickness conditioning pipes and electric power
plate a 3mm lines, produce induction loops in the
structure which are induced by impulse
galvanised 600 x 600 mm 30 x 3 mm
voltages due to the rapidly changing
grid-type plate cross section
magnetic lightning field. These impulse
copper-plated 14 mm

round c
min.
250 µm
coating with
voltages must be prevented from causing
uncontrolled flashovers which can also
possibly cause a fire.
5
Flashovers on electric power lines, for
99.9 % copper
example, can cause enormous damage to
bare, round e Ø10 mm the installation and the connected con-
bare or 75 mm2 min. thickness sumers. Fig. 5.6.1 illustrates the principle
galvanised 3 mm of separation distance.
strip d,e The formula for calculating the separa-
tion distance is difficult for the practi-
galvanised 100 mm2 min. wire-Ø tioner to apply.
cable d 1.7 mm
Stainless round 20 mm Ø10 mm h s Separation distance
steel g MDB Main distribution board
strip h 100 mm2 min. thickness
3 mm
s electrical installation
a The zinc coating must be smooth, continuous and free of residual flux,
mean value 50µm for round and 70 µm for flat material.
b The material must be formed correspondingly before galvanising. s
c The copper must be connected unresolvably with the steel. down
conductor
d Only permitted, if embedded completely in concrete. MDB
L

e Only permitted for the part of the foundation in contact with the earth, if
connected safely with the reinforcement every 5 m. EB
f Can also be tin-coated.
g Chrome ≥16 %, nickel ≥5 %, molybdenum ≥2 %, carbon ≤0.03 %. soil
h Also permitted as earth entry.
foundation metal installation
Note: Aluminium and aluminium alloys must not be laid in soil earthing electrode

Table 5.5.8.1 Material, form and min. cross sections of earthing electrodes Fig. 5.6.1 Illustration - Separation distance

www.dehn.de LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE 93

 The formula is:
kc
s = ki i L(m)
km
where
ki is a function of the type of light-
ning protection system chosen,
kc is a function of the geometric
arrangement (current splitting
coefficient),
km is a function of the material in the
point of proximity and
L (m) is the geometric distance measured
from the point of the proximity to
the next point of the lightning
equipotential bonding level.
The coefficient ki (induction factor) of
the corresponding type of lightning pro-
tection system represents the threat from
the steepness of the current.
The following values are defined for the
types of lightning protection system:
Type of LPS Coefficient ki
I 0.1
II 0.075
5 III / IV 0.05
Factor kc takes into consideration the
splitting of the current in the down-con-
ductor system of the external lightning
protection system. The standard gives
different formulae for determining kc. In
order to achieve the separation distances
which still can be realised in practice, par-
ticularly for higher structures, it is recom-
mended to install ring conductors, i. e. to
intermesh the down conductors. This
intermeshing balances the current flow,
which reduces the required separation
distance.
The material factor km takes into consid-
eration the insulating characteristics of
the surroundings. This calculation
assumes the electrical insulating charac-
teristics of air to be a factor of 1. All other
solid materials used in the construction
industry (e. g. masonry, wood, etc.) insu-
late only half as well as air.
Material Factor km
Air 1 a different distance L.
Solid material 0.5
94 LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE
Further material factors are not given.
Deviating values must be proved by tech-
nical tests. A factor of 0.7 is specified for
the GRP material (glass fibre-reinforced
plastic) used in the products of the isol- s
ated air-termination systems from DEHN
+ SÖHNE (DEHNiso distance holder,
DEHNiso Combi). This factor can be used
down conductor
for calculation in the same way as the s
other material factors.
Length L is not the actual length of the
down conductor but the plumb distance
(vertical measurement), measured from
the point of the “proximity” to the next
equipotential bonding or the next light- soil
ning equipotential bonding level.
earthing electrode
Each structure with lightning equipoten-
Fig. 5.6.2 Potential difference with increasing height
tial bonding has an equipotential surface
of the foundation earthing electrode or The calculation of the current splitting
earthing electrode near the surface of
coefficient kc is often difficult because of
the earth. This surface is the reference the different structures.
plane for determining the distance L.
If a single air-termination rod is erected
next to the structure, for example, the
If a lightning equipotential bonding level total lightning current flows in this one
is to be created for high structures, then air-termination conductor and down
for a height of 20 m, for example, the conductor. Factor kc is therefore equal to
lightning equipotential bonding must be 1.
carried out for all electrical and elec- The lightning current cannot split here.
tronic conductors and all metal installa- Therefore it is often difficult to maintain
tions. The lightning equipotential bond- the separation distance. In Fig. 5.6.3, this
ing must be realised by using surge pro-
tective devices Type I.
Otherwise, even for high structures, the
can be achieved by erecting the mast fur-
ther away from the structure.
equipotential surface of the foundation
earthing electrode/earthing electrode
protective angle
shall be used as reference point and basis
for the length L. Higher structures are
making it more and more difficult to
maintain the required separation dis-
tances.
The potential difference between the I
structure’s installations and the down
conductors is equal to zero near the
earth’s surface. The potential difference
increases with increasing height. This can
be imagined as a cone standing on its tip
(Fig. 5.6.2).
Hence, the separation distance to be
maintained is greatest at the tip of the
building or on the surface of the roof s
and becomes less towards the earth-ter-
mination system. Fig. 5.6.3 Air-termination mast with kc = 1
This requires a multiple calculation of the
distance from the down conductors with Almost the same situation occurs for air-
termination rods e.g. for roof-mounted
structures. Until it reaches the next con-
nection of the air-termination rod to the
air-termination or down conductor. This
defined path carries 100 % (kc = 1) of the
lightning current (Fig. 5.6.4).
www.dehn.de

kc = 1
s The example of a detached house with a
M
soil
Fig. 5.6.4 Flat roof with air-termination rod and ven-
tilation outlet
If two air-termination rods or air-termi-
nation masts have a cable spanned
between them, the lightning current can
split between two paths (Fig. 5.6.5).
Owing to the different impedances,
however, the splitting is not always 50 %
to 50 %, since the lightning flash does
not always strike the exact centre of the
arrangement but can also strike along
the length of the air-termination system.
The most unfavourable case is taken into
account by calculating the factor kc in the
formula.
This calculation assumes an earth-termi-
nation system Type B. If single earthing
electrodes Type A are existing, these
must be interconnected.
h+c
kc =
2h + c
h plumb distance, height of the build-
ing
c mutual distance of the air-termina-
tion rods or air-termination masts
c s
h
Fig. 5.6.5 Determination of kc with two masts with
overspanned cable and an earthing elec-
trode Type B
www.dehn.de
The following example illustrates the cal-
culation of the coefficient for a gable
roof with two down conductors
(Fig. 5.6.6). An earth-termination system
Type B (ring or foundation earthing elec-
trode) is existing.
9 + 12
kc = = 0.7
2 i 9 + 12
f The required distance between the ridge
c
Fig. 5.6.6 Determination of kc for a gable roof with
2 down conductors
The arrangement of the down-conductor
system shown in Fig. 5.6.6 should no
longer be installed, not even on a
detached house either. The current split-
ting coefficient is significantly improved
by using two further down conductors,
i.e. a total of 4 (Fig. 5.6.7). The following
formula is used in the calculation:
1 c
kc = + 0.1 + 0.2 3
2n h The actual distance of 0.5 m is not suffi-
h plumb distance, height up to the
gable of the building
c mutual distance of the down con-
ductors
n is the total number of down conduc-
tors
c
h
Fig. 5.6.7 Gable roof with 4 down conductors
1 12
kc = + 0.1 + 0.2 3
2i4 9
Result: kc ≈ 0.45
lightning protection system Type III
(ki = 0.05) and both values of the factor kc
determined (for 2 and 4 down conduc-
tors) is intended to illustrate the calcula-
tion of the separation distance s for the
ridge conductor.
conductor and the electrical conductor,
e. g. for the loft lighting, shall be deter-
mined (Fig. 5.6.8).
The roofing and the roof structure are
situated between the two conductors.
The material factor is thus km = 0.5.
An earth-termination system Type B
(foundation earthing electrode, ring
earthing electrode) is taken as given.
Separation distance for 2 down conduc-
tors (first example kc = 0.7) height of the
structure 9 m, the electrical conductor is
installed at a height of 8.5 m (distance
from ridge conductor 0.5 m).
kc
s = ki L(m)
km
5
0.7
s = 0.05 8.5( m )
0.5
Result: s = 0.595 m
cient since the required separation dis-
tance is 0.595. There is a risk of uncon-
trolled flashovers.
lamp
electrical conductor
L
Fig. 5.6.8 Separation distance s
Problematic installation of electrical
conductors
LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE 95
 If the number of down conductors is Due to local conditions (e. g gates, sup- distance s for a flat roof with roof-
increased by 2 (second example kc = 0.46), port distances) down conductors can mounted structures is determined below.
the separation distance results as follows: often not be arranged equally
(Fig. 5.6.10). In such cases, a correction Example:
0.45 factor must be incorporated into the cal- Domelights were installed on a structure
s = 0.05 8.5( m ) culation. with a lightning protection system
0.5 Type III. They are controlled electrically.
Result: s ≈ 0.39 m 1 cs cd
kc = + 0.1 + 0.2 3 6
Structure data:
The required separation distance of 2n h cs ⇒ Length 40 m
0.39 m (less than 0.5 m) between the roof Width 30 m
lighting and the air-termination system n total number of down conductors Height 14 m = perimeter 140 m
on the ridge is maintained. cs distance from the next down con- ⇒ Earth-termination system, founda-
ductor tion earthing electrode Type B
To determine the separation distance at ⇒ Number of earthing electrodes: 11
cd distance from the next down con-
the height of the eaves gutter (5 m above
ductor on the other side ⇒ Distance of the down conductors:
ground level), the calculation is as fol-
h plumb distance, height of the build- min. 12 m
lows:
ing max. 16 m
0.45 ⇒ Height of the electrically controlled
s = 0.05 5( m ) domelights: 1.5 m
0.5
The calculation of the current splitting
Result: s ≈ 0.23 m coefficient kc for the structure is:

Consequently, in case of a wall thickness 1 12 16

of 24 cm, an electrical conductor could be kc = + 0.1 + 0.2 3 6

installed in the inside of the structure, cs cd 2i11 14 12

h

e.g. in a cable duct , without risk of Result: kc ≈ 0.345

uncontrolled flashovers.
It is not necessary to calculate the factor
For structures with flat roofs, the current kc for the air-termination rod kc = 1.
splitting coefficient is calculated as fol-

5 lows, if the down conductors are distrib-

uted equally on the perimeter (same dis-
tance). In this case, an earthing electrode
Fig. 5.6.10
Values of coefficient kc in case of asym-
metric arrangement of the down con-
ductors
Calculation of the separation distance for
the top edge of the roof of the structure:

arrangement Type B is a precondition The material factor km is set as for solid

If electrical structures or domelights are
(Fig. 5.6.9). building material km = 0.5.
located on the flat roof (Fig. 5.6.11), then
two current splitting coefficients must be
1 c 0.345
kc = + 0.1 + 0.2 3 taken into account when calculating the
s = 0.05 14 ( m )
2n h separation distance. For the air-termina- 0.5
tion rod, kc = 1 to the next air-termina-
h plumb distance, height of the build- tion/down conductor. Result: s ≈ 0.48 m
ing The calculation of the current splitting
c mutual distance of the down con- coefficient kc for the subsequent course Calculation of the separation distance for
ductors of the air-termination system and down the air-termination rod:
n the total number of down conduc- conductors is performed as explained
tors above. For illustration, the separation The material factor is km = 0.5 because of
the position of the air-termination rod
on the flat roof.

1
s = 0.05 1.5( m )
0.5
Result: s = 0.15 m
h

c s

Fig. 5.6.9 Values of coefficient kc in case of a km = 0.5

meshed network of air-termination con-
ductors and an earthing Type B
Fig. 5.6.11 Material factors of an air-termination
rod on a flat roof

96 LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE www.dehn.de

This calculated separation distance
would be correct if the air-termination
rod were erected on the surface of the
earth (lightning equipotential bonding
level).
In order to obtain the separation dis-
ent heights by integrating all metal
installations and all electrical and elec-
tronic conductors by means of lightning (A)
current arresters (SPD Type I), then the
following calculation can be carried out.
This involves calculating distances to con-

h1
tance completely and correctly, the sepa- ductors installed on only one lightning da df

Ia

If
ration distance of the structure must be equipotential bonding level, and also to
added. those installed over several levels.
dg
This assumes an earth-termination sys-

h2
Stot = sstructure + sair-termination rod db

Ib
tem in form of a foundation or ring

Ig
= 0.48 m + 0.15 m
earthing electrode (Type B) (Fig. 5.6.12).
Stot = 0.63 m

h3
As previously explained, supplementary dc

Ic
This calculation states that a separation ring conductors can be installed around
distance of 0.63 m must be maintained at the structure (truss) to balance the light-
the uppermost point of the domelight. ning current. This has a positive effect on

h4
This separation distance was determined the separation distance. Fig. 5.6.13 illus- dd

Id
using the material factor 0.5 for solid trates the principle of ring conductors
materials. around the structure, without installing a
Erecting the air-termination rod with a cs cd
lightning equipotential bonding level by

concrete base, the “full insulating char-
acteristics” of the air are not available at
the foot of the air-termination rod
(Fig. 5.6.11).
If lightning equipotential bonding levels
are created for high structures at differ-
hn
using lightning current arresters at the
height of the ring conductors.
Fig. 5.6.12 Values of coefficient kc in case of an
intermeshed network of air-termination,
ring conductors interconnecting the
down conductors and an earthing Type B

1 3 cs · 6 cd
kc1 = + 0.1 + 0.2 ·
2n L cs 7th floor
kc1
L1

6th floor
ring conductor

5th floor
1
kc2 = + 0.1
n
L2

kc2 4th floor

3rd floor
down conductor

2nd flor

1 kc3
kc3 = + 0.01
L3

n 1st floor

ground floor

Fig. 5.6.13 Principle of ring conductors installed around a building

www.dehn.de LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE 97

 The individual segments are assigned dif-
ferent current splitting coefficients kc. If
the separation distance for a roof-
mounted structure shall now be deter-
mined, the total length from the equipo-
tential surface of the earthing electrode
to the uppermost tip of the roof-mount-
ed structure must be used as the base
(sum of the partial lengths). If the total
separation distance sg is to be deter-
mined, the following formula must be
used for the calculation:
ki
( kc1 i l1 + kc 2 i l2 + kc 3 i l3 )
sg =
km
With this design of supplementary ring
conductors around the structure, it is still
the case that no partial lightning cur-
rents whatsoever are conducted into the
structure.
Even if the numerous down conductors
and supplementary ring conductors do
not allow a maintaining of the separa-
tion distance for the complete installa-
tion, it is possible to define the upper
edge of the structure as the lightning
equipotential bonding surface (+/– 0).
This roof-level lightning equipotential
bonding surface is generally implement-
ed for extremely high structures where it
5 is physically impossible to maintain the
separation distance.
This requires the integration of all metal
installations and all electrical and elec-
tronic conductors into the equipotential
bonding by means of lightning current
arresters (SPD Type I). This equipotential
bonding is also directly connected to the
external lightning protection system.
These previously described measures
allow to set the separation distances on
the upper edge of the structure to 0. The
disadvantage of this type of design is
that all conductors, metal installations,
e. g. reinforcements, lift rails and the
down conductors as well, carry lightning
currents. The effect of these currents on
electrical and electronic systems must be
taken into account when designing the
internal lightning protection system
(surge protection).
It is advantageous to split the lightning
current over a large area.
98 LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE
5.7 Step and contact
voltages
DIN V VDE V 0185-3 draws attention to
the fact that, in special cases, contact or
step voltages outside a structure in the
vicinity of the down conductors can pre-
sent a life hazard even though the light-
ning protection system was designed
according to the latest standards.
Special cases are, for example, the
entrances or canopies of structures fre-
quented by large numbers of people
such as theatres, cinemas, shopping cen-
tres, where bare down conductors and
earthing electrodes are present in the
immediate vicinity.
Structures which are particularly exposed
(at risk of lightning strokes) and freely
accessible to members of the public may
also be required to have measures pre-
venting intolerably high step and contact
voltages.
These measures (e. g. potential control)
are primarily applied to steeples, obser-
vation towers, mountain huts, floodlight
masts in sports grounds and bridges.
Gatherings of people can vary from place
to place (e. g. in shopping centre
entrances or in the staircase of observa-
tion towers). Measures to reduce step
and contact voltages are therefore only
required in the areas particularly at risk.
Possible measures are potential control,
isolation of the site or the additional
measures described below. The individ-
ual measures can also be combined with
each other.
Definition of contact voltages
UE Earth potential
Ut Touch voltage
FE
1m
ϕ
Ut
ϕFE
US
Fig. 5.7.1 Illustration of touch voltage and step voltage
Contact voltage is a voltage acting upon
a person between his position on the
earth and when touching the down con-
ductor.
The current path leads from the hand via
the body to the feet (Fig. 5.7.1).
For a structure built with a steel skeleton
or reinforced concrete, there is no risk of
intolerably high contact voltages provid-
ed that the reinforcement is safely inter-
connected or the down conductors are
installed in concrete.
Moreover, the contact voltage can be dis-
regarded for metal façades if they are
integrated into the equipotential bond-
ing and/or used as natural components
of the down conductor.
If a reinforced concrete with a safe tie-in
of the reinforcement to the foundation
earthing electrode is already present
under the surface of the earth in the
areas outside the structure which are at
risk, then this measure already improves
the curve of the gradient area and acts as
a potential control. Hence step voltages
can be left out of the considerations.
The following measures can reduce the
risk of someone being injured by touch-
ing the down conductor:
⇒ the probability of people accummu-
lating can be reduced with informa-
tion or prohibition signs; barriers can
also be used.
⇒ the position of the down conductors
can be changed, e. g. not in the
entrance of the structure
US Step voltage
ϕ Potential of earth surface
FE Foundation earthing electrode
ϕFE + SE
UE
reference earth
www.dehn.de
⇒ the down conductor is sheathed in
insulating material (min. 3 mm cross-
linked polyethylene with an impulse
withstand voltage of 100 kV
1.2/50 µs)
⇒ The specific resistance of the surface
layer of the earth at a distance of up
to 3 m around the down conductor
must be not less than 5000 Ωm.
A layer of asphalt with a thickness of
5 cm generally meets this require-
ment
⇒ Compression of the meshed network
of the earth-termination system by
means of potential control
Note
A downpipe, even if it is not defined as a
down conductor, can present a hazard to
persons touching it. In such a case, one
possibility is to replace the metal pipe
with a PVC one (height: 3 m; zone 0c ).
Definition of step voltages
Step voltage is a part of the earthing
potential which can be bridged by a per-
son taking a step over 1 m. The current
path runs via the human body from one
foot to the other (Fig. 5.7.1).
The step voltage is a function of the form
of the gradient area.
As is evident from the illustration, the
step voltage decreases as the distance
from the structure increases. The risk to
persons therefore decreases the more
after they are from the structure.
earth in the field to be protected does If a potential control is implemented for
not exceed 1 Ω/m. a structure, it must be installed as follows
(Fig. 5.7.2):
To achieve this, an existing foundation The down conductors must be connected
earthing electrode should be supple- to all the rings of the potential control.
mented by a ring earthing electrode The individual rings must be connected
installed at a distance of 1 m and a depth at least twice, however.
of 0.5 m. If the structure already has an
earth-termination system in form of a If ring earthing electrodes (control
ring earthing electrode, this is already earthing electrodes) cannot be designed
“the first ring” of the potential control. to be circular, their ends must be con-
Additional ring earthing electrodes nected to the other ends of the ring
should be installed at a distance of 3 m earthing electrodes. There should be at
from the first one and the subsequent least two connections within the individ-
ones. The depth of the ring earthing ual rings (Fig. 5.7.5).
electrode shall be increased (in steps of
0.5 m) the more after it is from the struc-
ture (see Table 5.7.1).
Distance from Depth
the building
1st Ring 1m 0.5 m
2nd Ring 4m 1.0 m
3rd Ring 7m 1.5 m
4th Ring 10 m 2.0 m
Table 5.7.1 Ring distances and depths of the
potential control
5

The following measures can be taken to

reduce the step voltage:
⇒ Persons can be prevented from
accessing the hazardous areas (e. g.
by barriers or fences)
⇒ Reducing the mesh size of the
earthing installation network –
0.5 m

Potential control
⇒ The specific resistance of the surface
1m

layer of the earth at a distance of up

1.5 m

to 3 m around the down-conductor

2m

system must be not less than

5000 Ωm.
A layer of asphalt with a thickness of
5 cm generally meets this require-
ment

If large numbers of people frequently 1m 3m 3m 3m

congregate in a hazardous area near to
the structure to be protected, then a
potential control must be provided to
reference
earth

protect them.

The potential control is sufficient if the

symbolic course
resistance gradient on the surface of the
Fig. 5.7.2 Potential control - Illustration and symbolic course of the gradient area

www.dehn.de LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE 99

 clamped points

connection to e.g. existing foundation

(reinforced concrete)
3m 3m 1m
1m 3m 3m

mast
mast

Fig. 5.7.4 Potential control performance for a flood Fig. 5.7.5 Connection control at the ring / foun-
Fig. 5.7.3 Possible potential control in entrance area light or cell site mast dation earthing electrode
of the building

When choosing the materials for the ring

earthing electrodes, attention must be
paid to the possible corrosion load
(Chapter 5.5.7).
Stainless steel V4A (Material No. 1.4571)
has proved to be a good choice for tak-
ing the formation of voltaic cells
between foundation and ring earthing
electrodes into account.
Ring earthing electrodes can be designed
as round wires Ø10 mm or as flat strips
30 x 3.5 mm.

100 LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE www.dehn.de

6. Internal lightning protection
6.1 Equipotential bonding for
metal installations
Equipotential bonding in accordance
with DIN VDE 0100-410 and -540
Equipotential bonding is required for all
newly installed electrical power installa-
tions. Equipotential bonding in accor-
dance with DIN VDE 0100 removes
potential differences, i. e. prevents haz-
ardous contact voltages between the
protective conductor of the low voltage
electrical power installation and metal,
water, gas and heating pipes, for exam-
ple.
According to DIN VDE 0100-410, equipo-
tential bonding consists of
main equipotential bonding
and
supplementary equipotential bonding
Every building must be given a main
equipotential bonding in accordance
with the standards stated above
(Fig. 6.1.1).
The supplementary equipotential bond-
ing is intended for those cases where the
conditions for automatic disconnection
of supply cannot be met, or for special
areas which conform to the VDE series
0100 Group 700.
Main equipotential bonding
The following extraneous conductive
parts have to be directly integrated into
the main equipotential bonding:
⇒ main equipotential bonding conduc-
tor in accordance with DIN VDE
0100-410
⇒ foundation earthing electrodes or
lightning protection earthing elec-
trode
⇒ central heating system
⇒ metal water supply pipe
⇒ conductive parts of the building
structure (e. g. lift rails, steel skele-
ton, ventilation and air conditioning
ducting)
⇒ metal drain pipe
⇒ internal gas pipe
⇒ earthing conductor for antennas (in
accordance with DIN VDE 0855
Part 1)
⇒ earthing conductor for telecommu-
nication systems (in accordance with
DIN VDE 0800 Part 2)
⇒ protective conductors of the electri-
cal installation in accordance with
DIN VDE 0100 (PEN conductor for TN
systems and PE conductors for TT sys-
tems or IT systems)
www.dehn.de
⇒ metal shields of electrical and elec- the earth potential can be introduced via
tronic conductors them.
The following installation components
⇒ metal cable sheaths of power supply
cables up to 1000 V have to be integrated indirectly into the
main equipotential bonding via isolating
⇒ earth termination systems for special
spark gaps:
power installations with nominal
voltages above 1 kV in accordance ⇒ installations with cathodic corrosion
with DIN VDE 0141, if no intolerably protection and stray current protec-
high earthing potential can be trans- tion measures in accordance with
fered DIN VDE 0150
⇒ earth-termination systems of special
Normative definition in DIN VDE 0100- power installations with nominal
200:1998-06 of an extraneous conductive voltages above 1 kV in accordance
component: with DIN VDE 0101 and 0141, if intol-
A conductive unit not forming part of erably high earthing potential can
the electrical installation and liable to be transfered
introduce a potential, generally the ⇒ railway earth for electric ac and dc
earth potential. railways in accordance with DIN VDE
Note: Extraneous conductive compo- 0115 (railway lines of the German
nents also include conductive floors and
walls, if an electrical potential including
equipotential bonding of bathroom
metal element going
through the building
onally isolated (e.g. cathodic
buried installation, operati-
protected tank installation)
230/400 V
(e.g. lift rails)
remote signalling system
5
antenna
kWh
8
6 4
1
6
to PEN
6
distribution network
SEB
heating
6 6
insulating element
Z
IT system
waste 7
gas water
water
4
Z
3 3
2
foundation earthing electrode terminal lug for external
or lightning protection earthing electrode lightning protection
1 Equipotential bonding bar 4 Lightning current arrester 7 Terminal lug
2 Foundation earthing electrode 5 Terminal 8 Isolating spark gap
3 Wedge connector 6 Pipe clamp
Fig. 6.1.1 Principle of lightning equipotential bonding consisting of lightning and main equipotential bonding
LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE 101
 Railway may only be connected with
Main equipotential Supplementary
written authorisation).
bonding equipotential bonding
⇒ measuring earth for laboratories, if
they are separate from the protec- Normal 0.5 • cross section between two 1 • cross section
tive conductors of the largest bodies of the smaller
Fig. 6.1.1 shows the terminals and the protective conductor protective conductor
respective components of the main of the installation
equipotential bonding. between a body 0,5 • cross section
and an extraneous of the protective
Design of the earth-termination system conductive part conductor
for equipotential bonding
Minimum 6 mm2 with mechanical 2,5 mm2 Cu or
Since special power installation require protection equival. conductivity
certain earthing resistances (conditions
for automatic disconnection of supply) without mechanical 4 mm2 Cu or
and the foundation earthing electrodes protection equival. conductivity
provide good earthing resistances if Possible 25 mm2 Cu – –
installed cost-effectively, foundation limit or equivalent
earthing electrodes complement equipo- conductivity
tential bonding in an optimum and
effective way. The design of a foundation Table 6.1.1 Cross sections for equipotential bonding conductors
earthing electrode is governed by DIN
18014, which, for example requires ter- Equipotential bonding bars This standard contains the requirement
minal lugs for the earthing busbar. More on inspection of terminals with a cross
Equipotential bonding bars are a central
exact descriptions and designs of a foun- section greater than 16 mm2 to carry
component of equipotential bonding
dation earthing electrodes can be found lightning currents. Reference is made
which must clamp all the connecting con-
in Chapter 5.5. therein to the testing of the lightning
ductors and cross sections occuring in
practice to have high contact stability; protection units in accordance with DIN
If a foundation earthing electrode is used V VDE V 0185-201.
it must be able to carry current safely and
as lightning protection earthing elec- If the requirements in the previously
have sufficient corrosion resistance.
trode, additional requirements may need mentioned standard are met, then this
DIN VDE 0618 Part 1:1989-08 contains
to be taken into consideration; they can component can also be used for light-
details of the requirements on equipo-
be taken from Chapter 5.5. ning equipotential bonding in accor-
tential bonding bars for the main
equipotential bonding. It defines the fol- dance with DIN V VDE V 0185-4.
Equipotential bonding conductors
lowing connection possibilities as a mini-
Equipotential bonding conductors mum: Terminals for equipotential bonding
should, as long as they fulfil a protective Terminals for equipotential bonding
⇒ 1 x flat conductor 4 x 30 mm or round
function, be labelled the same as protec- must provide a good and permanent
conductor Ø 10 mm
tive conductors, i. e. green/yellow. contact.
Equipotential bonding conductors do ⇒ 1 x 50 mm2

6 not carry operating currents and can

therefore be either bare or insulated.
The decisive factor for the design of the
⇒ 6 x 6 mm2 to 25 mm2
⇒ 1 x 2. 5 mm2 to 6 mm2
Integrating pipes into the equipotential
bonding
In order to integrate pipes into the
main equipotential bonding conductors These requirements on an equipotential equipotential bonding, earthing pipe
in accordance with DIN VDE 0100-540 is bonding bar are met by K12 (Fig. 6.1.2). clamps corresponding to the diameters
the cross section of the main protective
of the pipes are used (Figs. 6.1.3 and
conductor. The main protective conduc-
6.1.4).
tor is the one coming from the origin of
an electrical installation.
In any case, the minimum cross section of
the main equipotential bonding conduc-
tor is at least 6 mm2 Cu. 25 mm2 Cu has
been defined as a possible maximum.
The supplementary equipotential bond-
ing (Table 6.1.1) must have a minimum
cross section of 2.5 mm2 Cu for a protect-
ed installation, and 4 mm2 Cu for an
unprotected installation.

For earthing conductors for antennas

(according to DIN VDE 0855 Part 1), the
minimum cross section is 16 mm2 Cu,
25 mm2 Al or 50 mm2 steel.
Fig. 6.1.2 K12 Equipotential bonding bar
Part No. 563 200
Fig. 6.1.3 Pipe earthing clamp, Part No. 408 014

102 LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE www.dehn.de


Fig. 6.1.4 Pipe earthing clamp, Part No. 407 114
Pipe earthing clamps made of stainless
steel, which can be universally adapted
to the diameter of the pipe, offer enor-
mous advantages for assembly.
Fig. 6.1.5 Pipe earthing clamp, Part No. 540 910
These pipe earthing clamps can be used
to clamp pipes together that are made of
different materials (e. g. steel, copper
and stainless steel). These components
allow also a straight-through connection.
Fig. 6.1.6 shows equipotential bonding
of heating pipes with straight-through
connection.
Fig. 6.1.6 Equipotential bonding with straight-
through connection
www.dehn.de
Test and inspection of the equipotential
bonding
Before commissioning the electrical
power installation, the connections must
be inspected to ensure that their condi-
tion and effectiveness are sound.
A low-impedance conductance to the
various parts of the installation and to
the equipotential bonding is recom-
mended. The guide value for the connec-
tions for the equipotential bonding pro-
vided in DIN V VDE V 0185-3 Main
Section 3 Subclause 4.3.1 is < 1 Ω.
Supplementary equipotential bonding
If the conditions for automatic discon-
nection of supply of the respective power
supply system or a part thereof cannot be
met, a supplementary local equipotential
bonding is required. The reason behind
this is to connect all simultaneously acces-
sible parts with each other. The aim is to
keep any touch voltage which may occur
as low as possible.
Moreover, the supplementary equipo-
tential bonding must be used for installa-
tions or parts of installations of IT systems
with insulation monitoring.
The supplementary equipotential bond-
ing is also required if the environmental
conditions in special installations or parts
of installations mean a particular risk.
The VDE series 0100 subgroup 700 draws
attention to the supplementary equipo-
tential bonding for operational facilities,
rooms and installations of a particular
type.
These are, for example,
⇒ DIN VDE 0100-701 for bathing/spa
facilities
⇒ DIN VDE 0100-702 for swimming
pools
⇒ DIN VDE 0100-705 for agricultural
premises
The difference to the main equipotential
bonding is the fact that the cross sections
of the conductors can be chosen to be
smaller (Table 6.1.1), and also this supple-
mentary equipotential bonding can be
limited to a particular location.
6.2 Equipotential bonding for
low voltage electrical
power installations
Equipotential bonding for low voltage
electrical power installations as part of
the internal lightning protection in
accordance with DIN V VDE V 0185-3,
subclause 5.2.4, represents an extension
of the main equipotential bonding bar in
accordance with DIN VDE 0100-410 (Fig.
6.1.1).
In addition to all extraneous conductive
parts, this also integrates the low voltage
electrical power installation into the
equipotential bonding. The special fea-
ture of this equipotential bonding is the
fact that a tie-up to the equipotential
bonding is only possible via suitable
surge protective devices. The require-
ments made of such surge protective
devices are described more in detail in
chapters 7.5.2 and 8.1.
Analogous to the equipotential bonding
with metal installations (see chapter 6.1),
the equipotential bonding for the low
voltage electrical power installation
should also be carried out at the exact
location where the installation enters the
property. The requirements governing
the installation of the surge protective
devices in the unmetered area of the low
voltage electrical power installation
(main distribution system) are described
in the directive of the Association of the
Electricity Industry (VDEW) “Class B surge
6
Fig. 6.2.1 DEHNbloc NH lightning current arrester
installed in a busbar terminal field of a
meter installation (refer to Fig. 6.2.2)
LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE 103
 protective devices – Directive for the use
in main distribution systems” (see sub-
clauses 7.5.2 and 8.1) (Figs. 6.2.1 and
6.2.2).
Fig. 6.2.2 Detail from Fig. 6.2.1
6.3 Equipotential bonding for
information technology
installations
Internal lightning protection or lightning
equipotential bonding requires that all
metal conductive components such as
cable lines and shields at the entrance to
the building shall be incorporated into
the equipotential bonding so as to cause
as little impedance as possible. Examples
of such components include antenna
6 lines, telecommunication lines with met-
al conductors, and also fibre optic sys-
tems with metal elements. The lines are
connected with the help of elements
capable of carrying lightning current
(arresters and shielding terminals). A
convenient installation site is the point
where cabling going outside the building
transfers to cabling inside the building.
Both the arresters and the shielding ter-
minals must be chosen to be appropriate
to the lightning current parameters to be
expected.
In order to minimise induction loops
within buildings, the following addition-
al steps are recommended:
⇒ cables and metal pipes shall enter
the building at the same location
⇒ power lines and data links shall be
laid spatially close but shielded
⇒ avoiding of unnecessarily long cables
by laying lines directly
104 LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE
100%
45°
(LPS Type III)
î~50% î~50%
î~16%
î~70% î~14%
EB
Fig. 6.3.1 Possible splitting of lightning current for an antenna installation
according to DIN VDE 0855 Part 300
Antenna installations:
For reasons connected with radio engi-
neering, antenna installations are gener-
ally mounted in an exposed location.
Therefore they are more affected by
surges, especially in the event of a direct
lightning stroke. They must be integrat-
ed into the equipotential bonding in
accordance with DIN VDE 0855 Part 300
and must reduce the risk of being affect-
ed through their design, (cable structure,
connectors and fittings) or suitable addi-
tional measures. Antenna elements that
are connected to an antenna feeder and
cannot be connected directly to the
equipotential bonding, as this would
s
Fig. 6.3.2 Isolated construction of a lightning protection system at a cell site
The electromagnetic lightning field can induce
high voltages in installation loops.
These consist of RF, data and power supply
lines as well as equipotential bonding sys­
tems.
transmitter/
receiver
data line
power supply
to "remote earth"
affect their functioning, should be pro-
tected by arresters.
Expressed simply, it can be assumed that
50 % of the direct lightning current flows
away via the shields of all antenna lines.
If an antenna installation is dimensioned
for lightning currents up to 100 kA
(10/350 µs) acc. to LPS type III, the light-
ning current splits so that 50 kA flow
through the earth conductor and 50 kA
via the shields of all antenna cables.
Antenna installations not capable of
carrying lightning currents must there-
fore be equipped with air-termination
systems in whose protection area the
antennas are located. choosing a suitable
cable, the respective partial lightning
separation distance s must be maintained
s
antenna
antenna mast
equipotential bonding
www.dehn.de
current share must be determined for
each antenna line involved in down con-
ducting. In unfavourable cases, the light-
ning current on an antenna cable can
split in a ratio of 2:1 between shield and
line. The required cable dielectric
strength can be determined from the
coupling resistance, the length of the
antenna line and the amplitude of the
lightning current (Fig. 6.3.1).
According to the current DIN V VDE V
0185-3 standard, antenna installations
mounted on buildings can be protected
by means of
– air-termination rods
– elevated wires
– or taut ropes
In each case the separation distance s
must be maintained in the areas protect-
ed against lightning strokes.
The electrical isolation of the lightning
protection system from conductive com-
ponents of the building structure (metal
structural parts, reinforcement etc.), and
the isolation from electric lines in the
building, prevent partial lightning cur-
rents from penetrating into control and
supply lines and hence protect sensitive
electrical and electronic devices from
being affected or destroyed (Fig. 6.3.2).
Fibre optic installations
Fibre optic installations with metal ele-
ments can normally be divided into the
following types:
⇒ cables with metal-free core but with
metal sheath (e. g. metal damp-
proofing) or metal supporting ele-
ments
⇒ cables with metal elements in the
core and with metal sheath or metal
supporting elements
⇒ cables with metal elements in the
core, but without metal sheath.
For all types of cable with metal ele-
ments, the minimum peak value of the
lightning current, which adversely affects
the transmission characteristics of the
optical fibre, must be determined. Cables
capable of carrying lightning currents
must be chosen, and the metal elements
must be connected to the equipotential
bonding bar either directly or via an SPD.
⇒ Metal sheath: termination by means
of shield terminals e. g. SAK, at the
entrance of the building
⇒ Metal core: termination by means of
earthing clamp e. g. SLK, near splice
box
www.dehn.de
⇒ Prevention of potential equalising
currents: connect indirectly via spark
gap e. g. DEHNgap, BLITZDUCTOR
CT, rather than directly
Telecommunication lines:
Telecommunication lines with metal con-
ductors normally consist of cables with
balanced or coaxial cabling elements of
the following types:
⇒ cables with no additional metal ele-
ments
⇒ cables with metal sheath (e. g. metal
damp-proofing) and/or metal sup-
porting elements
⇒ cables with metal sheath and addi-
tional lightning protection reinforce-
ment
The splitting of the partial lightning cur-
rent between IT lines can be determined
using the procedures in DIN V VDE V
0185-3 or 4. The individual cables must
be integrated into the equipotential
bonding as follows:
a) Unshielded cables must be connect-
ed by SPDs which are capable of
carrying partial lightning currents.
Partial lightning current of the line:
number of individual lines = partial
lightning current per line.
b) If the cable shield is capable of carry-
ing lightning currents, the lightning
current flows via the shield. How-
ever, capacitive/inductive interfer-
ences can reach the lines and make it
necessary to use surge arresters.
Requirements:
⇒ The shield at both ends must be con-
nected to the main equipotential
bonding to be capable of carrying
lightning currents (Fig. 6.3.3)
Fig. 6.3.3 SAK shield connection system capable of
carrying lightning currents
⇒ In both buildings where the cable
ends, the lightning protection zone
concept must be applied, and the
active lines must be connected in the
same lightning protection zone (usu-
ally LPZ 1)
⇒ If an unshielded cable is laid in a
metal pipe, this must be treated like
a cable with a cable shield which is
capable of carrying lightning cur-
rents.
c) If the cable shield is not capable of
carrying lightning currents, then:
⇒ for the terminal connected at both
ends, the procedure is the same as
for signal lines in an unshielded
cable. Partial lightning current of the
cable / number of individual lines + 1
(shield) = partial lightning current
per line
⇒ if the shield is not connected at both
ends, it has to be treated as if it were
not there; partial lightning current
of the cable / number of individual
lines = partial lightning current per
line
If it is not possible to determine the exact
line load, it is recommendable to make
assumptions which are on the conserva-
tive side. A tried and tested method for
this is using the proximity for the
telecommunication line of a private
home. Assuming LPS type III, we then
have a maximum load per line of 2.5 kA
(10/350).
Telekom costumer
TAE
6
IT installation
3 OUT 4
Blitzductor CT
BCT MOD ...
BLITZDUCTOR CT
1 IN 2
BCT MOD BD 110
5 kA (10/350 µs)
APL
Fig. 6.3.4 Lightning equipotential bonding for
connection of a telecommunication device
BLITZDUCTOR CT (application permitted
by German Telekom)
LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE 105
6

106 LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE www.dehn.de

7. Protection of electrical and electronic systems against LEMP
7.1 Lightning protection
zones concept
A lightning protection system according
to DIN V VDE V 0185-3 protects persons
and material assets of value in the build-
ings, but it does not protect the electrical
and electronic systems in the buildings
which are sensitive to transient high-
energy surges resulting from the light-
ning discharge. It is precisely such systems
- in the form of building management,
telecommunication, control and security
systems - which are rapidly becoming
common in practically all areas of resi-
dential and functional buildings. The
owner/operator places very high
demands on the permanent availability
and reliability of such systems.
The protection of electrical and electron-
ic systems in buildings and structures
against surges resulting from the light-
ning electromagnetic pulse (LEMP) is
based on the principle of Lightning Pro-
tection Zones (LPZ). According to this
principle, the building or structure to be
protected must be divided into internal
lightning protection zones according to
the level of threat posed by LEMP
(Fig. 7.1.1). This enables areas with differ-
ent LEMP risk levels to be adjusted to the
immunity of the electronic system.
air-termination system
spatial shield
ventilation
down-
conductor
system
l.v. power
supply system
IT system
Fig. 7.1.1 Lightning protection zones concept
www.dehn.de
With this flexible concept, suitable LPZs
can be defined according to the number,
type and sensitivity of the electronic
devices/systems. From small local zones
to large integral zones which can encom-
pass the whole building. Depending on
the type of threat posed by lightning, the
following lightning protection zones are
defined:
External zones
⇒ LPZ 0A – at risk from direct lightning
strokes, from impulse currents up to
whole lightning current and from
the whole electromagnetic field of
the flash of lightning
⇒ LPZ 0B – protected against direct
lightning strokes, at risk from
impulse currents up to whole light-
ning current and from the whole
electromagnetic field of the flash of
lightning
⇒ LPZ 0C – protected against direct
lightning strokes, at risk from
impulse currents up to whole light-
ning current and from the whole
electromagnetic field of the flash of
lightning
Risk of contact and step voltages to
living beings. Defined within a
height of 3 m and a distance of 3 m
from ground level outside a building
or structure
M Lightning current arrester
terminal device
Internal zones
⇒ LPZ 1 – impulse currents limited by
the splitting of the current and by
surge protective devices (SPDs) at the
zone boundaries. The electromag-
netic field of the lightning flash can
be attenuated by spatial shielding.
⇒ LPZ 2... n – impulse currents further
limited by the splitting of the current
and by surge protective devices
(SPDs) at the zone boundaries. The
electromagnetic field of the light-
ning flash is usually attenuated by
spatial shielding.
The requirements on the internal zones
must be defined according to the immu-
nity of the electrical and electronic sys-
tems to be protected.
At the boundary of each internal zone,
the equipotential bonding must be car-
ried out for all metal components and
utility lines entering the building or
structure. This is done directly or with
suitable SPDs. The zone boundary is
formed by the shielding measures.
Lightning equipotential bonding
Lightning current arrester
(SPD Type 1)
Local equipotential bonding
Surge arrester
(SPD Type 2, SPD Type 3)
Lightning equipotential bonding
Local equipotential bonding
Surge arrester
7
foundation earthing electrode
steel reinforcement
LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE 107
 Fig. 7.1.2 Example for realisation of the lightning protection zones concept
Fig. 7.1.2 illustrates an example of how
to realise the measures described for the
lightning protection zones concept.
7 only be achieved with a minimum of
108 LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE
7.2 LEMP protection manage-
ment
For new buildings and structures, opti-
mum protection of electronic systems can
expense if the electronic systems are
designed together with the building and
before its construction. In this way, build-
ing components such as the reinforce-
ment, the metal girders and metal but-
tresses can be integrated into the LEMP
protection management.
For existing buildings and structures, the
cost of the LEMP protection is usually
higher than for new buildings and struc-
tures. If, however, the LPZs are chosen
appropriately and existing installations
are used or upgraded, the costs can be
reduced.
If the risk analysis in accordance with DIN
V VDE V 0185-2 shows that LEMP protec-
tion is required, this can only be achieved
if
⇒ the measures are designed by a light-
ning protection specialist having
profound knowledge of EMC,
⇒ there is close coordination on all
aspects of the work between the
building experts (e. g civil and electri-
cal engineers) and those experts in
LEMP protection and
⇒ the management plan according to
Table 7.2.1 (Appendix D of DIN V
VDE V 0185-4) is adhered to.
A concluding risk analysis must prove
that the residual risk is less than the
acceptable risk.
www.dehn.de
 Step Aim Measure must be taken by
(if relevant)
Initial risk analysis a Assessing of the necessity of a LEMP • Lightning protection expert b
protection based on the acceptable risk • Owner
Specification of the LEMP Preparation of the protection concept • Lightning protection expert
protection with the definition of • Owner
• Lightning protection levels defining • Architect
important lightning current parameters • Designer of the electronic systems
• LPZ and their boundaries • Designer of important installations
• Spatial shielding
• Equipotential bonding networks
• Earth-termination systems
• Leading and shielding of conductors
• Equipotential bonding of supply lines
at the boundaries of the LPZ
Design of LEMP General drawings and descriptions • Engineering office or equivalent
protection
Preparation of the tender documentation
Detailed drawings and schedules
for the installation
LEMP protection system Quality of the installation • Lightning protection expert
Installation and • Installer of the LEMP protection system
Documentation
inspection • Engineering office
Possible revision of detailed drawings • Inspection representative
Acceptance of Inspection and documentation • Independent lightning protection expert
LEMP protection system of the system • Inspection representative
Concluding risk Inspection to ascertain that the residual • Independent lightning protection expert
analysis a risk is smaller than the acceptable risk • Inspection representative
Repeat inspections Ensuring of an appropriate LEMP • Independent lightning protection expert
protection system • Inspection representative
a see DIN V VDE V 0185-2 (VDE V 0185 Part 2)
b with profound knowledge of EMC and installation practice

Table 7.2.1 LEMP protection management for new buildings and for comprehensive modifications of the construction or the utilisation of buildings

7.3 Calculation of the mag- including the simulated lightning chan- To consider whether it is the effect of the
nel. electromagnetic field of the first partial
netic shielding attenua-
tion of building/room
shielding
Lightning current and the associated
electromagnetic field represent the pri-
mary source of interference for devices
and installations requiring protection in
7
a property. Fig. 7.3.1 shows the principle
of how lattice structures work. The fun-
damentals of the calculation are
described in the DIN V VDE V 0185-4 stan-
dard.
The fundamentals of the calculation are
based on assumptions and estimates. The
complex distribution of the magnetic
field inside lattice-shaped shields is deter-
mined with a first approximation. The
High field strength, great magnetic Reduction of the field strength / great
formulae for the determination of the
fields / induced voltages close to the magnetic fields; induced voltages close
magnetic field are based on numerical down conductor to the down conductor by means of
calculations of the magnetic field. The lattice shields
calculation takes into account the mag-
netic field coupling of each rod in the lat- Fig. 7.3.1 Reduction of the magnetic field by means of lattice shields
tice-shaped shield with all other rods,

www.dehn.de LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE 109

 lightning stroke or the subsequent light- shield for LPZ 0A – 1
ning stroke which is the more critical without shield
interference variable for the electric field of the
H0 = i
installation requiring protection, the cal- lightning
2pSa
culations must be done with the maxi- channel
mum value of the current of the short
volume Vs
stroke (if/max) and the maximum value of
for electronic
the current of the long stroke (is/max) cor- devices H0 H1
w
responding to the type of lightning pro-
tection system used. sa with shield
ds/...
The shielding effect of lattice-shaped H1 = H0
shields in the event of direct lightning 10 SF/20
strokes can be calculated using the for-
mula shown in Fig. 7.3.2. This view is Fig. 7.3.5 Magnetic field at a distant lightning stroke
based on the fact that the lightning separation distance (LEMP) DIN V VDE V 0185-...
stroke can happen at any point on the Nearby lightning stroke: Direct lightning stroke:
ds/1 = w • SF/10 ds/2 = w
roof. (Fig. 7.3.5), can be described by the qual-
The values calculated for the magnetic ity of the shielding.
Fig. 7.3.3 Volume for electronic devices within LPZ 1
field apply to the safety volume Vs inside The shielding factor SF can be calculated
lattice-shaped shields, which are defined as shown in Table 7.3.1.
by the separation distance ds/... (Fig. The fundamentals of the calculation of The results of this calculation of the mag-
7.3.3). the shielding effect of lattice-shaped netic field are valid for a safety volume Vs
shields for nearby lightning strokes are (Fig. 7.3.3), located within the lightning
explained more in detail by Figs. 7.3.4 protection zone with a separation dis-
and 7.3.5. tance ds/1 from the shielding.
direct lightning stroke
into a shielded building The separation distance ds/1 results in:

i w
dr
dw
w (LEMP) DIN V VDE V 0185-...
H1 = kH i
dw √dr [A/m]
Fig. 7.3.2 Magnetic field at a lightning stroke
(LEMP) DIN V VDE V 0185-...
This safety volume takes into account
maximum values of the magnetic field
strength directly at the lattice structure, a
field of the
lightning
channel
H0
H0 =
2pSa [A/m]
sa
Fig. 7.3.4 Magnetic field at a lightning stroke
Fig. 7.3.4 shows the formation of the
electromagnetic field whose reduction in
field strength is indirectly proportional to
the distance sa. The magnitude of the
magnetic field inside a protected vol-
ume, e. g. lightning protection zone 1
ds /1 = w i SF / 10( m )
w corresponds to the mesh size of the
lattice-shaped shield in metres
SF shielding factor
i
Implementation of the magnetic shield-
attenuation of building/room shielding
Particularly important when shielding
against magnetic fields, and hence for
the installation of lightning protection
zones, are extended metal components,
e. g. metal roofs and façades, steel rein-
forcements in concrete, expanded metals
in walls, lattices, metal supporting struc-
tures and pipe systems existing in the
building. The meshed connection creates
an effective electromagnetic shield.

7 factor which the approximation formula

does not sufficiently take into account. IT
devices may only be installed inside of
Material
25 kHz
SF (dB)
1 MHz
w = mesh size (m)
(w ≤ 5 m)
(first short stroke) (subsequent stroke)
volume Vs.
Copper
20 • log (8.5/w) 20 • log (8.5/w) r = rod radius (m)
Aluminium

(8.5/w) µr ≈ 200
Steel 20 • log 20 • log (8.5/w)
√1 + 18 • 10-6 / r2

Example: Steel lattice

w (m) r (m) dB at 25 kHz dB at 1 MHz
0.012 0.0010 44 57
0.100 0.0060 37 39
0.200 0.0090 32 33
0.400 0.0125 26 27
Table 7.3.1 Magnetic attenuation of lattices at a nearby lightning stroke
DIN V VDE V 0185-...

110 LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE www.dehn.de

Fig. 7.3.6 shows the principle how a steel a
4 4
reinforcement can be developed into an 1
electromagnetic cage (hole shield). In 1 Metal cover of the attic
practice, however, it will not be possible 2 Steel reinforcing rods
to weld or clamp together every junction 2 3 Intermeshed conductors,
in large buildings and structures. The b superimposed of the reinforcement

usual practice is to install a meshed sys-
tem of conductors into the reinforce-
ment, said system typically having a size
of a ≤ 5 m. This meshed network is con-
nected in an electrically safe way at the
crosspoints, e. g. by means of clamps. The
reinforcement is “electrically hitched”
onto the meshed network at a typical dis-
tance of b ≤ 1 m. This is done on the
building side, for example by means of
tie connections.
Mats made of construction steel in con-
crete are suitable for shielding purposes.
When upgrading existing installations,
such steel mats are also laid later. For this
type of design, the steel mats must be
galvanised to protect them from corro-
sion.
a
4 Connection of the air-termination system
3
5 Internal equipotential bonding bar
6
6 Connection capable of carrying
lightning currents
7 Connection, e.g. tie connection
7
8 Ring earthing electrode (if existing)
5
9 Foundation earthing electrode
9
8 (Typical dimension: a ≤ 5 m, b ≤ 1 m)
Fig. 7.3.6 Use of reinforcing rods of a building or structure for shielding and equipotential bonding

These galvanised steel mats are then laid

on roofs, for example, so that they over-
lap, or applied either externally or inter-
nally to the exterior wall to provide
shielding for the building.

Fig. 7.3.7a Galvanised construction steel mats for
shielding the building
Figs. 7.3.7a and 7.3.7b show the subse-
quent installation of galvanised steel
mats on the roof of a building.
Fig. 7.3.7b Use of galvanised construction steel
mats for shielding, e.g. in case of plan-
ted roofs
To bridge expansion joints, connect the
reinforcement of precast concrete com-
ponents, and for terminals on the exter-

earthing ring conductor

concrete tape conductor holder

fasade concrete support

steel support

fixed earthing point

7
base plate

Fig. 7.3.8 Shielding of a structure or building

www.dehn.de LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE 111

 nal earth-termination system or the
internal equipotential bonding system,
the building must already be equipped
with sufficient fixed earthing points.
Fig. 7.3.8 shows an installation of this
type, which must be taken into consider-
ation for designing the preliminary
building works.
The magnetic field inside the building or
structure is reduced over a wide frequen-
cy range by means of reduction loops,
which arise as a result of the meshed
equipotential bonding network. Typical
mesh sizes are a ≤ 5 m. The interconnec-
tion of all metal components both inside,
as well as on the buildings and structures
results in a three-dimensional meshed
equipotential bonding network.
Fig. 7.3.9 shows a meshed equipotential
bonding network with appropriate ter-
minals.
If an equipotential bonding network is
installed in the lightning protection
zones, the magnetic field calculated
according to the formulae stated above
is typically further reduced by a factor of
2 (corresponds to 6 dB).
7.3.1 Cable shielding
Cable shields are used to reduce the
effect of the interference on the active
lines, and the interference emitted from
the active lines to neighbouring systems.
From the point of view of lightning and
surge protection, attention must be paid
to the following applications of shielded
lines:
⇒ No shield earthing
Some installation systems recommend a
shielded cable but, at the same time, for-
bid shield earthing, (e. g. EIB). If there is
7 no shielding terminal, the shield is not
effective against interferences and must
therefore be considered as non-existing
(Fig. 7.3.1.1).
112 LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE
min. 50 mm²
earth
continuity conductor
connection to the earth
continuity conductor
Fig. 7.3.9 Earth continuity conductor according to DIN VDE 0800 Part 2
⇒ Double-ended shield earthing
A cable shield must be continuously con-
nected along the whole of its length for
good conducting performance, and
earthed at least at both ends. Only a
shield used at both ends can reduce
inductive and capacitive inputs. If the
shielded cable is laid between two light-
ning protection systems, the cable shield
is capable of carrying lightning currents
in accordance with DIN V VDE V 0185-3, if
it has a shield cross section > 10 mm2 and
does not exceed a maximum length of
approx. 80 m. The ends of the shield must
be earthed (Fig. 7.3.1.2).
⇒ Single-ended and indirect shield
earthing
For operational reasons, cable shields are
sometimes earthed at only one end. In
fact, a certain attenuation of capacitive
interference fields is given. Protection
against the electromagnetic induction
arising with lightning strokes, however, is
not provided. The reason for the single-
ended shield earthing is the fear of low
EB 1
Fig. 7.3.1.1 No shield connection - no shielding from capacitive/inductive couplings
reinforcement
frequency equalising currents. In extend-
ed installations, a bus cable, for example,
can often stretch many hundreds of
metres between buildings. Especially
with older installations, it can happen
that one part of the earth-termination
systems is no longer in operation, or that
no meshed equipotential bonding is
existing. In such cases, interferences can
occur as a result of multiple shield earth-
ing. Potential differences of the different
building earthing systems can allow low
frequency equalising currents (n x 50 Hz),
and the transients superimposed there-
on, to flow. At the same time, currents
measuring up to a few amperes are pos-
sible which, in extreme cases, can cause
cable fires. In addition, crosstalk can
cause signal interference if the signal fre-
quency is in a similar frequency range to
the interference signal.
EB 2
www.dehn.de
 during upgrading or maintenance work
in order to change between direct and
indirect shield earthing (Fig. 7.3.1.3).
⇒ Low impedance shield earthing
Cable shields can conduct impulse cur-
rents of up to several kA. During the dis-
charge, the impulse currents flow under
the shield and through the shield termi-
nals to earth. The impedance of the cable
shield and the shielding terminal creates
voltage differences between shield
potential and earth. In such a case, volt-
ages of up to some kV can develop and
the impulse transfer destroy the insulation of conductors or
EB 1 impedance of the EB 2 connected devices. Coarse-meshed
shield has to be shields and the twisting of the cable
considered! shield (pig tail) to the terminal in a rail
clamp are particularly critical. The quality
of the cable shield used affects the num-
Fig. 7.3.1.2 Shield connection at both ends - Shielding from capacitive/inductive couplings ber of shield earthings required. Under
certain circumstances, an earthing is
required every 20 – 40 metres in order to
achieve an efficient shielding effect. Suit-
able large contacting clamps with slip-
ping spring elements are recommended
for the shielding terminal. This is impor-
tant to compensate for the yield of the
synthetic insulation of the conductor
(Fig. 7.3.1.4).

shield terminal

direct earthing
indirect earthing via
gas discharge tube
EB 1 EB 2
cable

cable shield
Fig. 7.3.1.3 Shield connection at both ends - Solution: Direct and indirect shield earthing

The aim, however, must be to virtually sary. This switches between the cable anchor bar
implement the requirements of EMC and shield and the local earth. The gas dis-
prevent equalising currents. This can be charge tube can be inserted or removed Fig. 7.3.1.4 Shield connection
achieved by combining single-ended and
indirect shield earthing. All shields are
directly connected with the local equipo-
tential bonding at a central point such as
7
the control room. At the far ends of the I = 5 kA
cable, the shields are indirectly connect-
ed to the earth potential via isolating
spark gaps. Since the resistance of a spark l = 200 m
gap is around 10 GΩ, equalising currents
are prevented in surge-free operation.
Should EMC interferences such as light- Uiso = 2 kV
ning strokes occur, the spark gap ignites
to be calculated: max. permissible coupling impedance RK of
and discharges the interference pulse
the cable shielding
without consequential damage to the
equipment. This reduces the residual Uiso 2000 V
impulse on the active lines and the termi- RK = = = 0.4 Ω
I 5000 A
nal devices are subject to even less stress.
The BLITZDUCTOR CT arrester is 0.4 Ω 10-3 Ω
l = 200 m: RK = =2
equipped with a patented insert which 200 m m
can take a gas discharge tube, if neces- Fig. 7.3.1.5 Shield connection at both ends - Shielding from capacitive/inductive coupling

www.dehn.de LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE 113

 ⇒ Maximum length of shielded cables
Cable shields have a so-called coupling
resistance which roughly corresponds to
the dc resistance provided by the cable
manufacturer. An interference pulse
flowing through the resistance creates a
potential drop on the cable shield. The
permissible coupling resistance for the
cable shield can be determined as a func-
tion of the dielectric strength of the ter-
minal device and the cable, as well as the
cable length. It is crucial that the poten-
tial drop is less than the insulation
strength of the system. If this is not the
case, arresters must be used (Fig. 7.3.1.5).
⇒ Extension of LPZs with the help of
shielded cables
DIN V VDE V 0185-4 states that using a
shielded cable between two equal LPZs
obviates the need for arresters. This
statement applies to interferences to be
expected from the spatial surroundings
of the shielded cable (e. g. electromag-
netic fields) and for meshed equipoten-
tial bonding conforming to the standard.
But beware. Depending on the condi-
tions the installation is set up in, hazards
can still arise and make the use of
arresters necessary. Typical potential haz-
ards are: the feeding of the terminal
devices from different low voltage main
distribution boards (MDB), TNC systems,
high coupling resistances of the cable
shields or insufficient earthing of the
shield. Further caution must be exercised
with cables with poor shield cover, which
are often used for economic reasons. The
result is residual interferences on the sig-
nal lines. Interferences of this type can be
controlled by using a high-quality shield-
ed cable or surge protective devices.
7 Fig. 7.4.1 Equipotential bonding network in a structure or building
114 LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE
7.4 Equipotential bonding
network
The main function of the equipotential
bonding network is to prevent haz-
ardous potential drops between all
devices/installations in the inner LPZs,
and to reduce the magnetic field of the
lightning.
The low inductance equipotential bond-
ing network required is achieved by
means of interconnections between all
metal components aided by equipoten-
tial bonding conductors inside the LPZ of
the building or structure. This creates a
three-dimensional meshed network (Fig.
7.4.1). Typical components of the net-
work are:
⇒ all metal installations (e. g. pipes,
boilers),
⇒ reinforcements in the concrete
(in floors, walls and ceilings)
Fig. 7.4.2 Ring equipotential bonding bar in a computer facility
⇒ gratings (e. g. intermediate floors),
⇒ metal staircases, metal doors, metal
frames,
⇒ cable ducts,
⇒ ventilation ducts,
⇒ lift rails,
⇒ metal floors,
⇒ supply lines.
Ideally, a lattice structure of the equipo-
tential bonding network would be
around 5 m x 5 m. This would typically
reduce the electromagnetic lightning
field inside an LPZ by a factor of 2 (corre-
sponding to 6 dB).
Enclosures and racks of electronic devices
and systems should be integrated into
the equipotential bonding network with
short connections. This requires sufficient
numbers of equipotential bonding bars
and/or ring equipotential bonding bars
www.dehn.de
 Star-shape arrangement S Mesh-shape arrangement M
Basic
arrangement

S M

Integration
into the
equipotential
bonding
network Ss Mm

ERP
Fig. 7.4.3 Connection of the ring equipotential bon-
ding bar with the equipotential bonding Key
network via fixed earthing point Equipotential bonding network
(Fig. 7.4.2) in the building or structure. Equipotential bonding conductor
The busbars, in turn, must be connected Device
to the equipotential bonding network Termination point to the equipotential bonding network
(Fig. 7.4.3). ERP Earthing reference point
Ss Star-shape arrangement integrated via a neutral point
Protective conductors (PE) and cable
shields of the data links of electronic Mm Mesh-shape arrangement integrated via a meshed lattice
devices and systems must be integrated
Fig. 7.4.4 Integration of electronic systems into the equipotential bonding network
into the equipotential bonding network
in accordance with the instructions of the
system manufacturer. The connections
can be made as a mesh or in the shape of
a star (Fig. 7.4.4). Combination 1 Combination 2

When using a star point arrangement S,

all metal components of the electronic
system must be suitably insulated against
the equipotential bonding network. A Ss Ms
star-shaped arrangement is therefore
usually limited to applications in small, Integration
locally confined systems. In such cases, all into the
equipotential ERP ERP
lines must enter the building or struc-
bonding
ture, or a room within the building or network
structure, at a single point. The star point
Mm Mm
arrangement S must be connected to the
equipotential bonding network at one
single earthing reference point (ERP)
only. This produces the arrangement SS.
7
When using the meshed arrangement M,
all metal components of the electronic
system do not have to be insulated Key
against the equipotential bonding net-
work. All metal components shall be Equipotential bonding network
integrated into the equipotential bond- Equipotential bonding conductor
ing network at as many equipotential Device
bonding points as possible. The resulting Termination point to the equipotential bonding network
arrangement Mm is used for extended ERP Earthing reference point
and open systems with many lines
Ss Star-shape arrangement integrated via a neutral point
between the individual devices. A further
advantage of this arrangement is the fact Mm Mesh-shape arrangement integrated via a meshed lattice
that the lines of the system can enter a Ms Mesh-shape arrangement integrated via a neutral point
building, structure or room at different
Fig. 7.4.5 Combination of the integration methods accoding to Fig. 7.4.4
points.

www.dehn.de LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE 115

 Complex electronic systems, also allow
combinations of star point and meshed
arrangements (Fig. 7.4.5) in order to
combine the advantages of both
arrangements.
7.5 Equipotential bonding on
the boundary of LPZ 0A
and LPZ 1
7.5.1 Equipotential bonding for
metal installations
At the boundaries of the EMC lightning
protection zones, measures to reduce the
radiated electromagnetic field must be
realised, and all metal and electrical
lines/ systems passing through the sec-
tional area must be integrated into the
equipotential bonding without excep-
tion.
This requirement on the equipotential
bonding basically corresponds to that on
the main equipotential bonding bar in
accordance with DIN VDE 0100-410 and
540.
Further towards the main equipotential
bonding bar, the lightning equipotential
bonding must also be implemented for
cables of electrical and electronic systems
(see also chapter 7.5.2) at this boundary
of the zones.
This equipotential bonding must be
installed as close as possible to the loca-
tion where the lines and metal installa-
tions enter the building or structure. The
equipotential bonding conductor should
be designed to be as short (low imped-
ance) as possible.
For equipotential bonding, the following
minimum cross sections for tying in the
equipotential bonding bar to the earth-
termination system, interconnecting the
different equipotential bonding bars,
7 and tying in the metal installations to the
equipotential bonding bar, must be tak-
en into account:
Material Cross section
Cu 16 mm2
Al 25 mm2
Fe 50 mm2
116 LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE
The following metal installations have to
be incorporated into the equipotential
bonding:
⇒ Metal cable ducts
⇒ Shielded cables and lines
⇒ Building reinforcement
⇒ Metal water supply pipes
⇒ Metal conduits for lines
⇒ Other metal pipe systems or conduc-
tive components (e. g. compressed
air)
A corrosion-free earth connection can be
easily constructed by using fixed earthing
points. During this process, the reinforce- Fig. 7.5.1.1 Installation of fixed earthing point
ment can be connected to the equipo-
tential bonding at the same time (Fig.
7.5.1.1).
The procedure of tying in the equipoten-
tial bonding bar to the fixed earthing
point, and connecting the conduits to
the equipotential bonding, is shown
below (Fig. 7.5.1.2).
Chapter 7.3 illustrates the tying in of
cable shields to the equipotential bond-
ing.
7.5.2 Equipotential bonding for
power supply installations
In analogy to metal installations, all elec- Fig. 7.5.1.2 Connection of EB with fixed earthing
trical power lines and data links at the point
entrance of the building (lightning pro- boundary 0A/1 is usually taken to be the
tection zone boundary 0A to 1) must be boundary of the building (Fig. 7.5.2.1).
integrated into the equipotential bond-
ing. Whereas the design of data links is For properties fed directly from the
described in section 7.5.3, the following medium voltage network, the lightning
section will look at the design of equipo- protection zone 0A is extended up to the
tential bonding with electrical power secondary side of the transformer. The
lines in more detail. The intersections for equipotential bonding is carried out on
the equipotential bonding at the LPZ the 230/400 V side of the transformer
boundary 0A to 1 are defined with the (Fig. 7.5.2.2).
help of the specific design of the proper- To prevent the flow of partial lightning
ty which requires protection. For installa-
tions fed by low voltage systems, the LPZ
currents in LPZ 0 from affecting parts of
the installation/systems in LPZ 1, addi-
SPD SPD
0/1 0/1
Fig. 7.5.2.1 Transformer outside the structure or Fig. 7.5.2.2 Transformer inside the structure or buil-
building ding (LPZ 0 integrated in LPZ 1)
www.dehn.de
tional shielding measures are required
for the medium voltage line entering the
building or structure.
To prevent equalising currents from
occurring between the various equipo-
tential bonding points in an electrical
installation, it is recommended to carry
out the lightning equipotential bonding
of all metal lines and electrical power
lines and data links entering the building
or structure centrally at one point. If local
circumstances do not permit this, the use
of a ring equipotential bonding bar (Figs.
7.5.2.3 and 7.5.2.4) is recommended.
The ability of the lightning current
arrester used (SPD, Type 1) to discharge
the current must correspond to the loads
at the location where it is employed,
based on the type of lightning protection
system used for the property. The type of
lightning protection system appropriate
for the building or structure under con-

consumer's circuits

electronic equipment

meter
heating antenna line

service Fig. 7.5.2.5 DEHNventil combined lightning current

entrance box and surge arrester

power
supply meter EB

gas

water

water meter foundation

earthing electrode

Fig. 7.5.2.3 Internal lightning protection with a common entry of all supply lines

Reinforcement of the outer walls and the

1
foundation
2
Other earthing electrodes, e.g. intermeshing
2 to neighbouring buildings
1 3

4 10
3

4
Connection to the reinforcement

Internal (potential) ring conductor

7
8 Fig. 7.5.2.6 Lightning equipotential bonding for power
6 Connection to external conductive parts, supply and information technology
5
e.g. water pipeline systems situated centrally at one point

Earthing electrode Type B, ring earthing

6
7 electrode

9 7 Surge protective device

5
8 Equipotential bonding bar

9 Electrical power or telecommunication line

Connection to supplementary earthing

10 electrodes, earhting electrode Type A

Fig. 7.5.2.4 Example for equipotential bonding in a structure or building with several entries or the external
conductive parts and with an internal ring conductor as a connection between the equipotential Fig. 7.5.2.7 Lightning current arrester at
bonding bars LPZ boundary LPZ 0A – 1

www.dehn.de LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE 117

 sideration must be chosen on the basis of
a risk assessment. If no risk assessment is
available, or if it is not possible to make
detailed statements about the splitting
of the lightning current at the LPZ
boundary 0A to 1, it is recommended to
use the type of lightning protection sys-
tem with the highest requirements
(Type I) as a basis. The resulting lightning
current load of the individual discharge
paths is shown in Table 7.5.2.1.
When installing lightning current
arresters on the LPZ boundary 0A to 1, it
must still be borne in mind that, if the
recommended installation site is directly
at the service entrance box, this can fre-
quently only be done with the agree-
ment of the power supplier. The require-
ments on lightning current arresters in
main distribution systems are laid down
in the directive of the Association of the
Electricity Industry (VDEW) “Class B surge
protective devices – Directive for the use
in main distribution systems“. When
choosing lightning current arresters for
the LPZ boundary 0A to 1 then, besides
the rating of the discharge capability, the
prospective short circuit current to be
expected at the installation site must also
be taken into account. Lightning current
arresters based on spark gaps should
have a high self-quenshing capacity and
a good ability to limit follow currents, in
order to ensure that follow currents at
the mains frequency are switched off
automatically, and to prevent overcur-
rent protective devices, e. g. fuses, from
false tripping (Figs. 7.5.2.5 – 7.5.2.7).
Type of LPS Lightning impulse current capability
in TN systems in TT systems in TT systems
(L – N) (N – PE)
I ≥ 100 kA / m ≥ 100 kA / m ≥ 100 kA
II ≥ 75 kA / m ≥ 75 kA / m ≥ 75 kA
III / IV ≥ 50 kA / m ≥ 50 kA / m ≥ 50 kA
m: Quantity of conductors, e.g. for L1, L2, L3, N and PE; m = 5
Table 7.5.2.1 Required lightning impulse current capability of surge protective devices
SPDs Type 1 according to DIN V VDE 0100-534/A1
partial lightning current to be expected If the equipotential bonding is carried
for an IT cable (see DIN V VDE V 0185-3), out for lines on the LPZ boundary 0B to 1,
the lightning current must then be divid- it is sufficient to use surge protective
ed by the number of individual cores in devices with a discharge capacity of
the cable actually used, in order to arrive 20 kA (8/20 µs) since no electrically cou-
at the impulse current per core. The par- pled partial lightning currents flow.
tial lightning current load is lower for
multi-core cables than it is for cables with
fewer individual cores. For further infor-
mation please see chapter 6.3.
The following surge protective devices
can therefore be used:
1. Arresters designed for a discharge
current of (10/350 µs)
2. Arresters designed for a discharge
current of (8/20 µs) if
⇒ they have no inductance as a decou-
pling element
⇒ the specified nominal discharge cur-
rent is (8/20 µs) > 25 x the required
discharge current (10/350 µs) per
core (Fig. 7.5.3.1).

The special issues relating to the choice,

installation and assembly of lightning 25
current arresters (SPD Type 1) are
described in more detail in chapter 8.1.

20
7.5.3 Equipotential bonding for
7
Impulse current (8/20 µs) in kA

information technology
installations
15
LPZ 0 – 1
The lightning equipotential bonding
from LPZ 0 to 1 must be carried out for all
metal systems entering a building. IT 10
lines must be connected as close as possi-
ble to the point where they enter the
building or structure with lightning cur-
rent arresters providing a suitable dis- 5
charge capacity. For telecommunication
lines in smaller properties, a general dis-
charge capability of 5 kA (10/350 µs) is
required for the boundary from LPZ 0A to 0
1. The generalised approach is not used, 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0
however, when designing the discharge Testing lightning current (10/350 µs) in kA
capability for installations with a large
Fig. 7.5.3.1 Comparison of the amplitudes of test currents
number of IT lines. After calculating the
wave form 10/350 µs and 8/20µs, each at equal loads

118 LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE www.dehn.de

7.6 Equipotential bonding at
the boundary of LPZ 0A
and LPZ 2
7.6.1 Equipotential bonding for
metal installations
See chapter 7.5.1.
7.6.2 Equipotential bonding for
power supply installations
LPZ 0A – 2
Depending on the design of the building
or structure, it is often unavoidable to
realise a boundary from 0A to 2, especial-
ly with compact installations (Fig.
7.6.2.1).
SPD
0/1/2
Fig. 7.6.2.1 Only one SPD (0/1/2) required
(LPZ 2 integrated in LPZ 1)
Putting such an LPZ transition into prac-
tice makes high demands on the surge
protective devices employed, and the
surroundings of the installation. Besides
the parameters previously described in
section 7.5.2, a protection level must be
achieved which ensures the safe opera-
tion of equipment and systems of LPZ 2.
A low voltage protection level and high
limiting of the interference energy still
transmitted by the arrester, form the
basis here for a safe energy coordination
to surge protective devices in LPZ 2, or to
surge suppressing components in the
input circuits of the equipment to be pro-
tected. The combined lightning current
and surge arresters of the DEHNventil
family are designed for such applications
and enable the user to combine lightning
equipotential bonding and coordinated
terminal device protection in a single
device (Fig. 7.6.2.2).
www.dehn.de
Fig. 7.6.2.2 DEHNventil TT
Since, for the LPZ boundary from 0 to 2, it
is inevitable for both lightning protec-
tion zones to border directly on each
other, a high degree of shielding at the
zone boundaries is absolutely impera-
tive. As a matter of principle, it is recom-
mended to design the area of the light-
ning protection zones 0 and 2, which
border directly on each other, to be as
small as possible. Provided that the build-
ing or structure will permit it, LPZ 2
should be equipped with an additional
zone shield which is constructed at the
zone boundary 0, separately from the
zone shield flown through by a lightning
current, so that, as can be seen in Fig.
7.6.2.1, LPZ 1 is assembled for a further
area of the installation. The attenuation
of the electromagnetic field in LPZ 2 this
measure brings about, obviates the need
for systematic shielding of all lines and
systems within LPZ 2, which would other-
wise be necessary.
external
lightning
protection
system
lightning current arrester
KK: XX X
Combined lightning current
and surge arrester
KK: XX 1
Fig. 7.6.3.1 Coordination characteristics (KK) as combination aid
7.6.3 Equipotential bonding for
information technology
installations
LPZ 0A – 2
Generally, a lightning current arrester
from LPZ 0 to 1 acts like a kind of of wave
breaker. It conducts a large part of the
interference energy away, thus protect-
ing the installation in the building from
damage. However, it is frequently the
case that the level of residual interfer-
ence is still too high to protect the termi-
nal devices. In a further step, additional
surge protective devices are then
installed at the LPZ boundary from 1 to 2
to make available a low level of residual
interference adjusted to the immunity of
the terminal device.
When the equipotential bonding from
LPZ 0 to 2 is carried out, the first thing is
to choose the installation site, and deter-
mine the partial lightning current of the
individual lines and shields, precisely as
described in chapter 6.3.
However, the requirements on an SPD to
be installed changes at the LPZ boundary,
as do the requirements on the wiring
after this boundary. The protective
device must be designed as a combined
lightning current and surge arrester and
its energy must be coordinated with that
of the terminal device (Fig. 7.6.3.1). Com-
bined lightning current and surge
arresters have, on the one hand, an
extremely high discharge capacity and,
on the other, a low level of residual inter-
ference to protect the terminal devices.
Furthermore, care must be taken that the
outgoing line from the protective device
to the terminal device is shielded, and
surge arrester
7
?
terminal device
KK: X 1 (severity 1)
shielded cable
?
terminal device
(severity 1)
LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE 119
 that both ends of the cable shield are
integrated into the equipotential bond-
ing.

Combined lightning current and surge

arresters are recommended
⇒ if the terminal devices are near to
the location where the cables enter
the building
⇒ if low impedance equipotential
bonding from protective device to
terminal device can be created
⇒ if the line from the protective device
to the terminal device is continuous-
ly shielded
⇒ if a particularly cost-effective solu-
tion is sought

The use of lightning current arresters and

surge arresters is recommended
⇒ if there are long cable distances from
the protective device to the terminal
device
⇒ if the SPDs for power systems and IT
surge protective devices are earthed
via different equipotential bonding
bars
⇒ if unshielded lines are used
⇒ if large interferences can occur inside
LPZ 1.
7.7 Equipotential bonding on
the boundary of LPZ 1
and LPZ 2 and higher
7.7.1 Equipotential bonding for
metal installations
This equipotential bonding must be done
as close as possible to the location where
the lines and metal installations enter
the zone.
7 All systems and conductive components
must also be connected as described in
chapter 7.5.1.
The equipotential bonding conductors
should be designed to be as short (low
impedance) as possible.
Ring equipotential bonding in these
zones facilitates a low impedance tie-in
of the systems into the equipotential
bonding.
The following metal installations have to
be integrated into the equipotential
bonding:
⇒ metal cable ducts
⇒ shielded cables and lines
Fig. 7.7.1.1 Ring equipotential bonding and fixed earthing point for connection of metal installations
⇒ building reinforcement
⇒ metal water supply pipes
⇒ metal conduits for lines
⇒ other metal pipe systems or conduc-
tive components (e. g. compressed
air)
The cross sections described in chapter
7.5.1 must again be used for equipoten-
tial bonding conductors combining the
equipotential bonding bar and the
earth-termination systems as well as
other equipotential bonding bars.
For the tie-ins of the metal installations
to the equipotential bonding, reduced
cross sections can be used for these zone
boundaries:
Material Cross section
Cu 6 mm2
Al 10 mm2
Fe 16 mm2
Fig. 7.7.1.1 illustrates the preparation for
tying-in a cable trough to the ring
equipotential bonding at the zone tran-
sition.
7.7.2 Equipotential bonding for
power supply installations
LPZ 1 – 2 and higher
For LPZ boundaries 1 to 2 and higher, as
well, surge limitation and field attenua-
tion is achieved by systematical integra-
tion of the electrical power lines and
data links, also, into the equipotential
bonding at each LPZ boundary, as is done
with all metal systems. Shielding the
rooms and devices leads to the attenua-
tion of the electromagnetic effect.
The function of the surge protective
devices employed at the LPZ boundaries
1 to 2, or at the higher LPZ boundaries, is
to minimise the residual values of
upstream surge protective devices yet
further. They must reduce induced surges
affecting the lines laid in the LPZ, and
surges generated in the LPZ itself.
Depending on the location where the
protective measures are taken, they can
be either assigned to a device (device
protection) (Fig. 7.7.2.2 ) or represent the
infrastructural basis for the functioning
of a device or system in the installation
(Fig. 7.7.2.3). The embodiments of the
surge protection at the LPZ boundaries 1
to 2 and higher can thus be designed in
very different ways.

120 LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE www.dehn.de

 I0, H0 1 primary source of interference H0

H1

H2
shield

shield
electronic system
(susceptible device) U2, I2 U1, I1 partial
lightning Fig. 7.7.2.2 DEHNflex M
shield (enclosure) current

1 Primary source of interference

defined according to the chosen lightning protection level by

DIN V VDE V 0185-1 I0 and H0: impulse 10/350 µs and 0.25/100 µs

(VDE V 0185 Part 1):

2 Electronic system (susceptible device)

defined by the immunity against conducted (U, I) and radiated (H) lightning effects:

IEC 61000-4-5: U: impulse 1.2/50 µs

I: impulse 8/20 µs

IEC 61000-4-9 H: impulse 8/20 µs, (attenuated wave 25 kHz), Tp = 10 µs

IEC 61000-4-10: H: (impulse 0.2/5 µs), attenuated wave 1 MHz, Tp = 0.25 µs

Fig. 7.7.2.1 Electromagnetic compatibility in case of a lightning stroke

Fig. 7.7.2.3 Multipole DEHNguard

7.7.3 Equipotential bonding for ⇒ Paying attention to the energy coor-

information technology
installations
LPZ 1 – 2 and higher
At the LPZ boundaries inside buildings,
further measures must be taken to
reduce the level of interference. Since, as
a rule, terminal devices are installed in
LPZ 2 or higher, the protective measures
must ensure that the level of residual
interference, lies below values the termi-
nal devices can cope with.
⇒ Use of surge protective devices in the
vicinity of terminal devices
⇒ Integration of the cable shields into
the equipotential bonding
⇒ Low impedance equipotential bond-
ing of the SPD for IT installations to
terminal device and SPD for power
installations
dination of SPD and terminal device
⇒ Telecommunication lines and gas dis-
charge lamps must be installed at
least 130 mm apart
⇒ The distribution boards of electrical
installations and data should be
located in different cabinets
⇒ Low voltage lines and telecommuni-
7
cation lines must cross at an angle
of 90°
⇒ Cable intersections must be carried
out using the shortest route
Fig. 7.7.3.1 Protection of a PLC with BLITZDUCTOR
CT and SPS Protector

www.dehn.de LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE 121

 7.8 Coordination of the pro-
tective measures at vari-
ous LPZ boundaries
7.8.1 Power supply installations
Whereas surge protection in the terminal
device, or immediately upstream of it,
expressly fulfils the function of protect-
ing the device, the function of surge pro-
tective devices in the surrounding instal-
lation is twofold. On the one hand, they
protect the installation, and, on the
other, they form the protective link
between the threat parameters of the
complete system and the immunity of
the device of the equipment and systems
requiring protection. The threat parame-
ters of the system, and the immunity of
the device to be protected, are thus
dimensioning factors for the protective
cascade to be installed. To ensure that
this protective cascade, beginning with
the lightning current arrester and ending
with the terminal device protection, is
able to function, one must ensure that
individual protective devices are selec-
tively effective, i. e. each protection stage
only takes on the amount of interference
energy which it is designed for. The syn-
chronisation between the protective
stages is generally termed coordination.
In order to achieve the described selectiv-
ity as the protective device operates, the
parameters of the individual arrester
stages must be coordinated in such a way
that, if one protection stage is faced with
the threat of an energy overload, the
upstream more powerful arrester
“responds“ and thus takes over the dis-
charge of the interference energy. When
designing the coordination, one must be
aware that the pulse waveform with the
greatest pulse length must be assumed
to be a threat for the complete arrester
chain. Even though surge protective
devices, by definition, are only tested
7 with pulse waveforms of 8/20 µs, for the
coordination between surge arrester and
lightning current arrester, and also for
the surge protective device, it is impera-
tive to determine the ability of the device
to carry an impulse current of the partial
lightning currents with the waveform
10/350 µs. The Red/Line family of energy-
coordinated products, was created to
avert the dangers arising from defective
coordination and the resulting overload-
ing of low-energy protective stages .
These surge protective devices, which are
coordinated both with each other and
also with the device to be protected, pro-
vide the user with high safety. By design-
ing them as lightning current arresters,
surge arresters and combined lightning
current and surge arresters, they are ide-
122 LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE
ally matched to the requirements of the
corresponding LPZ boundaries (Figs.
7.8.1.1 – 7.8.1.3).
Fig. 7.8.1.1 DEHNbloc, 3-pole - Lightning current
arrester
Fig. 7.8.1.2 DEHNguard TT - Surge arrester
Fig. 7.8.1.3 DEHNventil TNS – Combined lightning
current and surge arrester
7.8.2 IT installations
When implementing measures to protect
against disturbance variables from near-
by, distant and direct lightning strokes
within buildings, it is recommended to
apply a concept of protective devices
with several protective stages. This
reduces the high energy interference
(partial lightning current) in stages
because an initial energy absorbing stage
prevents the main part of the interfer-
ence from reaching the downstream sys-
tem. The subsequent stages serve to
reduce the interference to values which
the system can cope with. Depending on
the conditions of the installation, several
protective stages can also be integrated
into one surge protective device using a
combined protective circuit.
The relevant interfaces where the protec-
tive devices are employed as part of a
cascade are, for example, the zone
boundaries (LPZ) of a lightning protec-
tion zone concept which conforms to DIN
V VDE V 0185-4.
A cascading of the surge protective
devices must be carried out with due
regard to the coordination criteria.
To determine the coordination condi-
tions, various methods are available (E
DIN VDE 0100 Part 534, supplement 1),
some of which require certain know-
ledge about the structure of the protec-
tive devices. A “black box” method is the
so-called “Let-Through-Energy Method”,
which is based on standard pulse param-
eters and hence can be understood from
both a mathematical and a practical
point of view. These methods are, how-
ever, difficult for the user to carry out
because they are very time-consuming. In
order to save time and work, the stan-
dard permits the use of information sup-
plied by the manufacturers for the coor-
dination (Fig. 7.8.2.1).
All parts of the cascade are considered to
be coordinated if the residual values Ip
for a short-circuited output, and Up for
an open-circuit output, are smaller than
the input values Iin /Uin .
Lightning current arresters at LPZ 0/1 or
higher are, as a rule, specified with a dis-
charge capacity of waveform 10/350 µs.
Surge arresters, by contrast, are only
specified with a waveform of 8/20 µs. This
originates from the fact that surge
arresters were developed primarily for
interferences of inductive and capacitive
inputs. If, however, a line passing out of
the building is connected to a cascade
comprising lightning current arrester and
www.dehn.de
 IP1 IIN2 IP2 IIN ITE UIN Surge immunity against
7.9 Inspection and
impulse voltages maintenance of the
IIN Surge immunity against
LEMP protection

UIN ITE
SPD 1 SPD 2 ITE

UIN2
impulse currents
UP1

UP2
UP Voltage protection level The fundamentals and pre-conditions
impulse voltage governing the inspection and mainte-
IP Let-through impulse
current
nance of the LEMP protection are the
same as those governing the inspection
Fig. 7.8.2.1 Coordination according to let-through method of 2 SPDs and one terminal device (according to E and maintenance of lightning protection
DIN VDE 0100 Part 534, supplement 1)
systems, as previously described in chap-
surge arrester, it follows from the coordi- The surge protective devices of the Yel- ter 3.4.
nation conditions that low/Line family are coordinated sequen- The inspections carried out during the
tially and safely with each other and with construction phase are particularly
⇒ the most sensitive element responds
the terminal devices. Therefore they pro- important for the inspection of the LEMP
first – the surge arrester
vide markings indicating their coordina- protection, since many components of
⇒ the surge arrester must also be able the LEMP protection are no longer
tion characteristics (Fig. 7.8.2.2).
to carry part of the partial lightning accessible when the building work has
current with the waveform been completed. The necessary measures
10/350 µs, albeit a small one (e. g. connecting the reinforcement)
⇒ before the surge arrester is over- must be documented photographically
loaded, the lightning current and included with the inspection report.
arrester must trip and take over the
Inspections must be carried out
discharge process.
⇒ during the installation of the LEMP
protection,
Use of a combined lightning current and surge arrester
⇒ after the installation of the LEMP
immunity severity
protection,
lightning current
acc. to EN 61000-4-5 ⇒ periodically,
⇒ after each modification to compo-
XX 1 terminal nents which are relevant for the
device
LEMP protection,
1 ⇒ after a lightning stroke to the build-
BLITZDUCTOR BCT B... ing or structure, if necessary
After completion of the inspection, all
defects found must be corrected forth-
Cascaded use of SPDs with. The technical documentation must
be updated as and where necessary.
immunity severity A comprehensive inspection of the LEMP
lightning current surge acc. to EN 61000-4-5 protection must be carried out at least
every four years as part of the inspection
XX X X 1 terminal of the electrical installation in accor-
device dance with workplace regulations.

1
BLITZDUCTOR BCT B... BLITZDUCTOR BCT M...

Cabling SPD Typical coordination characteristics

for appropriate SPDs at LPZ boundaries
7
to LPZ 1 to LPZ 2 to LPZ 3
From LPZ 0A Combined SPD XX |1 –
Cascading XX |X X|1 –
XX |X X| 4|1
From LPZ 0B Two-stage X|1 –
surge arrester X|1 – –
Cascading X| 4|1 –
From LPZ 1 Surge arrester – X|1 –
Cascading – X| 4|1
From LPZ 2 Surge – – X|1
arrester – – 4|1
Fig. 7.8.2.2 Assignment of the coordination characteristics of the SPDs at the LPZ boundaries

www.dehn.de LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE 123

7

124 LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE www.dehn.de

8. Selection and installation of surge protective devices (SPDs)
8.1 Power supply systems
main distribution board subdistribution board terminal equipment
(within the scope of the lightning current arrester surge arrester
lightning protection
F1 meter
zones concept according L1
to DIN V VDE V 0185-4) L2
Wh L3
The installation of a lightning and surge PEN SEB N
PE
protection system for electrical installa-
tions represents the latest State of the

protection system
external lightning
F2 F2
Art and is an indispensable infrastructur-
al condition for the trouble-free opera-
tion of complex electrical and electronic
systems without consequential damage.
The requirements on SPDs needed for
MEB
the installation of this type of lightning
and surge protection system as part of
local EB
the lightning protection zones concept
according to DIN V VDE V 0185-4 for
power supply systems are stipulated in
EN 61643-11.
Fig. 8.1.1 Use of SPDs in power supply systems (schematic diagram)
SPDs employed as part of the structure’s
fixed installation are classified according
A summary of the different functions,
to the requirements and loads on the
arrangements and requirements of
installation sites chosen into surge pro-
arresters is given in Tables 8.1.1 and 8.1.2.
tective devices Type 1, 2 and 3.
At this point, please note that E DIN VDE
0675-6, -6 /A1 and -6 /A2 was valid until
The highest requirements with respect to
October 2004. It was replaced by the
the discharge capacity are made on SPDs
European standard EN 61643-11.
Type 1. These are employed within the
scope of the lightning and surge protec-
tion system at the boundary of lightning
protection zone 0A to 1 and higher, as
shown in Fig. 8.1.1. These protective
devices must be capable of carrying par-
tial lightning currents, waveform
10/350 µs, many times without conse-
quential damage to the equipment. Standards E DIN VDE 0675-6 IEC 61643-1: EN 61643-11:
These SPDs Type 1 are called lightning Type/ with A1, A2 1998 2001
current arresters. The function of these Description
protective devices is to prevent destruc-
tive partial lightning currents from pene- Lightning current arrester Class B SPD class I SPD Type 1
trating the electrical installation of a Combined lightning current
structure. and surge arrester
Surge arrester for Class C SPD class II SPD Type 2
At the boundary of lightning protection distribution boards
zone 0B (0C)* to 1 and higher, or lightning subdistribution boards,
protection zone 1 to 2 and higher, SPDs fixed installations
Type 2 are employed to protect against
surges. Their discharge capacity is around Surge arrester for Class D SPD class III SPD Type 3
some 10 kA (8/20 µs). socket outlets / terminal units

The last link in the lightning and surge Table 8.1.1 Classification of SPDs according to VDE, IEC and EN
protection system for power supply
installations is the protection of terminal
devices (boundary from lightning protec-
8
tion zone 2 to 3 and higher). The main
function of a protective device Type 3
used at this point is to protect against
surges arising between L and N in the
electrical system. These are particularly
switching surges.
* Lightning protection zone 0C belongs to lightning
protection zone 0B, but with additional risk of
step voltages

www.dehn.de LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE 125

 Surge Protective Devices Requirements on surge arresters upon
Classification Location Voltage Protection Level Loadability
A • no protection against in accordance with in accordance with
for use in low voltage direct contact required • IEC 99.1 • E DIN VDE 0675-6:1989-11,
overhead lines • can be overloaded or (Table 1 under discussion) Table 6 (isn = 5 kA (8/20 µs))
destroyed at direct • Impulse withstand voltage • E DIN VDE 0675-6/A1:1996-
lightning strokes category IV, according to 03, Subclause 5.19.5
• insulation resistance DIN VDE 0110-1:1997-04
provided even under • E DIN VDE 0675-6/A1:1996-
climatic influences 03, Table 7
B • protection against direct in accordance with in accordance with
designed for lightning equi- contact required • Impulse withstand voltage • E DIN VDE 0675-6/A1:
potential bonding according • no failure or fire risk during category IV, according to 1996-03, Table 4
to DIN VDE 0185 operation in correspon- DIN VDE 0110-1: 1997-04 (Iimp = 0,5 ... 50 kA (8/20 µs))
Lightning Current Arresters dence with the loadability • E DIN VDE 0675-6/A1:1996- • E DIN VDE 0675-6/A1:1996-
Combined Lightning Current required 03, Table 7 03, Subclause 5.19.5
and Surge Arresters
C in accordance with in accordance with
designed for surge protection • Impulse withstand voltage • E DIN VDE 0675-6:1989-11,
in fixed installations category III, according to Tab. 6 (isn = 5 kA (8/20 µs))
preferably for use in impulse DIN VDE 0110-1: 1997-04 • E DIN VDE 0675-6/A1:1996-
withstand voltage category • E DIN VDE 0675-6:1989-11, 03, Subclause 5.19.5
(surge protection category) III Table 4
Surge Arrester • E DIN VDE 0675-6/A1:1996-
03, Table 7
D in accordance with in accordance with
designed for surge protection • Impulse withstand voltage • E DIN VDE 0675-6:1989-11,
in mobile/fixed installations category II, according to Tab. 6 (isn = 5 kA (8/20 µs))
preferably for the application DIN VDE 0110-1: 1997-04 • E DIN VDE 0675-6/A1:1996-
in impulse withstand voltage • E DIN VDE 0675-6:1989-11, 03, Subclause 5.19.7
category (surge protection Table 4
category) II • E DIN VDE 0675-6/A1:1996-
Surge Arrester 03, Table 7

Table 8.1.2 Types of SPDs for power supply systems according to E DIN VDE 0675-6: 1989-11 and E DIN VDE 0675-6/A1: 1996-03

8.1.1 Technical characteristics of Lightning impulse currents (10/350 µs) ⇒ Residual voltage for nominal dis-
SPDs apply to SPDs Type 1. They must be able charge current (in accordance with
to discharge such lightning impulse cur- EN 61643-11: Ures )
Maximum continuous voltage UC
rents several times without consequen-
The maximum continuous voltage (equal
tial damage to the equipment. The surge protective device appropriate
to: rated voltage) is the root mean
to the installation site is chosen in accor-
square (rms) value of the max. voltage
Nominal discharge current In dance with the overvoltage categories
which may be applied to the correspond-
The nominal discharge current In is the described in DIN VDE 0110 (IEC 60664-1).
ingly marked terminals of the surge pro-
peak value of the current flowing It must be noted that the required mini-
tective device during operation. It is the
through the surge protective device mum value of 2.5 kV only applies to
maximum voltage on the arrester in the
(SPD). It has an 8/20 µs impulse current equipment belonging to the fixed elec-
defined non-conductive state which
waveform and is rated for classifying the trical installation. Equipment in the ter-
ensures that this state is regained after it
test of SPDs Type 2 and also for condi- minal circuits supplied by the installation
has responded and discharged.
tioning the SPDs for Type 1 and 2 tests. require a voltage protection level which
The value of UC shall be selected in accor-
is much lower than 2.5 kV.
dance with the nominal voltage of the
Voltage protection level Up

8 system to be protected and the require-

ments of the installation provisions (IEC
60364-5-534).
The voltage protection level of an SPD
denotes the maximum instantaneous
value of the voltage on the terminals of
IEC 60364-4-534 also requires a minimum
voltage protection level of 2.5 kV for a
230/400 V low voltage consumers‘ instal-
an SPD while at the same time character- lation. This minimum voltage protection
Impulse current Iimp
ising their capacity to limit surges to a level can be realised by means of a coor-
This is a standardised impulse current
residual level. dinated system of SPDs Type 1 and SPDs
curve with a 10/350 µs waveform. Its
Depending on the type of SPD, the volt- Type 2, or by employing a Type 1 com-
parameters (peak value, charge, specific
age protection level is determined by bined lightning current and surge
energy) simulate the load caused by nat-
means of the following individual tests: arrester.
ural lightning currents.
⇒ Lightning impulse sparkover voltage
1.2/50 µs (100%)

126 LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE www.dehn.de

Short-circuit withstand capability
This is the value of the prospective
power-frequency short circuit current
controlled by the surge protective device
in case it is furnished with an upstream
backup fuse (backup protection).
Follow current extinguishing capability
at UC (Ifi)
The follow current extinguishing capabil-
ity, also termed breaking capacity, is the
unaffected (prospective) rms value of the
mains follow current which can automat-
ically be extinguished by the surge pro-
tective device when UC is applied.
Either the indicated follow current extin-
guishing capability of the SPDs corres-
ponds to the maximum prospective short
circuit current at the SPD’s installation
site, or a corresponding backup fuse shall
be chosen for the protective device
which interrupts the mains follow cur-
rent through the protective device.
According to both IEC 60364-5-534 and
EN 61643-11 (VDE 0675 Part 6-11), SPDs
connected between neutral conductors
and PE conductors, where a follow cur-
rent with mains frequency can arise after
the SPD has responded (e. g. spark gaps),
must have a follow current extinguishing
capability of Ifi≥ 100 Arms.
Follow current limitation (for spark-gap
based SPDs Type 1)
Follow current limitation is the capability
of a spark-gap based SPD to limit any
mains follow currents arising to such a
degree that the current actually flowing
is noticeably smaller than the possible
short circuit current at the installation
site.
A high degree of follow current limita-
tion prevents upstream protective ele-
ments (e. g. fuses) from tripping because
of a too high mains follow current.
The follow current limitation is an impor-
tant parameter for the availability of the
electrical installation, particularly for
spark-gap based SPDs with a low voltage
protection level.
Coordination
In order to ensure a selective functioning
of the various SPDs, an energy coordina-
tion among the individual SPDs is
absolutely essential. The basic principle
of energy coordination is characterised
by the fact that each protective stage
must only discharge the amount of inter-
ference energy the SPD is designed for. If
higher interference energies occur, the
protective stage upstream of the SPD,
e. g. SPD Type 1, must take over the dis-
charge of the impulse current and relieve
the downstream protective devices. This
www.dehn.de
type of coordination must take into 8.1.2 Use of SPDs in various sys-
account all possible incidences of inter- tems
ference such as switching surges, partial
Measures to ensure protection against
lightning currents, etc.. According to DIN
life hazards always take priority over
V VDE V 0185-4, Subclause 12.5 “Proof of
surge protective measures. Since both
energy coordination” the manufacturer
measures are directly linked to the type
must prove the energy coordination of
of power supply systems and hence also
its SPDs.
with the use of surge protective devices
The devices in the Red/Line family are
(SPDs), the following describes TN,TT and
coordinated with each other and tested
IT systems and the variety of ways in
with reference to their energy coordina-
which SPDs can be used.
tion.
Electric currents flowing through the
TOV Voltage
human body can have hazardous conse-
TOV voltage (TOV = Temporary Over-
quences. Every electrical installation is
Voltage) is the term used to describe
therefore required to incorporate pro-
temporary surges which can arise as a
tective measures to prevent hazardous
result of faults within the medium and
currents flowing through the human
low voltage networks.
body. Components being energised dur-
To TN systems as well as the L-N path in
ing normal operation must be insulated,
TT systems and for a measuring time of 5
covered, sheathed or arranged to pre-
seconds applies: UTOV = 1.45 x U0, where
vent from being touched if this could
U0 represents the nominal ac voltage of
result in hazardous currents flowing
the line to earth.
through the body. This protective meas-
For TOVs arising in low voltage systems
ure is termed “protection against direct
as a result of earth faults in the high-volt-
shock hazard” (new term: “protection
age system, UTOV = 1200 V for the N-PE
against electrical shock hazard under
path in TT systems has to be taken into
normal conditions"). Moreover, it goes
consideration for 200 ms.
without saying, of course, that a hazard
must not be caused either by current
According to EN 61643-11, the devices of
flowing through the body if, as the result
the Red/Line family of products must be
of a fault, e. g. a faulty insulation, the
rated and tested in accordance with TOV
voltage is transferred to the metal enclo-
voltages.
sure (body of a piece of electrical equip-
ment). This protection against hazards
which, in the event of a fault, can result
from touching bodies or extraneous con-
ductive components, is termed “protec-
tion against indirect shock hazard” (new
term: "protection against electrical shock
hazard under fault conditions").
Generally, the limit of the permanently
permissible shock hazard voltage UL for
ac voltages is 50 V and for dc 120 V.
In electrical circuits containing socket
outlets and in electrical circuits contain-
ing Type I mobile equipment normally
held permanently in the hand during
operation, higher shock hazard voltages,
which can arise in the event of a fault,
must be disconnected automatically
within 0.4 s. In all other electrical circuits,
higher shock hazard voltages must be
automatically disconnected within 5 s.
DIN VDE 0100 Part 410 describes protec-
tive measures against indirect shock haz-
ard with protective conductors. These
8
protective measures operate in the event
of a fault by means of automatic discon-
nection or message. When setting up the
measures for the “protection against
indirect shock hazard”, they must be
assigned according to the system config-
uration and the protective device.
LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE 127
 According to DIN VDE 0100 Part 410, a
low voltage distribution system in its
entirety, from the power source of the
electrical installation to the last piece of
equipment, is essentially characterised
by:
⇒ earthing conditions at the power
source of the electrical installation
(e. g. low voltage side of the local
network transformer)
and
⇒ earthing conditions of the body of
the equipment in the electrical con-
sumer’s installations.
Hence, essentially, three basic types are
defined as distribution systems:
TN system, TT system and IT system.
The letters used have the following sig-
nificance:
The FIRST LETTER describes the earthing
conditions of the supplying power source
of the electrical installation:
T direct earthing of a point of the
power source of the electrical instal-
lation (generally the neutral point of
the transformer),
I Insulation of all active components
from the earth or connection of a
point of the power source of the
electrical installation earthed via an
impedance.
The SECOND LETTER describes the earth-
ing conditions of the body of the equip-
ment of the electrical installation:
T Body of the equipment is earthed
directly, regardless of any possible
existing earthing of a point of the
power supply,
N Body of the electrical equipment is
directly connected to the power sys-
tem earthing (earthing of the power
source of the electrical installation).
SUBSEQUENT LETTERS describe the
arrangement of the neutral conductor
and the protective conductor:
S Neutral conductor and protective
conductor are separate from each
8 C
other,
Neutral conductor and protective
conductor are combined (in one con-
ductor).
There are therefore three possible
options for the TN system:
TN-S system, TN-C system and TN-C-S sys-
tem.
128 LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE
The protective devices which can be Part 6 – Designation) means an SPD
installed in the various systems are Type 1.
⇒ overcurrent protective device, This directive, compiled by the VDEW,
defines basic requirements which,
⇒ residual current device,
depending on the DNO (operator of the
⇒ insulation monitoring device, distribution network), can lead to differ-
⇒ fault-voltage-operated protective ent technical designs.
device (special cases). The VDEW directive was also incorporat-
ed in the TAB 2000 in chapter 12 ”Selec-
As previously mentioned, the system con- tion of protective measures” as a supple-
figuration must be assigned to the pro- mentary note.
tective device. The preferred design for each kind of
This results in the following assignments: supply (system configuration) must be
ascertained from the responsible DNO.
TN system
⇒ Overcurrent protective device,
⇒ Residual current device.
TT system
⇒ Overcurrent protective device,
⇒ Residual current device,
⇒ Fault-voltage-operated protective
device (special cases).
IT system
⇒ Overcurrent protective device,
⇒ Residual current device,
⇒ Insulation monitoring device
These measures to protect against life
hazards have top priority when installing
power supply systems. All other protec-
tive measures such as lightning and surge
protection of electrical systems and
installations are secondary to the protec-
tive measures taken against indirect con-
tact with protective conductors under
consideration of the system configura-
tion and the protective device. The latter
must not be overridden by the use of
protective devices for lightning and
surge protection. The occurrence of a
fault in an SPD, unlikely as it may be, shall
also be taken into account. This has par-
ticular significance because the surge
protective devices are always used to the
protective conductor.
In the following sections we therefore
describe the use of SPDs in various system
configurations. These circuit proposals
are taken from IEC 60364-5-534.
The concepts shown illustrate the use of
lightning current arresters mainly in the
area of the service entrance box, i. e.
upstream of the meter. IEC 60364-5-534
defines the installation site of lightning
current arresters as “close to the origin of
the installation”.
The use of lightning current arresters
upstream of the meter is regulated by
the "Directive for the use of Class B surge
protective devices in mains systems".
Here, a Class B designation (VDE 0675
www.dehn.de
8.1.3 Use of SPDs in TN Systems
For „protection against indirect shock
hazard“ in TN systems, overcurrent and
residual current devices have been
approved. For the use of SPDs this means
that these protective devices may only be
arranged downstream of the devices for
“protection against indirect shock haz-
ard” in order to ensure that the measure
to protect against life hazards also oper-
ates in the event of a failure of an SPD.
If an SPD Type 1 or 2 is installed down-
stream of a residual current device, it has
to be expected that, because of the dis-
charged impulse current to PE, this
process will be interpreted by a residual
current device (RCD) as residual current,
and it interrupts the circuit.
Moreover, if an SPD Type 1 is loaded with
partial lightning currents it must be
assumed that the high dynamics of the
lightning current will cause mechanical
damage on the residual current device.
This would override the protective meas-
ure to protect against shock hazards.
supplementary separate backup fuse
must be designated for the arrester
branch, depends on the size of the next
upstream supply fuse and the backup
fuse approved for the SPD. The following
maximum continuous voltages apply to
SPDs Type 1, 2 and 3 when used in TN sys-
tems (Figs.8.1.3.2 to 3b):
L1
L2
L3
PEN
1.1 U0
RA
Fig. 8.1.3.2 “3+0” circuit in TN-C systems
Fig. 8.1.3.4 illustrates an example of the
connections for use of lightning current
arresters and surge protective devices in
TN-C-S systems. It can be seen that SPDs
Type 3 are used downstream of the re-
sidual current device (RCD). In this con-
text, please note the following:
U0 = 230 V ac
Uc 1.1 x 230 V = 255 V ac
=> 3 x SPD with Uc 255 V ac
U0 = Nominal ac voltage of the phase
conductors to earth

U0 = 230 V ac
L1
Phase conductor to PE:
L2
L3
Uc 1.1 x 230 V = 255 V ac
N Neutral conductor to PE:
PE Uc 230 V ac

3 x SPD with Uc 255 V ac

1 x SPD with Uc 230 V ac
1.1 U0 U0
The values of U0 between neutral conductor and PE
already refer to most unfavourable operating conditions.
A tolerance of 10% was therefore not considered

U0 = Nominal ac voltage of the phase

RA conductors to earth

Fig. 8.1.3.3a “4+0” circuit in TN-S systems

U0 = 230 V ac
L1
Phase conductor to PE:
L2
L3
Uc 1.1 x 230 V = 255 V ac
N Neutral conductor to PE:
PE Uc 230 V ac

Fig. 8.1.3.1 RCD destroyed by lightning impulse 3 x SPD with Uc 255 V ac

current 1 x SPD with Uc 230 V ac
1.1 U0
The values of U0 between neutral conductor and PE
already refer to most unfavourable operating conditions.
Of course, this must be avoided. There-
fore both lightning current arresters Type
1 and SPDs Type 2 should be used
U0
A tolerance of 10% was therefore not considered.
8
U0 = Nominal ac voltage of the phase
upstream of the residual current device. conductors to earth
Hence, for SPDs Type 1 and 2, the only
possible measure for “protection against RA
indirect shock hazard” is using overcur-
rent protective devices. The use of SPDs Fig. 8.1.3.3b “3+1” circuit in TN-S systems
must therefore always be considered in
conjunction with a fuse as the overcur-
rent protective device. Whether or not a

www.dehn.de LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE 129

 As a result of the frequency of switching
surges in the terminal circuits, SPDs main distribution board subdistribution board terminal equipment
Type 3 are primarily employed to protect lightning current arrester surge arrester
against differential mode voltages. These protection acc. to IEC 61024-1, IEC 61312-1 (DIN V VDE V 0185/1-4)
surges generally arise between L and N. protection acc. to IEC 60364-4-443 (DIN VDE 0100/443)
F1
A surge limitation between L and N
L1
means that no impulse current is dis- L2

RCD
charged to PE. Thus, this process can also Wh L3
not be interpreted as residual current by PEN SEB N
PE
the RCD. In all other cases, SPDs Type 3
are designed for a nominal discharge

protection system
external lightning
F2 F2
capacity of 1.5 kA. These values are suffi-
cient in the sense that upstream protec-
tive stages of SPDs Type 1 and 2 take over
the discharge of high energy impulses.
When using an RCD capable of with-
MEB
standing impulse currents, these impulse
currents are not able to trip the RCD or
local EB
cause mechanical damage. The following
diagrams illustrate the use of SPDs as
part of the lightning protection zones Fig. 8.1.3.4 Use of SPDs in TN-C-S systems
concept, and the required lightning and
surge protective measures for an TN-C-S
system. The following diagram illustrates the use
of SPDs in a TN-S system.

main distribution board subdistribution board terminal equipment

lightning current arrester surge arrester
protection acc. to IEC 61024-1, IEC 61312-1 (DIN V VDE V 0185/1-4)
protection acc. to IEC 60364-4-443 (DIN VDE 0100/443)
F1
L1
L2
Wh L3
SEB N
PE
protection system
external lightning

F2 F2

MEB

local EB

Fig. 8.1.3.5 Use of SPDs in TN-S systems

130 LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE www.dehn.de

 L1 L2 L3 N PE

Socket Outlet
S-Schutz

DEHNflex

cable leng 1x DSA 230 LA Part No. 924 370 1x DFL M 255 Part No. 924 396 1x STC 230 Part No. 924 350
th ≥ 5 m
for cable ducts for flush-mounted systems for existing socket outlets

indication of interference
16 A

Subdistribution Board
PE PE

DEHNguard¤ DEHNguard¤ DEHNguard¤ DEHNguard¤ DEHNguard¤ DEHNguard¤ DEHNguard¤ DEHNguard¤

L1 L2 L3 N L1 L2 L3 N

1 1
125 A 125 A

or with remote signalling contact:

1x DG TNS 230 400 Part No. 900 530 1x DG TNS 230 400 FM Part No. 900 560

DEHNbloc Maxi DEHNventil¤

Coordinated to DEHNguard without (lightning current and surge arrester) can
additional decoupling coil or cable length be coordinated directly with SPDs Type 2
and 3 without additional decoupling coil
or cable length.
cable length < 15 m

DEHNbridge DEHNbridge DEHNbridge

DBR 35 DBR 35 DBR 35

Remote signalling module Remote signalling module

cable leng
th ≥ 15 m DEHNsignal DSI DBM DEHNsignal DSI DV
with floating changeover contact and with floating changeover contact and optical
DEHNbridge according to nominal current optical fibre connection fibre connection
3x DBR 35 Part No. 900 121
3x DBR 63 Part No. 900 122 DSI DBM Part No. 910 623 DSI DV Part No. 910 620 Main Distribution Board

315 A 1 315 A 1 315 A 1

L L' L L' L L' L L' L L' L L' L1 L1’ L2 L2’ L3 L3’

H1 H2 H3
DEHNbloc DEHNbloc DEHNbloc DEHNbloc Maxi DEHNbloc Maxi DEHNbloc Maxi ®
DB 1 255 H DB 1 255 H DB 1 255 H DBM 1 255 L DBM 1 255 L DBM 1 255 L DEHNventil DV TNC 255

N/PEN N/PEN N/PEN N/PEN N/PEN N/PEN N/PEN N/PEN N/PEN N/PEN N/PEN N/PEN PEN
D D D D D D - only for DEHNsignal -
S S S S S S
I I I I I I - nur f r DEHNsignal -

8
! ! ! ! ! !

3x DB 1 255 H Part No. 900 222 3x DBM 1 255 L Part No. 900 026 1x DV TNC 255 Part No. 900 373
1x MVS 1 8 Part No. 900 611 1x MVS 1 8 Part No. 900 611 also available as
Alternative: DV TNS 255 variant Part No. 900 374
MEB
3x DBM 1 255 Part No. 900 025
1x MVS 1 8 Part No. 900 611 1) only required, if a fuse of the same or a
lower nominal value is not already provided
in the upstream power supply.

Fig. 8.1.3.6 SPDs used in TN systems - Example: Office Building - Separation of the PEN in the main distribution board

www.dehn.de LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE 131

 L1 L2 L3 N PE

Überspannungsschutz

Socket Outlet
S-PROTECTOR

230V~ Defect

0
1
SFL-Protector

cable leng 1x NSM PRO EW Part No. 924 342 1x SF PRO Part No. 909 820 1x SFL PRO Part No. 912 260
th ≥ 5 m
1x S PRO Part No. 909 821

indication of interference
16 A

Subdistribution Board
PEN PEN

DEHNguard¤ DEHNguard¤ DEHNguard¤ DEHNguard¤ DEHNguard¤ DEHNguard¤

L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3

1 1
125 A 125 A

or with remote signalling contact:

1x DG TNC 230 400 Part No. 900 510 1x DG TNC 230 400 FM Part No. 900 540

DEHNbloc Maxi DEHNventil

Coordinated to DEHNguard¤ without (lightning current and surge arrester) can
additional decoupling coil or cable length be coordinated directly with SPDs Type 2
and 3 without additional decoupling coil
or cable length.
cable length < 15 m

DEHNbridge DEHNbridge DEHNbridge

DBR 35 DBR 35 DBR 35

Remote signalling module Remote signalling module

cable leng
th ≥ 15 m DEHNsignal DSI DBM DEHNsignal DSI DV
with floating changeover contact and with floating changeover contact and optical
DEHNbridge according to nominal current optical fibre connection fibre connection
3x DBR 35 Part No. 900 121
3x DBR 63 Part No. 900 122 DSI DBM Part No. 910 623 DSI DV Part No. 910 620
Main Distribution Board

315 A 1 315 A 1 315 A 1

L L' L L' L L' L L' L L' L L' L1 L1’ L2 L2’ L3 L3’

H1 H2 H3
DEHNbloc DEHNbloc DEHNbloc DEHNbloc Maxi DEHNbloc Maxi DEHNbloc Maxi ®
DB 1 255 H DB 1 255 H DB 1 255 H DBM 1 255 L DBM 1 255 L DBM 1 255 L DEHNventil DV TNC 255

N/PEN N/PEN N/PEN N/PEN N/PEN N/PEN N/PEN N/PEN N/PEN N/PEN N/PEN N/PEN PEN
D D D D D D - only for DEHNsignal -
S S S S S S
I I I I I I - nur f r DEHNsignal -

8
! ! ! ! ! !

3x DB 1 255 H Part No. 900 222 3x DBM 1 255 L Part No. 900 026 1x DV TNC 255 Part No. 900 373
1x MVS 1 8 Part No. 900 611 1x MVS 1 8 Part No. 900 611 also available as
Alternative: DV TNS 255 variant Part No. 900 374
MEB
3x DBM 1 255 Part No. 900 025
1x MVS 1 8 Part No. 900 611 1) only required, if a fuse of the same or a
lower nominal value is not already provided
in the upstream power supply.

Fig. 8.1.3.7 SPDs used in TN systems - Example: Office Building - Separation of the PEN in the subdistribution board

132 LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE www.dehn.de

 1
L1 L2 L3 N PE 16 A

3 A1 16 A also 16 A 1

Switchgear / Machine
possible
without NF10
Mains filter

1 2
L L N N
IN N L1 L2 L3
SPS-Protector
DEHNrail
PLC electronic
PLC DR ... FML

NETZFILTER DEHNrail 230/3N FML

DR 230 3N FML equipment
3 4 OUT
1 L' L' N' N'

10 A N L1 L2 L3

cable leng
th ≥ 5 m
1x SPS PRO Part No. 912 253 1x DR 230 FML Part No. 901 100 1x DR 230 3N FML Part No. 901 130
1x NF 10 Part No. 912 254
16 A

Subdistribution Board
PEN

DEHNguard¤ DEHNguard¤ DEHNguard¤

VNH VNH VNH

V NH 00 280 V NH 00 280 V NH 00 280

2 L1 L2 L3

1
125 A

3x V NH00 280 Part No. 900 261 1x DG TNC 230 400 Part No. 900 510
2)without separate backup fuse in case of earth and or with remote signalling contact:
short-circuit-proof wiring 1x DG TNC 230 400 FM Part No. 900 540

DEHNbloc Maxi DEHNventil

Coordinated to DEHNguard without (lightning current and surge arrester) can
additional decoupling coil or cable length be coordinated directly with SPDs Type 2
and 3 without additional decoupling coil
or cable length.
cable length < 15 m

DEHNbridge DEHNbridge DEHNbridge

DBR 35 DBR 35 DBR 35

Remote signalling module Remote signalling module

cable leng
th ≥ 15 m DEHNsignal DSI DBM DEHNsignal DSI DV
with floating changeover contact and with floating changeover contact and optical
DEHNbridge according to nominal current optical fibre connection fibre connection
3x DBR 35 Part No. 900 121
3x DBR 63 Part No. 900 122 DSI DBM Part No. 910 623 DSI DV Part No. 910 620
indication of
interference

Main Distribution Board

indication of
interference

500A 1 315 A 1 315 A 1

L L' L L' L L' 14 11 12 14 11 12
L1 L1' L2 L2' L3 L3'

H1 H2 H3
DEHNbloc Maxi DEHNbloc Maxi DEHNbloc Maxi DEHNsignal DEHNsignal
DBM 1 255 L DBM 1 255 L DBM 1 255 L DEHNventil® DV TNC 255
® ® ® DSI DBM DSI DV
DEHNbloc NH DEHNbloc NH DEHNbloc NH
DB NH00 255 DB NH00 255 DB NH00 255

N/PEN N/PEN N/PEN N/PEN N/PEN N/PEN PEN

D D D 1 2 3 1 2 3 4
S S S

8
I I I
! ! !

3x DB NH00 255 Part No. 900 260 3x DBM 1 255 L Part No. 900 026 1x DV TNC 255 Part No. 900 373
Alternative: 1x MVS 1 8 Part No. 900 611 also available as
MEB
3x DB 1 255 H Part No. 900 222 Alternative: DV TNS 255 variant Part No. 900 374
1x MVS 1 8 Part No. 900 611 3x DBM 1 255 Part No. 900 025 Option:
1) only required, if a fuse of the same or a lower nominal 1x MVS 1 8 Part No. 900 611 1x DSI DV Art.-Nr. 910 620
value is not already provided in the upstream power Option:
supply 1x DSI DBM Art.-Nr. 910 623

Fig. 8.1.3.8 SPDs used in TN systems - Example: Industry - Separation of the PEN in the subdistribution board

www.dehn.de LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE 133

 L1 L2 L3 N PE
indication of
interference
1 2
DEHNrail
DR ... FML
3 4
1x DR 230 FML
16 A
L1
125 A
H1
DEHNventil® DV TNC 255
MEB
- only for DEHNsignal -
- nur f r DEHNsignal -
1x DV TNC 255
also available as
DV TNS 255 variant
Fig. 8.1.3.9 SPDs used in TN systems - Example: Residential building
8.1.4 Use of SPDs in TT systems
For „protection against indirect shock
hazard“ in TT systems, the overcurrent
protective devices, residual current
devices (RCD) and, in special cases, fault-
voltage-operated protective devices have
been approved. This means that, in TT
systems, lightning current and surge
arresters may only be arranged down-
stream of the above described protective
devices in order to ensure the “protec-
tion against indirect shock hazard” in the
event of an SPD failure.
As previously described in section 8.1.3,
in case of an arrangement of an SPD Type
1 or 2 downstream of an RCD, it has to be
expected that, because of the impulse
8 current discharged to PE, this discharge
process will be interpreted by the RCD as
residual current, and then the circuit is
interrupted by the same. If SPDs Type 1
are used, it must further be assumed that
the dynamics of the discharged partial
lightning current would cause mechani-
cal damage to the RCD as the SPD Type 1
responds as is the case with TN systems.
This would damage the protective device
for “protection against shock hazard”
134 LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE
Heating Control
Socket Outlet
S-PROTECTOR
230V~ Defect
heating
Part No. 901 100 1x S PRO Part No. 909 821
1x SF PRO Part No. 909 820
1x SFL PRO Part No. 912 260
DEHNsignal DSI DV
Subdistribution Board
Remote signalling module
with floating changeover contact and optical fibre
Central Main and
connection
DSI DV Part No. 910 620
Note:
L1’ L2 L2’ L3 L3’
As an alternative, surge arresters
H2 H3
(e.g. DG TNC 230 400 Part No. 900 510)
can also be applied, if no
− lightning protection system
PEN
− electrical power supply via the service entry mast
− antenna on the roof
is available.
Part No. 900 373
Part No. 900 374
and override the protective measure. TT system, a short circuit current can
This type of state, which can result in life develop and cause the next upstream
hazards, must of course be avoided. overcurrent protective device to respond.
Hence, both SPDs Type 1 and SPDs Type 2 However, since lightning currents always
must always be installed upstream of the occur to earth, i. e. PE, a supplementary
residual current device in TT systems. discharge path between N and PE must
SPDs Type 1 and 2 must be arranged in TT be provided.
systems to meet the conditions for the These so-called “N-PE arresters” must
use of overcurrent protective devices for meet special requirements since here, on
“protection against indirect shock haz- the one hand, the sum of the partial dis-
ard”. charge currents from L1, L2, L3 and N
In the event of a failure, i. e. a faulty SPD, must be carried and, on the other, there
short circuit currents must flow to initiate must be a follow current extinguishing
an automatic disconnection of the over- capability of 100 Arms because of a possi-
current protective devices within 5 s. If ble shifting of the neutral point.
the arresters in the TT system were The following maximum continuous volt-
arranged as shown in Figs. 8.1.3.4 and ages apply to the use of SPDs in TT sys-
8.1.3.5 for TN systems then, in the event tems between L and N (Fig. 8.1.4.1):
of a fault, only earth fault currents would
arise instead of short circuit currents. In
certain circumstances, however, these
The lightning current carrying capability
of the SPDs Type 1 must be designed to
earth fault currents do not trip an conform to lightning protection levels I,
upstream overcurrent protective device II, III/IV, as per DIN V VDE V 0185-1.
within the time required. For the lightning current carrying capa-
bility of the SPDs between N and PE, the
SPDs Type 1 and 2 in TT systems are there- following values must be maintained:
fore arranged between L and N. This
arrangement shall ensure that, in the
event of a faulty protective device in the
www.dehn.de
 U0 = 230 V ac
L1
Phase conductor to neutral conductor
L2
L3
Uc 1.1 x 230 V = 255 V ac
N Neutral conductor to PE:
PE Uc 230 V ac

3 x SPD with Uc 255 V ac

1 x N-PE arrester with Uc 230 V ac
1.1 U0
The values of U0 between neutral conductor and PE
already refer to the most unfavourable operating con-
ditions. A tolerance of 10% has therefore not been
U0 considered.

U0 = Nominal ac voltage of the phase

conductors to earth
RA

Fig. 8.1.4.1 TT system (230/400 V); “3+1” circuit

Lightning protection level:

I Iimp ≥ 100 kA (10/350 µs)
II Iimp ≥ 75 kA (10/350 µs)
III/IV Iimp ≥ 50 kA (10/350 µs).

The SPDs Type 2 are also connected

between L and N and between N and PE.
For the SPD between N and PE, in combi-
nation with SPDs Type 2, the discharge
capacity must be at least
In ≥ 20 kA (8/20 µs) for three-phase sys-
tems and In ≥10 kA (8/20 µs) for single-
phase systems.
Since coordination is always performed
on the basis of the worst-case conditions main distribution board subdistribution board terminal equipment
(10/ 350 µs waveform), the N-PE Type 2
lightning current arrester surge arrester
arrester from the Red/Line family is
based on a value of 12 kA (10/350 µs). protection acc. to IEC 61024-1 (DIN V VDE V 0185/1-4)
F1 protection acc. to IEC 60364-4-443 (DIN VDE 0100/443)
Fig. 8.1.4.2. shows an example of the con- L1
nections for use of SPDs in TT systems. As L2
RCD

is the case in TN systems, surge protective Wh L3

N
devices Type 3 are installed downstream SEB PE
of the RCD. Generally, the impulse cur- F2
rent discharged by this SPD is so low that F2
protection system
external lightning

the RCD does not recognise this process

as a residual current.

However, it is still important to use an

RCD capable of withstanding impulse
currents.
MEB local EB

Fig. 8.1.4.2 Use of SPDs in TT systems

8

www.dehn.de LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE 135

 L1 L2 L3 N PE

Socket Outlet
ÜS-Schutz

DEHNflex

cable leng 1x DSA 230 LA Part No. 924 370 1x DFL M 255 Part No. 924 396 1x STC 230 Part No. 924 350
th ≥ 5 m
for cable ducts for flush-mounted systems for existing socket outlets

indication of
interference
16 A

Subdistribution Board
RCD
PE PE

DEHNguard® DEHNguard® DEHNguard® DEHNguard® DEHNguard® DEHNguard® DEHNguard® DEHNguard®

L1 L2 L3 N L1 L2 L3 N

1 1
125 A 125 A

or with remote signalling contact:

1x DG TT 230 400 Part No. 900 520 1x DG TT 230 400 FM Part No. 900 550

DEHNbloc Maxi DEHNventil

Coordinated to DEHNguard without (lightning current and surge arrester) can
additional decoupling coil or cable length be coordinated directly with SPDs Type 2
and 3 without additional decoupling coil
or cable length.
cable length < 15 m

DEHNbridge DEHNbridge DEHNbridge DEHNbridge

DBR 35 DBR 35 DBR 35 DBR 35

Remote signalling module Remote signalling module

cable leng
th ≥ 15 m DEHNsignal DSI DV DEHNsignal DSI DV
with floating changeover contact and with floating changeover contact and optical
optical fibre connection fibre connection
DEHNbridge according to the nominal current
4x DBR 35 Part No. 900 121 DSI DV Part No. 910 620 DSI DV Part No. 910 620
4x DBR 63 Part No. 900 122
Main Distribution Board

315 A1 315 A 1 315 A 1

L L' L L' L L' L1 L1' L2 L2' L3 L3' N N'
L L' L L' L L' N N'
H1 H2 H3
DEHNbloc DEHNbloc DEHNbloc Durchgangsklemme DEHNgap® BN DEHNbloc Maxi DEHNbloc Maxi DEHNbloc Maxi DEHNgap Maxi ®
DEHNventil DV TT 255
DB 1 255 H DB 1 255 H DB 1 255 H DK 35
DBM 1 255 L DBM 1 255 L DBM 1 255 L DGP M255

PE
N/PEN N/PEN N/PEN N/PEN N/PEN N/PEN N/PEN N/PEN N/PEN N/PEN N/PEN N/PEN N
D D D

8
S S
I I
! !
D D D D
S S S S S
I I I I I
!
! ! ! !

3x DB 1 255 H Part No. 900 222 3x DBM 1 255 L Part No. 900 026 1x DV TT 255 Part No. 900 375
1x DK 35 Part No. 900 699 1x DGPM 255 Part No. 900 055
1x DGP BN 255 Part No. 900 132 1x MVS 1 8 Part No. 900 611
MEB 1x MVS 1 8 Part No. 900 611
Alternative: 1) only required, if a fuse of the same or a
3x DBM 1 255 Part No. 900 025 lower nominal value is not already provided
1x DGPM 255 Part No. 900 055 in the upstream power supply
1x MVS 1 8 Part No. 900 611

Fig. 8.1.4.3 SPDs used in TT systems - Example: Office Building

136 LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE www.dehn.de

 1
L1 L2 L3 N PE 16 A
16 A also
1
possible 16 A
3 A1 without NF10

Switchgear / Machine
mains filter

1 2
L L N N
IN N L1 L2 L3
SPS-Protector
DEHNrail
PLC electronic
PLC DR ... FML

NETZFILTER DEHNrail 230/3N FML

DR 230 3N FML equipment
3 4 OUT
1 L’ L’ N’ N’

10 A N L1 L2 L3

cable leng
th ≥ 5 m
1x SPS PRO Part No. 912 253 1x DR 230 FML Part No. 901 100 1x DR 230 3N FML Part No. 901 130
1x NF 10 Part No. 912 254
16 A

indication of
interference

Subdistribution Board
RCD
PE PE

DEHNguard¤ DEHNguard¤ DEHNguard¤ DEHNguard¤ DEHNguard¤ DEHNguard¤ DEHNguard¤ DEHNguard¤

L1 L2 L3 N L1 L2 L3 N

1 1
125 A 125 A

or with remote signalling contact

1x DG TT 230 400 FM Part No. 900 520 1x DG TT 230 400 FM Part No. 900 550

DEHNbloc Maxi DEHNventil

Coordinated to DEHNguard without (lightning current and surge arrester) can
additional decoupling coil or cable length be coordinated directly with SPDs Type 2
and 3 without additional decoupling coil
or cable length.

DEHNbridge DEHNbridge DEHNbridge DEHNbridge

cable length

DBR 35 DBR 35 DBR 35 DBR 35

Remote signalling module Remote signalling module

DEHNsignal DSI DBM DEHNsignal DSI DV
< 15 m

cable leng
th ≥ 15 m
with floating changeover contact and with floating changeover contact and optical
optical fibre connection fibre connection
DEHNbridge according to nominal current
4x DBR 35 Part No. 900 121 DSI DV Part No. 910 620 DSI DV Part No. 910 620
4x DBR 63 Part No. 900 122
315 A 1
indication of
interference

Main Distribution Board

indication of
interference

500 A 1 315 A 1
14 11 12
L1 L1’ L2 L2’ L3 L3’ N N’

H1 H2 H3

¤ ¤ ¤ ¤
DEHNsignal DEHNventil¤ DV TT 255
DEHNbloc NH DEHNbloc NH DEHNbloc NH DEHNbloc NH 14 11 12 L L’ L L’ L L’ N N’ DSI DV
DB NH00 255 DB NH00 255 DB NH00 255 DB NH00 255

DEHNsignal DEHNbloc Maxi DEHNbloc Maxi DEHNbloc Maxi DEHNgap Maxi

DSI DV DBM 1 255 L DBM 1 255 L DBM 1 255 L DGP M255
PE
1 2 3 4

8
N/PEN N/PEN N/PEN N/PEN N/PEN N/PEN N
1 2 3 4 D D D D
S S S S
I I I I
! ! ! !

3x DB NH00 255 Part No. 900 260 3x DBM 1 255 L Part No. 900 026 1x DV TT 255 Part No. 900 375
1x DGP B NH00 N 255 Part No. 900 269 1x DGPM 255 Part No. 900 055 Option:
MEB
Alternative: 1x MVS 1 8 Part No. 900 611 1x DSI DV Part No. 900 620
Alternative:
3x DB 1 255 H Part No. 900 222 3x DBM 1 255 Part No. 900 025
1x DK 35 Part No. 900 699 1x DGPM 255 Part No. 900 055
1x DGP BN 255 Part No. 900 132 1x MVS 1 8 Part No. 900 611 1) only required, if a fuse of the same or a
Option: lower nominal value is not already provided
1x MVS 1 4 Part No. 900 610 in the upstream power supply.
1x DSI DV Part No. 900 620

Fig. 8.1.4.4 SPDs used in TT systems - Example: Industry

www.dehn.de LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE 137

 L1 L2 L3 N PE

indication of
interference

Heating Control

Socket Outlets
1 2
S-PROTECTOR

DEHNrail
DR ... FML 230V~ Defect

heating

3 4

1x DR 230 FML Part No. 901 100 1x S PRO Part No. 909 821
16 A 1x SF PRO Part No. 909 820
1x SFL PRO Part No. 912 260
RCD
DEHNsignal DSI DV
Remote signalling module

Subdistribution Board
with floating changeover contact and optical fibre

Central Main and

connection
DSI DV Part No. 910 620

Note:
As an alternative, surge arresters
(e.g. DG TT 230 400 Part No. 900 520)
125 A L1 L1’ L2 L2’ L3 L3’ N N’
can also be applied, if no
− lightning protection system
H1 H2 H3

DEHNventil¤ DV TT 255

MEB − electrical power supply via

the service entry mast
− antenna on the roof
PE
- only for DEHNsignal -
- nur f r DEHNsignal -

is available.

1x DV TT 255 Part No. 900 375

Fig. 8.1.4.5 SPDs used in TT systems - Example: Residential building

8.1.5 Use of SPDs in IT systems nents which persons can come into con- This possible operating state must be tak-
For “protection against indirect shock tact with, adopt this potential via the en into account when choosing the SPDs
hazard“ in IT systems, overcurrent pro- protective conductor. Hence, no haz- with respect to their maximum continu-
tective devices, residual current devices ardous potential differences can be ous voltage.
(RCD) and insulation monitoring devices bridged either. When the first fault
have been approved. occurs, however, it must be noted, that When considering IT systems, a distinc-
the voltage of the IT system of the intact tion is made between IT systems with
Whereas in TN or TT systems, the “pro- conductors to earth corresponds to the neutral conductors entering the building
tection against indirect shock hazard” in voltage between the external conduc- with the others, and IT systems without
the event of the first fault is ensured by tors. Hence, in a 230/400 V IT system, in such neutral conductors. For IT systems
the appropriate automatic disconnection the event of a faulty SPD there is a volt- with the latter configuration, the SPDs in
from supply through the overcurrent age of 400 V across the non-faulty SPD. the so-called “3+0” circuit must be
protective devices or RCDs, the first fault
in an IT system only creates an alarm. An
excessive shock hazard voltage cannot
occur because the first fault in the IT sys- L1 UL-L 500 V ac
tem simply creates an earth connection L2 Phase conductor to PE:

8 of the system. The operating state of the

IT system then becomes a TN or TT sys-
tem. Hence, an IT system can be further
L3
PE
Uc 500 V ac

3 x SPD with Uc 500 V ac

UL-L
operated at no risk after the first fault. The values of Uc between neutral conductor and PE already
Thus, work or production processes refer to the most unfavourable operating conditions. A
already begun (e. g. chemical industry) tolerance of 10% has therefore not been considered.
can still be completed. For the first fault,
the protective conductor adopts the
potential of the faulty external conduc- RA
tor, which, however, does not create a
risk, because all bodies and metal compo- Fig. 8.1.5.1a IT system without neutral conductor; “3+0” circuit

138 LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE www.dehn.de

installed between each external conduc-
tor and the PE conductor. For IT systems U0 = 230 V ac
L1
with neutral conductors entering the Phase conductor to neutral conductor:
L2
Uc 3 x 230 V = 398 V ac
building with the others, both the “4+0” L3
N Neutral conductor to PE:
and the “3+1” circuit can be used. When Uc 230 V ac
PE
using the “3+1” circuit, it must be noted
that, in the N-PE path, an SPD must be 3 x SPD with Uc 398 V ac
employed with a follow current extin- 1 x SPD with Uc 230 V ac
guishing capability appropriate to the 3 U0 U0
The values of Uc between neutral conductor and PE already
system conditions.
refer to the most unfavourable operating conditions. A
The following maximum continuous tolerance of 10% has therefore not been considered.
operating voltages apply to the use of
SPDs Type 1, 2 and 3 in IT systems with U0 = Nominal ac voltage of the phase
conductors to earth
and without neutral conductors entering
RA
the building with the others
(Figs.8.1.5.1a – c):

A second fault in an IT system must then Fig. 8.1.5.1b IT system with neutral conductor; “4+0” conductor
cause a tripping of a protective device.
The statements about TN and TT systems U0 = 230 V ac
made in sections 8.1 and 8.2 apply to the L1
Phase conductor to neutral conductor:
L2
use of SPDs in IT systems in connection Uc 1.1 x 230 V = 255 V ac
L3
with a protective device for "protection N Neutral conductor to PE:
against indirect shock hazard". The use PE Uc 230 V ac
of SPDs Type 1 and 2 upstream of the
3 x SPD with Uc 255 V ac
RCD is therefore also recommended for
1 x SPD with Uc 230 V ac
IT systems. A connection example for the
1.1 U0
use of SPDs in IT systems without neutral The values of Uc between neutral conductor and PE already
conductors entering the building with refer to the most unfavourable operating conditions. A
the others is shown in Fig.8.1.5.2. tolerance of 10% has therefore not been considered.
U0

U0 = Nominal ac voltage of the phase

conductors to earth

RA

Fig. 8.1.5.1c IT system with neutral conductor “3+1” circuit

main distribution board subdistribution board terminal equipment

lightning current arrester surge arrester
protection acc. to IEC 61024-1
F1 protection acc. to IEC 60364-4-443 (DIN VDE 0100/443)
L1
L2
Wh L3
SEB PE
protection system
external lightning

F2 F2

MEB local EB
8
Fig. 8.1.5.2 Use of SPDs in IT systems without neutral conductor

www.dehn.de LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE 139

 L1 L2 L3PE

indication of
interference
PE
PE

DEHNguard¤ DEHNguard¤ DEHNguard¤

DEHNguard¤ DEHNguard¤ DEHNguard¤

L1 L2 L3
L1 L2 L3

1 1
100 A 100 A

Subdistribution Board
or with remote signalling contact
1xDG IT 500 Part No. 900 516 1xDG IT 500 FM Part No. 900 546

1) only required, if a fuse of the same or a

cable length < 30 m

lower nominal value is not already provided
in the upstream power supply
DEHNbridge DEHNbridge DEHNbridge DEHNbridge DEHNbridge DEHNbridge
DBR 35 DBR 35 DBR 35 DBR 35 DBR 35 DBR 35

cable leng
th 30 m

6x DBR 35 Part No. 900 121

6x DBR 63 Part No. 900 122
1x MVS 1 8 Part No. 900 611

Main Distribution Board

100 A 1

DEHNbloc¤ DEHNbloc¤ DEHNbloc¤ Durchgangsklemme DEHNbloc¤

DB 1 255 DB 1 255 DB 1 255 DK 35 DB 1 255

4x DB 1 255 Part No. 900 111

1x DK 35 Part No. 900 699
1x MVS 1 4 Part No. 900 610
MEB
1x MVS 1 8 Part No. 900 611

Fig. 8.1.5.3 Use of SPDs in 500 V IT systems - Example without neutral conductor

8.1.6 Rating the lengths of the con- Series connection (V-shape) in accor- Therefore, IEC 60364-5-534 suggests a
necting leads for SPDs dance with IEC 60364-5-534 series connection system (V-shape) as

8 Rating the lengths of connecting leads of

surge protective devices is a significant
part of the IEC 60364-5-534 installation
Crucial for the protection of systems,
equipment and consumers is the actual
level of impulse voltage across the instal-
shown in Fig. 8.1.6.1 to be used for con-
necting surge protective devices. This
requires no separate conductor branches
lations to be protected. The optimum for connecting the surge protective
regulations.
protective effect is then achieved when devices.
The aspects stated below are also fre-
quently the reason for complaints the impulse level across the installation
through experts, members of technical to be protected matches the voltage pro-
inspectorates, etc. inspecting the struc- tection level provided by the surge pro-
ture. tective device.

140 LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE www.dehn.de

 L1 L2 L3 N PE

indication of
interference
DEHNguard¤ DEHNguard¤ DEHNguard¤ DEHNguard¤ DEHNguard¤ DEHNguard¤ DEHNguard¤ DEHNguard¤

1 1
125 A 125 A

Subdistribution Board
or with remote signalling contact
4x DG T 440 Part No. 900 655 4x DG T 440 FM Part No. 900 685
1x MVS 1 4 Part No. 900 610 1x MVS 1 4 Part No. 900 610

1) only required, if a fuse of the same or a lower

cable length < 15 m

nominal value is not already provided in the

upstream power supply

DEHNbridge DEHNbridge DEHNbridge DEHNbridge

DBR 35 DBR 35 DBR 35 DBR 35
cable leng
th 15 m

4x DBR 35 Part No. 900 121

or
4x DBR 63 Part No. 900 122

Main Distribution Board

100 A 1

DEHNbloc¤ DEHNbloc¤ DEHNbloc¤ DEHNbloc¤

DB 1 440 DB 1 440 DB 1 440 DB 1 440

4x DB 1 440 Part No. 900 159

MEB 1x MVS 1 8 Part No. 900 611

Fig. 8.1.5.4 Use of SPDs in 230/400 V IT systems - Example with neutral conductor

Parallel connection system in series wiring can sometimes not be used

accordance with IEC 60364-5-534 for systems with higher nominal operat-

iimp uSPD Utotal

The optimum series connection system
cannot be used under all system condi-
tions.
ing currents.
Meanwhile, the industry provides so-
called “two-conductor terminals” to
8
Nominal currents carried via the double solve this “problem“. Thus, the cable
terminals on the surge protective device lengths can still be kept short, even if the
Utotal = uSPD nominal operating current is increased.
as part of the series wiring are limited by
iimp Discharged impulse current the thermal loadability of the double ter- When using the “two-conductor termi-
uSPD Limiting SPD voltage minals. For this reason, the manufacturer nals”, however, it must be ensured that
Utotal Limiting voltage on the terminal equipment the value of the backup fuse stated by
of the surge protective device prescribes
a certain max. permissible value of the the manufacturer for this particular
Fig. 8.1.6.1 Connection of surge protective devices backup fuse which, in turn, means that
in serial connection

www.dehn.de LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE 141

 application is always observed
(Figs. 8.1.6.2 and 8.1.6.3).
If series connection is definitely no
option, surge protective devices must be
integrated into a separate branch circuit.
If the nominal value of the next
upstream installation fuse exceeds the
nominal current of the max. permissible
backup fuse of the surge protective
device, the branch must be equipped
with a backup fuse for the surge protec-
tive device (Fig. 8.1.6.4).
Fig. 8.1.6.2 Principle of “two-conductor terminals
(TCT)” - Illustration of a single-pole unit
Fig. 8.1.6.3 “Two-conductor terminals”
When the surge protective device in the
conductor branch responds, the dis-
charge current flows through further ele-
ments (conductors, fuses) causing addi-
tional dynamic voltage drops across
these impedances.
8 It can be stated here that the ohmic com-
ponent is negligible compared to the
inductive component.
Taking into account the relation
⎛ di ⎞
U dyn = i i R + ⎜ ⎟ L
⎝ dt ⎠
and the rate of current change (di/dt) for
transient processes of a few 10 kA/µs, the
dynamic voltage drop Udyn is consider-
142 LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE
L/N
Udyn 1
uSPD Utotal
iimp
Udyn 2
PE
Utotal = Udyn 1 + uSPD + Udyn 2
iimp Discharged impulse current
uSPD Limiting SPD voltage
Utotal Limiting voltage on the terminal equip-
ment
Udyn 1 Dynamic voltage drop on the phase-side
connection of the SPD
Udyn 2 Dynamic voltage drop at the earth-side
connection of the SPD
Fig. 8.1.6.4 Connection of surge protective devices
in cable branches
ably determined by the inductive compo-
nent.
In order to keep this dynamic voltage
drop low, the electrician carrying out the
work must keep the inductance of the
connecting cable and hence its length as
low as possible. IEC 60364-5-534 there-
fore recommends to design the total
cable length of surge protective devices
in branch circuits to be not longer than
0.5 m (Fig. 8.1.6.5).
Design of the connecting lead on the
earth side
This requirement, which is seemingly dif-
ficult to realise, shall be explained with
the help of the example shown in
Figs. 8.1.6.6a and b. These show the main
equipotential bonding of a low voltage
consumer’s installation in accordance
with DIN VDE 0100 Part 410. Here, the
use of surge protective devices Type 1
extends the equipotential bonding to
a
SPD
TEI
b
EB
a+b ≤ 0.50 m
TEI = Terminal Equipment Interface
Fig. 8.1.6.5 Recommended max. cable lengths of surge protective devices in branch circuits
become a lightning equipotential bond-
ing.
In Fig. 8.1.6.6a, both measures are
installed separately. In this case, the PEN
was connected to the equipotential
bonding bar and the earthing connec-
tion of the surge protective devices was
performed via a separate equipotential
bonding conductor.
Thus, the effective cable length (la) for
the surge protective devices corresponds
to the distance between the installation
site of the surge protective devices (e. g.
service entrance box, main distribution
board) to the equipotential bonding bar.
A connection configuration of this type
mostly achieves minimum effective pro-
tection of the installation. Without great
expenses, however, it is possible to use a
conductor leading as shown in
Fig. 8.1.6.6b to reduce the effective cable
length of the surge protective devices
(lb < 0.5 m).
This is achieved by using a “bypass” con-
ductor (y) from the terminal of the earth
side of the arrester to the PEN. The con-
nection from the terminal of the earth
side of the arrester to the equipotential
bonding bar (x) remains as it was.
According to the VDEW directive on the
use of “surge protective devices Class B“
in main distribution systems, the bypass
conductor (y) may only be omitted if the
surge protective device is installed in the
immediate vicinity (≤ 0.5 m) of the service
entrance box and hence also in the
immediate vicinity of the equipotential
bonding.
When installing the connection y, the dis-
tance between service entrance box or
main distribution board and equipoten-
TEI
SPD
b1
EB
b2
(b1 + b2) < 0.50 m
www.dehn.de
 Design of the phase-side connecting
L1
L2 cable
L3 The cable length on the phase side must l1

installation site 1
PEN
also be taken into consideration. The fol-
lowing case study shall illustrate this:

la
In expanded control systems, surge pro-
tection must be provided for the busbar l2

x system and the circuits attached thereto

(A to D) with their consumers

installation site 2
EB
(Fig. 8.1.6.7).
For the use of the surge protective
devices in this case, installation sites 1
and 2 are taken as alternatives. Installa-
unfavourable A B C D
tion site 1 is located directly at the supply
of the busbar system. This ensures the l1: Total cable length at installation site 1
Fig. 8.1.6.6a Connection of surge protective devices same level of protection against surges l2: Total cable length at installation site 2
under consideration of the recommen- for all consumers. The effective cable
ded max. cable lengths length of the surge protective device at Fig. 8.1.6.7 Arrangement of surge protective devices
installation site 1 is l1 for all consumers. If in a system and the resulting effective
there is not enough space, the installa- cable length
L1 tion site of the surge protective devices is
L2
L3 sometimes chosen at a position along the This allows to realise a series connection
PEN busbar system. In extreme cases, installa- directly via the device. Fig. 8.1.6.8 shows
lb

y ment shown in Fig. 8.1.6.7. For circuit A
x tance compared to cables and conductors
EB
favourable
Fig. 8.1.6.6b Connection of surge protective devices
under consideration of the recommen-
ded max. cable lengths
tial bonding bar is thus insignificant. The
solution for this problem referred only to
the design of the connecting cable on
the earth side of the surge protective
devices.
tion site 2 can be chosen for the arrange-
results the effective cable length l2. Bus-
bar systems in fact have a lower induc-
(approx. 1/4) and hence a lower inductive
voltage drop. However, the length of the
busbars must not be disregarded.
The design of the connecting cables has
considerable influence on the effective-
ness of surge protective devices and must
therefore be taken into consideration at
the design stage of the installation!
The contents of IEC 60364-5-534
described above were important guide-
lines for the development of the new
DEHNventil combined lightning current
and surge arrester which was supposed
to combine the requirements on light-
ning current and surge arresters in accor-
dance with the DIN V VDE V 0185 1-4
standard series in a single device.
such a series connection in form of an
operating circuit diagram.
From Fig. 8.1.6.9 it can be taken how
advantageous it is to implement a series
connection with the aid of a busbar.
Because of the thermal loading capacity
of the double terminals employed, a
series connection (also called through-
wiring) can be used up to 125 A.
For load currents > 125 A, the surge pro-
tective devices are connected in the con-
ductor branch (so-called parallel wiring).
The maximum cable lengths according to
IEC 60364-5-534 must be observed. The
parallel wiring can be implemented as
shown in Fig. 8.1.6.10.

L1'
L2'
L3'
PEN
F4 F5 F6

SEB

F1-F3
L1

H1
L1'

DEHNventil® DV TNC 255

L2 L2'

H2
L3

H3
L3'
F1 - F3
> 125 A gL/gG
8
PEN
- only for DEHNsignal - F4 - F6
- nur für DEHNsignal -
= 125 A gL/gG

L1 L2 L3 PEN
new connecting cable EB

Fig. 8.1.6.8 Series connection

www.dehn.de LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE 143

 L1'
L2'
L3'
PEN
F4 F5 F6
s s s
SEB
L1 L1’ L2 L2’ L3 L3’
F1 - F3
H1 H2 H3

F1-F3 ®
DEHNventil DV TNC 255
> 315 A gL/gG

PEN
- only for DEHNsignal - F4 - F6
- nur f r DEHNsignal -
= 315 A gL/gG

L1 L2 L3 PEN
MEB

Fig. 8.1.6.10 Parallel connection

When installing the devices, it must be

Fig. 8.1.6.9 Series connection with a busbar
In this context, it should be ensured that
the connecting cable on the earth side
still benefits from the double terminal
for the earth connection. As shown in
Fig. 8.1.6.10, it is often possible, without
great effort, to achieve an effective cable
length of the order of magnitude
l < 0.5 m with a conductor leading from
terminal component “PE” of the earth-
side double terminal to PEN.
8.1.7 Rating of the cross-sectional
areas and the backup protec-
tion of surge protective
devices
Connecting leads of arresters can be sub-
jected to loads from impulse currents,
operating currents and short circuit cur-
rents. The individual loads depend on
various factors:
⇒ Type of protective circuit: one-port
(Fig. 8.1.7.1) / two-port (Fig. 8.1.7.2)
⇒ Type of arrester: lightning current
arrester, combined lightning current
and surge arrester, surge protective
devices
⇒ Performance of the arrester on fol-
low currents: follow current extinc-
tion/follow current limitation
Conductor Insulating material
ensured that the short circuit current
actually flowing is able to trip the backup material NR PVC VPE IIK
protection. The rating of the cross- SR EPR
sectional area or of the conductor is then
Cu 141 115 143 134
given by the following equation:
Al 87 76 94 89
k 2 i s2 = l 2 i t Table 8.1.7.1 Material coefficient k for copper and
t Permissible time for disconnection in aluminium conductors with different
the event of a short circuit in s insulating materials
S Conductor cross section in mm2 which is smaller than the maximum back-
I Current at complete short circuit in A up fuse stated in the data sheet of the
k Material coefficient in A • s / mm2 arrester by a ratio of 1:1.6.
according to Table 8.1.7.1 For surge protective devices installed as
shown in Fig. 8.1.7.2, the maximum oper-
ating current must not exceed the nomi-
Furthermore, it must be ensured that the nal load current stated for the protective
information concerning the maximum device. To protective devices which can
permissible overcurrent protection cir- be connected in series, applies the maxi-
cuits in the data sheet of the surge pro- mum current for through-wiring
tective device is only valid up to the value (Fig. 8.1.7.3).
of the stated short-circuit withstand
capability of the protective device. If the
Fig. 8.1.7.4. shows examples of cross-sec-
short circuit current at the installation tional areas and backup protection for
site is greater than the stated short-cir-
lightning current arresters and combined
cuit withstand capability of the protec- lightning current and surge arresters
tive device, a backup fuse must be chosen Type 1.
Fig. 8.1.7.5 shows examples of cross-sec-
tional areas and backup protection for
surge protective devices Type 2. Fig.
S2 1
8.1.7.6 shows the same for surge protec-
tive devices Type 3.
S3 2
The behaviour of the impulse current
must be taken into consideration when

8 If surge protective devices are installed as

shown in Fig. 8.1.7.1, the S2 and S3 con-
necting cables must only be rated upon
Fig. 8.1.7.1 One-port protective circuit

the criteria of short circuit protection

according to DIN VDE 0100 Part 530 and 1 3

the impulse current carrying capability.

The data sheet of the protective device
provides the maximum permissible over- 2 4
current protection which can be used in
this application as backup protection for
the arrester.
Fig. 8.1.7.2 Two-port protective circuit Fig. 8.1.7.3 SPD with through-wiring

144 LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE www.dehn.de

 F1 Nominal currents
L1 L1’ Fuse F1 S2 / mm¥ S3 / mm¥ Fuse F2 and design
L2 L2’ DEHNventil DV TNC 255 A gL / gG A gL / gG
L3 L3’ 25 10 16 --- 250A/1 25 kA 75 kA
PEN PEN F1 > 315 A gL / gG 35 10 16 --- 200A/1 22 kA 70 kA
40 10 16 ---
F2 50 10 16 --- 160A/00 20 kA1) 75 kA2)
F1 63 10 16 --- 100A/C00 9.5 kA 25 kA
S2 80 10 16 ---
F2 = 315 A gL / gG 63A/C00 5.5 kA 20 kA
100 16 16 ---
125 16 16 --- 35A/C00 4 kA 15 kA
L1 L1’ L2 L2’ L3 L3’ F1 ≤ 315 A gL / gG 160 25 25 ---
H1 H2 H3 F2 20A/C00 1.7 kA 8 kA
DEHNventil¤ DV TNC 255 200 35 35 ---
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
250 35 35 ---
315 50 50 ---
I (kA)
F2 melting explosion
- only for DEHNsignal -
PEN
>315 50 50 315
- nur f r DEHNsignal -

Fig. 8.1.7.7 Performance of NH fuses bearing impul-

S3 se current loads
MEB
Field 1: No melting
The energy brought into the fuse by the
Fig. 8.1.7.4 Example: DEHNventil, DV TNC 255 lightning impulse current is so too low to
cause a melting of the fuse.
L3'
L2'
Field 2: Melting
A
L1' DEHNguard TNC.../ TNS.../ TT... The energy of the lightning impulse cur-
DG TNC 230 400 FM rent is sufficient to melt the fuse and
PE DG TNS 230 400 FM hence interrupt the current path through
DEHNguard ¤
DEHNguard ¤ ¤
DEHNguard DEHNguard¤
DG TT 230 400 FM the fuse (Fig. 8.1.7.8).
F1 > 125 A gL / gG
It is characteristical for the performance
L1 L2 L3 N

F1 of the fuse that the lightning impulse

current, since it is injected, continues to
F2 = 125 A gL / gG
flow, unaffected by the performance of
F2 F1 ≤ 125 A gL / gG the fuse. The fuse disconnects only after
F1
L1 F2 the lightning impulse current has
L2 decayed. The fuses are therefore not
L3
N F2 selective with respect to the disconnec-
PE tion of lightning impulse currents. There-
fore it must be ensured that, because of
Fig. 8.1.7.5 Example: DEHNguard TNS the behaviour of the impulse current, the
maximum permissible backup fuse as per
F1 rating the backup fuses for surge protec-
the data sheet and/or installation instruc-
tive devices. There is a noticeable differ-
tions of the protective device is always
ence in the way fuses disconnect short
used.
circuit currents compared to the way
From Fig. 8.1.7.8 it can also be seen that,
F2 they disconnect loads with impulse cur-
1 2 during the melting process, a voltage
electronic rents, particularly with lightning impulse
DEHNrail
device drop builds up across the fuse which in
DR ... FML
currents, waveform 10/350 µs.
part can be significantly above 1 kV. For
The performance of fuses was deter-
applications as illustrated in Fig. 8.1.7.9, a
3 4
mined as a function of the rated current
melting of the fuse can also result in the
of the lightning impulse current
voltage protection level of the installa-
(Fig.8.1.7.7).
tion being significantly higher than the
voltage protection level of the surge pro-
tective device employed.
DEHNrail DR ... FML
Field 3: Explosion
F1 > 16 A gL / gG If the energy of the lightning impulse

F1
current is so high to be much higher than
the pre-arcing of the fuse, then the fuse
strip can vaporise explosively. This often
8
F2 = 16 A gL / gG
results in a bursting fuse box. Apart from
F1 ≤ 16 A gL / gG the mechanical consequences, it must be
F2
noted that the lightning impulse current
continues to flow through the bursting
F2 fuse in the form of an electric arc; the
lightning impulse current can thus not be
interrupted nor, linked to this, can the
Fig. 8.1.7.6 Example: DEHNrail required impulse current carrying capa-

www.dehn.de LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE 145

 kA 8 4.0 kV

7 3.5 F1 L1
impulse current F2 L2
6 3.0 F3 L3
i u
N
5 2.5 F1... F3 > max. F4 F5 F6
permissible
4 fuse voltage 2.0
backup fuse of
3 1.5 the SPD
F4... F6 = max.
2 1.0
permissible
1 0.5 backup fuse of
the SPD
0 0 PE
-200 0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800
t µs

Fig. 8.1.7.8 Current and voltage of a blowing 25 A NH fuse being charged with lightning impulse currents Fig. 8.1.7.9 Use of a separate backup fuse for surge
(10/350 µs) protective devices

bility of the employed arrester be

reduced.
arc voltage u
u (V)
Selectivity to the protection of the instal- 400 mains
lation
200 voltage
When using spark-gap based surge pro-
tective devices, care must be taken that 0
any starting mains follow current is limit- -200 U0
ed to the extent that overcurrent protec- -400 flowing
tive devices such as fuses and/or arrester i (kA) i (kA) follow current If
40 prospective
backup fuses cannot trip. This character- 0.5
short circuit
istic of the protective devices is called fol- current Ikpros
20 0
low current limitation or follow current
suppression. Only by using technologies 0 10 15 t (ms)
0
such as the RADAX Flow technology
allows to develop arresters and combina- 0 5 10 15 20 25 t (ms)
tions of arresters which, even for installa-
tions with high short circuit currents, are
able to reduce and extinguish the current
Fig. 8.1.7.10 Reduction of the follow current with the patented Radax Flow principle
to such a degree that upstream fuses for
lower rated currents do not trip
(Fig. 8.1.7.10). Prearcing l2t let-through l2t
l2 t in A2 s l2 t in A2 s
The system availability required by EN 250A
60439-1, even in the event of responding
100 000
surge protective devices, can be fulfilled
by the aforementioned “follow current
suppression” characteristic of the device. Use of a NH gG fuse 100A
For surge protective devices with low Nominal current
sparkover voltage, in particular, designed 10 000 63A
to not only take on the function of the
40A
lightning equipotential bonding but also characteristic
that of surge protection in the installa- 32A DEHNventil®
tion, the performance of the follow cur- 1 000
rent limitation is more important than
ever for the availability of the electrical no follow current 16A

8 installation (Fig. 8.1.7.11).

100 Prospective short-
circuit current [kArms]
0,1 1 10 100

Fig. 8.1.7.11 Disconnection selectivity of DEHNventil to NH fuse holders with diffferent rated currents

146 LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE www.dehn.de

8.2 Information technology ing protective devices for measuring and
control systems. They are described Types of protection modules BCT MOD...
systems below for our universal BLITZDUCTOR CT
B 110
The primary function of arresters is to protective devices and illustrated by
protect downstream terminal devices. means of application examples BE 5 ME 5
They also reduce the risk of cables from (Figs. 8.2.1 – 8.2.4 and Table 8.2.1). BE 12 ME 12
being damaged. BE 15 ME 15
The choice of arresters depends, among Type designation of the protective BE 24 ME 24
other things, on the following considera- modules BE 30 ME 30
tions: BE 48 ME 48
C Supplementary limitation of differ- BE 60 ME 60
⇒ Lightning protection zones of the
ential-mode interferences and sup- BE 110 ME 110
installation site, if exisiting
plementary decoupling resistors in
⇒ Energies to be discharged the BLITZDUCTOR CT output for BD 5 MD 5
⇒ Arrangement of the protective decoupling the BLITZDUCTOR pro- BD 12 MD 12
devices tective diodes from any diodes possi- BD 15 MD 15
bly present at the input of the device BD 24 MD 24
⇒ Immunity of the terminal devices BD 30 MD 30
to be protected (e. g. clamping
⇒ Protection against differential-mode BD 48 MD 48
diodes, optocoupler diodes)
and/or common-mode interferences BD 60 MD 60
HF Design for protection of high fre-
⇒ System requirements, e. g. transmis- BD 110 MD 110
quency transmission paths (use of a
sion parameters BD 250 MD 250
diode matrix for fine limitation of
⇒ Compliance with product or user- surges), limitation of common-mode BE C 5 ME C 5
specific standards, where required and differential-mode interferences BE C 12 ME C 12
⇒ Adaption to the environmental con- EX Protective device for use in intrinsi- BE C 24 ME C 24
ditions/installation conditions cally safe circuits approved by, ATEX BE C 30 ME C 30
and FISCO (ac voltage resistance to BD HF 5 MD HF 5
Protective devices for antenna cables are earth 500 V ac) BD HFD 5 MD HFD 5
classified according to their suitability for BD HFD 24 MD HFD 24
coaxial, balanced or hollow conductor
systems, depending on the physical MD EX 24
design of the antenna cable. MD EX 30
In the case of coaxial and hollow conduc- MD EX HFD 6
tor systems, the outer conductor can gen- Table 8.2.1 Type designation of the protection
erally be connected directly to the modules
equipotential bonding. Earthing coup-
lings specially adapted to the respective
cables are suitable for this purpose. BCT MOD _ _ _ _ _
SPD classification
Procedure for selection and installation Discharge capacity Voltage protection level
l in kA U in V
of arresters: Example BLITZDUCTOR CT 10 500
Opposite to choosing surge protective 8 400
devices for power supply systems (see B = Lightning current arrester 6 300
Chapter 8.1), where uniform conditions Iimp = 2.5 kA (10/350 µs) 4 200
can be expected with respect to voltage per line 2 100
and frequency in 230/400 V systems, the
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800

100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800

types of signals to be transmitted in t in µs t in µs

automation systems differ with respect
l in kA U in V
to their 10 500

⇒ voltage (e. g. 0 – 10 V) B_ = Combined lightning current 8 400

and surge arrester 6 300
⇒ current (e. g. 0 – 20 mA, 4 – 20 mA) Iimp = 2.5 kA (10/350 µs) 4 200
⇒ signal reference (balanced, unbal- per line. 2 100
anced) However: voltage protection
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800

100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800

level like surge arrester

⇒ frequency (DC, LF, HF)
⇒ type of signal (analogue, digital). l in kA
10
t in µs

U in V
500
t in µs

8
8 400
Each of these electrical characterisitcs for
M_ = Surge arrester 6 300
the signal to be transmitted can contain Isn = 10 kA (8/20 µs) 4 200
the actual information to be transferred. per line 2 100
Therefore, the signal must not be influ-
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800

100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800

enced intolerably by the use of lightning

t in µs t in µs
current and surge arresters in measuring
Fig. 8.2.1 SPD classification
and control installations. Several points
must be taken into account when choos-

www.dehn.de LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE 147

 BCT MOD _ _ _ _ _
SPD classification
E = Fine limitation of surges
line ⇒ earth
(limitation of common-mode
interferences)
D = Fine limitation of surges
line ⇒ line
(limitation of differential-mode
interferences)
Fig. 8.2.2 Limitation performance
BCT MOD _ _ _ _ _
SPD classification
C = Additional limitation of differential-mode interfe-
rences and additional decoupling resistors in the
BLITZDUCTOR CT output for decoupling the BLITZ-
DUCTOR protective diodes from eventually existing
diodes in the input of the device to be protected
(e.g. clamping diodes, optocoupler diodes)
HF = Design for protection of high-frequency transmission
lengths (use of a diode matrix for fine limitation of
surges), limitation of common-mode and differential-
mode interferences)
EX = Protective device for use in intrinsically safe circuits
(ac voltage resistance to earth 500 V ac)
Fig. 8.2.3 Note on special applications
Technical data:
8 Voltage protection level Up
The voltage protection level is a parame-
ter that characterises the performance of
a surge protective device in limiting the
voltage at its terminals. The voltage pro-
tection level must be higher than the
maximum limiting voltage measured.
148 LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE
Up
Up
Up
The measured limiting voltage is the
maximum voltage measured at the ter-
minals of the surge protective device
when exposed to a surge current and/or
surge voltage of a certain waveform and
amplitude.
BCT MOD _ _ _ _ _
SPD classification
The indication of the nominal voltage characterises
the range of a typical signal voltage which has no
limiting effect on the protective device under
nominal conditions. The value of nominal voltage
is indicated as dc value. Transmitting ac voltages,
the peak value of the ac voltage must not exceed
the nominal voltage value.
The nominal voltages for the individual types are
indicated as follows:
Type Nominal voltage UN
_E = Voltage between line-earth
_D = Voltage between line-line
_E C = Voltage between line-line
as well as line-earth
_D HF = Voltage between line-line
_D HFD = Voltage between line-line
_D EX = Voltage between line-line
Uline-earth
1 3
BLITZDUCTOR CT
2 4
Uline-line
1 3
BLITZDUCTOR CT
2 4
Fig. 8.2.4 Nominal voltage
Measured limiting voltage with a steep-
ness of the applied test voltage wave-
form of 1 kV/µs
This test is to determine the response
characteristics of gas discharge tubes
(GDT). These protective elements have a
"switching characteristic". The mode of
functioning of a GTD can be compared to
a switch whose resistance can “automat-
ically“ switch from > 10 GΩ (in non-ignit-
ed state) to values < 0.1 Ω (in ignited
state) when a certain voltage value is
exceeded and the surge applied is nearly
short circuited. The response voltage of
the GDT depends on the steepness of the
incoming voltage (du/dt).
Generally applies:
The higher the steepness du/dt, the high-
er is the response voltage of the gas dis-
charge tube. The comparability of differ-
ent gas discharge tubes is made possible
by applying a voltage rise of 1 kV/µs at
the gas discharge tube for determination
of the dynamic response voltage
(Figs. 8.2.5 and 8.2.6).
www.dehn.de

1 3
2 4
Measured limiting voltage at nominal
fG f in Hz
discharge current
This test is carried out to determine the 3 dB
limiting behaviour of protective ele-
ments with constant limiting characteris-
tics (Figs. 8.2.7 and 8.2.8).

Nominal current IL
The nominal current of BLITZDUCTOR CT
Voltage
characterises the permissible continuous
du/dt = 1 kV/µs aE in dB
operating current. The nominal current
Fig. 8.2.5 Test arrangement for determining the of BLITZDUCTOR CT is determined by the Fig. 8.2.10 Typical frequency response of a BLITZ-
limiting voltage at a rate of voltage rise of current carrying capability and the inser- DUCTOR CT
du/dt = 1 kV/µs tion loss of the impedances used for
decoupling of gas discharge tubes and
rate of voltage rise fine protection elements as well as by the
du/dt = 1 kV/µs follow current extinguishing capability. Selection features (SF)
U in V
1000 The value is stated as dc value(Fig. 8.2.9). 1. Which discharge capacity is
900 required ?
800 The rating of the discharge capacity of
700 BLITZDUCTOR CT is determined by the
600 protective task to be fulfilled. For easy
1 3
500 limiting voltage IL BLITZDUCTOR CT selection, the following cases a to d are
400 2 4 explained.
300
200 Case a:
Fig. 8.2.9 Nominal current of BLITZDUCTOR CT In this case the terminal equipment to be
100
0
protected is located in a building struc-
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.1
1.2

ture with an external lightning protec-

t in µs tion system or the roof of the building is
To the different types of protection mod- equipped with metal roof structures
Fig. 8.2.6 Sparkover performance of an SPD at ules of BLITZDUCTOR CT apply the nomi- exposed to lightning (e. g. antenna
du/dt = 1 kV/µs nal currents according to Table 8.22: masts, air-conditioning systems). The
data or telecommunications cable con-
current isn
B 1A necting the terminal equipment (Fig.
1 3 8.2.11) to the transformer is mounted
BE 1A ME 1A outside the building structure.
BD 1A MD 1A
2 4 BE C 0.1 A ME C 0.1 A
BD HF 0.1 A MD HF 0.1 A external lightning
protection system
BD HFD 0.1 A MD HFD 0.1 A
MD EX 0.5 A
Fig. 8.2.7 Test arrangement for determining the MD EX HFD 4.8 A
limiting voltage at nominal discharge
current Table 8.2.2 Nominal currents of the protection
modules

U in V SPD
Cut-off frequency fG
60 limiting voltage The cut-off frequency describes the per-
40 MC cable terminal device
formance of an SPD depending on the
telecommunication cable
20 frequency. It is that frequency which
Fig. 8.2.11 Building with external lightning protec-

−20
0
gives an insertion loss (aE) of 3 dB under
certain test conditions (see EN 61643-21)
If there is no other indication in the cata-
tion system and cables installed bet-
ween buildings 8
−40 logue, this frequency stated applies to a
−60 50 Ohm system (Fig. 8.2.10).
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100

t in µs

Fig. 8.2.8 Limiting voltage at nominal discharge cur-

rent

www.dehn.de LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE 149

 Due to the fact that the building struc-
ture is fitted with an external lightning
protection, the installation of a lightning
current arrester is necessary. Types B or
B... of the BLITZDUCTOR CT family can be
used for this purpose.
Case b:
Case b is similar to case a, only the build-
ing structure, where the terminal equip-
ment to be protected is located, has no
external lightning protection system: The
arising of lightning currents or partial
lightning currents is not assumed here.
The installation of lightning current
arresters Type B or Type B... is only neces-
sary if the telecommunications cable can
be influenced by lightning striking adja-
cent building structures. If this can be
excluded, BLITZDUCTOR CT Type M... can
be used (Fig. 8.2.12).
SPD
MC cable terminal device
telecommunications cable
Fig. 8.2.12 Building without external lightning pro-
tection system and cables installed bet-
ween buildings
Case c:
In case c, no cable of the data and
telecommunications system is mounted
outside the building. Although the build-
ing structure is fitted with an external
lightning protection system, direct light-
ning currents cannot be injected into this
part of the telecommunications system.
Therefore, a surge protective device Type
M... of the BLITZDUCTOR CT family is
installed here (Fig. 8.2.13).
external lightning
protection system
8 transformer
SPD terminal device
Fig. 8.2.13 Building with external lightning protec-
tion system and cables installed inside
of the building
150 LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE
Case d:
The difference between case d and case c
is that the building structure concerned
has neither an external lightning protec-
tion system nor are cables of the data
and telecommunications system mount-
ed outside the building structure. There-
fore only the installation of surge
arresters is necessary for protection of
the equipment. As in cases b and c, pro-
tection modules Type M... of the BLITZ-
DUCTOR CT family are installed
(Fig. 8.2.14).
transformer
SPD terminal device
Fig. 8.2.14 Building without external lightning pro-
tection system and cables installed in-
side of the building
2. Which kinds of interferences have to
be controlled?
Basically, interferences are classified into
common-mode and differential-mode
interferences. Common-mode interfer-
ences always arise between the signal
line and earth whereas differential-mode
interferences only arise between two
signal lines. The majority of interferences
arrising in communication/signalling sys-
tems are common-mode interferences.
Therefore protective surges devices limit-
ing between signal line and earth (Type
...E) should normally be chosen. Some
input modules of devices, as e.g. isolat-
ing transformers, do not need fine pro-
tection of the line-to-earth connection
against surges. Only gas discharge tubes
protect them against common-mode
interferences. Due to their different
response characteristics, the response of
gas discharge tubes might cause a com-
mon-mode interference to change to a
differential-mode interference. There-
fore, fine protection elements are inte-
grated between the signal lines (Type
...D).
3. Are there special requirements to
adopt the protection circuit to the
input circuit of the equipment to be
protected?
In some cases it is necessary to protect the
equipment against common-mode and
differential-mode interferences. The
input modules of such electronic equip-
ment are normally fitted with their own
protection circuit or contain optocoupler
inputs for control-to-load isolation of sig-
nalling cirucit and internal circuit of the
automation equipment. Therefore addi-
tional measures are required for decou-
pling BLITZDUCTOR CT and input circuit
of the equipment to be protected. This
decoupling is realised with additional
decoupling elements between the fine
protection elements and output termi-
nals of BLITZDUCTOR CT.
4. How high is the signal frequency /
data transmission rate to be trans-
mitted?
As every transmission system, the protec-
tion circuit of BLITZDUCTOR CT has cer-
tain low-pass characteristics. The cut-off
frequency indicates the frequency value
from which the frequency to be transmit-
ted is attenuated in its amplitude (above
3 dB). In order to keep the feedback
effects of BLITZDUCTOR CT on the com-
munication/signalling system in the
limits, the signal frequency of the sig-
nalling circuit must be below the cut-off
frequency of BLITZDUCTOR CT. The cut-
off frequency is indicated for sinusoids.
However, sinusoid signals are not very
common in data transmissions. With
respect to this fact, a BLITZDUCTOR is to
be chosen with a higher cut-off frequen-
cy than the nominal frequency of the sig-
nalling circuit. When transmitting wave-
shape signals evaluating the rising or
sinking pulse edge, it must be considered
that this edge changes from L to H or
from H to L within the appropriate inter-
val. This time interval is important for the
identification of an edge and for passing
“restricted areas“. This signal therefore
requires a frequency bandwidth which is
considerably higher than the fundamen-
tal of this wave. That is why the frequen-
cy of the protective device must be rated
that high. As a general rule applies that
the cut-off frequency must not be lower
than five times the fundamental wave.
5. How high is the operating current of
the installation to be protected?
Due to the electrical features of the com-
ponents used in the protection circuit of
BLITZDUCTOR CT, the signal current
which can be transmitted by the protec-
tive device is limited. For practical appli-
cations this means that the operating
current of a signalling system has to be
lower than or equal to the nominal cur-
rent of the protective device.
www.dehn.de
6. Which maximum continuous operat-
ing voltage can arise in the installa-
tion to be protected?
The maximum continuous operating
voltage in signalling systems must be
lower than or equal to the nominal volt-
age of BLITZDUCTOR CT, so that the pro-
tective device has no limiting effects with
normal operating conditions.
The maximum continuous operating
voltage in signalling systems is normally
the nominal voltage of a transmission
system regarding also tolerances. When
current loops (e.g. 0 – 20 mA) are used,
the open circuit voltage of the installa-
tion is to be applied to the maximum
continuous operating voltage.
7. Which reference has the maximum
continuous operating voltage?
Different signal current circuits have dif-
ferent signal references (balanced/
unbalanced). On one hand, the continu-
ous operating voltage of the installation
can be stated as line/line voltage, on the
other hand, as line/earth voltage. This is
to be considered when chosing the pro-
tective devices: Different nominal volt-
ages are stated on the basis of the differ-
ent circuit of the fine protection ele-
ments in the protection module of BLITZ-
DUCTOR CT. The different references for
the nominal voltage voltage of BLITZ-
DUCTOR CT are given in section “Techni-
cal data – Nominal voltage“.
8. Do the integrated decoupling ele-
ments of BLITZDUCTOR CT affect the
signal transmission ?
Decoupling elements are used inside of
BLITZDUCTOR CT in order to coordinate
the energy load of the integrated protec-
tion elements. They are mounted directly
in the signalling circuit and may influ-
ence it. Especially with current loops (0 ...
20 mA, 4 ... 20 mA), the operation of a
BLITZDUCTOR CT can cause the over-
range of the permissible load of the sig-
nalling circuit when it is already operated
with its maximum load. This has to be
considered before use!
9. Which protection level is required ?
In general it is possible to choose the
immunity level for automation/telecom-
munications equipment. However, the
problem is that this level is often
unknown. Therefore it is necessary to use
other means of comparison. In the tests
for electromagnetic compatibility (EMC),
electrical and electronic eqipment must
have a certain immunity level against
line-conducted interferences. The re-
quirements for testing and test set-up
www.dehn.de
are stipulated in IEC 61000-4-5:1995-02. Remark:
Different test levels are determined with The following examples show the choice
respect to the immunity to pulse-shaped of surge protective devices of the BLITZ-
interferences for the various devices used DUCTOR CT family in accordance with
under varying electromagnetic environ- the 10 selection features described above
mental conditions. These test levels bear (SF). The result of each single stage is
the designation 1 to 4, whereby test level indicated in the column “intermediate
1 contains the lowest immunity require- result“.
ments (on the devices to be protected) The column “final result” shows the
and test level 4 ensures the highest influence of the intermediate result on
immunity requirements of a device. the total result.
With regard to the protection provided
by the surge protective devices this
means that the “let-through energy“
must be below the immunity level of the
equipment to be protected. Therefore,
coordination characteristics (CC) were
developed for the BLITZDUCTOR CT fam-
ily. These coordination characterstics
allow a coordinated installation of the
different types of BLITZDUCTOR CT for
protection of automation engineering
equipment. The surge immunity test of
this equipment was taken as a basis of
determining the BLITZDUCTOR coordina-
tion characteristics. If, for example,
automation engineering equipment is
tested according to test level 1, the
equipment may only have a let-through
energy corresponding to this test level. In
practice this means that an equipment
tested with level 4 can only discharge
overvoltages without damaging the
equipment if the output of the surge
protective device corresponds to a let-
through energy of 1, 2, 3, or 4. This
makes it very easy for the user to choose
suitable protective devices.
10. Shall there be one or two stages of
protection?
Depending on the building structure and
the protection requirements stipulated
by the Lightning Protection Zones Con-
cept it may be necessary to install light-
ning current and surge arresters locally
separated from each other or at one
point of the installation. In the first case,
the protection module Type B of BLITZ-
DUCTOR CT is installed as lightning cur-
rent arrester and the protection module
Type M ... as surge arrester. If lightning
and surge protective measures are
required at one point of the installation,
the use of a combined lightning current
and surge arrester BLITZDUCTOR CT, Type
B... is required.
8
LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE 151
 Surge protection for electrical tempera-
ture control systems
The electrical temperature control of
media in technological processes is
applied in all branches of industry. The
branches differ a lot from eath other:
They streach from food industry via
chemical processes up to ventilation sys-
tems of building structures and building
services control systems. However, they
have something in common: the distance
between measuring sensor and indicator
or measured-value processing is long.
Due to the long connection cables, over-
voltages can be coupled which are not
only caused by atmospheric discharges.
Therefore a possible protection concept
of temperature measurements against
surges by a standard type Pt 100 shall be
worked out in the following. The build-
ing structure where the measuring
instrument is located has no external
lightning protection system.
The temperature is controlled indirectly
by measuring the electrical resistance.
The resistance thermometer Pt 100 has a
resistance of 100 Ω at 0°C. This value
varies by around 0.4 Ω/K depending on
the temperature. The temperature is
controlled by injecting a constant current
causing a voltage drop proportional to
the temperature rise at the resistance
thermometer. In order to prevent the the
self-heating of the resistance thermome-
ter, the current is limited to 1 mA. In this
case, a voltage drop of 100 mV appears
at the Pt 100 at 0°C. This measured volt-
feed-in (l=const.)
ϑ
measuring signal (Um / ϑ)
transformer connecting line
Pt 100
Fig. 8.2.15 Block diagram of temperature measuring
152 LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE
age must now be transmitted to the indi- Remark:
cator or receiver (Fig. 8.2.15). Out of For ease of assembly, the temperature
many various connections of Pt 100 meas- control system with surge protective
uring sensors to the measuring trans- devices, power supply and measuring
former, the four-wire configuration is lines is fitted with the same type of surge
chosen. It represents the best connection protective device. In practice it has
for resistance thermometers. By this con- proved that the balanced lines for supply,
figuration, the interfering effects of the compensation and measurement are
conductor resistance and its temperature allocated to one protected device each.
sensitivity on the mesured result are Surge protection of the 230 V power sup-
excluded. The Pt 100 sensor is supplied ply of the Pt 100 receiver as well as the
with an injected current. Alternations of 4 ...20 mA current loop coming from the
the conductor resistance are compensat- receiver is also necessary but not shown
ed by automatic adjustment of the sup- here in order to retain clearness.
ply voltage. If the conductor resistance
does not alter, the measured voltage Um
remains unchanged. This measured volt-
age is only influenced by the alternation
of the measuring resistance depending
on the temperature. It is measured at the
transformer using a high-resistance volt-
age detector. Line compensation is there-
fore not necessary with this configura-
tion.
4 ... 20 mA
Pt 100
230 V supply
4 ... 20 mA
Pt 100 measuring transformer
www.dehn.de
 SF Application Intermediate result Final result
1 The transformer is situated at a process framework in a production hall
and the measuring transformer is installed in a control room inside of
the production building. The building has no external lightning
protection system. BLITZDUCTOR CT BLITZDUCTOR CT
This example corresponds to case d. BCT MOD M... BCT MOD M...
2 The threat to transformer Pt 100 as well as the measuring transformer
Pt 100 by surges arises between signal line and earth. This requires a BLITZDUCTOR CT BLITZDUCTOR CT
fine limitation of common-mode interferences. BCT MOD ...E BCT MOD ME
3 There are no special requirements on the adjustment of the protective
circuit to the input circuit of the devices to be protected BLITZDUCTOR CT
(Pt 100, Pt 100 measuring transformer). no influence BCT MOD ME
4 The temperature measuring equipment is a system supplied by dc
current. The temperature-related measuring voltage is also a dc voltage BLITZDUCTOR CT
variable. Thus no signal frequencies have to be considered no influence BCT MOD ME
5 The operating current of the supply circuit is limited to 1 mA due to the IL type ME = 1 A
physical measuring principle of Pt 100. 1 mA < 1 A ⇒ ok
The operating current of the measuring signal amounts to some µA due BLITZDUCTOR CT
to the very high impedance measurement tapping. µA < 1 A ⇒ ok BCT MOD ME
6 The maximum arising operating voltage in this system results from the
following consideration:
According to DIN IEC 751, Pt 100 measuring resistors are designed for a
maximum temperature of up to 850°C. The respective resistance is 340Ω.
Considering the load-independent measuring current of 1 mA, results a BLITZDUCTOR CT BLITZDUCTOR CT
measuring voltage of approx. 340 mV. BCT MOD ... 5 V BCT MOD ME 5
7 The operating voltage of the system arises from line to line. BCT MOD BE 5 V
has nominal voltage
5 V dc line ⇒ earth,
this allows
line ⇒ line 10 V dc
⇒ no influence on BLITZDUCTOR CT
the measuring signal BCT MOD ME 5
8 Using the four-wire circuit for measuring the temperature with Pt100,
the influence of the cable resistance and its temperature-related
fluctuations on the measuring result are completely eliminated. This also
applies to the increasing of the cable resistance by the decoupling BLITZDUCTOR CT
impedances of BLITZDUCTOR CT no influence BCT MOD ME 5
9 The Pt 100 measuring transformer has an immunity against conducted BLITZDUCTOR CT
interferences according to test level 2 according to DIN EN 61000-4-5. BCT MOD ME 5
The “transmitted energy” being related to the voltage protection level
KK: X | 1
of the surge protective device may correspond to max. test level 2
of DIN EN 61000-4-5. "transmitted energy"
corresponds
to level 1
"transmitted energy"
of the protective
device is less than
immunity of the
terminal device
BLITZDUCTOR CT

10 The surge protection shall be performed in one stage.

⇒ KK: X | 1
BLITZDUCTOR CT
is ok BCT MOD ME 5
8
BCT MOD ME 5
⇒ surge arrester BLITZDUCTOR CT
BCT MOD ME 5
Result of selection: BLITZDUCTOR CT
BCT MOD ME 5
Table 8.2.3 Selection features for an electrical temperature measuring equpiment.

www.dehn.de LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE 153

 8.2.1 Measuring and control sys- lightning stroke (>10 kV) above their
tems transmitter/receiver surge withstand The actual control devices are at the
capability. automation level. DDC stations (Direct
The large separations between the meas-
Many designers and operators of such Digital Control) are increasingly being
uring sensor and the evaluation unit in
installations misleadingly assume that installed. They implement the complete
measuring and control systems allow a
this also realises lightning and surge pro- control and switching functions from a
coupling of surges. The consequential
tection. At this point it is expressly software point of view. All operating
destruction of components and the
emphasised that this voltage only pro- modes, control parameters, nominal val-
breakdown of complete control units can
vides the insulating resistance between ues, switching times and alarm trigger
severely interfere with a process technol-
input and output (common-mode inter- levels and the corresponding software is
ogy procedure. The extent of a surge
ference). This means that, when installed filed at the automation level.
damage caused by a lightning stroke
in transmission systems attention must Process field devices such as actuators
often becomes apparent only some
be paid not only to the limitation of com- and sensors are located at the lowest
weeks later because more and more elec-
mon-mode interferences but also to suf- level, the field level. They represent the
tronic components have to be replaced
ficient limitation of differential-mode interface between the electrical control
because they no longer operate safely.
interferences. Furthermore, the integra- and the process. Actuators transform an
Such kind of damage can have serious
tion of supplementary decoupling resist- electrical signal into another physical
consequences for the operator who uses
ors at the output of the SPD achieves an value (engines, valves, etc.). Sensors
a so-called field bus system because all
energy coordination with the optocou- transform a physical value into an electri-
intelligent field bus components
pler diode. cal signal (temperature sensor, limit
together in one segment can break
Hence, in this case, common-mode and switch, etc.).
down simultaneously.
differential-mode interference limiting
The situation can be improved by
SPDs, e. g. BLITZDUCTOR CT Type ...EC, It is precisely the diffuse branched net-
installing lightning and surge protective
must be installed. work of DDC stations and the conse-
devices (SPDs) which have to be chosen
Detailed designs for the application-spe- quential integration into building con-
to suit the specific interface.
cific choice of protective devices for trol systems which offer a large contact
Typical interfaces and the protective
measuring and control systems can be area for interferences caused by light-
devices appropriate to the system can be
found in chapters 9.8, 9.12, 9.16 and 9.17. ning currents and surges. If this causes a
found in our “Surge Protection” product
breakdown of the complete lighting, air-
catalogue or at www.dehn.de.
conditioning or heating control, this not
8.2.2 Building control systems only incurs primary costs for the equip-
Electrical isolation using optocouplers:
The pressure of rising costs is forcing the ment, it is also precisely the conse-
Optoelectronic components (Fig. 8.2.1.1),
owners and operators of buildings in quences of this system breakdown which
which typically produce a dielectric
both the public and the private sector to make a difference. They can significantly
strength between the input and output
look more and more for cost saving increase the energy costs because peak
of a few 100 V to 10 kV, are frequently
opportunities for building services man- loads can no longer be analysed and
installed to transmit signals in process
agement. Technical property manage- optimised due to the fault in the control
technology systems in order to isolate
ment (TPM) can help to reduce costs on a electronics. If production processes are
the field side electrically from the process
permanent basis. Technical property integrated into the BA, damage to the
side. Thus their function is similar to that
management is a comprehensive instru- BA can lead to breakdowns in production
of transformers and they can primarily be
ment to make technical equipment in and hence quite possibly to large eco-
installed to block low common-mode
buildings continuously available, to keep nomic losses. To ensure permanent avail-
interferences. However, they cannot pro-
it operative and to adapt it to changing ability, protective measures are required,
vide sufficient protection against arising
organisational requirements. This facili- whose exact nature depends on the risk
common-mode and differential-mode
tates optimum management which to be controlled.
interferences. When being affected by a
increases the profitability of a property.
Detailed designs for the application-spe-
input current IF output current IC
Building automation (BA) has grown out cific choice of protective devices for
1 3 of measuring and control systems (MCS) building automation can be found in
on the one hand, and central control sys- chapters 9.13, and 9.14.
2 4
radiation tems (CCS) on the other. The function of
building automation is to automate the
technical processes within the building in
transmitter
their entirety. This involves networking

8 optical fibre
substrate
sheathing
the complete installation comprising
room automation, the M-bus measuring
system and the heating-ventilation-air-
conditioning and alarm systems via pow-
erful computers on the management
level (Fig. 8.2.2.1). Data archiving takes
receiver place at the management level. Long
term data storage allows evaluations
connections connections concerning the energy consumption and
3,4 1,2 the adjustment of the installations in the
building to be obtained.
Fig. 8.2.1.1 Optocoupler - Schematic diagram

154 LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE www.dehn.de


Fig. 8.2.2.1 Levels in a building
8.2.3 Generic cabling systems (EDP
networks, TC installations)
The European standard EN 50173“Infor-
mation technology – Generic cabling sys-
tems” has been valid since November
1995.
It provides
⇒ users with an application independ-
ent generic cabling system and an
open market for cabling compo-
nents;
⇒ users with a flexible cabling scheme
that allows to carry out modifica-
tions in a both easy and economical
way;
⇒ building professionals (for example,
architects) with guidance allowing
the accommodation of cabling
before specific requirements are
known; i.e. in the initial design stage
either for construction or refurbish-
ment,
⇒ industry and standardisation bodies
for applications with a cabling sys-
tem which supports current products
and provides a basis for future prod-
uct development.
This European standard thus defines a
universal cabling system which can be
used within sites with one or more build-
ings. It deals with cable systems with bal-
anced copper cables and optical fibre
www.dehn.de
management level
automation level
field level
cables (OF cables). This universal cabling
system supports a wide range of services
including voice, data, text and images.
The universal cabling system comprises
the following functional elements:
⇒ Campus distributors (CD),
⇒ Campus backbone cables,
⇒ Building distributors (BD),
⇒ Building backbone cables
⇒ Floor distributors (FD),
⇒ Horizontal cables,
⇒ Transition points (optional),
⇒ Telecommunication outlet (TO).
Groups of these functional elements are
connected together to form cabling sub-
systems.
CD BD
campus backbone building backbone
cabling subsystem cabling subsystem
universal cabling system
Fig. 8.2.3.1 Universal cabling structure
Generic cabling schemes contain three
cabling subsystems: campus backbone,
building backbone and horizontal
cabling. The cabling subsystems are con-
nected together to create a generic
cabling structure as shown in Fig. 8.2.3.1.
The distributors provide the means to
configure the cabling to support differ-
ent topologies like bus, star and ring.
The campus backbone cabling subsystem
extends fromt he campus distributor to
the building distributor(s) usually located
in separate buildings. When present, it
includes the campus backbone cables,
the mechanical termination of the cam-
pus backbone cables (at both the campus
and building distributors) and the cross-
connections at the campus distributor.
A building backbone cabling subsystem
extends from building distributor(s) to
the floor distributor(s). The subsystem
includes the building backbone cables,
the mechanical termination of the build-
ing backbone cables (at both the build-
ing and floor distributors ) and the cross
connections at the building distributor.
The horizontal cabling subsystem
extends from the floor distributor to the
telecommunications outlet(s) connected
to it. The subsystem includes the horizon-
tal cables, the mechanical termination of
the horizontal cables at the floor distrib-
utor, the cross connections at the floor
distributor and the telecommunications
outlets.
Optical fibre cables are usually used as
data connection between the CD and the
BD. This means that no surge arrester
(SPD) is required for the field side. If,
however, the OF cables have a metal
rodent protection, this must be integrat-
ed into the lightning protection system.
The active OF components for the distri-
bution of the optical fibre cables, howev-
er, are supplied with 230 V on the power
side. In this case, SPDs can be used for the
power supply system (see chapter 7.7.2).
terminal
device
FD TP
(optionally)
TO
8
horizontal
cabling subsystem
terminal cabling
subsystem
LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE 155
 Nowadays, building backbone cables (BD
to FD) are equipped almost exclusively
with OF cables for the transmission of
data. Balanced copper cables (so-called
master cables), however, are still used to
transmit voice (telephone).
With a few exceptions, balanced copper
cables are used today for the horizontal
cables (FD to TO).
For cable lengths of around 500 m (build-
ing backbone cables) or 90 m (horizontal
cables) direct lightning strokes to the
structure (Fig. 8.2.3.2) can induce com-
mon-mode interferences which would
overload the insulation capacity of a
router or an ISDN card in the PC. Both the
building/floor distributors (hub, switch,
router) and the terminal equipment must
be equipped with protective measures in
this case.
The protective devices required here
must be chosen according to the network
application. Common network applica-
tions are
⇒ Token Ring,
⇒ Ethernet 10 Base T,
⇒ Fast Ethernet 100 Base TX,
⇒ Gigabit Ethernet 1000 Base TX.
An appropriate protection concept for
choosing the appropriate protective
devices can be found in chapter 9.11
“Surge protection for ETHERNET net-
works”.
approx. 90 m
TO
FD
approx. 500 m
BD
Horizontal cabling system
− connecting lead between FD and TO,
length: approx. 90 m
− Transmission characteristics up to 250 MHz
8 TO
(Cat. 6)
Telecommunication outlet
FD Floor distributor
BD Building distributor
Building backbone cabling subsystem
− Connecting lead between BD and FD,
length: approx. 500 m
Fig. 8.2.3.2 Influence of lightning on IT cabling sub-
systems
156 LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE
8.2.4 Intrinsically safe circuits
In all fields of industry whose processing
or transport operations produce com-
bustible materials - gases, vapors, mist or
dust - which, when mixed with air, can
form a potentially explosive atmosphere
of hazardous proportions, special meas-
ures must be taken to protect against
explosions.
Depending on the possibility and the
duration of the occurrence of a poten-
tially explosive atmosphere, sections of
the installation are divided into haz-
ardous areas – so-called zones.
Hazardous areas:
Areas where hazardous potentially
explosive atmospheres arise due to gases,
vapors and mist, for example, are divided
into zones 0 to 2. Those where hazardous
potentially explosive atmospheres can
arise due to dust are divided into zones
20, 21 or 22.
Explosion groups I, IIA, IIB and IIC provide
a system of classification according to the
explosiveness of the combustible mater-
ials used in the respective field of appli-
cation. Classification criteria are the
“Maximum Experimental Safe Gap
(MESG)“ and the “Minimum Ignition
Current (MIC)”. The MESG and MIC are
determined for the various gases and
vapors according to a stipulated testing
arrangement.
Explosion group IIC contains the most
highly combustible materials such as
hydrogen and acetylene. When heated,
these materials have different ignition
temperatures classified into temperature
classes (T1... T6).
To avoid electrical equipment from being
sources of ignition in explosive atmos-
pheres, these are designed with different
types of protection. One type of protec-
tion used all over the world, particularly
in measuring and control systems, is the
type of protection “Intrinsic safety” Ex(i).
Type of protection: Intrinsic safety
Intrinsic safety being a type of protection
is based on the principle of current and
voltage limitation in an electrical circuit.
With this system, the energy of the circuit
or a part of the circuit, which is in a posi-
tion to ignite potentially explosive
atmospheres, is kept so low to ensure
that neither sparks nor intolerable sur-
face heating of the electrical compo-
nents can cause an ignition of the sur-
rounding potentially explosive atmos-
phere. Apart from voltages and currents
of the electrical equipment, the induc-
tances and capacitances in the complete
circuit acting as energy storage devices
must be limited to safe maximum values.
For the safe operation of a measuring
and control system circuit, for example,
this means that neither the sparks arising
during the operational opening and clos-
ing of the circuit (e. g. at a make-or-break
contact in an intrinsically safe circuit), nor
those arising in the event of a fault (e. g.
a short circuit or earth fault) must be
capable of causing an ignition. Moreover,
both for normal operation and also in
the event of a fault, heat ignition as a
result of overheating of the equipment
and cables in the intrinsically safe circuit,
must also be excluded.
This basically limits intrinsic safety as a
type of protection to circuits requiring
relatively little power. These are circuits
of measuring and control systems and
also data systems. Intrinsic safety which
can be achieved by limiting the energies
available in the circuit does not relate to
individual devices – as is the case with
other types of protection – but to the
complete circuit. This produces a number
of considerable advantages compared to
other types of protection.
Firstly, no expensive special constructions
are required for the electrical equipment
used in the field, for example flame-
proof encapsulation or embedding in
cast resin, which results mainly in more
cost-effective solutions. Another advan-
tage is that the intrinsic safety is the only
type of protection which allows the user
to work freely at all live intrinsically safe
installations in a hazardous area without
having an adverse effect on the protec-
tion against explosion.
The economic advantage of using intrin-
sically safe circuits lies in the fact that,
even in the hazardous areas, convention-
al non-certified passive equipment can
be used. Thus this type of protection is
also one of the simplest types of installa-
tion.
Intrinsic safety has therefore consider-
able significance, particularly in measur-
ing and control systems, not least
because of the increased use of electron-
ic automation systems. However, intrinsic
safety demands more from the designer
or constructor of an installation than
other types of protection. The intrinsic
safety of a circuit not only depends on
compliance with the design provisions
for the individual pieces of equipment,
but also on the correct connection of all
equipment in the intrinsically safe circuit
and the correct installation.
www.dehn.de
Transients in hazardous areas:
Intrinsic safety as type of protection con-
siders all electrical energy storage devices
present in the system but not energy
from outside, such as coupled surges
resulting from atmospheric discharges.
Coupled surges come up in expanded
industrial installations mainly as a result
of close and distant lightning strokes. In
the event of a direct lightning stroke, the
voltage drop across the earth-termina-
tion system causes a potential rise
between some 10 and 100 kV. This poten-
tial rise acts as a potential difference on
all equipment connected via cables to
distant equipment. These potential dif-
ferences are considerably greater than
the insulation resistance of the equip-
ment and can easily be sparked over. For
distant lightning strokes it is mainly the
coupled surges in conductors that can
destroy the inputs of electronic equip-
ment by acting as differential-mode
interferences (differential voltage
between the lines).
www.dehn.de
Classification of electrical equipment
into category ia or ib
An important aspect of intrinsic safety
for explosion protection is the issue of
the reliability with respect to maintain-
ing of voltage and current limits, even
assuming certain faults. There are two
categories of reliability.
Category ib specifies that the intrinsic
safety must be maintained if a fault
occurs in the intrinsically safe circuit.
Category ia requires that the intrinsic
safety must be maintained if two inde-
pendent faults occur.
The classification of the BLITZDUCTOR CT
or DEHNconnect DCO as category ia is
the classification in the highest category.
This means that the BLITZDUCTOR may
also be used with other equipment locat-
ed in zones 0 and 20. Extra attention
must be paid to the special conditions of
zones 0 and 20 and clarified in each indi-
vidual case.
Maximum values of current I0,
voltage U0, inductance L0 and capaci-
tance C0
At the interface between hazardous area
and safe area, safety barriers or transmit-
ters with Ex(i) output circuit are used to
separate these two different zones.
The safety-related maximum values of a
safety barrier or a measuring transformer
with Ex(i) output circuit are defined by
the test certificates of an authorised test-
ing laboratory:
⇒ Maximum output voltage U0
⇒ Maximum output current I0
⇒ Maximum external inductance L0
⇒ Maximum external capacitance C0
non-hazardous area
3 1
¤ ¤
BLITZDUCTOR
MT
4 2
® ®
measuring transfor- BLITZDUCTOR CT
mer with Ex(i) input
(max. perm. Lo, Co)
LBD
3 1
CBD
4 2
EB/PE
Fig. 8.2.4.1 Calculation of L0 and C0
The designer/constructor must test
whether these safety-related permissible
maximum values of the equipment con-
nected and located in the intrinsically
safe circuit (i.e. process field devices, con-
ductors and SPD) are maintained for each
individual case. The corresponding values
have to be taken from the rating plate of
the pertinent equipment or the type
examination certificate.
Fig. 8.2.4.1 shows the principle use of
SPDs in measuring and control circuits
II C: Classification in explosion groups
Explosive gases, vapors and mist are clas-
sified according to the spark energy
required to ignite the most explosive
mixture with air.
Equipment is classified according to the
gases which it can be used with.
Group II applies to all fields of applica-
tion, e.g. chemical industry, coal and
grain processing, with exception of
underground mining.
Group II has the highest risk of explosion,
since this group considers a mixture with
the lowest ignition energy.
The certification of BLITZDUCTOR for
explosion group II C means that it fulfils
the highest, i.e. most sensitive, require-
ments for a mixture of hydrogen in air.
hazardous area MC circuit Ex(i)
1 3
BLITZDUCTOR
2 4
signal line
BLITZDUCTOR CT transmitter
LLtg LBD LGe
8
1 3
CLtg CBD CGe
2 4
C C
EB/PE
Lo LBD + LLtg + LBD + LGe
Co CBD + CLtg + CBD + CGe + C
LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE 157
 T6: Classification into temperature-
classes
When a potentially explosive atmos-
phere is ignited as a result of the hot sur-
face of a piece of equipment, a minimum
temperature specific to the material is
required to cause the explosion. The igni-
tion temperature is a characteristic of the
material characterising the ignition
behaviour of the gases, vapors or dust on
a hot surface. For economic reasons, gas-
es and vapors are therefore classified
into certain temperature classes. Temper-
ature class T6 specifies that the maximum
surface temperature of the component
must not exceed 85° C either in operation
or in the event of a fault, and that the
ignition temperature of the gases and
vapors must be higher than 85° C.
With its T6 classification, BLITZDUCTOR
CT also fulfils the highest stipulated
requirements in this aspect.
In accordance with the certificate of con-
formity issued by the Physikalisch-Tech-
nische Bundesanstalt (PTB), the following
electrical parameters must also be taken
into consideration.
Selection criteria for SPDs –
BLITZDUCTOR CT
Using the example of BLITZDUCTOR CT,
BCT MOD MD EX 24, the specific selec-
tion criteria for this component are
explained below (Figs. 8.2.4.2a and
8.2.4.2b).
PTB 99 ATEX 2092
Fig. 8.2.4.2a Intrinsically safe SPD
8 Circuit
(a)
(b)
(c)
Fig. 8.2.4.2b Schematic diagram of BCT MOD MD EX ...
158 LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE
This component has already a certificate
of conformity issued by the Physikalisch-
Technischen Bundesanstalt, in Brunswick,
Germany (PTB).
The SPD has the following classification:
II 2(1) G EEx ia IIC T6.
This classification states the
II Group of devices – the SPD may be
used in all fields apart from mining.
2 (1) G Device category – the SPD may
be installed in potentially explosive
gas atmospheres in zone 1 and also
in conductors from zone 0 (to pro-
tect terminal devices in zone 0)
EEx Testing laboratory certifies that this
electrical equipment conforms to the
harmonised European standards.
EN 50014: General Principles
EN 50020: Intrinsic safety “i”
BLITZDUCTOR CT equipment has
passed a type examination success-
fully.
ia Type of protection – the SPD controls
even a combination of two arbitrary
faults in an intrinsically safe circuit
without causing ignition itself
IIC Explosion group – the SPD fulfils the
requirements of explosion group IIC
and may also be used with ignitable
gases such as hydrogen.
T6 Temperature class – the SPD was clas-
sified into the highest temperature
class T6 (max. surface temperature of
85° C) at a max. ambient tempera-
ture of 40° C.
Application example
(d)
1 ¤ 3
2
BLITZDUCTOR CT 4
(e)
Further important electrical data:
⇒ Maximum external inductance L0
and maximum external capacitance
(C0):
The special choice of components in
BLITZDUCTOR CT means that the val-
ues of the internal inductance and
capacitance of the various individual
components are negligibly small.
⇒ Maximum input current (Ii):
The maximum permissible current
which may be supplied via the con-
nections is 500 mA, without overrid-
ing the intrinsic safety.
⇒ Maximum input voltage (Ui):
The maximum voltage which may be
applied to BLITZDUCTOR CT is 26.8 V,
without overriding the intrinsic safe-
ty.
Insulation resistance
The insulation between an intrinsically
safe circuit and the frame of the electrical
equipment or other components which
can be earthed must usually be able to
withstand the root mean square value of
an ac test voltage which is twice as high
as the voltage of the intrinsically safe cir-
cuit, or 500 V, whichever value is higher.
Equipment with an insulation resistance
< 500 V ac is considered to be earthed.
Intrinsically safe equipment (e. g. cables,
transmitters, sensors, etc.) generally have
an insulating strength > 500 V ac.
Intrinsically safe circuits must be earthed
if this is required for safety reasons. They
may be earthed if this is required for
functional reasons. This earthing must be
carried out at only one point by connec-
tion with the equipotential bonding.
SPDs with a dc sparkover voltage to earth
< 500 V dc represent an earthing of the
intrinsically safe circuit.
If the dc sparkover voltage of the SPD is
> 500 V dc, the intrinsically safe circuit is
considered to be non-earthed. This
requirement corresponds to BLITZDUC-
TOR CT, BCT MOD MD EX 24.
www.dehn.de
Fig. 8.2.4.3 illustrates the installation of
BLITZDUCTOR CT MD/Ex SPDs to protect
a transmitter and sensor with an insulat-
ing strength > 500 V ac.
In order to coordinate the dielectric
strength of the devices to be protected
(transmitter and sensor) with the voltage
protection level of the SPDs, it must be
ensured that the insulation resistance of
the devices to be protected is consider-
ably higher than the requirements for an
ac test voltage 500 - V ac.
In order to avoid that the voltage drop of
the interference current to be discharged
in the earth connection does not
degrade the voltage protection level, it
must be ensured that the equipotential
bonding between the device to be pro-
tected and the SPD is consistent. In
Fig. 8.2.4.3 this is represented by a sup-
plementary equipotential bonding con-
ductor between the device to be protect-
ed and the SPD BLITZDUCTOR CT.
Fig. 8.2.4.4 illustrates a special type of
application. This particular application
arises if the terminal device to be pro-
tected has an insulation resistance
< 500 V ac. In this case, the intrinsically
safe measuring circuit is not floating.
A BLITZDUCTOR CT, BCT MOD ME, which
is not certified for use in hazardous areas,
is used as the SPD in the hazardous area
and realises a voltage protection level
between lines to earth/equipotential
bonding which is considerably less than
500 V. This is necessary in this particular
application since the insulating strength
of the transmitter corresponds to < 500 V
ac.
This example illustrates particularly the
importance of a common consideration
of the conditions of intrinsic safety and
the EMCsurge protection to be brought
into line with each other in systems engi-
neering.
Earthing/Equipotential bonding
A consistent equipotential bonding and
an intermeshing of the earth-termina-
tion system in the hazardous area of the
installation must be ensured.
The cross section of the earth conductor
from the SPD to the equipotential bond-
ing must be at least 4 mm2 Cu.
Installation of SPD BLITZDUCTOR CT in
intrinsically safe circuits
The normative stipulations for intrinsical-
ly safe circuits from the point of view of
the protection against explosion and of
electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) cor-
www.dehn.de
non-hazardous area hazardous area MC circuit
measuring
transformer 1) BLITZDUCTOR CT
®
BLITZDUCTOR CT
®
transmitter 1)
3 1 1 3
MD / Ex MD / Ex
Mu
4 2 2 4
signal line
intermeshed earth-termination system
1)
Insulation resistance > 500 V ac
ensures consequent equipotential
bonding and intermeshing
Fig. 8.2.4.3 SPD in hazardous location - Insulation resistance > 500 V ac
Circuit Application example
(a) (d)
1 ¤ 3
2
BLITZDUCTOR CT 4
(b) (e)
(c)
Fig. 8.2.4.4 Application - Insulation resistance < 500 V ac
respond to different positions, a situa- which are determined by the installation.
tion which occasionally causes consterna- During the discharge, the current flow
tion among designers and building con- through the installation (e. g. L and R of
structors. the equipotential bonding conductor)
can cause a voltage drop ULR which must
Chapter 9.16 “Installation of surge pro- be added to Up and results in the residual
tective devices in intrinsically safe cir- voltage at the terminal device Ur.
cuits”, lists the most important selection
criteria for both intrinsic safety and Hence:
EMC/surge protection in installations in ⇒ Ur = Up + UL + UR
order to detect the interaction on the
⇒ Uc of the SPD is just above the open
other requirement profile in each case.
circuit voltage of the system
⇒ Up of the SPD should be as low as
8.2.5 Special features of the instal- possible, since additional voltage
lation of SPDs drops through the installation have
less effect
The protective effect of an SPD for a
device to be protected is provided if a ⇒ The equipotential bonding should
source of interference is reduced to a
specified value below the interference or
destruction limit and above the maxi-
be designed to have the lowest
impedance possible
⇒ Installing the SPD as close as possible
8
to the terminal device has a
mum operating voltage of a device to be
protected. Generally, the protective favourable effect on the residual
voltage
effect of an arrester is indicated by the
manufacturer in form of the voltage pro-
tection level Up (see EN 61643-21 (VDE
0845 Part 3-1)). The effectiveness of a
surge protective device, however,
depends on additional parameters,
LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE 159
 Installation examples:
Example 1: Correct installation
(Fig. 8.2.5.1) Blitzductor CT

1 IN 2

3 OUT 4
BCT MOD ...

The terminal device is only earthed Up = voltage protection level

directly via the earth connection point of
the arrester. The consequence is that the

discharge current
Up of the SPD is in fact available at the
terminal device. This form of installation L of line
residual voltage Ur
illustrates the most favourable applica-
tion of the SPD for protection of the ter-
minal device. R of line

Ur = Up
UL +UR have no effect
L and R of the line have no effect on Ur out of Ur = Up

Example 2: Most common installation

Fig. 8.2.5.1 Correct installation
(Fig. 8.2.5.2)
The terminal device is earthed directly via
the earth connection point of the
arrester and is also connected via the Blitzductor CT
1 IN 2

3 OUT 4
BCT MOD ...
protective conductor. The consequence is
that a part of the discharge current, Up
depending on the impedance ratio, flows
away via the connection to the terminal
discharge current

device. To prevent a coupling of the Uv = voltage drop

interference from the connecting L of line connection
Ur
equipotential bonding conductor to the BCT > terminal
protected lines, and to keep the residual device
R of line
voltage low, this equipotential bonding
conductor must be installed separately, if
possible, and/or be designed to have e.g. connection of protective conductor of power supply
extremely low impedance (e. g. metal
mounting plate). This form of installation L and R of the line have a little effect on Ur, if the connection has a low
illustrates current installation practice for impedance: Ur = Up + Uv
terminal devices safety class 1.
Ur = Up + Uv Fig. 8.2.5.2 Most frequent installation

Example 3: Wrong method of equipoten-

tial bonding (Fig. 8.2.5.3)
The terminal device is only earthed Blitzductor CT
1 IN 2

3 OUT 4

BCT MOD ...

directly via the protective conductor ter-

minal, for example. There is no low Up
impedance equipotential bonding to the
surge protective device. The path of the
discharge current

equipotential bonding conductor from

UL no direct earth connection
protective device to where it meets the Ur
between BLITZDUCTOR and
protective conductor terminal of the ter- terminal device
minal device (e. g. equipotential bonding UR
bar) has considerable effect on the
residual voltage. Depending on the
length of the conductor, voltage drops L and R of the line impair Ur: Ur = Up + UL + UR
up to a few kV can arise which add up to
Up and can lead to the destruction of the

8 terminal device during the discharge of

surges.
Fig. 8.2.5.3 Wrong method of equipotential bonding

terminal device. If strict spatial separa-

Ur = Up + UL + UR
Example 4: Wrong conductor leading
(Fig. 8.2.5.4)
Even if the equipotential bonding is car-
ried out correctly, a wrong conductor
leading can interfere with the protective
effect or even result in damage to the
tion or shielding of an unprotected con-
ductor upstream of the SPD, and protect-
ed conductor downstream of the SPD, is
not maintained, then the electromagnet-
ic interference field can cause coupling
of interference impulses on the protect-
ed conductor.

160 LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE www.dehn.de

 1 3
Blitzductor CT
1 IN 2

3 OUT 4
BCT MOD ...

2 4

Ur

Due to wrong conductor leading interferences are coupled

from the unprotected to the protected line

Fig. 8.2.5.4 Wrong conductor leading

Shielding
Recommendations for installation : Type of installation Distance
The use of metal shields or cable ducts Without
reduces the interaction between line pair divider Aluminium Steel
and surroundings. For shielded cables, or divider divider
please note the following: non-metallic
⇒ Shield earthing at one end reduces divider
the coupling of electric fields Unshielded power cable and
⇒ Shield earthing at both ends reduces unshielded IT cable 200 mm 100 mm 50 mm
the coupling of electomagnetic
Unshielded power cable and
fields
shielded IT cable 50 mm 20 mm 5 mm
⇒ Conventional shields offer no signifi-
cant protection against low frequen- Shielded power cable and
cy magnetic fields. unshielded IT cable 30 mm 10 mm 2 mm
Shielded power cable and
Recommendations: shielded IT cable 0 mm 0 mm 0 mm
Shields should run continuously between
IT installations, have a low coupling
Table 8.2.5.1 Separation of telecommunication and low voltage cables (based on EN 50174-2)
resistance and be conducted around the
complete circumference, if possible. The
shield must enclose the conductors com-
Recommended
pletely, if possible. Interruptions in the
shield and high impedance earth connec- not recommended
tions and “pig tails“ of cables should be l.v. cables
avoided.
The extent to which low voltage lines can
affect telecommunication lines depends
on a multitude of factors. The recom- auxiliary cables
mended guide values for the spatial dis- right
tances to low voltage lines are described
telecommunica-
in EN 50174-2. For a cable length less
tion cables
than 35 m no distance is generally
required. In all other cases, Table 8.2.5.1
besides gives the distances applying.
It is recommended to install telecommu-
sensitive
applications
8
nication lines in metal ducts which are
electrically connected and completely metal cable trays
enclosed. The metal cable duct systems
should be connected with low imped-
ance to earth as frequently as possible, at Low voltage cables Telecommunication cables
least at the beginning and the end Auxiliary cables
(Fig. 8.2.5.5). Cables for sensitive applications
(e.g. fire alarm systems, door openers)

Fig. 8.2.5.5 Separation of cables in cable duct systems

www.dehn.de LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE 161

8

162 LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE www.dehn.de

9. Application proposals
9.1 Surge protection for frequency converters
The first frequency converters came
onto the German market in 1956. In
simple words, a frequency converter
consists of a line-side converter (rectifi-
er), a dc link (bank of capacitors), and a
load-side converter (inverter) (Fig.
9.1.1).
At the input of the line-side converter,
the interlinked, three-phase ac voltage
is changed into a dc voltage and is
pushed into the dc link that also serves
as energy store (buffer). From this stor-
age, energies can be supplied for accel-
erating or braking a motor.
Capacitors in the dc link and the LC net-
works connected to earth in the ac line
filter, can cause problems with the
residual current devices (RCD) connect-
ed in series. The reason for this is often
wrongly seen in the application of
surge arresters.
The problems, however, result from the
short-term induction of fault currents
by the frequency converter. These are
sufficient to activate sensitive earth
leakage circuit breakers (RCDs). A
line-side
converter rectifier
SR1
mains
L1
L2
L3
data
nominal
values
Fig. 9.1.1 Schematic diagram of a frequency converter
(Ref.: “Die Bibliothek der Technik” Volume 36, Frequenzumrichter, published by Verlag Moderne Industrie)
frequency converter
power supply line to be
kept as short as possible
compact filter
mains
metal mounting plate connected to earth
general: all cables should be kept as short as possible
Fig. 9.1.2 EMC Measures (Ref.: “Die Bibliothek der Technik Volume 36, Frequenzumrichter”, published by Verlag
Moderne Industrie)
www.dehn.de
“selective RCD” or the use of line reac-
tors, for example, provide a remedy.
The load-side converter (inverter) in
connection with the control electronics
delivers pulses whose amplitudes fol-
low a sine wave at the output of the
frequency converter. By means of fre-
quency, current and voltage, the oper-
ating performance and the speed of
the motors connected to the frequency
converter can be varied. The sine curve
at the output of the frequency convert-
er is formed by pulses.
The higher the clock frequency of the
switching cycles provided by the elec-
tronics, the more exactly the voltage
follows a sine wave at the output. With
each cycle, a switching transient is cre-
ated that is superimposed on the curve
of the fundamental frequency. This
switching transient reaches a maximum
of 1200 V and higher (according to the
power spectrum of the frequency con-
verter). The better the simulation of
the sine curve at the output, the better
is also the performance and control
dc link
bank of capacitors
SR2
+ +
V1
C UZ
V4
− −
control electronics
control / regulation / monitoring
communication
shielded motor supply line
shield is earthed on both
sides over a wide area
connection to FC filter
response of the motor. This also means,
however, that the switching transients
appear at the output of the frequency
converter more frequently.
For choosing of lightning arresters and
surge arresters, the maximum continu-
ous operating voltage UC has to be tak-
en into account. UC specifies the maxi-
mum permissible operating voltage a
surge protective device may be con-
nected to. This means that no surge
protective devices with UC ≥ 255 V are
used at the output side of the frequen-
cy converter as it is usual in low voltage
systems (230/400 V), like e. g. DEHN-
guard T 275 FM. Instead, surge protec-
tive devices with higher UC are used.
This avoids a "faster" ageing of the
surge protective devices under normal
operating conditions and through the
switching transients which leads to a
failure of the protection. Therefore,
surge protective devices with high UC.
must be used here. This allows a safe
protection against transient surges
without running the risk of voltage
load-side converter
inverter
motor load
V3 V5
U1
M
V1
3~
W1
V6 V2
peaks (switching cycles) of the frequen-
cy converter and insufficiently rated
surge protective devices causing a heat-
ing of the arrester and consequently a
motor
disconnection of the surge protection.
The voltage at the output of the fre-
quency converter is often regulated by
the variable nominal voltage at the
input (approx. 5 % during continuous
operation), in order to compensate the
voltage drop over a long connection
line. Otherwise, one can simply say that
the maximum voltage at the input of
the frequency converter is equal to the
9
LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE 163
 maximum voltage at the output of the dc link
frequency converter.

PX
PR
P1
+

−
The high clock frequency at the output
of the frequency converter generates mains
L1 U M
fieldborne interferences and therefore, L2 V 3~
requires necessarily a shielded cabling L3 W
between frequency converter and drive 1 L11 power 2
motor so that adjacent systems are not L21 supply
disturbed. input
For shielding the motor power supply signal circuit
line, a bilateral shield earthing at the charge
protective
frequency converter and the drive
PC circuits
motor has to be ensured. The large-sur- STF
face contacting of the shield results STR alarm
STOP
from the EMC requirements (Fig. 9.1.2). RH
By means of intermeshed earth-termi- RM A fault
RL B
nation systems, i. e. the earth-termina- C indicator
RT Processor/DSP
tion system the frequency converters JOG
MRS AM analogue
and the drive motor are connected to, AU Software 5 output
potential differences are reduced CS
SD Functions: FM Hz
between the parts of the installation reset RES
PID controller SD
and thus equalising currents are avoid-
operator s station
ed. Basic functions:
SE operating
PU/DU RUN state
Voltage/frequency function SU
Fig. 9.1.3 shows the application of vector control OL and
IPF fault
surge protective devices of the DEHN- FU
10E indicator
guard series. Furthermore, the SPD
10
type BLITZDUCTOR is used here as an 2
example for the protection of 0-20 mA 5
3 4
signals. The protective devices have to 1 LCD/LED display PU/DU
be adapted according to the type of
interface. Protective devices can be
chosen from the selection aid accord- No. Type Part No.
ing to interface in our catalogue
"Surge Protection" or from the website 1 DEHNguard T DG T 275 900 650
www.dehn.de.
2 DEHNguard T DG T 600 900 651
For networking the frequency convert- BLITZDUCTOR CT 919 523 +
er with a central building control sys- 3 BCT MOD ME 24 + BCT BAS 919 506
tem or with a building management
system, it is absolutely essential to con- Fig. 9.1.3 Structure of a frequency converter
nect all communication interfaces with (Ref.: “Die Bibliothek der Technik Volume 36, Frequenzumrichter”, published by Verlag Moderne
surge protective devices in order to Industrie)
minimise the threat of a system failure
by surges.

164 LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE www.dehn.de

9.2 Lightning and surge protection of MW wind turbines
We can observe an unabated trend for
the utilisation of regenerative energies
like wind power, solar technology, bio-
mass, or geothermics. This is an enor-
mous market potential not only for the
energy industry but also for the suppli-
ers of the energy industry and the elec-
trical trade and that worldwide.
In the last year, the wind power indus-
try attained a turnover of approx. three
billion euros in Germany alone. In the
meantime, approx. 12,000 wind tur-
bines are integrated into the power
supply grid and cover already around
three percent of the German power
consumption. Despite of all economic
crises, the wind power industry is
booming.
Positive prognoses
The prognoses for the future turn out
to be positive. The German wind power
institute (Deutsches Windenergie-Insti-
tut, DEWI) predicts approximately
4,000 wind turbines for the year 2030
on the open seas. Thus, a nominal pow-
er of approx. 20,000 megawatt could
be produced by offshore windfarms.
The importance of wind turbines is
obvious. Looking at the growth rates of
this power market, the reliable avail-
ability of energy is also an important
aspect.
Danger resulting from lightning effects
An operator of these installations can-
not afford downtimes. On the contrary,
the high capital investments for a wind
turbine must have returned in a few
years. Wind turbines are comprehen-
sive electric and electronic installations,
concentrated on a very small area.
Everything, what electrical engineering
and electronics offer, can be found:
switchgear cabinets, motors and drives,
frequency converters, bus systems with
actuators and sensors. It goes without
saying that surges can cause consider-
able damage there. Due to the exposed
position and the overall height, wind
turbines are exposed to direct lightning
effects. The risk of being hit by light-
ning increases quadratically versus the
height of the structure. MW wind tur-
bines with blades reach a total height
of up to 150 m and are therefore par-
ticularly exposed to danger. A compre-
hensive lightning and surge protection
is required.
www.dehn.de
Frequency of lightning strokes
The annual number of cloud-to-earth
lightning flashes for a certain region
results from the well-known isokerau-
nic level. In Europe, a mean number of
one to three cloud-to-earth flashes per
km2 and year applies to coast areas and
low mountain ranges.
The mean annual number of lightning
strokes to be expected can be deter-
mined by the following formula:
n = 2.4 i 10 −5 i N g i H 2.05
Ng number of cloud-to-earth flashes
1
per km2 and year in ⎯⎯⎯
km2 • a
H Height of the object in m
The maximum and minimum number
of lightning strokes to be expected can
differ from the mean value by the fac-
tor of approximately 3.
An assumed number of annually two
cloud-to-earth flashes per km2 and a
height of 75 m results in an expected
mean frequency of one lightning
stroke in three years.
For dimensioning lightning protection
installations, it has to be considered
that in case of objects with a height of
> 60 m, and which are exposed to light-
ning, also earth-to-cloud flashes can
come up, so-called upward flashes,
beside cloud-to-earth flashes. This
results in greater values as specified in
the above formula.
Fig. 9.2.1 Impulse current laboratory DEHN + SÖHNE -
Max. lightning impulse current 200 kA, waveform 10/350 µs
Furthermore, earth-to-cloud flashes
starting from high exposed objects car-
ry high charges of a lightning current,
which are of special importance for the
protection measures at rotor blades
and for the design of lightning current
arresters.
Standardisation
IEC 61400-24 (VDE 0127 Part 24) and
the guidelines of Germanischer Lloyd
are the basis for the design of the pro-
tection concept.
The German Insurance Association
(GDV) recommends in its publication
VdS 2010 "Risikoorientierter Blitz- und
Überspannungsschutz” (Risk oriented
lightning and surge protection) to
implement at least lightning protection
systems Type II for wind turbines in
order to meet the minimum require-
ments for protection of these installa-
tions.
Protection measures
The main concern in this technical con-
tribution is the realisation of lightning
protection measures and proactive
measures against surges for the electric
and electronic devices/systems of a
wind turbine.
The complex problems of the protec-
tion of rotor blades and swivelling
parts and bearings require a detailed
examination. They are also vendor-spe-
cific and type-specific.
The following engineering services and
test services for the optimisation of cus-
tomer-specific solutions are offered in
the laboratory of DEHN + SÖHNE:
9
LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE 165
 ⇒ Tests of customer-specific, pre-
wired connection units for protec-
tion of the electrical installation
⇒ Performance of bearings in the
presence of lightning currents
⇒ Lightning current test at down con-
ductors and receptors of rotor
blades
These tests in the laboratory prove the
effectiveness of the chosen protection
measures and contribute to the optimi-
sation of the "protection package"
(Fig. 9.2.1).
LPZ 1 nacelle
LPZ 2
electromagnetic shield
shielded cable route
shielded pipe or the like
Fig. 9.2.2 Lightning protection zones concept for a wind turbine
mast / tower
concrete foundation
reinforcement
ring earthing electrode
Fig. 9.2.3 Intermeshed network of earthing electrodes of a wind turbine
166 LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE
Lightning Protection Zones Concept
The lightning protection zones concept
is a structuring measure for creating a
defined EMC environment within a
structure (Fig. 9.2.2). The defined EMC
environment is specified by the electro-
magnetic immunity of the used electric
equipment.
Being a protection measure, the light-
ning protection zones concept includes
therefore a reduction of the conducted
and radiated interferences at bound-
aries down to agreed values. For this
reason, the object to be protected is
subdivided into protection zones. The
protection zones result from the struc-
operation building
LPZ 1
outgoing
LPZ 2 lines
reinforcement
of the building
cable duct
foundation earthing element
earth
conductor
ture of the wind turbine and shall con-
sider the architecture of the structure.
It is decisive that direct lightning
parameters affecting lightning protec-
tion zone 0A from outside are reduced
by shielding measures and installation
of surge protective devices to ensure
that the electric and electronic systems
and devices situated inside the wind
turbine can be operated without inter-
ferences.
Shielding measures
The nacelle should be designed as a
metal shield that is closed in itself. Thus
a volume can be obtained inside the
nacelle with a considerably attenuated,
electromagnetic field compared to the
outside. The switchgear and control
cabinets in the nacelle and, if existing,
in the operation building should also
be made out of metal. The connecting
cables should be provided with an out-
er, conductive shield. With respect to
interference suppression, shielded
cables are effective against EMC cou-
pling only if the shields are connected
with the equipotential bonding on
both sides. The shields must be contact-
ed with encircling contact terminals to
avoid long and for EMC improper “pig-
tails".
Earth-termination system
For earthing a wind turbine, the rein-
forcement of the tower should always
be integrated. Installation of a founda-
tion earthing electrode in the tower
base, and, if existing, in the foundation
of an operation building, should also
be preferred in view of the corrosion
risk of earth conductors.
The earthing of the tower base and the
operation building (Fig. 9.2.3) should
be connected by an intermeshed earth-
ing in order to get an earthing system
with the largest surface possible.
The extent to which additional poten-
tial controlling ring earthing electrodes
must be arranged around the tower
base depends on the fact whether too
high step and contact voltages must
possibly be reduced to protect the
operator in case of a lightning stroke.
www.dehn.de
Protective circuit for conductors at the
boundaries of lightning protection
zones 0A to 1 and higher
Besides shielding against radiated
sources of interference, protection
against conducted sources of interfer-
ence at the boundaries of the lightning
protection zones must also be provided
for reliable operation of the electric
and electronic devices.
At the boundaries of lightning protec-
tion zones 0A - 1 (conventionally also
called lightning equipotential bond-
ing) SPDs must be used, which are capa-
ble of discharging considerable partial
lightning currents without damage to
the equipment. These SPDs are called
lightning current arresters (SPDs
Type 1) and tested with impulse cur-
rents, waveform 10/350 µs.
At the boundaries of LPZ 0B to 1 and
LPZ 1 and higher, only low energy
impulse currents have to be controlled
which result from voltages induced
from the outside or from surges gener-
ated in the system itself. These protec-
tion devices are called surge protective
devices (SPDs Type 2) and tested with
impulse currents, waveform 8/20 µs.
Surge protective devices should be cho-
sen according to the operating charac-
teristics of the electric and electronic
systems.
After the discharge, surge protective
devices to be used in the power supply
system must be capable of extinguish-
ing safely the follow currents coming
from mains afterwards. Beside the
impulse current carrying capability, this
is the second important aspect of
design.
Fig. 9.2.4 shows lightning current
arrester DEHNbloc with encapsulated
spark gap.
Fig. 9.2.4 Application of DEHNbloc non-exhausting
lightning current arresters
www.dehn.de
This lightning current arrester can be
mounted among bare live system parts
in the installation to be protected with-
out having to take minimum distances
into account. The protective device
DEHNbloc is used, for example, for low
voltage lines coming from the wind
turbine.
Surge arresters (Fig. 9.2.5) are dimen-
sioned for loads as they occur in case of
inductive couplings and switching
operations. Within the scope of energy
coordination, they have to be connect-
ed downstream of the lightning cur-
rent arresters. They include a thermally
monitored metal oxide varistor.
Fig. 9.2.5 Application of DEHNguard surge arrester,
DG TNC FM, UC = 750 V,
Serial No. 1371
Contrary to surge protective devices for
power supply systems, special attention
has to be paid on system compatibility
and the operating characteristics of the
measuring and control or data line
when installing SPDs in data processing
systems. These protective devices are
connected in series with the data pro-
cessing lines and must be able to
reduce the interference level below the
immunity of the equipment to be pro-
tected.
Considering a single telephone line
within the lightning protection zones
concept, the partial lightning current
on this conductor can be assumed to be
blanket 5 %. For lightning protection
systems type III/IV, this would amount
to a partial lightning current of 5 kA,
waveform 10/350 µs.
Fig. 9.2.6 shows a lightning current
arrester suitable for such specific appli-
cations.
Fig. 9.2.6 shows the approved multipur-
pose device BLITZDUCTOR CT, BCT
MOD BE as a lightning current and
surge arrester. This protective device
can be used for protection of equip-
ment in EMC lightning protection
zone I and higher. BLITZDUCTOR CT is
designed as a four-terminal network
and limits both common-mode inter-
ferences as well as differential-mode
interferences. It can be fixed directly in
the course of terminal blocks or,
instead of these terminals, on support-
ing rails, whereby its special design
allows a space-saving arrangement.
Fig. 9.2.6 Application of BLITZDUCTOR CT lightning
current and surge arrester
9
LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE 167
9

168 LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE www.dehn.de

9.3 Lightning and surge protection for PV systems and solar power plants
9.3.1 Lightning and surge protec-
tion for PV systems
In the meantime, Germany has gained
a leading position in the field of photo-
voltaic systems (PV) on the world mar-
ket. The guaranteed service life of 20
years for photovoltaic generators and
their exposed installation sites as well
as the sensitive electronics of the
inverter really require effective light-
ning and surge protection.
Not only house owners install a PV sys-
tem on their rooftop but also private
operating companies make more and
more investments in shared systems,
which are erected on large-surface
roofs, on traffic structures, or unused
open areas.
Because of the big space requirements
of the photovoltaic generator, PV sys-
tems are especially threatened by light-
ning discharges during thunderstorms.
Causes for surges in PV systems are
inductive or capacitive voltages deriv-
ing from lightning discharges as well as
lightning surges and switching opera-
tions in the upstream power supply sys-
tem. Lightning surges in the PV system
can damage PV modules and inverters.
This can have serious consequences for
the operation of the system. Firstly,
high repair costs, for example, those of
the inverter, have a negative effect,
and, secondly, the system failure can
result in considerable profit cuts for the
operator of the plant.
Necessity of lightning protection
For the installation of PV systems it
must be generally distinguished
between an installation on a building
with or without lightning protection.
For public buildings, e.g., assembly
places, schools, hospitals, national
building regulations request lightning
protection systems for safety reasons.
For this purpose, buildings or structures
are differentiated, for which, according
to their location, construction type, or
utilisation, a lightning stroke could eas-
ily have severe consequences. Such
buildings or structures in need of pro-
tection have to be provided with a per-
manently effective lightning protection
system.
In case of privately used buildings light-
ning protection is often refrained from.
This happens partly out of financial
reasons, but also because of lacking
sensibility with respect to this topic.
If a building without external lightning
protection was selected as location for
a PV system, the question arises, if, with
the additional installation of the PV
generator on the roof, lightning pro-
www.dehn.de
tection should be provided for the into account for the installation of a PV
entire structure. According to the cur- system:
rent scientific state of the art, the ⇒ DIN V VDE V 0185
installation of PV modules on buildings
⇒ E DIN IEC 64/1123/CD
does not increase the risk of a lightning
⇒ VdS 2010
stroke, so that the request for lightning
protection can not be derived directly
PV systems on buildings without light-
from the mere existence of a PV system.
ning protection system
However, there may be an increased
Fig. 9.3.1.1 shows the surge protection
danger for the electric facilities of the
concept for a PV system on a building
building in the event of a lightning
without lightning protection system.
stroke. This is based on the fact that,
Possible installation sites of the surge
due to the wiring of the PV lines inside
protective devices can be:
the building in existing risers and cable
runs, strong conducted and radiated ⇒ Generator junction box
interferences may result from lightning ⇒ DC input of the inverter
currents. Therefore, it is necessary, to
⇒ 230 V side of the inverter
estimate the risk by lightning strokes,
and to take the results from this into
The max. continuous operating voltage
account for the design. DIN V VDE V
of the surge protective devices has to
0185-2 states procedures and data for
be chosen higher than the open-circuit
the calculation of the risk resulting
voltage of the PV generator to be
from lightning strokes into structures
expected during maximum insolation
and for the choice of lightning protec-
on a cold day in winter.
tion systems. Four types of lightning
Available are surge protective devices
protection systems are distinguished;
in different designs and for various
whose efficiency increases from Type IV
max. continuous operating voltages
to I. In addition, the risk estimate also
(Table 9.3.1.1). Also for generator volt-
provides facts to find out if additional
ages up to 1000 V dc, particular surge
measures against surges must be taken
protective devices can be provided.
for achieving an acceptable risk for the
installation.
These surge protective devices of the
Since the procedure of the risk analysis
DEHNguard Y PV family are available
is very complex and time-consuming,
with floating contacts for central
the German Insurance Association has
supervision of the operating state. This
picked up the risk estimate in their
avoids expensive inspections of the
guideline Vds 2010 "Risikoorientierter
SPDs after thunderstorms.
Blitz- und Überspannungsschutz für
Objekte” (Risk oriented lightning and
If a generator junction box is existing,
surge protection for objects) (taken
as it is shown in Fig. 9.3.1.1, it has to be
from DIN V VDE V 0185-2) and present
equipped with surge protective devices
lightning protection measures for
for protection of the PV modules. Pro-
buildings or structures as they are seen
tective measures against surges are
by the insurance industry. In Table 3,
always effective only locally. This also
this guideline assigns types of lightning
applies to those installed for protection
protection systems and measures
of the PV modules. Other components
against surges to objects in a simplified
of the photovoltaic system, especially
manner. Furthermore, the guideline
the PV inverter, which may be mounted
also refers to buildings with alternative
some meters away from the generator
power supply installations, as for exam-
junction box, have also to be connected
ple, buildings with a PV system
to surge protective devices at the dc
(> 10 kW). According to this, these
voltage input of the respective inverter.
objects shall be equipped with a light-
For this purpose, surge protective
ning protection system Type III as mini-
devices of the same type as in the gen-
mum requirement for external light-
erator junction box are installed.
ning protection. Additionally, protec-
tive measures against surges are
The ac side of the inverter has also to
required.
be equipped with surge protective
According to E DIN IEC 64/1123/CD,
devices (see Table 9.3.2). The provisions
surge protection should be provided
according to VDE 0100, Part 534, have
for the positive and negative conductor
to be considered.
of the photovoltaic generator.
In summary, the following valid stan-
dards and guidelines must be taken
The induced differential-mode interfer-
ence in the main dc line can be reduced
9
by arranging the outgoing wire and
LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE 169
 generator junction box a TT system 230 V ac b TN system 230 V ac
(if existing) dc isolation device
inverter inverter
L+
ac ac
L L
dc dc
L−
3 N 2 N
1 1
PE PE
DG Y PV... (FM)* DG Y PV... (FM)*
to the DG TT 230 (FM) DG TN 230 (FM)
PV module frame

* (Typeto be chosen upon the PV

PV surge arrester generator open-circuit voltage acc.
to Table 9.3.1.1)

Fig. 9.3.1.1 Basic circuit diagram - Surge protection for a PV installation on a building without external lightning protection system
a) TT system 230 V ac b) TN system 230 V ac

a the owner of the building about these
s tems, like air-termination rods, for
s to be installed additionally, must be
Fig. 9.3.1.2 PV modules in the protection area of air-
termination rods under consideration of
separation distance s
the return wire of the individual gener-
ator cables close to each other. The use
of a shielded generator main line is also
recommended.
PV system on buildings with lightning
protection system
The correct operating condition of the
lightning protection system has to be
proven by existing test reports or by
clamping elements), the constructor of nents. In all other cases, a direct con-
the PV system has the duty to inform nection between the external lightning
protection system and the metal PV
faults in writing. The PV system on the components must be avoided by all
roof surface should be designed under means.
consideration of the existing external
lightning protection system. For this Fig. 9.3.1.4 shows the surge protection
purpose, the PV system has to be concept for a PV system on a building
installed within the protection zone of with lightning protection system. Possi-
the external lightning protection sys- ble application sites for surge protec-
tem (Fig. 9.3.1.2) to ensure its protec- tive devices can be:
tion against a direct lightning stroke. ⇒ Generator junction box
By using suitable air-termination sys-
⇒ DC input of the inverter
example, direct lightning strokes into ⇒ 230 V side of the inverter
the PV modules can be prevented. The ⇒ Low voltage main distribution
necessary air-termination rods possibly board
arranged to prevent a direct stroke into
the PV module within their protection
zone and, secondly, any casting of a
shadow on the modules. These air-ter-
mination systems are then connected
to the existing ones to get a connection
to the down-conductor system and the
earth-termination system.
It has to be considered that a separa-
tion distance s must be kept between
the PV components and metal parts
like lightning protection systems, rain
gutters, skylights, solar cells or antenna
systems in compliance with DIN V VDE
V 0185-3 (Fig. 9.3.1.3). The separation
distance has to be calculated according
to DIN V VDE V 0185-3. If the separa-
tion distance cannot be kept because
of unfavourable installation condi-

9 maintenance tests. If faults are found

during the examination of the external
lightning protection system (i. e.
intense corrosion, loose and free
tions, a direct conductive connection
must be provided at these positions
between the external lightning protec-
tion system and the metal PV compo-

170 BLITZPLANER www.dehn.de

 Quick overview on DEHNguard Y PV Special feature

Type Mid-central- Mid-central- Earth-free

(S. No., Part No.) earthing of the earthing of the systems
PV generator inverter
without
remote signalling cont. 500 V dc 350 V dc 350 V dc • No leakage current
DG Y PV 275 from the varistors
S. No. 1373 to earth
Part No. 900 510/S
with • No influence on
remote signalling cont. the insulation
DG Y PV 275 FM monitoring system
S. No. 1403
Part No. 900 540/S
without
remote signalling cont. 600 V dc 420 V dc 420 V dc
DG Y PV 320
S. No. 1384
Part No. 900 510/S
with
remote signalling cont.
DG Y PV 320 FM
S. No. 1404
Part No. 900 540/S
without
remote signalling cont. 1000 V dc 1000 V dc 1000 V dc • Fault-resistant
DG Y PV 1000 circuit to
Part No. 900 517 avoid damage
with to the
remote signalling cont. surge protection due
DG Y PV 1000 FM to isolation faults
Part No. 900 547 in the generator circuit
• Despite of high
rated voltage control
of the air and
creepage distances

Table 9.3.1.1 Selection of SPDs for dc systems

Upstream of the dc input of the inverter,

No. in Figs. Protection for ... SPDs Part No.
the generator main line is furnished
9.3.1.1 and
with surge protective devices. The max.
Figs. 9.3.1.4
continuous operating voltage of the
ac TN system without remote signalling cont. surge protective devices has to be chose
2
DEHNguard DG TN 230 900 506 to be higher than the open-circuit volt-
with remote signalling cont. age of the PV generator to be expected
DEHNguard DG TN 230 FM 900 507 during maximum insolation on a cold
ac TT system without remote signalling cont. day in winter (see Table 9.3.1.1). The
3 surge protective devices upstream of the
DEHNguard DG TT 230 900 508
with remote signalling cont. dc input of the inverter protect the lat-
DEHNguard DG TT 230 FM 900 509 ter against too high peak voltages,
which can be coupled in via the
Table 9.3.1.2 Surge protective devices for ac systems unshielded generator on the generator
main line.

No in Fig. Protection for ... SPDs Part No. If the dc main line is not situated in the
9.3.1.4 protection zone of the air-termination
system, shielding measures must be
3-phase TN-C system DEHNventil DV TNC 255 900 373 taken to relief the dc main line and the
4 used surge protective devices. The
3-phase TN-S system DEHNventil DV TNS 255 900 374
3-phase TT system DEHNventil DV TT 255 900 375
shield of this conductor must be capa-
ble of carrying impulse currents. The
cable shield must be connected to the
9
Table 9.3.1.3 Selection of the combined lightning current and surge arrester upon system configuration rack on the generator side, and it must

www.dehn.de BLITZPLANER 171

 have a flat and well conductive connec-
tion to earth upstream the dc input of
the inverter.
Beside the reduction of surges, the use
of the shielded cable is also advanta-
geous with respect to the EMC problem
(antenna characteristic of the genera-
tor main line) as the emission of elec-
tromagnetic interferences from the
generator main line are considerably
reduced. The shield diameter should be
at least 16 mm2 Cu in order to with-
stand the loads of the partial lightning
currents.
Low-voltage power supply
An essential part of a lightning protec-
tion system is the lightning equipoten-
tial bonding for all conductive systems
entering the building from the outside.
The requirements of lightning equipo-
tential bonding are met by direct con-
nection of all metal systems and by
indirect connection of all live systems
via lightning current arresters. The
lightning equipotential bonding
should be performed preferably near
the entrance of the structure in order
to prevent a penetration of partial
lightning currents into the building.
The low-voltage power supply of the
building is protected by a multi-pole
combined lightning current and surge
arrester with spark gap technology. The
surge protective device has to be cho-
sen according to the type of power sup-
ply system (see Table 9.3.1.3). This com-
bined lightning current and surge
arrester unites lightning current and
surge arrester in one device and is
available as complete prewired unit for
generator junction box
(if existing) shielded wiring
L+
L−
1 1
DG Y PV... (FM)*
to the
PV module frame
* (Type to be chosen upon the
PV surge arrester generator open-circuit volta-
ge acc. to table 9.3.1.1)
9
Fig. 9.3.1.4 Basic circuit diagram - Surge protection for a PV installation at a building with external lightning protection system
a) TT system 230 V ac b) TN system 230 V ac
172 LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE
every low-voltage system (TN-C, TN-S,
TT). There is sufficient protection with- s
out additional protective devices s s
between DEHNventil and terminal
equipment up to a cable length of
≤ 5 m. For greater cable lengths SPDs
Type 2 or 3 have to be used in addition.
If the distance between the 230 V input
of the inverter and the application site
of DEHNventil is not greater than 5 m,
no further protective devices are
required for the ac side.
For the application of surge protective
devices in main power supply systems a) Separation distance s kept
refer to the VDEW guideline
The separation distance is calculated acc. to
“ Überspannungs-Schutzeinrichtungen DIN V VDE V 0185-3.
der Anforderungsklasse B - Richtlinie
für den Einsatz in Hauptstromver- b) Separation distance s not kept
sorgungssystemen” (Surge protective
devices of requirement class B - Guide- Direct electrically conductive connection between
line for the application in main power external ligthning protection system and PV
module frame
supply systems) published in 1998.
Fig. 9.3.1.3 Separation distance
Summary of the measures to be taken:
⇒ Integration of the photovoltaic the input of the low-voltage power
generator into the external light- supply for lightning equipotential
ning protection system bonding
⇒ Application of shielded generator (see Table 9.3.1.3)
main lines
⇒ Installation of surge protective
devices at the dc input of the
inverter
(see Table 9.3.1.1)
⇒ Installation of surge protective
devices at the ac input of the
inverter
(see Table 9.3.1.2)
⇒ Installation of a combined light-
ning current and surge arrester at
a TT system 230 V ac b TN system 230 V ac power supply
dc isolation device system
inverter inverter
3x 230/400 V ac
ac L ac L
dc N dc N
2 3 4
DV
PE PE
DG Y PV... (FM)*
DG TT 230 (FM) DG TN 230 (FM)
www.dehn.de
Equipotential bonding
Due to their arrangement, photovolta-
ic generators are comparable to anten-
na installations. Therefore, it is justified
and reasonable to request also a suit-
able earthing for the metallic parts of
photovoltaic generators. To avoid reli-
ably flashovers to other installations or
parts of the building, and to reduce
magnetic couplings into other installa- equipotential bonding has to be car-
tions, the equipotential bonding con- ried out.
ductor should be led to the earth-ter-
mination system preferably outside the
building.
The following decision matrices should
give an overview, when surge protec-
tive devices have to be used, and when

Inverter with transformer Inverter without transformer

PV module, class II
yes no

Equipotential bonding Equipotential bonding of the PV frame Equipotential bonding of

of the PV frame recommended required the PV frame required
Cross section of the equipotential Cross section of the equipotential
bonding conductor = Cross section bonding conductor = Cross section
of the main dc conductor of the main dc conductor
⇒ not less than 6 mm2 (Cu) ⇒ not less than 6 mm2 (Cu)
(DIN VDE 0100 Part 540, Table 9) (DIN VDE 0100 Part 540, Table 9)
Use of surge protective Use of surge protective devices Use of surge protective devices
devices recommended recommended recommended

Table 9.3.1.4 Equipotential bonding for a PV installation on buildings without external lightning protection system

Within the protective area of air-termination system Outside the protective area
Separation distance s Separation distance s
of air-termination system
kept not kept

PV module, class II
yes no
Equipotential bonding Equipotential bonding Direct conductive Direct conductive
of the PV frame of the PV frame connection of at least connection of at least
recommended required 16 mm2 (Cu) required 16 mm2 (Cu) required
between external between external lightning
Cross section of the lightning protection protection system and
equipotential bonding system and PV modular frame
= Cross section of the PV modular frame
main dc conductor
⇒ not less than 6 mm2 (Cu) Compile a Compile a
(DIN VDE 0100 Part 540, system-specific system-specific
Table 9) protection concept protection concept

Use of surge protective Use of surge protective Use of surge protective Use of surge protective
devices recommended devices recommended devices required devices required

Table 9.3.1.5 Equipotential bonding for a PV installation on buildings with external lightning protection system

www.dehn.de LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE 173

 9.3.2 Lightning and surge protec-
tion for solar power plants
Regarding the need for lightning pro-
tection, a risk analysis has to be carried
out for such a complex type of installa-
tion. The following example describes
the measures to be taken. Since the pro-
cedure for the risk analysis is very com-
plex and time-consuming, the German
Insurance Association has picked up the
risk estimate in their guideline Vds 2010
“Risikoorientierter Blitz- und Überspan-
nungsschutz für Objekte” (Risk oriented
lightning and surge protection for
objects) from DIN V VDE V 0185-2 and
present lightning protection measures
for buildings or structures as they are
seen by the insurance industry. This
guideline was used for the following
example. The aim is to protect both the
operation building and the PV array
against damage by fire (direct lightning
stroke), and the electric and electronic
systems (inverters, remote diagnostics
system, generator main line) against the
effects of lightning electromagnetic
impulses (LEMP).
Air-termination rod
Generator junction box
tion b
opera
PV array
Earth-termination system
Mesh size 20 x 20 m
9 dc line
Fig. 9.3.2.1 Layout of a large PV installation in an open area
174 LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE
Air-termination system and down-con-
ductor system
For protecting the PV array against
direct lightning strokes, it is necessary to
arrange the solar modules in the protec-
tion zone of an isolated air-termination
system. Its design is based on lightning
protection system Type III for PV systems
greater 10 kW in compliance with VdS
guideline 2010. According to the type of
lightning protection system and the
height of the air-termination rod, the
quantity of air-termination rods
required is determined as well as the dis-
tance between them by means of the
rolling sphere and/or protective angle
method. The air-termination systems
must be arranged to cast no shadow on
the PV modules, since this would other-
wise lead to profit cuts. Furthermore, it
has to be ensured that the separation
distance s is kept between the PV sup-
porting frames and the air-termination
rods in compliance with DIN V VDE V
0185-3. Also, the shown operation
building is equipped with an external
lightning protection system Type III. The
down conductors are connected with
the earth-termination system by using
terminal lugs. Due to the corrosion risk
uildin
g rents from penetrating the building. In
at the point where the terminal lugs
come out of the soil or concrete, they
have to be made out of corrosion-resist-
ant material (stainless steel V4A, Materi-
al No. 1.4571) or, in case of using gal-
vanised steel they have to be protected
by corresponding measures (applying
sealing tape or heat-shrinkable tubes,
for example).
Earthing system
The earthing system of the PV system is
designed as a ring earthing electrode
(surface earthing electrode) with a mesh
size of 20 m x 20 m (Fig. 9.3.2.1). The
metal supporting frames which the PV
modules are fixed onto, are connected
to the earth-termination system approx.
every 10 m. The earthing system of the
operation building is designed as a
foundation earthing electrode accord-
ing to DIN 18014. The earth-termination
system of the PV system and the one of
the operation building have to be con-
nected with each other via at least one
conductor (30 x 3.5 mm steel strip V4A,
Material No. 1.4571 or galvanised steel).
The interconnection of the individual
earthing systems reduces considerably
the total earthing resistance. The inter-
meshing of the earthing systems creates
an “equipotential surface“ which
reduces considerably the voltage load of
lightning effects on the electric connect-
ing cables between PV array and opera-
tion building. The surface earthing elec-
trodes are laid at least 0.5 m deep in the
soil. The meshes are interconnected
with four-wire connectors. The joints in
the soil have to be wrapped with an
anticorrosion band. This also applies to
V4A steel strips laid in the soil.
Lightning equipotential bonding
In principle, all conductive systems,
entering the operation building from
outside, have to be generally included
into the lightning equipotential bond-
ing. The requirements of lightning
equipotential bonding are fulfilled by
the direct connection of all metal sys-
tems and by the indirect connection of
all live systems via lightning current
arresters. Lightning equipotential bond-
ing should be performed preferably
near the entrance of the structure in
order to prevent partial lightning cur-
this case (Fig. 9.3.2.2), the low voltage
power supply in the operation building
is protected by a multi pole DEHNventil
combined lightning current and surge
arrester (see Table 9.3.2.1). For the appli-
cation of surge protective devices in
main power supply systems refer to the
www.dehn.de
VDEW guideline “Überspannungs- surge protective devices are installed in Surge protective measures for data
Schutzeinrichtungen der Anforderungs- a generator junction box as close as pos- processing systems
klasse B – Richtlinie für den Einsatz in sible to the PV generator. For generator The operation building provides a
Hauptstromversorgungssystemen” voltages up to 1000 V dc, particular remote diagnostics system, which is used
(Surge protective devices of require- surge protective devices are available for a simple and quick function check of
ment class B - Guideline for the applica- (see Table 9.3.1.1). the PV systems. This allows the operator
tion in main power supply systems) pub- Application example: DG Y PV 1000 with to recognise and remedy malfunctions
lished in 1998. P/N 900 517. in good time. The remote supervisory
control system provides the perform-
Surge protective measures for the dc In practice, it is a proven method to use ance data of the PV generator constant-
lines surge protective devices with floating ly in order to optimise the output of the
Being laid in the soil, the dc lines of the contacts to indicate the operating state PV system.
photovoltaic generator must be protect- of the thermal disconnection device.
ed against coupling of partial lightning Thus, the intervals between the regular As shown in Fig. 9.3.2.3, measurements
currents. Therefore, the dc lines are laid on-site inspections of the protection of wind velocity, module temperature
in a steel conduit between the genera- devices are extended. and ambient temperature are per-
tor and the operation building. The The surge protective devices in the gen- formed via external sensors at the PV
steel conduit must be connected with erator junction boxes assume the pro- system. These measurements can be
the earth-termination system on the tection for the PV modules locally and read directly from the acquisition unit.
generator side as well as where it enters ensure that no sparkovers caused by The data acquisition unit provides inter-
the building. conducted or field-related interferences faces like RS 232 or RS 485, which a PC
The close mesh design of the earth-ter- come up at the PV modules. For protect- and/or modems are connected to for
mination system and the arrangement ing the inverters in the central operation remote enquiry and maintenance. Thus,
of the dc lines in the steel conduit pro- building, the surge protective devices the service engineers can determine the
vide the advantage that the load on the are directly installed at the dc input ter- cause of a malfunction by telediagnosis
dc cable by partial lightning currents is minals of the inverter. Therefore, well- and then directly eliminate it. The
kept low. So the use of SPDs Type 2 is known inverter manufacturers often modem in Fig. 9.3.2.3 is connected to
sufficient. already equip their systems with suit- the network termination unit (NTBA) of
able surge protective devices. an ISDN basic access.
In order to reduce the load on the isola-
tion inside the solar modules at a light- The measuring sensors for wind velocity
ning stroke into the isolated air-termi- and module temperature shown in Fig.
nation system, thermally controlled 9.3.2.3 are also installed in the zone pro-
tected against lightning strokes like the
PV modules. Thus, no lightning currents
No. in Fig. Protection for .. SPDs Part No. come up in the measuring leads, but
9.3.2.2 probably conducted transient surges
3-phase TN-C system DEHNventil DV TNC 255 900 373 resulting from induction effects in the
1 event of lightning strokes into the iso-
3-phase TN-S system DEHNventil DV TNS 255 900 374 lated air-termination system.
3-phase TT system DEHNventil DV TT 255 900 375 In order to provide a reliable trouble-
free and continuous transmission of the
measured data to the measuring unit, it
Table 9.3.2.1 Selection of a combined lightning current and surge arrester upon system configuration
is necessary, to lead the sensor cables
entering the building via surge protec-
No in Fig. Protection for ... SPDs Part No. tive devices (Table 9.3.2.2). When choos-
9.3.2.2 ing the protective devices, it has to be
Network and data input NT PRO 909 958 ensured that the measurements cannot
1 be impaired. The forwarding of the
of an NTBA
measured data via the telecommunica-
Measuring and control BLITZDUCTOR tion network per ISDN modem must be
2
systems and devices BVT RS 585 5 918 401 provided as well, in order to provide a
with four-wire data continuous control and optimisation of
transmission, e.g. the performance of the installation. For
RS 485 bus systems this purpose, the Uk0 interface upstream
Wind direction indicators, BLITZDUCTOR of the NTBA which the ISDN modem is
3 connected to, is protected by a surge
e.g. analogue trans- BCT MOD BE 24 919 623
mission of measured + Base part BCT BAS 919 506 protective adapter. This adapter ensures
values 4 to 20 mA additional protection for the 230 V
power supply of the NTBA.
Sensor for environment BLITZDUCTOR
4
and modular BCT MOD BE 5 919 620
temperature + Base part BCT BAS 919 506
9
Table 9.3.2.2 Surge protective devices for data acquisition and evaluation

www.dehn.de LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE 175

 steel telescopic
lightning protection mast

PV mo
building with inverter generator
junction box

=
∼

foundation earthing electrode

Fig. 9.3.2.2 Basic circuit diagram - Surge protection for a solar power plant

NTBA modem
1

2
3

4
acquisition
=
∼ unit for
measured values
4

9
Fig. 9.3.2.3 Protection concept for data acquisition and evaluation

176 LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE www.dehn.de

9.4 Retrofitting lightning and surge protection for sewage plants
Introduction
Resources of drinking water running
short require a more efficient treat-
ment. Therefore, sewage plants play a
central role in the circle of drinking
water. The necessary high efficiency of
sewage plants (Fig. 9.4.1) requires the
optimisation of the operating proce-
dure at a simultaneous reduction of the
running operating costs. For this pur-
pose, considerable financial efforts
were made for electronic measuring
equipment and decentralised elec-
tronic control and automation systems
in recent years. Compared to conven-
tional technology, however, the new
electronic systems provide only a lower
resistance against transient surges. The
structural conditions of the spacious
open-air plants with wastewater treat-
ment technology and the spread meas-
uring devices and controls increase
additionally the risk of interferences
due to lightning discharges or surges.
Thus, a failure of the complete process
control system or parts of it, is highly
probable to expect, if no protective
measures are taken. The consequences
of such a failure can be far-reaching.
They can reach from the costs for the
recovery of the system function to the
non-amountale costs for the removal
of contaminations from the ground
water.
rain overflow basin
black water basin
sedimentation tank
outlet
Fig. 9.4.1 Schematic structure of a sewage plant
www.dehn.de
In order to come up to this threat effec-
tively and increase the availability of
the systems, external and internal light-
ning protection must be provided.
Lightning Protection Zones Concept
In order to obtain the best technical
and economical protection, the sewage
plant control is divided into lightning
protection zones (LPZ) (see chapter
7.2). Subsequently, a risk analysis is car-
ried out for each LPZ and for the rele-
vant types of damage. Lastly, the mutu-
al dependences of the LPZs are exam-
ined and the finally required protec-
tion measures are defined in order to
reach the necessary protection aim in
all lightning protection zones. The fol-
lowing areas were assigned lightning
protection zone 1 (LPZ 1) and lightning
protection zone 2 (LPZ 2):
⇒ Electronic evaluation system in the
control room (LPZ 2)
⇒ Oxygen measurement in the aera-
tion tank (LPZ 1)
⇒ Interior of the control room (LPZ 1)
According to the lightning protection
zones concept of DIN V VDE V 0185-4,
all conductors at the LPZ boundaries
must be provided with appropriate
protective measures against surges,
pumping draw works
sewage plant control
activated sludge basin
nitrification - denitrification
which are described in the following
(Fig. 9.4.2).
Risk assessment for the sewage plant
control
The following example was calculated
by using prestandard DIN V VDE V
0185-2 and simultaneously checked
with the AIXTHOR software. It should
be pointed out that the procedure is
only described as an example. The solu-
tion presented is in no way binding and
can be replaced by any other equiva-
lent solutions. The following states
only the essential characteristics of the
example.
First, a questionnaire with relevant
questions on the structure and its utili-
sation was discussed with the operator
and fixed in writing. This proceeding
ensures the elaboration of a lightning
protection concept that is comprehen-
sible for all parties involved. This con-
cept represents then the minimum
requirements, which, however, can still
be technically improved anytime.
rough / fine rake
ventilation / sand-fat catcher
primary sedimentation tank
precipitant tank
9
LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE 177
 sewage plant control

230 V
DEHNguard® DEHNguard®

3 OUT 4 3 OUT 4 3 OUT 4 3 OUT 4 3 OUT 4 3 OUT 4 3 OUT 4 3 OUT 4

Blitzductor CT

Blitzductor CT

Blitzductor CT

Blitzductor CT

Blitzductor CT

Blitzductor CT

Blitzductor CT

Blitzductor CT
BCT MOD ...

BCT MOD ...

BCT MOD ...

BCT MOD ...

BCT MOD ...

BCT MOD ...

BCT MOD ...

BCT MOD ...

1 IN 2 1 IN 2 1 IN 2 1 IN 2 1 IN 2 1 IN 2 1 IN 2 1 IN 2

MCS
O2 value

Fig. 9.4.2 Division of a sewage plant control into lightning protection zones

Site description fixed telecommunication network

The complete process control of the
230 / 400 V power supply
sewage plant is situated centrally in the sewage plant control
sewage plant control. Characterised by
the extended cable connections to the
measuring stations as well as substa-
tions, considerable partial lightning
currents and surges are imported by
these lines into the switchrooms at a
lightning stroke. In the past, this result-
ed again and again in destructions of O2 value
the installation and system failures.
The same applies to the power supply
line and the telephone line (Fig. 9.4.3).
The sewage plant control itself shall be
protected against damage by fire
(direct lightning stroke), and the elec-
tric and electronic systems (control and 3 OUT 4
measuring point
automation system, telecontrol) DEHNguard® DEHNguard®
Blitzductor CT
BCT MOD ...

against the effects of lightning electro- 1 IN 2

magnetic impulses (LEMP).

230 V supply
Additional conditions
⇒ The density of lightning flashes is 4 - 20 mA
assumed to be 2.81 per square kilo-
metre and year (according to DIN V Fig. 9.4.3 Electrical lines going into the sewage plant control
VDE V 0185-2, Annex E, the value
of 2.25 for the cloud-to-earth light-
⇒ Protective measures against effects at, the service entrance of the
ning density was even multiplied
of lightning are already existing 230 / 400 V power supply line, SPD,
by an excess charge of 1.25, since
9 the lightning statistics has existed
for only 9 years (1992 – 2000)).
(external lightning protection sys-
tem according to VDE 0185 Part 1,
surge protective devices (SPD),
(previously class C) type VM 280 in
the switchgear cabinets of the
measuring and control system).
(previously class B), type VGA 280/4

178 LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE www.dehn.de

 protective angle method
αϒ 80

70
60
50
40
30 αϒ

R
ht
I II III IV
20
protected area
10
0
0 2 10 20 30 40 50 60
h (m)

Fig. 9.4.4 Protective angle method according to DIN V VDE V 0185-3

⇒ The following types of damage are
relevant: D2 for loss of services
(water supply and water disposal)
and D4 for economic losses (threat
to the environment). Type of dam-
age D1 (injury to or death of per-
sons) was excluded, since the instal-
lation should run fully automatical-
ly in future operation.
The result after calculating the actual
state is that the calculated risk R for
both types of damage D2 and D4 is still
well above the acceptable risk Ra in
each case.
Now, possible protective measures are
initiated in order to obtain R < Ra for
both types of damage:
⇒ Installation of a lightning protec-
tion system Type III according to
DIN V VDE V 0185-3 (this is the
same result as stated in VdS publi-
cation 2010)
⇒ Installation of SPDs, previously class
B (new: SPD Type 1 according to EN
61643-11) (power supply) and SPDs,
category D1 according to IEC
61643-21 for the data processing
lines (data lines of the measuring
and control system and telecom-
munication lines)
⇒ SPD, previously class C (new: SPD
Type 2 according to EN 61643-11)
(power supply) and surge protec-
tive devices, category C2 according
to IEC 61643-21 for the data pro-
cessing lines (data lines of the
measuring and control system and
telecommunication lines)
Lightning protection system structure and cause damage. Due to
The existing lightning protection sys- the size of the control room
tem of the sewage plant control was (15 m x 12 m), the number of down con-
upgraded in accordance with the ductors (4) did not have to be changed.
requirements of lightning protection The local earthing system of the
systems Type III (Fig. 9.4.4). The existing, sewage plant control was checked at all
indirect connection of the structures measuring points and the values were
mounted on the roof (air conditioning recorded. Also, no upgrades had to be
systems) via isolating spark gaps was made here.
removed. The protection against direct
lightning strokes was realised by means
of air-termination rods in compliance
with requested separation distances
and protective angles. Consequently, in
the case of a direct lightning stroke
into the control room, no more partial
lightning current can flow into the
lightning equipotential bonding
EB
external lightning protection system
power
supply
water
gas Z
heating
cathodic protected tank pipe

foundation earthing electrode 9

Fig. 9.4.5 Lightning equipotential bonding

www.dehn.de LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE 179

 Lightning equipotential bonding for all
cables entering from the outside
In principle, all conductive systems
entering the sewage plant from the
outside must be integrated into the
lightning equipotential bonding
(Fig. 9.4.5) The requirements of light-
ning equipotential bonding are ful-
filled by direct connection of all metal
systems and indirect connection of live
systems via surge protective devices.
These SPDs must have a lightning cur-
rent discharge capability (SPD Type 1
(power supply systems) and SPD Type
D1 (information technology), test
waveform 10/350 µs). The lightning
equipotential bonding shall preferably
be installed near the entrance into the
building or structure in order to pre-
vent a penetration of lightning cur-
rents into the inside of the building.
Equipotential bonding
In the entire sewage plant control, a
consistent equipotential bonding is car-
ried out according to parts 410, 540 of
DIN VDE 0100. The already existing
equipotential bonding is tested to
avoid potential differences between
different as well as extraneous conduc-
tive parts. Also, supporting parts of the
building and parts of the construction,
pipelines, containers, etc., are included
in the equipotential bonding, so that
voltage differences do not have to be
expected, even at a failure. For the
application of surge protective devices,
the cross section of the earth conductor
for equipotential bonding must be
minimum 6 mm2 Cu for SPDs for power
supply systems, and minimum 4 mm2 Cu
for SPDs for information technology.
Moreover, in areas with potentially
explosive atmospheres the connections
of the equipotential bonding conduc-
tors must be secured at e.g. equipoten-
tial bonding bars against self-loosening
(e. g. by means of spring washers).
Surge protection for the low voltage
power supply
In the described application, the SPD
type VGA 280/4 installed at the service
entrance of the building is replaced by
a SPD Type 1 with low protection level,
type DEHNventil DV TNS 255 (Fig.
9.4.6), since the "old" SPD does no
more comply with the requirements for
lightning protection systems according
to DIN V VDE V 0185. The SPDs Type 2,
(previously class C), Type VM 280, were
tested with an arrester test unit, type
9 PM 10. Since the test values were still
within the tolerances, there was no
reason to remove the SPD. If further
180 LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE
SPDs are installed for protection of the
terminal equipment as in the present
case, they must be coordinated among
each other and with the terminal
equipment to be protected. The corres-
ponding instructions given in the
enclosed installation instructions must
be observed.
Otherwise, the use of surge protective
devices in low voltage consumer's
installations shows no peculiarities
compared to other applications and
has already been described many times
(for more information, please also see
publication DS 649 E – Red / Line: “...
Easy Choice").
Surge protection in data processing
systems
From the protection point of view, the
transfer interface of all data processing
lines to the sewage plant is the service
entrance. At this point, SPDs type BM
10DA are used, which are capable of
carrying lightning currents (category
D1), and are equipped with gas-dis-
charge tubes, type GDT 230. From the
transfer interface, the cables are led
directly to the switchgear cabinets and
are connected there. In accordance
with the performed risk analysis, the
incoming cables must be led via SPDs,
types DCO RK ME 24 (20 mA signal) or
DCO RK MD 110 (telecontrol). These
are suitable for use in the lightning
protection zones concept (category
C2), and are system compatible (Figs.
9.4.7 and 9.4.8).
Fig. 9.4.6 DEHNventil installed into a switchgear
cabinet for protection of the power supply
system
This ensures a complete surge protec-
tion concept for the data processing
cabling.
Additional applications for protection
of measuring points in sewage plants
can be found in publication DS 107 E
“Surge protection: Safety for Sewage
Plants”.
This can be downloaded from our web-
site: www.dehn.de\service\download\
Safety for Sewage Plants.
Summary
Especially for highly available elec-
tronic systems in buildings the pre-
standards for lightning protection
allow a future-orientated, reliable and
flexible design. The risk analysis pro-
vides an additional security for design-
ing and preparing a technically and
economically balanced protection con-
cept. The planned protective measures
are implemented in accordance with
the protection standards of DIN V VDE
V 0185-4. Consequently, the pre-
standards form the basis to meet the
high expectations on the availability of
the power supply and data processing
systems when being affected by light-
ning.
Fig. 9.4.7 DCO ME 24 Surge protective device instal-
led into a switchgear cabinet for protec-
tion of the complete measuring and con-
trol system
Fig. 9.4.8 DCO ME 24 Surge protective device instal-
led into a switchgear cabinet, incoming
lines from double bottom
www.dehn.de
9.5 External and internal lightning protection for churches
Introduction
Church steeples are structures normally
towering considerably above their
environment and thus representing a
preferred point of strike for lightning.
Also, when considering the high his-
torico-cultural value of churches and
the fact that big crowds are frequently
assembled in churches, the necessity of
lightning protection is obvious. Chap-
ter 5.1.10 provides details for air-termi-
nation systems for steeples and church-
es.
External lightning protection
According to DIN V VDE V 0185-3, Sub-
clause 7.1, a lightning protection sys-
tem designed for lightning protection
systems Type III, corresponds to the nor-
mal requirements on steeples and
churches. In special individual cases,
like buildings or structures with high
cultural value, for example, the necessi-
ty for additional measures must be
assessed in accordance with DIN V VDE
V 0185-2.
The nave
According to DIN V VDE V 0185-3, Sub-
clause 7.5, the nave must have its own
lightning protection system and, if a
steeple is attached, this system must be
connected by the shortest route with a
down conductor of the steeple (Fig.
9.5.1). In the transept, the air-termina-
tion conductor along the transverse
ridge must be equipped with a down-
conductor system at each end.
Fig. 9.5.1 External lightning protection system of the
nave
www.dehn.de
The church steeple
Steeples up to a height of 20 m must be
equipped with one down-conductor
system. If steeple and nave are joined,
then this down-conductor system must
be connected to the external lightning
protection system of the nave by the
shortest route (Fig. 9.5.2). If the down-
conductor system of the steeple coin-
cides with a down-conductor system of
the nave, then a common down-con-
ductor system can be used at this loca-
tion. According to DIN V VDE V 0185-3,
Subclause 7.3, steeples higher than
20 m must be provided with at least
two down-conductor systems. At least
one of these down-conductor systems
must be connected with the external
lightning protection system of the nave
by the shortest route.
Fig. 9.5.2 Down conductor installed at the steeple
external lightning
protection system
1
M
3~
UV DV
kWh
1 2
EB EB
earthing electrode
power supply line
1 Surge arrester 2 Combined lightning current
Type DG 275 and surge arrester
Part No. 900 600 DV TNC
Part No. 900 373
Fig. 9.5.3 Principle of external and internal lightning protection for a church with attached steeple
9
LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE 181
 Down-conductor systems on steeples
Conductors for... DEHN Type Part No. No. in
must always be guided to the ground
Fig. 9.5.3
on the outside of the steeple. They
must not be installed inside the steeple 3-phase TN-C system DEHNventil DV TNC 255 900 373
(DIN V VDE V 0185-3, Subclause 7.2). 2
3-phase TN-S system DEHNventil DV TNS 255 900 374
Further, the separation distance s to
metal components and electrical instal- 3-phase TT system DEHNventil DV TT 900 375
lations in the steeple (e.g. clock mecha-
Table 9.5.1 Selection of combined lightning current and surge arresters for three-phase systems
nisms, belfry, etc.) and under the roof
(e.g. air conditioning, ventilation and Equipotential bonding
heating systems) must be maintained The purpose of equipotential bonding
by suitable arrangement of the exter- is to avoid potential differences
nal lightning protection system. The between different, extraneous conduc-
required separation distance can tive parts. Equipotential bonding has
become a problem especially at the to be carried out, installed and checked
clock. In this case, the conductive con- carefully according to DIN VDE 0100
nection into the structure can be Parts 410, 540 and 610. For lightning
replaced by an isolating connector (e.g. equipotential bonding, the cross sec-
a GRP pipe) to prevent hazardous tion of the earth conductor of the
sparking in parts of the external light- surge protective devices for equipoten-
ning protection system. tial bonding has to be chosen with at
In more modern churches built with least 16 mm2 Cu.
reinforced concrete, the steel rein-
forcements steels can be used as down-
conductor systems if it can be ensured
that their conductive connection is con-
tinuous. If pre-cast reinforced concrete
parts are used, the reinforcement may
be used as a down-conductor system, if
terminals to connect the reinforcement
continuously are provided on the pre-
cast concrete parts.

R2 N R2 A S1 S2 S3 S4 N SWK R2 NUK
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

DEHNguard¤ DEHNguard¤ DEHNguard¤ DEHNguard¤ DEHNguard¤ DEHNguard¤ DEHNguard¤ DEHNguard¤ DEHNguard¤

R R 9 x DEHNguard DG 275
N N Part No. 900 600
2 2

M
1~ MK

master clock
H S S S NL
NUK A
A 1 2 3 K
NLK
NUK
VK VK VK
HLK 1 2 3

HA
SWK

9 Fig. 9.5.4 Use of surge protective devices in the contol system of the master clock (sacristry)

182 LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE www.dehn.de

 N G1 B1 u1 v1 w1 N G2 B2 u2 v2 w2 N G3 B3 u3 v3 w3 N G4 B4 u4 v4 w4

u v w u v w u v w u v w
95 95 95 95

96 96 96 96

7 5 3 1 7 5 3 1 7 5 3 1 7 5 3 1
b b b b

8 6 4 2 a 8 6 4 2 a 8 6 4 2 a 8 6 4 2 a

distribution board
of the electric bell

main switch,
3-pole
Sch G Sch G Sch G Sch G
N R1
1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4

DEHNguard® DEHNguard® DEHNguard® DEHNguard® DEHNguard® DEHNguard® DEHNguard® DEHNguard® DEHNguard® DEHNguard® DEHNguard® DEHNguard® DEHNguard®

4 x DEHNguard DG 275 9 x DEHNguard DG 275

Part No. 900 600 Part No. 900 600

Fig. 9.5.5 Use of surge protective devices in the distribution board of the electric bell (up in the steeple)

Lightning protection and surge pro- lightning equipotential bonding via TT) (Table 9.5.1). Up to a cable length of
tection for power supply systems lightning current arresters. ≤ 5 m between DEHNventil and termi-
nal equipment there is sufficient pro-
Since churches must be equipped with The lightning equipotential bonding tection without additional protective
an external lightning protection as per has to be installed as close as possible devices. For greater cable lengths, addi-
DIN V VDE V 0185-3, Subclause 7, the to the entry of the low voltage cable tional surge protective devices are nec-
lightning equipotential bonding must into the building (low voltage main dis- essary for the terminal equipment, e. g.
also be provided inside the church. It tribution board). The main distribution DEHNrail.
has to be established by directly con- board of the power supply system of a
necting the metal scaffold of the struc- church is often located in the sacristy
ture, the installations made of metal area. The lightning equipotential
and the external conductive parts with bonding for the low voltage con-
the lightning protection system. Addi- sumer's installation is performed by
tionally, all conductive systems of the using the combined lightning current
power supply and information technol- and surge arrester DEHNventil as
ogy inserted from the outside must be shown in Fig. 9.5.3. The combined SPD
integrated into the lightning equipo- DEHNventil unites lightning current
tential bonding. All live wires of power
supply and data processing cables and
lines entering and coming out of the
and surge arrester in one device and is
available as complete prewired unit for 9
every low voltage system (TN-C, TN-S,
structure are directly connected to the

www.dehn.de LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE 183

 Another important measure is surge Concluding remarks
protection for the electrical installation Avoiding damage at historico-cultural
inside the nave and the steeple. For this monuments like churches fromlight-
purpose, all wires of the electric cables ning and damage caused by surges in
leading into the steeple, are connected the control systems within the church,
with surge protective devices in the requires a conceptually coordinated
tower on top as well as at the corres- lightning and surge protection. Apart
ponding distribution board in the tow- from the realisation of the external
er at the bottom or in the sacristy (Fig. lightning protection, protective meas-
9.5.3). Depending on the used control ures against surges must be taken in
system, surge protective devices type the power supply of the main distribu-
DEHNguard or BLITZDUCTOR CT can be tion board as well as in the control sys-
applied here. tem of the master clock, bell ringing
machine, and at the motor-driven
Fig. 9.5.4 shows the principle of a possi- façade clock hand mechanism.
ble implementation of surge protection
for the control system of the master
clock. In the area where the bell ringing
machines (Fig. 9.5.5) are spread, all
incoming cables are also connected
with surge protective devices. It has to
be considered that the surge protective
devices are connected to earth via the
local protective earth (PE) of the distri-
bution and not led separately to the
equipotential bonding bar situated at
the bottom of the tower. One possible
solution is shown in Fig. 9.5.6. The same
motor-driven façade motion train 1
is done with the cables for the motor-
driven façade clock hand mechanism.
Also here, all incoming cables are con- M
nected with surge protective devices, ~
type DEHNguard DG 275, Part No. 900 VAK
600. Fig. 9.5.7 shows a possible solution 1 2 SWK
1 2
by using the surge protective devices
DEHNguard 275 for protection of the
church clock drive.

R c c R SWK
N N
2 1 2 2 1 2

DEHNguard® DEHNguard® DEHNguard® DEHNguard® DEHNguard® DEHNguard®

DEHNguard® DEHNguard
DG 275
Part No. 900 600
6 x DEHNguard DG 275
Part No. 900 600

Fig. 9.5.6 Application example for using surge protective devices close to the electric bell Fig. 9.5.7 Use of surge protective devices for the

9 drive of the church clock (up in the steeple)

184 LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE www.dehn.de

9.6 Application proposal for lightning and surge protection in modern agri-
culture
Introduction
Complex electric and data processing
systems characterise the picture of
modern agriculture. Many processes
are automated, and controlled and
monitored by computers. Today, an
intact data network is an important
survival factor on the market not only
for industry but also for agriculture. For
protecting the installations and systems
against the destruction by powerful
transient surges, the use of surge pro-
tective devices is required. An external
lightning protection alone is by far no
longer sufficient there.

The construction
An example for the high degree of
automation in agriculture is the keep-
ing of cattle. Ultramodern electric and
electronic installations like automatic
Fig. 9.6.1 Modern automatic milking system
milking systems (Fig. 9.6.1), automatic
feeders (Fig. 9.6.2), ventilation systems,
flushing plants (Fig. 9.6.3), and heating
systems with heat recovery and indus-
trial water supply (Fig. 9.6.4) ensure a DEHNguard®T DEHNguard T
trouble-free operation. DG T 275
Part No. 900 650
The milking system (Figs. 9.6.1), for 3 OUT 4

BLITZDUCTOR CT
example, runs almost fully automatical- BCT BAS
ly in a modern farm. Part No. 919 506 +
Blitzductor CT
BCT MOD ...

BCT MOD ME 24
According to a natural rhythm, the 1 IN 2 Part No. 919 523
dairy cows enter the milking carousel
once in the early morning and once in
the evening – always at the same time –
to deliver their milk. The quantity deliv-
ered is immediately acquired by the
electronic operating control system of
this installation, saved and transmitted
online to an existing computer net-
work for administration (Fig. 9.6.5).
Each animal has a collar with a registra-
tion chip (Fig. 9.6.6) for identification.
Fig. 9.6.2 Automatic feeding system
Beside the milk quantity, inter alia the
name, date of birth, descent, diseases,
feed quantity, pregnancy duration, etc.
of the animal is acquired and stored.
The farmer can immediately intervene,
when e. g. the milk quantity changes,
by modifying the feed quantity accord-
ingly, and compensate for losses as
quickly as possible.

DEHNflex
DFL M 255
DEHNflex

Part No. 924 396

9
Fig. 9.6.3 Ventilation and flushing system

www.dehn.de LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE 185

 Protection concept
The failure of even only one plant com-
1 2
ponent due to surges leads to non-
DEHNrail
foreseeable consequences for opera- DEHNrail
DR ... FML
DR 230 FML
tors and animals. For example, health Part No. 901 100
problems may occur among the ani- 3 4

mals.
This results in downtimes, production
losses and additional costs for the med-
ical care of the animals.

Other consequences can be

⇒ high costs for the reconstruction of
data
⇒ costs for replacing the faulty
devices and the time required for it
Another example:
A big piggery in midsummer, where,
due to a thunderstorm or surge, the
complete ventilation system fails for a
Fig. 9.6.4 Heating system with heat recovery and service water supply
few hours.
Here, the animals may perish because
of gases, vapors, and the enormous
increase in temperature within shortest
time.

The enclosed newspaper article

describes such damage: " Lightning
killed cow in the barn – Power failed:
Pigs suffocated ".

From these examples it is obvious, how

important a protection is in agricultural
installations against lightning damage 1 2

and damage caused by surges. An DEHNrail

DEHNrail
DR ... FML
DR 230 FML
extensive protection requires the use of
Part No. 901 100
components for electric power as well 3 4

as for information technology

(telecommunications network, com-
puter network, measuring and control
Fig. 9.6.5 Electrical milking system with control box
line). Companies located at network
spurs of distribution networks are espe-
cially at risk.

The following shows an example for

the implementation of lightning and
surge protection in agricultural build-
ings or structures. Here, Figs. 9.6.7 and
9.6.8 show the design of the lightning
and surge protection on the power
supply side using protective devices
arranged in a decentralised manner by
means of combined lightning current
and surge arresters.

9 Fig. 9.6.6 Cow with collar and registration chip

186 LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE www.dehn.de

 No. Type Part No.
TN-S system 900 374
telephone
DEHNventil TNS
DV TNS 255
power telecommunication 1
supply line supply line TT system 900 375
2
DEHNventil TT
DV TT 255
HUB
1 kWh NTBA ISDN Protector 909 954
4 2 ISDN PRO
3
BLITZDUCTOR CT 919 670 +
3
BCT MOD BD HF 5 + BCT BAS 919 506

lines to stabling BLITZDUCTOR CT 919 647 +

4
BCT MOD BD 110 + BCT BAS 919 506

Fig. 9.6.7 Lightning and surge protection for agricultural installations

feeding system control

milking
lines to residential system control No. Type Part No.
building
230 V TN-S system 900 374
3
2 4 DEHNventil TNS
4 DV TNS 255
1
TT system 900 375
2
4 DEHNventil TT
milking carousel DV TT 255

2 DEHNrail DR 230 FML 901 100

1
S Protector 909 821
3
S PRO
5 5
4 - 20 mA BLITZDUCTOR CT 919 670 +
M M 4
BCT MOD BD HF 5 + BCT BAS 919 506
5 5
feeding trough feeding trough BLITZDUCTOR CT 919 523 +
5
BCT MOD ME 24 + BCT BAS 919 506

potential control close

to the standing animals
(DIN VDE 0100/705)

Fig. 9.6.8 Lightning and surge protection for agricultural installations

Examples of damage : [ Stuttgarter Nachrichten Online ] [ Donaukurier Online ] 29 June 2001

[ Oberpfalznet ] 16 June 2003
60 cows burn in the stable
Lightning discharge sets farm on fire in
Kainsricht – 500,000 Euro damage
Kainsricht. A flash of lightning struck a
farm on early Saturday evening and set
a stable with two outbuildings on fire.
60 cows died in the flames. The owner
of the farm, a 70 year old farmer, suf-
fered a shock. The caused damage
amounts to at least 500,000 Euro.
09 May 2003
Many fires and full cellars
The fire brigade of Fribourg moved out
for more than 60 deployments. Within
two hours, the police received 150
emergency calls in the city. In Oberwol-
fach (district of Ortenau), a flash of
lightning set a farm on fire and caused
a damage of approximately 150,000
Euro. The almost 100 year old building
burned down to the foundation walls.
Nobody was injured.
Lightning killed cow in the barn
Power failed: Pigs suffocated
Munich. During the thunderstorms in
the night towards Thursday, a flash of
lightning set a barn on fire in the rural
district of Roth. In a barn in Höttingen
(rural district of Weißenburg-Gunzen-
hausen), a cow was killed by lightning.
The strongest cloudburst happened in
Kempten, where more than 21 litres of
rain per square metre fell in one hour.
In Weißenburg, it was 20 litres.
Around 450 pigs suffocated in a fatten-
ing shed in Kitzingen and died of panic
attacks. A power failure, apparently
caused by a thunderstorm, has put the
ventilation of the stable out of opera-
tion in the night towards Thursday, said
the police. The farmer could still open a
window of the barn but could not pre-
9
vent the perishing of the animals.

www.dehn.de LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE 187

9

188 LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE www.dehn.de

9.7 Surge protection for video surveillance systems
Introduction
In the industry as well as in the private
sector, video surveillance systems are
used more and more frequently for
entrance monitoring and property
supervision.
The following describes protective
measures against surges that meet the
availability requirements on video sur-
veillance systems.
Video surveillance systems
A video surveillance system consists at
least of one camera, one monitor and
one suitable video transmission line.
Remotely controllable camera stations
are normally equipped with an inclina-
tion and swivel support so that position
and viewing angle of the station can be
individually adapted by an operator.
As shown in Fig. 9.7.1, video transmis-
sion and power supply of the camera
are implemented via an interface cable
between terminal box and camera.
The communication line between ter-
minal box and monitor can be a coaxial
cable or a balanced two-wire cable. The
transfer of the video signals through
coaxial cables is certainly the most com-
mon type in video technology. In this
case, an unbalanced transfer is used,
i. e. the video signal is transferred
through the core of the coaxial cable
(inner conductor). The shielding (earth)
is the reference point for the signal
transmission. The two-wire transmis-
sion is, beside the coaxial cable trans-
mission, a common possibility. If there
camera
system cable
inclination and
swivel head
3 2
1
junction box
1 DEHNguard
Surge arrester
2 BLITZDUCTOR CT BCT MOD BD/HF
for two-wire cables
UGK B for coax cable
Fig. 9.7.1 Video surveillance system - Lightning and surge protection
www.dehn.de
is already a global telecommunication with pipelines, metal installations with-
infrastructure for the object to be in the building and the earth-termina-
monitored, a free twin wire (two-wire tion system. Additionally, all earthed
cable) in the telecommunication cables parts of the power supply and data
is used to transfer the video signal processing systems must be integrated
into the lightning equipotential bond-
Video surveillance systems are partially ing. All live wires of power supply and
powered directly from the distribution data processing cables and lines lead-
panels, but also via inserted UPS. ing in and coming out of the structure
are connected indirectly with the light-
Choice of surge protective devices ning equipotential bonding via light-
ning current arresters. If no lightning
Building with external lightning pro-
current arresters are installed in the
tection system
low voltage main distribution board,
In Fig. 9.7.1, the camera is installed on a
the operator must be informed that
pole. A direct lightning stroke into the
these need to be upgraded.
camera can be prevented by an air-ter-
Tables 9.7.1 and 9.7.2 show the surge
mination rod mounted at the top end
protective devices to be used for signal
of the pole. With reference to the cam-
and feeder lines according to consecu-
era as well as to its connection cable, a
tive numbers in Fig. 9.7.1.
sufficient separation distance (DIN V
VDE V 0185-3) must be maintained
Fig. 9.7.1 (No. 4) shows the application
from parts of the external lightning
of a combined lightning current and
protection system.
surge arrester DEHNventil (Table 9.7.2).
This combined SPD unites lightning cur-
Usually, the connecting cable between
rent arrester and surge arrester in one
terminal box and camera is laid inside
device, requires no decoupling coil and
the metal pole.
is available as complete prewired unit
If this is not possible, the camera cable
for each type of low voltage system
has to be laid in a metal pipe, which
(TN-C, TN-S, TT).
must be electrically connected with the
Up to cable lengths of ≤ 5 m between
pole. For cable lengths of a few meters,
DEHNventil and terminal equipment,
a protective circuit in the terminal box
there is sufficient protection without
is not necessary in these cases.
additional protective devices. In case of
For the coaxial cable or the two-wire
greater cable lengths, additional surge
cable as well as for the control cable
protective devices are required for the
leading from the terminal box at the
terminal equipment, e. g. DEHNrail.
pole into a building with an external
lightning protection system, lightning
When mounting the camera at an
equipotential bonding must be imple-
external building façade it should be
mented (Table 9.7.1). This includes con-
ensured that the camera is fixed below
necting the lightning protection system
camera
monitor
inclination and control board
swivel head
control cable
entrance
box EB 2 3
coax or two-wire cable
4
control cable 230 V power cable
electrical distributor
3 BLITZDUCTOR CT BCT MOD BD...
(e.g. 24 V)
4 DEHNventil
Combined lightning curent
and surge arrester
9
LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE 189
 the outer edge of the roof, in the pro-
tection zone. If this is not possible, an
area must be created that is protected
against lightning strokes by means of
additional external lightning protec-
tion measures. This can be done with
an air-termination system, as shown in
Fig. 9.7.2, to safeguard the camera
against direct lightning strokes.
Buildings without external lightning
protection system
For buildings without external light-
ning protection system, it is assumed
air-termination rod
that the risk of damage caused by a
direct or close lightning stroke into the
building, is low and therefore accept-
ed.
If this risk is also accepted for a subse-
quently mounted video transmission
equipment, this can be sufficiently pro-
tected by installing SPDs.

The surge protective devices to be used

for the feeder line in Fig. 9.7.3 (No. 1)
can be taken from Table 9.7.2.
The surge arresters for protection of Fig. 9.7.2 Camera for video surveillance in the pro-
the signal lines in Fig. 9.7.3 are listed in tective area of the air-termination rod
Table 9.7.3

outside inside camera

monitor
camera
inclination and control board
swivel head

system cable control cable

inclinationd
and swivel head
junction box
5 6

coax or two-wire cable

6 5
1
1
junction box
control cable 230 V power cable

electrical distributor

1 DEHNguard 5 BLITZDUCTOR CT BCT MOD MD HF 6 BLITZDUCTOR CT BCT MOD MD

Surge arrester for two-wire cable or
UGKF for coax cable

Fig. 9.7.3 Video surveillance system - Surge protection

190 LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE www.dehn.de

 No. in
Fig.
9.7.1 Protection for ... SPDs Part No.
2-wire line BLITZDUCTOR CT, BCT MOD BD HF 5 919 670
2
(video transmission) + Base part BCT BAS 919 506
Coax cable UGKF BNC 929 010
2
(video transmission)
Control cable BLITZDUCTOR CT, BCT MOD BD 24 919 643
3
(e.g. 24 V dc) + Base part BCT BAS 919 506
Table 9.7.1 Lightning and surge protection for signal lines

No. in Combined SPDs (lightning current and surge arresters)

Fig.
9.7.1 Protection for ... SPDs Part No.
3-phase TN-C system DEHNventil DV TNC 255 900 373
4
3-phase TN-S system DEHNventil DV TNS 255 900 374
3-phase TT system DEHNventil DV TT 255 900 375
Single-phase TN system DEHNventil DV 2P TN 255 900 371
Single-phase TT system DEHNventil DV 2P TT 255 900 370
No. in Surge arresters
Fig.
9.7.1 and
9.7.3 Protection for ... SPDs Part No.
3-phase TN-C system DEHNguard‚ DG TNC 230 400 900 510
1
3-phase TN-S system DEHNguard‚ DG TNS 230 400 900 530
3-phase TT system DEHNguard‚ DG TT 230 400 900 520
Single-phase TN system DEHNguard‚ DG TN 230 FM 900 506
Single-phase TT system DEHNguard‚ DG TT 230 FM 900 508
Table 9.7.2 Lightning and surge protection for power supply lines

No. in
Fig.
9.7.3 Protection for ... SPD’s Part No.
2-wire line BLITZDUCTOR CT, BCT MOD MD HF 5 919 570
5
(video transmission) + Base part BCT BAS 919 506
Coax cable UGKF BNC 929 010
5
(video transmission)
Control cable BLITZDUCTOR CT, BCT MOD MD 24 919 543
6
(e. g. 24 V dc) + Base part BCT BAS 919 506

Table 9.7.3 Surge protection for signal lines

www.dehn.de LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE 191

9

192 LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE www.dehn.de

9.8 Surge protection for electromechanical truck scales with
microcomputer-controlled electronic evaluation unit
Introduction
connected with
The electric circuits of electronic scales reinforcement weighing bridge
are designed with four-wire or six-wire
technology.
⇒ Two wires for compensation line
⇒ Two wires for test line
⇒ Two wires for power supply.

Equipotential bonding load cell

ÜS
Inside the scale pit, an equipotential
bonding must be established between
all pressure and tensile sensors and
metal parts of the scale.
connected
It is recommended to use the reinforce- with foundation 16 mm2 Cu
earthing electrode to main equipotential bonding
ment of the scale pit (installation of a
foundation tank to indicator
foundation earthing electrode) as
earth-termination system on the spot
ÜS Surge protection unit Foundation earthing electrode
at the pressure and tensile sensors (Fig. Steel strip 30 x 3.5 mm
9.8.1).
Iron plate Equipotential bonding bar
Line-loss compensation
The compensation lines (feedback) are
first of all used for long connecting Fig. 9.8.1 Structure of an electromechanical truck scale
cables between pressure/tensile sensor
transducer and electronic evaluation

load cell

3 OUT 4 3 OUT 4 3 OUT 4

Blitzductor CT

Blitzductor CT

Blitzductor CT
BCT MOD ...

BCT MOD ...

BCT MOD ...

1 IN 2 1 IN 2 1 IN 2

1 IN 2 1 IN 2 1 IN 2
BCT MOD ...
Blitzductor CT

BCT MOD ...

Blitzductor CT

BCT MOD ...

Blitzductor CT

3 OUT 4 3 OUT 4 3 OUT 4

2
PE

4
DEHNguard® DEHNguard®

No. Type Part No.

230 V~ BLITZDUCTOR® CT
N
L1 1 BCT MOD BE C 12 919 661+
PC BCT BAS 919 506
PE
V.24
BLITZDUCTOR® CT
3 OUT 4 1 2 BCT MOD BE 12 919 621+
BCT BAS 919 506
Blitzductor CT
BCT MOD ...

FS 924 018
3
FS 25E HS 12
1 IN 2 large digit display
V.11
4
DEHNguard®
DG 275
900 600
9
Fig. 9.8.2 Surge protection for the weighing and indicator system

www.dehn.de LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE 193

 equipment for compensation of line
losses.

For protection, one SPD type BLITZ-

DUCTOR CT BE 12, rated voltage 12 V –,
is used immediately both before the
strain gage load cells to be protected
and the electronic evaluation unit (Fig.
9.8.2).

Test and power cables

In the same way, the load cells and elec-
tronic evaluation unit are connected
for protection by using two BLITZDUC-
TORs CT BE 12, with a rated voltage of
12 V, (Fig. 9.8.2) for each unit

Electronic evaluation unit

The data transfer between electronic
evaluation unit and large-digit display
is usually realised via balanced inter-
faces, e. g. V.11/RS 422 (Fig. 9.8.2).

The electronic evaluation unit (inter-

face V.11 / RS 422) is protected by BLITZ-
DUCTOR CT BE C 12, rated voltage
12 V – (Fig. 9.8.2).

Linking PC/EDP
Control and monitoring can be per-
formed by means of personal com-
puters with unbalanced interfaces.

An interface V 24/RS 232 is protected

against surges by FS 25E HS S 12 (Fig.
9.8.2).

Protective wiring of the power supply

systems
For protection of the power supply sys-
tems, DEHNguard DG 275 surge
arresters are used (Fig. 9.8.2).

194 LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE www.dehn.de

9.9 Lightning and surge protection for automatic fire alarm systems and
burglar alarm systems
Introduction
In a dangerous situation, emergency
alarm systems (fire alarm systems or
burglar alarm systems) should signal
‘actively’, and remain ‘passive’ in safe
situations. Malfunctions of these sys-
tems (no response in case of danger, or
alarm signal in case of no danger) are
undesirable and expensive. False
alarms sent by emergency alarm sys-
tems result in expenses, which, in the
industrial countries, amount to several
hundred million Euros per year. Anoth-
er aspect of malfunctions is the possible
direct or indirect danger to human
lives. In this context, we may remember
the malfunction of the fire alarm sys-
tem in the tower of the Frankfurt
Rhein-Main airport in 1992, where a
false activation of the fire extinguish-
ing system occurred because of a light-
ning stroke. Within a few minutes, the
air traffic controllers had to leave the
control room. In this critical situation,
approaching airplanes had to be redi-
rected to other airports. Considerable
delays occurred in the air traffic.
False alarms of emergency alarm sys-
tems are also disturbing in another
respect:
⇒ When false alarms accumulate, the
operator can no longer rely on the
system and questions the signifi-
cance of the system (investment) as
such.
⇒ The guard starts ignoring alarm
messages.
⇒ Neighbours will be disturbed by
acoustic alarms.
⇒ Fire-fighting forces (e. g. fire
brigade) will be bound unnecessar-
ily.
⇒ The activation of the fire extin-
guishing system causes interrup-
tions of operations.
⇒ Damage is caused by not signalling
existing dangers.
All these factors cause unnecessary
expenses. They can be avoided, when
possible causes for false alarms are
already recognised in the design stage
and are eliminated by suitable preven-
tive measures. For this purpose, the
German Insurance Association
(Gesamtverband der Deutschen Ver-
sicherungswirtschaft e. V. - GDV) pub-
lished VdS guidelines (VdS 2095; VdS
2311; VdS 2833). One of the measures
also requested in the VdS guidelines is
lightning and surge protection.
A coordinated lightning and surge pro-
tection prevents a false alarm caused
www.dehn.de
by atmospheric discharges and
improves the availability of the early
detection of dangers and alarms.
When installing comparable alarm
transmission systems, for which, out of
financial reasons, a VdS approval is not
used (e. g. residential building, ...), the
guidelines may also be used for project
design and for the construction as well
as for agreeing individual measures
between constructors and operators.
Indeed, most of the nowadays installed
fire alarm systems have an increased
surge immunity in accordance with IEC
61000-4-5 for primary and secondary
wires as well as for the mains inputs.
However, a comprehensive protection
against damage by lightning discharge
and surges can only be achieved by
external and internal lightning protec-
tion measures.
Monitoring principles
Different monitoring principles are
applied for emergency alarm systems:
⇒ Impulse line technology
The information from the trigger-
ing alarm device is transferred in
digital form. This allows to recog-
nise the alarm device and the exact
localisation of the trouble spot
(Fig. 9.9.1).
⇒ DC line technology
Each alarm line is permanently
monitored according to the closed-
circuit principle. If an alarm device
is activated in the line, this line is
interrupted and an alarm is trig-
gered in the control and indication
equipment. Hereby, however, only
the alarm line can be identified but
not the individual detector (Figs.
9.9.3 and 9.9.4).
Regardless of the used monitoring
principle, the lines of the emergency
alarm system must be integrated into
the lightning and surge protection of
the complete system.
Protection recommendations
For protection of alarm lines with dc
line technology, BLITZDUCTOR CT BCT
MOD BE ... is recommended. It is chosen
according to the voltage of the alarm
lines, which is normally 12 or 24 V.
BLITZDUCTOR CT BCT MOD BE is
recommended in order not to change
the loop resistance of the alarm lines
too much.
Regardless of the line topology, the
outputs of the control and indication
equipment, like e.g. for acoustic and
visual signalisation, should be protect-
ed by BLITZDUCTOR CT. Care should be
taken that the nominal current of the
protective devices is not exceeded. In
case of nominal currents > 1 A, DEHN-
rail DR 24 FML protective device has to
be used alternatively (see Table 9.9.1).
The control and indication unit is nor-
mally connected to an exchange line of
a fixed-network operator by means of
a telephone dial unit. For this applica-
tion, the SPD type BLITZDUCTOR CT,
BCT MOD BP 110 is suitable (see also
chapter 9.16 "Surge protection for
telecommunication accesses").
The surge protection of the power sup-
ply is important, too. It is recommend-
ed to use DEHNguard surge protective
devices here (see Table 9.9.2).
For alarm systems, which are certified
by the German Insurance Association,
(systems recognised by VdS), the manu-
facturer of the alarm system should be
contacted. The installations as well as
the lightning and surge protection
equipment have to be set up in accor-
dance with VdS 2095, VdS 2311 or VdS
2833.
As an example, the enclosed diagrams
contain a proposal for surge protection
of control and indication units, which
are operated on the principle of dc line
technology or pulse engineering.
If the fire and burglar alarm post and
the control unit shall be integrated into
a lightning protection system, then all
lines entering the building shall be con-
nected with lightning current arresters
or combined lightning current and
surge arresters. See Tables 9.9.1 and
9.9.2.
9
LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE 195
 Conclusion
A distinct increase of the operational magnetic contacts
reliability of these systems can be Detector group 1 4
8 8 8 8 8
glass breakage
reached with specific lightning and 4 detector
Detector group 2
surge protection of alarm systems. On Detector group 3 4 magnetic contacts
8 8 8 8 8 glass breakage
the one hand, this refers to the preven- 4
Detector group 4 detector
tion of false alarms when no danger 6
Detector group 5 IR 1

Control and indication untit

exists, and on the other, costs eventual-
ly arising from this, can be prevented.
6
This again, allows an effective damage Detector group 6 IR 2
limitation by informing the auxiliary Detector group 7 impact sound detector
2 2
personnel reliably. This counteracts a Burglar group robbery alarm button 1+2
possible formation of catastrophic con- 6
Block lock block lock 1
ditions (e. g. danger to human lives, Area 1 2
activation acknowledging 1
pollution of the environment, etc.). Block lock 6
block lock 2
Notice that in case of injuries to per- 2
Area 2 activation acknowledging 2
sons or environmental damage, the 2
Signal transmitter buzzer 1
operator of a plant is liable first. This
comprehensive responsibility for securi- Exterior alarm system 1 siren 1
ty can normally be expected from man- Sabotage line
agers or executives of a company. How- Exterior alarm system 2 siren 2 flash
ever, in the legal sense, an operator of Exterior alarm system 3 light
a plant is a technical layman, who is not 1
able to estimate, if threats can arise
from a technical solution. Therefore,
skilled persons as suppliers of technical
solutions must ensure in each individ- L1 N PE 3
ual case, that the solutions offered also
correspond to the actual requirements.
Retreating to the accepted rules of Fig. 9.9.1 Lightning and surge protection for the control unit of a burglar alarm system with impulse line
technology is not sufficient, if the state technology
of the art already describes a higher
quality solution. This may entitle a
technical layman (plant operator) to
claim recourses. 2
A− A+
Regardless of the fact, whether fire
alarm systems are VdS-approved sys- UE
tems or not, they should be furnished
Control and indication unit

with a surge protection.

analogue ring

2
B− B+

10
annunciator

2
Exterior alarm system 1 siren 1

2
Exterior alarm system 2 siren 2

Exterior 2
flash
SPD alarm system 3 light
1

2
Telecom
L1 N PE 3

9
Fig. 9.9.2 Lightning and surge protection for the control unit of a fire alarm system - Analogue ring

196 LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE www.dehn.de

 IR detector 1
magnetic contacts and block lock 1
UE glass breakage detector

3 3
Detector line 1
activation
buzzer acknowledging
Control and indication unit

IR detector 2 device
magnetic contacts and block lock 2
glass breakage detector

3 3
Detector line 2
activation
acknowledging burglar
device alarm
button

Exterior alarm system 1 siren 1

Exterior alarm system 2 siren 2

Exterior flash
alarm system 3 light
SPD
1

Telecom
L1 N PE 3

Fig. 9.9.3 Lightning and surge protection for the control unit of a burglar alarm system with dc line technology

2
Detector group 1
UE Detector group 2 2

2
Detector group 3
2
Detector group 4
10
annunciator
Control and indication unit

4
sprinkler system
8
FB control panel
8
FB key depot
4
main detector

2
Exterior alarm system 1 siren 1

2
Exterior alarm system 2 siren 2

1
Exterior 2
flash
alarm system 3 light
SPD

2
Telecom FB = fire brigade
L1 N PE 3

9
Fig. 9.9.4 Lightning and surge protection for the control unit of a fire alarm system with dc line technology

www.dehn.de LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE 197

 No. in Fig. Type Short definition Part No.
BLITZDUCTOR CT, Two-pole, universal device as terminal block for protection of 919 523
1
BCT MOD ME 12 or IT systems and devices, consisting of a base part and a protection or
BCT MOD ME 24 module; surge arrester for use in the EMC-orientated lightning
+ Base part BCT BAS zones concept at boundaries 919 506
0B to 1 or higher
Alternative: Combined lightning current and surge arrester:
BLITZDUCTOR CT, Two-pole, universal device as terminal block for protection of 919 623
BCT MOD BE 12 or IT systems and devices, consisting of a base part and a protection or
BCT MOD BE 24 module; lightning current and surge arrester for use in the EMC- 919 624+
+ Base part BCT BAS orientated lightning zones concept at boundaries 919 506
0A to 1 and/or 0A to 2
BLITZDUCTOR CT, Two-pole, universal device as terminal block for protection of
2
BCT MOD MD 110 IT systems and devices, consisting of a base part and a protection 919 547+
+ Base part BCT BAS module; surge arrester for use in the EMC-orientated lightning 919 506
zones concept at boundaries
0B to 1 or higher
Alternative: Combined lightning current and surge arrester:
BLITZDUCTOR CT, Two-pole, universal device as terminal block for protection of
BCT MOD BD 110 IT systems and devices, consisting of a base part and a protection 919 647+
+ Base part BCT BAS module; lightning current and surge arrester for use in the EMC- 919 506
orientated lightning zones concept at boundaries
0A to 1 and/or 0A to 2

Table 9.9.1 Short definition of the SPDs

No. in Fig. Conductors for ... SPDs Part No.

3-phase TN-C system DEHNguard‚ DG TNC 230 400 900 510
3
3-phase TN-S system DEHNguard‚ DG TNS 230 400 900 530
3-phase TT system DEHNguard‚ DG TT 230 400 900 520
Single-phase TN-S system 2x DEHNguard‚ DG 275 900 600
Single-phase TN-C system DEHNguard‚ DG 275 900 600
Single-phase TT system DEHNguard‚ DG 275 – phase L to N 900 600
+ DEHNgap C/T, DGP C T 255 – N to PE 900 133
3-phase TN-C system DEHNventil, DV TNC 255 900 373
3-phase TN-S system DEHNventil, DV TNS 255 900 374
3-phase TT system DEHNventil, DV TT 255 900 375
Table 9.9.2 Selection of SPDs

198 LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE www.dehn.de

9.10 Lightning and surge protection of an EIB system
Introduction
In modern office buildings and public
buildings, like schools, EIB bus systems
are is used for the automation of
sequences of operations of the build-
ing control system. EIB offers the possi-
bility to realise complex processes with
a single, upwards compatible system.
However, this future-proof investment
can be quickly destroyed by lightning
discharges. Then, the building automa-
tion is not available and further costs
are caused by replacement and recon-
figuration of the system. Therefore,
measures shall be taken against the
direct and indirect effects of a lightning
discharge when designing and
installing such complex systems.
Lightning protection or surge protection?
Basic conditions must be considered
when choosing the surge arresters cor-
rectly. This does not only include the
system-specific electric data, like nomi-
nal voltage, nominal current, frequen-
cy, but also the threat parameters,
which must be controlled. It makes a
difference, if the risk of direct lightning
strokes into buildings, where the EIB is
installed, must be considered when
designing the protective measures, or if
safety against surges is desired only. If
direct lightning strokes and the high
destruction potential involved should
be handled properly, the infrastructure
of the EIB system must be designed
according to the lightning protection
zones concept. The lightning protec-
tion zones concept is standardised in
DIN V VDE V 0185-4 and describes the
protective measures against lightning
electromagnetic impulses. An impor-
tant part is the classification of the
infrastructure to be protected in light-
ning protection zones. The higher the
ordinal number of the lightning pro-
tection zones is, the smaller must be
the electromagnetic threat parameters.
Electric and electronic systems like the
EIB system have to be classified in
accordance with their electromagnetic
immunity into lightning protection
zones, which also offer an electromag-
netic environment in case of a direct
lightning stroke to ensure that the
equipment continues to function with-
out getting disturbed or even
destroyed.
If an external lightning protection sys-
tem is installed in accordance with DIN
V VDE V 0185-3, an effective lightning
and surge protection is necessary and is
to be implemented for the EIB accord-
ing to the lightning protection zones
concept. Within the context of EIB sys-
www.dehn.de
tems, the measures taken are often General conditions 1 :
called primary and secondary protec- Connecting the two buildings with a
tive measures. buried cable (copper cable).
If the aim of the protective measures is
Solution 1 :
only the protection against surges (sec-
The following SPDs are used (Fig. 9.10.1) :
ondary protection), the hazard poten-
tial of a direct lightning stroke is not ⇒ 1 2 pieces
taken into account. In the case of a
direct or very near lightning stroke into ⇒ 2 2 pieces
buildings with built-in EIB, damage ⇒ 3 2 pieces
must be expected there. Only interfer-
ences resulting from inductive or ⇒ 4 n pieces
capacitive coupling, as they occur dur-
ing lightning discharges some kilome- General conditions 2:
tres away or during switching opera- Connection of the two buildings with
tions, can be controlled. Lightning dis- cable and lines in a supply duct, the
charges create electromagnetic inter- reinforcement of which is integrated
ference fields, which can cause danger- into the equipotential bonding at both
ously high voltages and currents in ends. This condition is also fulfilled by a
installation loops. steel earthing tape 50 mm2 stripped
over the buried cables and connected
to the equipotential bonding bar at
Cabling between buildings both ends.
In an extended building complex,
which is equipped with a lightning pro- Solution 2 :
The following SPDs are used (Fig. 9.10.2) :
tection system, an EIB installation shall
be integrated and protected against ⇒ 3 2 pieces
transient surges. A gatehouse is
approximately 50 m away from a main ⇒ 4 n pieces
building. Both buildings are equipped
with a lightning protection system. General conditions 3:
Since the gatehouse is connected to the The EIB connection between both
EIB installation of the main building via buildings is achieved via an optical
a bus line, measures for internal light- fibre connection (OFC). If the fibre-
ning protection must be taken both for optic cable has a metal braid inside the
the 230/400 V line as well as for the bus cable (protection against rodents), this
line. braid has to be connected to the
equipotential bonding at the point
where it enters the building.
Solution 3 :
The following SPDs are used (Fig. 9.10.3) :
⇒ 1 2 pieces
⇒ 3 2 pieces
⇒ 4 n pieces
No. Type Part No.
3-phase TN-C system: DEHNventil, DV TNC 255 900 373
1
3-phase TN-S system: DEHNventil, DV TNS 255 900 374
3-phase TT system: DEHNventil, DV TT 255 900 375
BLITZDUCTOR CT‚ BCT MOD B 110 919 510
2
+ Base part BCT BAS 919 506
3-phase TN-C system: DEHNguard‚ DG TNC 230 400 900 510
3
3-phase TN-S system: DEHNguard‚ DG TNS 230 400 900 530
3-phase TT system: DEHNguard‚ DG TT 230 400 900 520
4
BUStector, BT 24 925 001 9
Table 9.10.1 Short description of the SPDs
LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE 199
 Conclusion
main building complex gatehouse
For the design and implementation of
an EIB system, it is absolutely necessary
that designers and contractors take
EIB distribution board EIB distribution board
appropriate measures for the correct
operation of such a system. Of particu- 3 4 3
lar concern should be into which sur-
roundings the EIB system is integrated
and installed. Interfaces to other infra- power cable
4
structures, like low-voltage systems,
telecommunications and data systems
have to be protected against interfer-
ences or even destruction as the EIB 1 2 bus cable 2 1
itself.
Proper lightning protection systems
and surge protection systems and the EB EB EB
corresponding surge protective devices
are available for protection against the
effects of interferences. These can pro- Fig. 9.10.1 Lightning and surge protection for cabling systems installed between buildings without inter-
tect the future-proof EIB building connection of the foundation earthing electrodes
installation cost-effectively due to tech-
nical and economic considerations dur- main building complex gatehouse
ing the design and by expert installa-
tion.
EIB distribution board EIB distribution board

3 4 cable duct 3
or 50 mm2 steel

power cable
4

bus cable
EB EB EB

Fig. 9.10.2 Lightning and surge protection for cabling systems installed between buildings with interconnec-
tion of the foundation earthing electrodes

main building complex gatehouse

EIB distribution board EIB distribution board

3 4 3

power cable
4

optical fibre cable

1 1

EB EB EB

Optical fibre /
EIB converter

9 Fig. 9.10.3 Lightning and surge protection for cabling systems installed between buildings without inter-
connection of the foundation earthing electrodes, with EIB optical fibre cabling

200 LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE www.dehn.de

9.11 Surge protection for ETHERNET and Fast Ethernet networks
General ⇒ direct lightning strokes creating M, for example, can be used for protec-
Surges not only cause malfunctions but impermissible potential differences tion of the terminal equipment.
also destructions and thus, failures of and partial lightning currents in
computer systems, by which the opera- the building installations. Protection of the data lines
tion can be persistently impaired Whether data or voice transmission is
because of longer down times. Besides Choise of surge protective devices concerned, both require appropriate
a protected power supply and data protective components for safe opera-
backup, the reliable utilisation of com- General tion. Normally, networks are designed
puter systems also requires protection For an effective surge protection it is as generic cabling systems in accor-
concepts against surges. necessary that the measures for the dif- dance with EN 50173. Even if fibre optic
ferent systems are coordinated by the cables between building distributors
Causes of damage involved experts like electrical engi- and floor distributors are the standard
Failures of computer systems are typi- neering technicians, computer special- practice, copper wires are still used
cally caused by ists and telecommunications techni- between the floor distributor and the
⇒ distant lightning strokes generat- cians as well as the manufacturer. In terminal equipment. Therefore, it is
ing conducted transient overvolt- case of bigger projects, it is necessary to necessary to protect the HUBs, bridges
ages in power supply lines, data consult an expert (e. g. from an engi- or switches with NET Protector LSA 4 TP.
lines, or communication lines neering company). Terminal equipment can be protected
by wall socket outlets DSM RJ45 4 TP or
⇒ close lightning strokes generating
Protection of the power equipment by cable adapters UGKF RJ45 4 TP.
electromagnetic fields, by which
Figure 9.11.1 shows an administration
transient surges are induced in
building as an example. For the power
power supply lines, data lines, or
supply, lightning current arresters
communication lines
Type 1 (e. g. DEHNbloc) and SPDs Type 2
(e. g. DEHNguard) can be installed.
DEHNrail, SFL-Protector, or DEHNflex

No. SPD Type Part No.

®
1 DEHNbloc DB 3 255 900 110
2 Surge protective plug DPL 1 F... DPL 1F ARD 110 907 145
Disconnection plug TL2 10DA LSA 907 996
Earthing busbar ES 10DA 907 998
SDB
14 Mounting frame for term. blocks 10x10 TC MB2 10 LSA 907 995
3 Equipotential bonding bar K12 563 200
4
®
13 4 DEHNguard TNS DG TNS 230 400 900 530
5 DEHNrail DR 230 FML 901 100
6 Surge arrester UGKF UGKF RJ 45 4 TP 929 023
7 DEHNlink DLI ISDN I 929 024
8 NET Protector for 8 ports NET PRO LSA 4TP 929 036
5 6 19" Enclosure for 3 x NET Protector EG NET PRO 19" 929 034
SDB EDP TC floor distri-
bution board 9 SFL Protector SFL PRO 912 260
server

8 9 10 11 9 NET Protector for 8 x 2 TC

10 NET PRO TC 2 LSA 929 072
4 TC system
19" Enclosure for 3 x NET Protector EG NET PRO 19" 929 034
12
11 DEHNflex M DFL M 255 924 396
13
7 12 Data protection module DSM DSM RJ45 4TP 924 263
5 5 12 Telephone protection module DSM
13 DSM TC 1 SK 924 271
14 DATA Protector DATA PRO 4 TP 909 955

MDB telephone
building terminal board
distribution
1 board 2

4 EB
3

9
Fig. 9.11.1 Administration building with highly available installation parts

www.dehn.de LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE 201

9

202 LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE www.dehn.de

9.12 Surge protection for M-Bus
Introduction
M-Bus is used for the transmission of
readings from consumption meters. All
devices connected to an M-Bus system
can be read off centrally, either directly
on the spot or per data transmission
from an external head office. This
increases the housing quality of the
tenants, and the energy budget of an
entire building can be controlled any-
time.
The following describes surge protec-
tive measures that meet the availability
claim of this system.
The M-Bus
The M-Bus (meter bus) is a cost-opti-
mised field bus for the transmission of
energy consumption data. As shown in
Fig. 9.12.1, a central master (in the sim-
plest case a PC with a level converter
downstream of the PC) communicates
via a two-wire bus with the units sharing
the bus. Using M-Bus repeaters, the
installation can be divided in M-Bus seg-
ments. Each segment can include up to
250 slaves like heat counters, water
meters, power meters, gas meters, and
also sensors and actuators of any type.
More and more manufacturers imple-
ment the electric M-Bus interface includ-
ing protocol layer into their consump-
tion meters.
direct connection
RS 232
M-Bus control unit
RS 485
level transformer
RS 485 M - Bus
bus segment
repeater
M-Bus
Fig. 9.12.1 Example of an M-Bus system
www.dehn.de
The M-Bus corresponds to European stan- ation. The maximum bus voltage
dard and is described in standard EN 1434. amounts to 42 V.
Previously, the energy data of individual The expansion of the network as well
buildings were transferred via on-wire as the maximum bit rate is limited by
connections from the network to the the number of M-Bus devices, the pro-
master station. Frequently, in case of tective wiring, the cable routing, and
widespread building complexes, the the cable types used.
data is transmitted via a modem connec-
The total sum of all cables as well as of
tion.
the connected M-Bus devices and of
The M-Bus system is used for the con- protective wirings creates a capaci-
sumption cost accounting and remote tance in the M-Bus segment. This
monitoring of capacitance restricts the baud rate.
⇒ local and district heating systems The maximum baud rate per M-Bus
segment can be determined by means
⇒ multifamily residences
of the following table (Table 9.12.1).
The readout of the supply meters can
be performed by central and decen-
tralised systems. If the supply meters Total capacity Max. data
are situated immediately close, the sim- M-Bus transmission
ple and economical central system net- segment rate
work architecture is chosen. This
includes a star-shaped connection of up to 382 nF 9600 Baud
each individual meter to the control up to 1528 nF 2400 Baud
centre. In case of a decentralised sys-
tem, the data of the meters installed on up to 12222 nF 300 Baud
the spot is first collected in substations Table 9.12.1 Max. data transmission rate
and is then sent via a bus line to the
control centre.
The M-Bus is a two-wire bus system,
which is powered by an isolated supply
source from the bus master. For all other
units sharing the M-Bus, no reference to
the ground may be created during oper-
telephone connection
RS 232
modem
modem modem
telephone network
RS 232 RS 232
M-Bus control unit
M-Bus control unit
level transformer remote monitoring of an
M-Bus system with
5 supply meters
RS 485
M-Bus M-Bus
9
LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE 203
 If surge protective devices are used, the tion), the operator must be informed event of direct lightning strokes, are
capacitances and series impedances of that these must be added. reduced.
the surge protective devices must be
Further measures for protection of elec- Note:
considered and taken into account
trical installations and systems include Cascaded use of lightning current and
when defining the network clients. The
installing of surge protective measures. surge arresters
following tables show the capacitances
These measures also allow the protection Energy coordination is the principle of a
and the series impedances of the surge
of the electrical installations and systems cascaded application of lightning cur-
protective devices (Table 9.12.2).
in the event of a direct lightning stroke as rent and surge arresters. Energy coordi-
nation is usually achieved by the imped-
ance of the connecting cable of at least
SPDs Capacity: Series impedance 15 m length between the SPDs. If this is
line/ line per line not possible, the decoupling coil DEHN-
bridge 35 A or 63 A can be used.
BLITZDUCTOR CT. BCT MOD BD 48
Part No. 919 645 0.6 nF 2.2 Ω Another possibility is using DEHNventil.
This combined SPD unites lightning cur-
BLITZDUCTOR CT. BCT MOD BE 24 rent and surge arrester in one device,
Part No. 919 623 0.7 nF 2.2 Ω requires no decoupling coil, and is avail-
BLITZDUCTOR CT. BCT MOD BE 5 able as complete prewired unit for every
Part No. 919 620 3 nF 1.4 Ω low-voltage (TN-C, TN-S, TT) system
(Table 9.12.3).
DEHNconnect. DCO RK MD 48 Up to cable lengths of ≤ 5 m between
Part No. 919 942 0.6 nF 0.4 Ω DEHNventil and terminal equipment,
DEHNconnect. DCO RK ME 24 sufficient protection exists without addi-
Part No. 919 921 0.5 nF 1.8 Ω tional surge protective devices. For
greater cable lengths, additional surge
DEHNconnect. DCO RK ME 12 protective devices have to be installed at
Part No. 919 920 1.2 nF 1.8 Ω terminal equipment, e. g. DEHNrail.
Table 9.12.2 Capacities and series impedances of surge protective devices Tables 9.12.3, 9.12.4, and 9.12.5 list
surge protective devices to be applied in
Choice of surge protective devices for accordance with the consecutive num-
additional measure to the lightning
M-Bus systems bers in Fig. 9.12.2.
equipotential bonding.
For establishing an M-Bus system, the
bus lines are also installed outside the If lightning equipotential bonding and
buildings. Therefore, the devices are the installation of surge protective meas-
exposed to the danger of destruction by ures are implemented as carefully as the
transient surges of lightning discharges external lightning protection system, this
and must be protected accordingly. In contributes to a reliable performance of
the following, the surge protective cir- electrical systems. Failures, even in the
cuit for M-Bus systems is described in
detail considering two applications. No. in Fig. Conductors for ... SPDs Part No.
9.12.2
Example of application: Building with
3-phase TN-C system DEHNventil DV TNC 255 900 373
external lightning protection system 10 11
If a building has an external lightning 3-phase TN-S system DEHNventil DV TNS 255 900 374
protection system, the lightning equipo- 3-phase TT system DEHNventil DV TT 255 900 375
tential bonding must be implemented.
This comprises connecting of the light- Single-phase TN system DEHNventil DV 2P TN 255 900 371
ning protection system to pipelines, met- Single-phase TT system DEHNventil DV 2P TT 255 900 370
al installations within the building and
the earth-termination system. In addi- Table 9.12.3 Selection of combined SPD with regard to the power supply system
tion, all earthed parts of the power sup-
ply and data processing systems must be
integrated into the lightning equipoten- No. in Fig. Conductors for ... SPDs Part No.
tial bonding. All live lines of power sup- 9.12.2 BLITZDUCTOR CT
ply and data processing cables and lines Type
entering and coming out of the building
or structure are indirectly connected to M-Bus BCT MOD BD 48 919 645
1 to 7
the lightning equipotential bonding via + Base part BCT BAS 919 506
lightning current arresters. If no lightning 0-20 mA, 4-20 mA BCT MOD BE 24 919 623
8
current arresters are installed at the ser- + Base part BCT BAS 919 506
vice entrance of the building (for exam-

9 ple in the low-voltage consumer's instal-

lation of the low-voltage main distribu-
9
temperature measurement
PT 100, PT 1000
BCT MOD BE 5
+ Base part BCT BAS
919 620
919 506

Table 9.12.4 Surge protection for signal interfaces

204 LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE www.dehn.de

 temperature sensor
UPS modem PT 100
cable length 0 ... 20 mA
≥ 15 m
PC Server
10 11
1 2 1 2
COM 2 COM 1 8 9
processor processor 3 4 3 4

M - Bus Box M - Bus Box

building 1 3 4 repeater
1
1 2 3 4 3 4
3 4 6 7
2 1 2 1 2
3 1
1 2
3

M-Bus
4 2

230 V power supply

12

1 3
4
2 4

1 3 building 2
5
2 4

Fig. 9.12.2 Protection concept for M-Bus systems in buildings with external lightning protection system

No. in Fig. Conductors for ... SPDs Part No.

9.12.2
3-phase TN-C system DEHNbloc‚ DB 3 255 – phase L1/L2/L3 to PEN 900 110
10
3-phase TN-S system DEHNbloc‚ DB 3 255 – phase L1/L2/L3 to PE 900 110
+ DEHNbloc‚ DB 1 255 – N to PE 900 111
3-phase TT system DEHNbloc‚ DB 3 255 – phase L1/L2/L3 to N 900 110
+ DEHNgap, DGP BN 255 – N to PE 900 132
Single-phase TN-S system 2 x DEHNbloc‚ DB 1 255 – phase L1 + N to PE 900 111
Single-phase TN-C system DEHNbloc‚ DB 1 255 – phase L to PEN 900 111
Single-phase TT system DEHNbloc‚ DB 1 255 – phase L to N 900 111
+ DEHNgap, DB 1 255 – N to PE 900 132
3-phase TN-C system DEHNguard‚ DG TNC 230 400 900 510
11 12
3-phase TN-S system DEHNguard‚ DG TNS 230 400 900 530
3-phase TT system DEHNguard‚ DG TT 230 400 900 520
Single-phase TN system
Single-phase TT system
DEHNguard‚ DG TN 230
DEHNguard‚ DG TT 230
900 506
900 508
9
Table 9.12.5 Surge protection for the 230 V power supply

www.dehn.de LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE 205

 temperature sensor
UPS modem PT 100
0 ... 20 mA

PC server
10
1 2 1 2
COM 2 COM 1 8 9
processor processor 3 4 3 4

M - Bus box M - Bus box

building 1 3 4 repeater
1
1 2 3 4 3 4
3 4 6 7
2 1 2 1 2
3 1
1 2
3

M-Bus
4 2

230 V power supply

11

1 3
4
2 4

1 3 building 2
5
2 4

Fig. 9.12.3 Protection concept for M-Bus systems in buildings without external lightning protection system

Application example :
Building without external lightning
protection system
Fig. 9.12.3 shows an example how a net- No. in Conductors for ... SPDs Part No.
worked M-Bus system must be wired in Fig.
order to get an efficient protection 9.12.3
against surges. M-Bus DEHNconnect, DCO RK MD 48 919 942
Tables 9.12.6 and 9.12.7 list the surge 1 – 7
protective devices to be used in accor-
dance with the consecutive numbers in 0-20 mA, 4-20 mA DEHNconnect, DCO RK ME 24 919 921
8
Fig. 9.12.3.
temperature DEHNconnect, DCO RK ME 12 919 920
9
measurement
PT 100, PT 1000
Table 9.12.6 Surge protection for signal interfaces

No. in Conductors for ... SPDs Part No.

Fig.
9.12.3
3-phase TN-C system DEHNguard‚ DG TNC 230 400 900 510
10 11
3-phase TN-S system DEHNguard‚ DG TNS 230 400 900 530
3-phase TT system DEHNguard‚ DG TT 230 400 900 520
Single-phase TN system DEHNguard‚ DG TN 230 900 506

9 Table 9.12.7
Single-phase TT system DEHNguard‚ DG TT 230

Surge protection for the 230 V power supply

900 508

206 LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE www.dehn.de

9.13 Surge protection for Sauter Cumulus systems
Introduction
The application of programmable DDC
systems (abbreviation for Direct Digital
Control) for control and regulation of
technical installations in buildings has
gained much more significance in
recent years. This applies first of all to
controlling, regulating, and monitor-
ing operational installations user-
friendly and optimal for use. Sooner or
later, this technology will have com-
pletely replaced conventional analo-
gous control engineering. By network-
ing, DDC stations can be linked in big-
ger buildings and operated in so-called
building automation systems (BA sys-
tems). Technical installations in wide-
spread buildings or structures can be
monitored and operated from a central
site via modem and public telephone
system.
The following describes surge protec-
tive measures that meet the availability
claim of this system.
Building automation system EY 3600
As shown in Fig. 9.13.1, the building
automation system EY3600 of Sauter
Cumulus is a complete family of sys-
tems for regulation, control and moni-
toring of building installations. This sys-
tem EY 3600 consists of the following
components:
⇒ Automation stations
EY 3600 nova
Ethernet
IEEE802.3
AS system 1 novaNet
Fig. 9.13.1 Building automation system EY 3600 by Sauter Cumulus (Ref.: Sauter Cumulus GmbH)
www.dehn.de
⇒ Single-room control system
EY 3600 ecos
⇒ Network novaNet
⇒ Communication with non-Sauter
Cumulus systems via novacom
⇒ Management level with EY 3600
novaPro system operation software
⇒ Project designing software
EY 3600 CASE
The use of a modem/ISDN adapter
allows a remote access to the installa-
tion via the public telecommunication
network. Messages and protocols can
be transmitted to printer, fax machine,
pager, paging system, etc.
Connection between management plane
and automation level via novaNet
NovaNet is a Sauter-Cumulus-specific
bus system with twisted-pair lines
(shielding recommended) as transmis-
sion medium. Up to 28 ,672 automation
stations as well as 256 PCs can be con-
nected to this system. The PCs, in turn,
are interconnected via a LAN/WAN net-
work.
Connection between automation level
and field level via novaLink
NovaLink is a Sauter-Cumulus-specific
bus system with a twisted and shielded
two-wire line, earthed at both ends, as
transmission medium. EY 3600
novaLink is a point-to-point connection
to each unit. The maximum length
between automation station and field
management level
novaNet AS system 2
novaLink
automation level
field level
module may be up to 100 m (< 5 nF,
12 Ohm).
Connection to non-Sauter Cumulus
systems via nova230
This allows to integrate field bus sys-
tems like e. g. EIB and LON into the
Sauter building automation.
Choice of surge protective devices
Lightning current arrester
Lightning current arresters protect the
installation and the lines entering
lightning protection zone 1 and com-
ing from lightning protection zone 0A.
Each of the protective devices is
installed at the zone boundaries and is
connected at low impedance in the
shortest possible way with the equipo-
tential bonding of the building.
Surge arrester
Surge arresters protect the installation
and the lines leading from lightning
protection zone 0B to lightning protec-
tion zone 1 or higher. The surge
arresters are connected at low resistance
and in the shortest possible way to the
local equipotential bonding in light-
ning protection zone 1.
Combined SPDs
In the cases, where the lightning pro-
tection zone 0 changes into lightning
protection zone 2 directly, a combined
SPD can be used. A combined SPD
includes lightning current and surge
arrester in one device. In case of a cas-
caded use of lightning current and
surge arresters, attention should be
paid to the energy coordination. The
combined SPDs are connected at low
impedance and in the shortest possible
way with the equipotential bonding of
the building.
9
LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE 207
 4 2 2 4
2 2
novaNET 3 1 1 3

switchgear 2 1 2 1
switchgear
cabinet cabinet
4 4
4 3 4 3

automation automation
station (as) station (as)
line length
DI AO
15 m

1 3 3 4 3 4 3
5 6
1 2 1 2

field 3 4
devices
building 1 2
1 2
building 2

field
devices

Fig. 9.13.2 Protection concept for building services management systems for a building with external lightning protection system

Instructions for installation :

novaNet The following principles have always to
be considered :
⇒ Surge arresters must always be con-
switchgear nected to the equipotential bond-
cabinet ing of the building in the shortest
2 1
possible way
4
4 3 ⇒ If necessary, a further equipotential
bonding has to be added
automation ⇒ The connecting cable between
station (as) surge protective device and
equipotential bonding should be
kept as short as possible (max.
0.5 m). Lines in lightning protection
3 novaLink
3 4
zone 1 must not be arranged in
7 parallel with unprotected lines
1 2 from lightning protection zone 0A
or 0B.

Tables listing suitable surge protective

3 4 devices for building automation sys-
8 tem EY3600
1 2
The following tables list suitable surge
protective devices upon lightning pro-
tection zone boundary and network
configuration. These are used for pro-
building tection of the EY 3600 automation

9 components. Figs. 9.13.2 and 9.13.3

show the installation sites of the surge
protective devices.
Fig. 9.13.3 Protection concept for building services management systems for a building without external
lightning protection system

208 LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE www.dehn.de

 No. in Fig. Conductors for ... ... connect boundary 0A ⇔ 1 with: Part No.
9.13.2
3-phase TN-C system DEHNbloc‚ DB 3 255 – Phase L1/L2/L3 to PEN 900 110
1
3-phase TN-S system DEHNbloc‚ DB 3 255 – Phase L1/L2/L3 to PE 900 110
+ DEHNbloc‚ DB 1 255 – N to PE 900 111
3-phase TT system DEHNbloc‚ DB 3 255 – Phase L1/L2/L3 to N 900 110
+ DEHNgap B/n, DGP BN 255 – N to PE 900 132
Single-phase TN-S system 2x DEHNbloc‚ DB 1 255 – Phase L1 + N to PE 900 111
Single-phase TN-C system DEHNbloc‚ DB 1 255 – Phase L to PEN 900 111
Single-phase TT system DEHNbloc‚ DB 1 255 – Phase L to N 900 111
+ DEHNgap B/n, DGP BN 255 – N to PE 900 132
NovaNet line BLITZDUCTOR CT‚ BCT MOD B 110 919 510
2
+ Base part BCT BAS 919 506
Digital inputs BLITZDUCTOR CT‚ BCT MOD B 110 919 510
⇒ dc 24 V + Base part BCT BAS 919 506
Digital outputs BLITZDUCTOR CT, BCT MOD B 110 919 510
⇒ dc 24 V + Base part BCT BAS 919 506
Analogue inputs BLITZDUCTOR CT‚ BCT MOD B 110 919 510
⇒ temperature measurement + Base part BCT BAS 919 506
Analogue inputs BLITZDUCTOR CT‚ BCT MOD B 110 919 510
⇒ U/I/R measuring + Base part BCT BAS 919 506
Analogue outputs BLITZDUCTOR CT‚ BCT MOD B 110 919 510
+ Base part BCT BAS 919 506
Impulse meter BLITZDUCTOR CT‚ BCT MOD B 110 919 510
+ Base part BCT BAS 919 506
EIB BLITZDUCTOR CT‚ BCT MOD B 110 919 510
(e.g. boundary converter) + Base part BCT BAS 919 506
LON BLITZDUCTOR CT‚ BCT MOD B 110 919 510
(e.g. boundary converter) + Base part BCT BAS 919 506
ISDN – Uk0 interface BLITZDUCTOR CT‚ BCT MOD B 110 919 510
(use upstream of NTBA) + Base part BCT BAS 919 506
Table 9.13.1 Boundary between lightning protection zones 0A ⇔ 1

Boundary between lightning Conductors for ... ... connecty boundary Part No.
protection zones 0A ⇔ 2 and higher 0A ⇔ 2 with:
3-phase TN-C system DEHNventil DV TNC 255 900 373
⇒ Combined SPD for three-phase
systems 3-phase TN-S system DEHNventil DV TNS 255 900 374
If the cable length in Fig. 9.13.2 3-phase TT system DEHNventil DV TT 255 900 375
between lightning current arresters (1)
Table 9.13.3 Selection of combined lightning current and surge arresters, lightning protection zone 0A – 2
and surge arresters (3) is less than 15 m,
the combined SPD DEHNventil TNC, TN,
or TT is used (see Table 9.13.3 ). Conductors for ... ... connect boundary Part No.
0A ⇔ 2 with:
⇒ Combined SPD for bus and sensor NovaNet line BLITZDUCTOR CT, BCT MOD BE C 5 919 660
lines + Base part BCT BAS 919 506
If BLITZDUCTOR CT type BCT MOD B Digital inputs BLITZDUCTOR CT, BCT MOD BE 12 919 621
110 (3) cannot be installed separately Analogue in- and outputs, + Base part BCT BAS 919 506
at the service entrance of the building Impulse meter
as well as BLITZDUCTOR CD M ... (4) in
NovaLink line BLITZDUCTOR CT, BCT MOD BE C 12 919 661
the switchgear cabinet as shown in Fig.
(at DDC station) + Base part BCT BAS 919 506
9.13.2, a combined SPD has to be
installed into the switchgear cabinet
(see Table 9.13.4)
NovaLink line
(at input of field module)
BLITZDUCTOR CT, BCT MOD BE 12
+ Base part BCT BAS
919 621
919 506 9
Table 9.13.4 Selection of combined lightning current and surge arresters, lightning protection zone 0A – 2

www.dehn.de LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE 209

 No. in Fig. Conductors for ... ... connect boundary 1 ⇔ 2 with: Part No.
9.13.2
3-phase TN-C system DEHNguard‚ DG TNC 230 400 900 510
3
3-phase TN-S system DEHNguard‚ DG TNS 230 400 900 530
3-phase TT system DEHNguard‚ DG TT 230 400 900 520
Single-phase TN system DEHNguard‚ DG TN 230 900 506
Single-phase TT system DEHNguard‚ DG TT 230 900 508
novaNet BLITZDUCTOR CT‚ BCT MOD ME C 5 919 560
4
+ Base part BCT BAS 919 506
Digital inputs BLITZDUCTOR CT‚ BCT MOD ME 12 919 521
5
⇒ dc 24 V + Base part BCT BAS 919 506
Digital outputs BLITZDUCTOR CT‚ BCT MOD ME 12 919 521
6
⇒ dc 24 V + Base part BCT BAS 919 506
Analogue inputs BLITZDUCTOR CT‚ BCT MOD ME 12 919 521
⇒ temperature measurement + Base part BCT BAS 919 506
Analogue inputs BLITZDUCTOR CT‚ BCT MOD ME 12 919 521
⇒ U/I/R-measuring + Base part BCT BAS 919 506
Analogue outputs BLITZDUCTOR CT‚ BCT MOD ME 12 919 521
+ Base part BCT BAS 919 506
Impulse meter BLITZDUCTOR CT‚ BCT MOD ME 12 919 521
+ Base part BCT BAS 919 506
EIB 1 BUStector per line 925 001
(e.g. boundary converter)
LON for TP/FFT 10 and TP/LPT 10
(e.g. boundary converter) BLITZDUCTOR CT‚ BCT MOD MD 48 919 545
+ Base part BCT BAS 919 506
ISDN - S0 interface DSM ISDN SK 924 270

Im Fig. Conductors for ... ... connect the boundary 1 ⇔ 2 with: Part No.
9.13.3
Nr.
novaLink (at DDC station) BLITZDUCTOR CT‚ BCT MOD ME C 12 919 561
7
+ Base part BCT BAS 919 506
novaLink (at input BLITZDUCTOR CT‚ BCT MOD ME 12 919 521
8
of field module) + Base part BCT BAS 919 506

Table 9.13.2 Boundary between lightning protection zones 1 ⇔ 2 and higher

Note:
If surge protection is used, the capaci- SPDs Capacity Series impedance
tances and series impedances of the BLITZDUCTOR CT line/ line per line
surge protective devices must be taken
BCT MOD B 110 6 pF 0.4 Ω
into account and considered for the lay
out of the network clients. Table 9.13.5 BCT MOD ME C 5 8 nF 6.6 Ω
shows the capacitances and the series BCT MOD ME C 12 3 nF 13.5 Ω
impedances of surge protective
devices. BCT MOD ME 12 1 nF 1.5 Ω
BCT MOD BE 12 1 nF 1.9 Ω
BCT MOD BE C 12 3 nF 13.9 Ω
Table 9.13.5 Capacities and series impedances of SPDs

210 LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE www.dehn.de

Note:
If only measures against surges are sup-
posed to be taken instead of installing
lightning protection systems, lightning
current arresters are not required. The
connections will then be reduced to the
application of surge arresters (see Table
9.13.2).
Shielding of cables
If the manufacturer of the system speci-
fies the use of shielded cables, these
must be connected in accordance with
the directions of the system manufac-
turer for correct function.
⇒ novaNet
Sauter Cumulus recommends a shield-
ing for the novaNet system bus. If the
used cable type has a shield, this is,
according to Cumulus Sauter, to be con-
nected only once per bus segment to
the earthing electrode of the
switchgear cabinet. But in order to
meet the EMC requirements, the shield
must be earthed at both ends.
In order to avoid equalising currents on
the shield, the shield is connected to
earth directly at one end of the cable
and indirectly at the other one. The
indirect shielding is carried out via the
base part BLITZDUCTOR CT. For this
purpose, the gas discharge tube, Part
No. 919 502, has to be inserted into the
plug-in unit provided for the base part
of BLITZDUCTOR CT (see Fig. 9.13.4)
In functional operation, the E-bus cable
is considered earthed once in case of
indirect shield earthing is used.
⇒ novaLink
In case of novaLink, the shield must be
earthed directly at both ends.
1.
3.
2.
Fig. 9.13.4 Installation of BLITZDUCTOR CT surge protective device
www.dehn.de
Surge protective devices for generic
cabling systems.
Between campus distributor and build-
ing distributor, fibre optic cables are
usually used as data link. Surge protec-
tion is not required here. The star coup-
lers for distribution of the fibre optic
cables, however, are supplied with
230 V and must be protected against
surges.
For building backbone cables (between
building distributor and floor distribu-
tor) and horizontal lines between floor
distribution board (hub) and terminal
equipment, copper lines are mostly
used. High common-mode interfer-
ences exceeding the insulation capacity
of the hubs and the network cards can
be induced in the event of a lightning
stroke into the building.
Both the building/floor distributor and
the telecommunications outlet require
protective measures. The installation
sites of the individual surge protective
devices are shown in Fig. 9.13.5
Between hub and patch panel,
NET Protector is installed and connect-
ed via patch cables. For protection of
the terminal equipment against surges,
there are various possibilities according
to installation conditions. These are
shown in Table 9.13.6.
9
LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE 211
 floor distributor

1 HUB

NET Protector LSA-Plus NET Protector 4TP

patch panel

2 3

Fig. 9.13.5 Surge protection for universal cabling

system

No in
Fig.
9.1.3.4 Surge protective devices Description Part No.
Surge protective device for protection of the building / floor distributor (Hub)
NET Protector 19“ enclosure Closed shielded enclosure acc. to EN 55022 with space 929 034
1
EG NET PRO 19” for three units of fine surge protection modules
e.g. NET Protector 4TP
NET Protector, NET PRO 4TP Protection module for 8 shielded ports and protective 929 035
circuit for all pairs
In- and output with RJ45 sockets
NET Protector, NET PRO LSA 4TP Protection module for 8 shielded parts and protective 929 036
circuit for all pairs
Input: LSA-Plus technology / Output: RJ45 sockets
Surge protective devices for protection of terminal equipment
UGKF RJ45 4TP Cable adapter with shielded in- and output 929 023
2
RJ45 sockets and protective circuit for all 4 pairs
DSM RJ45 4TP Universal data socket outlet with shielded RJ45 socket 924 263
3
and surge protective circuit for installation into
flush-mounted socket outlets and cable ducts
Data Protector, DATA PRO 4TP Combined SPD for power supply and data connection 909 955
4
of a terminal device
Data in- and output via shielded RJ45 sockets
Table 9.13.6 Selection of surge protective devices for universal cabling systems

212 LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE www.dehn.de

9.14 Lightning and surge protection for Honeywell building management
systems
Introduction
The application of programmable DDC
systems (abbreviation for Direct Digital
Control) for control and regulation of
technical installations in buildings has
gained much more significance in
recent years. This applies first of all to
controlling, regulating, and monitor-
ing operational installations user-
friendly and optimal for use. Sooner or
later, this technology will have com-
pletely replaced conventional analo-
gous control engineering. By network-
ing, DDC stations can be linked in big-
ger buildings and operated in so-called
building automation systems (BA sys-
tems). Technical installations in wide-
spread buildings or structures can be
monitored and operated from a central
site via modem and public telephone
system.
The following describes surge protec-
tive measures that meet the availability
claim of this system.
Excel 500/100 automation system of
Honeywell
Excel 500 of Honeywell is a program-
mable control, regulation, and moni-
toring system using DDC technology,
which was specifically developed for
the technical service for facilities.
Excel 500
is a modular structured DDC system
consisting of bases with base plates,
system housing and slide-in modules.
The Excel 500 automation station can
be equipped with up to 5 system hous-
ings with a total of 16 I/O modules (XFL
521 ... 524). In the first system housing
(XH561), there is the power supply (XP
502) and a computer module (XC 5010C
or XC 6010). Two further slots in this
cabinet can be equipped with I/O mod-
ules.
The XP 502 power supply module is
powered by an external 24 V trans-
former of the CRT series. Each control
unit requires its own transformer. Field
devices belonging to an automation
station also require a separate trans-
former.
www.dehn.de
Excel 500 smart The enclosed table lists the capaci-
The XCL 5010 is a compact controller tances of the surge protective devices
for decentralised input/output modules (Table 9.14.2):
with full functionality of a CPU but
without connection of internal (plug-
in) modules. The device communicates SPDs Capacity Part No.
with up to 16 input/output modules via BLITZDUCTOR line / line
the E-Bus. Excel 500 smart requires no
BCT MOD B 110 6 pF 919 510
system housing and no power supply
module. The 24 V ac supply voltage BCT MOD MD 48 600 pF 919 545
comes from a CRT series transformer.
BCT MOD BD 48 600 pF 919 645
The transformer may be used simulta-
neously for controllers and field Table 9.14.2 Capacity values of surge protective
devices. devices
Based on the LONWORKS communica-
tion standard, Excel 500 / Excel 500 smart
FTT network segment
offer the possibility, to install input and
By using the surge protective devices,
output modules at decentralised places
the number of permissible FTT nodes
in the building. The I/O modules commu-
decreases in the segment:
nicate with each other via a two-wire
⇒ up to 50 BLITZDUCTORs CT,
bus, the E-Bus. The E-Bus can be imple-
mented as FTT-10A free topology (LON). BCT MOD B 110
one FTT node less
In case of free topology, star wiring and
daisy chain as well as a combination of ⇒ per BLITZDUCTOR CT,
both are allowed. BCT MOD BD 48 / BCT MOD MD 48
All automation stations have a C bus two FTT nodes less
interface, by which they can be inter- Example:
connected. Up to 29 automation sta-
When using
tions can be connected to the system
bus (C-Bus). On the system bus, the 1 x BCT MOD B 110 and
automation stations communicate with 1 x BCT MOD MD 48
each other as equal partners. This mul-
up to 61 FFT nodes can still be used in a
timaster bus architecture also allows a
segment
full data transfer between the con-
(64 stations – 2 – 0.02 = 61.98).
nected automation stations without
supervisory control room.
LPT-LPT network segment
A two-wire bus line serves normally as In a LPT10 network, a total of up to 128
transmission medium for the C-Bus. nodes is permissible, from which 127
The physical features of the bus system nodes are addressable. Here, the num-
essentially correspond to the RS 485 ber of the LPT nodes is reduced in the
standard. segment due to the application of
surge protective devices:
Surge protection and maximum num- ⇒ up to 25 BLITZDUCTORs CT,
ber of nodes BCT MOD B 110
The capacitances of the surge protec- one LPT node less
tive devices must be taken into account
⇒ per BLITZDUCTOR CT
for the lay-out of the network clients.
In an FTT/LPT network segment, the BCT MOD BD 48 / BCT MOD MD 48
line-to-line capacitances of 300 pF x 64 four LPT nodes less
stations are permissible. The capaci- Example:
tances of the transceivers amount to
(Table 9.14.1): When using
1 x BCT MOD B 110 and
Capacity 1 x BCT MOD MD 48
Transceiver
line / line a maximum of 123 LPT nodes can still
FTT 10 A 300 pF be used in one segment
(128 nodes – 4 – 0.04 = 123.96).
LPT 10 150 pF
Table 9.14.1 Capacities of transceivers
LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE 213
 Surge induction by loops
Often, only those electric facilities LON 230 V ac PE water pipe
entering the building are protected
with surge arresters at the service
node EB
entrance of the building. Whereby,
surges can even then be caused on bus
lines, when alterations of the magnetic
node
field penetrate into a conductor loop. node with
connection to
Loops of power cables and bus lines, as protective
well as of pipe networks, and bus lines conductor
or power circuits are the most frequent
coupling paths for surges. Fig. 9.14.1
node LON node
shows examples of installation loops.
Often, however, it cannot be avoided
that power lines and bus lines form
LON loop - 230 V ac LON loop - water pipe
conductor loops. Hence, bus lines and
power lines must always be arranged as
Fig. 9.14.1 Formation of installation loops
closely as possible side by side in order
to keep the enclosed area as small as
possible. Induction loops are also
caused, when bus lines are installed JY(ST)Y 2x2x0.8
close to earthed conductors, e. g. near
water and heating pipes. Here, the
loop is closed via the equipotential
Excel 500
bonding bar. Loops to earthed conduc- module
e.g. XC 5010C
tors should be avoided, i. e. LON nodes Excel 500 indirect earthing via
should be installed at some distance smart gas discharge tube
from heating and water pipes, and e.g. XCL 5010
lightning protection systems.

The value of the induced voltage is pro- direct module

portional to the area of the conductor
loop. The larger the area in the conduc-
tor loop, the higher is the induced volt-
age. This means that no loops may
develop during the cable installation.
Installation loops can be avoided by
parallel conductor leading.
LON ring topology
The DDC substation Excel 500 in Fig.
9.14.2 is situated in the switchgear cab-
inet, which is defined as lightning pro-
tection zone 2. From this DDC station,
the individual modules are contacted in
the field via a LON ring bus line (JY(ST)
2 x 2 x 0.8). To protect the DDC substa-
tion against transient surges, a light-
ning arrester BLITZDUCTOR CT type
BCT MOD MD 48 (Part No. 919 545 +
Base Part, Part No. 919 506) is used both
at the start and at the end of this ring
bus line.
earthing
EB
LPZ 2
switchgear cabinet
BLITZDUCTOR® BCT MD 48
Fig. 9.14.2 Use of surge protective devices in an LON ring structure
Connection of unused wires
DIN V VDE V 0185-4 describes the gen-
eral principles of protection against
lightning electromagnetic impulse. It
explains how a structure is subdivided
according to the lightning protection
zones concept into several lightning
protection zones, and how the equipo-
tential bonding has to be realised at
the zone boundaries. The lightning
protection zones are characterised by
distinct alterations of the radiated and
conducted lightning interferences at
their boundaries. If a metal power sup-
ply system penetrates a zone boundary
and thus an electromagnetic shield of a
zone, this power supply system has to
be treated at the boundary. This means
LPZ 1
building
nection of all unused wires with a
BLITZDUCTOR CT. As shown in Fig.
9.14.3, unused but connected wires are
directly earthed by means of the earth
terminal set.
Shielding of cables (connection of
shielded cables)
If the manufacturer of the system speci-
fies the use of shielded cables, these
must be connected according to the
specifications of the system manufac-
turer for correct function. The proper
handling of the cable shield is an
important part of the protection con-
cept. In principle, the cable shields have
to be earthed at both cable ends as
well as when leading through a light-

9 that all electric lines must be protected

by surge protective devices at the zone
boundary. This also includes the con-
ning protection zone. Cable shields can
attenuate capacitive and inductive cou-
pling on the bus wires, however only, if

214 LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE www.dehn.de

 Earth clamp set
Table for selection upon lightning pro-
Part No. 919 505 tection zones
for direct earthing
of both lines Lightning current arrester
Lightning current arresters protect the
installation and the lines, which enter
lightning protection zone 1 coming
from lightning protection zone 0A. The

min. 6 mm2
protective devices are installed at each

No. ..
zone boundary and connected at low
resistance in the shortest possible way
to the equipotential bonding of the
building (Table 9.14.3).

Surge arrester
Surge arresters protect the installation
and the lines leading from lightning
Fig. 9.14.3 Use of the earth clamp set for earthing unused lines
protection zone 0B to lightning protec-
tion zone 1 or higher. The surge
the shields are earthed consistently at In functional operation, the E-bus cable arresters are connected at low resist-
each bus station. In practice, however, is considered earthed once in case of ance and in the shortest possible way
the shield connection is frequently per- indirect shield earthing is used. to the local equipotential bonding in
formed only once, since low-frequency ⇒ C-Bus lightning protection zone 1 (Table
equalising currents are feared. At a 9.14.4).
central site (control panel, control In case of the C-Bus, the shield must be
room) all shields are directly connected grounded directly at both ends. Combined SPDs
to the local equipotential bonding. At Note: In cases, where lightning protection
the distant cable ends, the shields are If only surge protective measures are zone 0A directly changes to lightning
connected to the earth via gas dis- supposed to be taken instead of protection zone 2, a combined SPD can
charge tubes. Fig. 9.14.4 shows the pos- installing lightning protection systems, be used. A combined SPD includes
sibility to insert a gas discharge tube lightning current arresters are not lightning current and surge arrester in
for indirect shield earthing. Since the required. The protection is then one device. In case of a cascaded use of
resistance of the gas discharge tube is reduced to the use of surge arresters, as lightning current and surge arresters,
approximately 10 GΩ, equalising cur- listed in Table 9.14.4. attention should be paid to the energy
rents are prevented in a surge-free con- coordination. Combined SPDs are con-
dition. The aim of indirect shield earth- nected at low resistance and in the
ing is to realise the EMC requirements shortest possible way to the equipoten-
and to avoid equalising currents. tial bonding of the building (Tables
Appearing EMC interferences like light- 9.14.6 and 9.14.7).
ning effects lead to an ignition of the
gas discharge tube. This directs dis-
charges to earth in a non-destructive
way.
⇒ E-Bus
Honeywell do not request shielding for
the E-Bus. If the used cable type has a
shielding, it is, according to Honeywell,
to be connected to the earthing elec-
trode of the control panel only once
1
per bus segment. To meet the EMC
requirements, however, the shield must
be earthed at both ends. In order to 3
avoid equalising currents in the shield, 3
the shield is earthed directly at one
cable end (control panel, control room) 2
and indirectly at the other. The indirect
shielding is performed by the base part Fig. 9.14.4 Use of a gas discharge tube for indirect shield earthing
of BLITZDUCTOR CT. For this purpose,
the gas discharge tube, Part No. 919
502, has to be inserted into the plug-in
unit provided at the base part of BLITZ-
DUCTOR CT (see Figs. 9.14.4 and
9.14.5).
9

www.dehn.de LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE 215

 standard transformer
cable length type CRT
15 m exterior sensor
24 V Excel 500 4 2 4 2 −
dc e.g. XC 5010C
230 V Excel 500 smart
3 6 1 3 7 1 +
ac e.g. XCL 5010

class I class II E-Bus C-Bus

3 4 3 4 4 2 4 2
connection to other
controllers in other
3 3
buildings
1 2 1 2 3 5 1 3 1
8 (e.g. XC 5010,
1 2
connection XCL 5010)
to module,
e.g. XFL 521 LPZ 2
switchgear cabinet
LPZ 1
building
XFL 524
LPZ 0B
fire alarm line LPZ 0A
table between line between
buildings buildings

Fig. 9.14.5 Protection concept for building management services system by Honeywell in a building with external lightning protection system

No. in Conductors for ... ... connect boundary 0A ⇔ 1 with: Part No.
Fig.
9.14.5
3-phase TN-C system DEHNbloc, DB 3 255 – Phase L1/L2/L3 to PEN 900 110
1
3-phase TN-S system DEHNbloc, DB 3 255 – Phase L1/L2/L3 to PE 900 110
+ DEHNbloc, DB 1 255 – N to PE 900 111
3-phase TT system DEHNbloc, DB 3 255 – Phase L1/L2/L3 to N 900 110
+ DEHNgap B/n, DGP BN 255 – N to PE 900 132
Single-phase TN-S system 2x DEHNbloc, DB 1 255 – Phase L1 + N to PE 900 111
Single-phase TN-C system DEHNbloc, DB 1 255 – Phase L to PEN 900 111
Single-phase TT system DEHNbloc, DB 1 255 – Phase L to N 900 111
+ DEHNgap B/n, DGP BN 255 – N to PE 900 132
C-bus line BLITZDUCTOR CT, BCT MOD B 110 919 510
8
+ Base part BCT BAS 919 506
E-bus line BLITZDUCTOR CT, BCT MOD B 110 919 510
+ Base part BCT BAS 919 506
Floating BLITZDUCTOR CT, BCT MOD B 110 919 510
7
measuring sensor 24 V + Base part BCT BAS 919 506
0 – 20 mA BLITZDUCTOR CT, BCT MOD B 110 919 510
4 – 20 mA signal + Base part BCT BAS 919 506

Table 9.14.3 Use of lightning current arresters at boundary 0A ⇔ 1

216 LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE www.dehn.de

 No. in Conductors for ... ... connect boundary 0B ⇔ 1 with: Part No.
Fig.
9.14.5
3-phase TN-C system DEHNguard, DG TNC 230 400 900 510
3-phase TN-S system DEHNguard, DG TNS 230 400 900 530
3-phase TT system DEHNguard, DG TT 230 400 900 520
Single-phase TN system DEHNguard, DG TN 230 900 506
Single-phase TT system DEHNguard, DG TT 230 900 508
C-bus line BLITZDUCTOR CT, BCT MOD MD HF 5 919 570
+ Base part BCT BAS 919 506
Alternative:
BLITZDUCTOR VT, BVT RS485 5 918 401
E-bus line BLITZDUCTOR CT, BCT MOD MD 48 919 545
3
+ Base part BCT BAS 919 506
Floating BLITZDUCTOR CT, BCT MOD ME 24 919 523
measuring sensor 24 V + Base part BCT BAS 919 506
0 – 20 mA BLITZDUCTOR CT, BCT MOD ME 24 919 523
4 – 20 mA signal + Base part BCT BAS 919 506

Table 9.14.4 Use of surge arresters at boundary 0B ⇔ 1

No. in Conductors for ... ... connect boundary 1 ⇔ 2 with: Part No.
Fig.
9.14.5
3-phase TN-C system DEHNguard, DG TNC 230 400 900 510
2
3-phase TN-S system DEHNguard, DG TNS 230 400 900 530
3-phase TT system DEHNguard, DG TT 230 400 900 520
Single-phase TN system DEHNguard, DG TN 230 900 506
Single-phase TT system DEHNguard, DG TT 230 900 508
C-bus line BLITZDUCTOR CT, BCT MOD MD HF 5 919 570
5
+ Base part BCT BAS 919 506
Alternative
BLITZDUCTOR VT, BVT RS485 5 918 401
E-bus line BLITZDUCTOR CT, BCT MOD MD 48 919 545
+ Base part BCT BAS 919 506
Floating BLITZDUCTOR CT, BCT MOD ME 24 919 523
6
measuring sensor 24 V + Base part BCT BAS 919 506
0 – 20 mA BLITZDUCTOR CT, BCT MOD ME 24 919 523
4 – 20 mA signal + Base part BCT BAS 919 506
Table 9.14.5 Use of surge arresters at boundary 1 ⇔ 2

www.dehn.de LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE 217

 ⇒ Combined SPDs for three-phase
Conductors for ... ... connect boundary Part No.
systems
0A ⇔ 2 with:
If the cable length between lightning
3-phase TN-C system DEHNventil DV TNC 255 900 373
current arresters (No. 1 in Fig. 9.14.5)
and surge arresters (No. 2 in Fig. 9.14.5) 3-phase TN-S system DEHNventil DV TNS 255 900 374
is less than or equal to 15 m, the com-
3-phase TT system DEHNventil DV TT 255 900 375
bined SPD DEHNventil TNC, TN or TT
(Table 9.14.6) is used. Table 9.14.6 Selection of combined lightning current and surge arresters for three-phase current systems

⇒ Combined SPDs for bus and sensor

lines
If BLITZDUCTOR CT type BCT MOD B
110 (e.g. No. 7 in Fig. 9.14.5) cannot be Conductors for ... ... connect boundary Part No.
installed separately at the service 0A ⇔ 2 with:
entrance of the building and also C-bus line BLITZDUCTOR CT, BCT MOD BD HF 5 919 670
BLITZDUCTOR CT M... (e.g. No. 6 in Fig. + Base part BCT BAS 919 506
9.14.5) in the switchgear cabinet, a
combined SPD (Table 9.14.7) has to be Floating BLITZDUCTOR CT, BCT MOD BE 24 919 623
installed in the switchgear cabinet. measuring sensor 24 V + Base part BCT BAS 919 506
0 – 20 mA BLITZDUCTOR CT, BCT MOD BE 24 919 623
4 – 20 mA signal + Base part BCT BAS 919 506
Table 9.14.7 Selection of combined lightning current and surge arresters for bus and signal lines

218 LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE www.dehn.de

9.15 Surge protection for PROFIBUS FMS, PROFIBUS DP, and PROFIBUS PA
Introduction
The application of PROFIBUS as com-
munications system in process-related
and production-related fields as well as
its use as multi-data cell and multi-
object control medium results in high
availability requirements on this bus
system. These availability requirements
face a high degree of surge risks due to
the application sites.
PROFIBUS
is the SIEMENS name for communica-
tion products (hardware/software) of
the PROFIBUS standard (Process Field -
Bus) standardised in DIN 19245 and EN
50170. Alternative Siemens names for
PROFIBUS FMS and PROFIBUS DP are
SINEC L2 and SINEC L2-DP. While
PROFIBUS FMS is designed for baud
rates up to 500 kBit/s only, PROFIBUS DP
is able to transfer data with a rate of up
to 12 MBit/s. First of all, the main appli-
cation of PROFIBUS FMS (SINEC L2) is
the handling of big quantities of data
at the process management and group
control level. The fast PROFIBUS DP is
designed for applications in the field of
the decentralised periphery of pro-
grammable control systems.
The most recent development in the
PROFIBUS segment is the intrinsically
safe PROFIBUS PA, which, in process
engineering, can also be used in areas
where explosion hazards may occur.
A two-wire bus cable serves normally as
transmission medium. The physical
characteristics of the bus system essen-
tially correspond to the RS 485 stan-
dard.
The bus sharing units can be connected
in various ways:
⇒ Connection via 9-pin D subminia-
ture plug (usual pin assignment
3/8)
⇒ Connection via screw terminals
⇒ Connection via bus terminals.
www.dehn.de
Selection of surge protective devices Note:
Cascaded use of lightning current and
Building with external lightning pro-
surge arresters
tection system
Energy coordination is the principle of
If a building has an external lightning
the cascaded use of lightning current
protection system, lightning equipo-
and surge arresters. Energy coordina-
tential bonding must be implemented.
tion is usually reached by the imped-
This includes connecting the lightning
ance of the connecting cable of at least
protection system to pipelines, metal
15 m length between the surge protec-
installations within the building, and
tive devices. If this is not possible,
the earthing system. Additionally, all
decoupling coil DEHNbridge 35 A or
earthed parts of the power supply and
63 A can be used.
data processing systems must be inte-
grated into the lightning equipotential
Another possibility is using DEHNventil.
bonding. All live wires of power supply
This combined SPD unites lightning cur-
and data processing cables and lines
rent and surge arrester in one device,
leading into and coming out of the
requires no decoupling coil and is avail-
structure are indirectly connected to
able as complete prewired unit for
the lightning equipotential bonding
every low voltage system (TN-C, TN-S,
via lightning current arresters. If no
TT) (Table 9.15.2).
lightning current arresters are installed
Up to conductor lengths of ≤ 5 m
in the low-voltage consumer's system,
between DEHNventil and terminal
the operator must be informed that
equipment, there is sufficient protec-
these have to be refitted.
tion without additional protective
devices. Longer conductors require
Further measures for protection of
additional surge protective devices at
electrical installations and systems
terminal equipment, e. g. DEHNrail.
include the installation of surge protec-
tion systems. As an additional measure
The following tables list the surge pro-
to lightning equipotential bonding,
tective devices to be applied.
these devices also allow the protection
of electrical installations and systems,
even in case of a direct lightning
stroke.
If lightning equipotential bonding and
the installation of surge protection sys-
tems are performed as carefully as the
external lightning protection system,
failures are reduced even at direct
lightning strokes.
switchgear cabinet and/or
services management room
230/400 V
1 2 3 4
4 5 6 6 5 4
bus line
1 2 2 1
equipotential bonding
1 − 4 bus station
Fig. 9.15.1 Lightning and surge protection for SIMATIC Net PROFIBUS FMS and DP 9
LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE 219
 Surge protection for bus cables of
PROFIBUS DP / PROFIBUS FMS
PROFIBUS DP/ PROFIBUS FMS
No. in SPD Type Part No.
⇒ Combined SPD for bus cables
Fig.
If a separate installation of BLITZ- 9.15.1
DUCTOR CT type BCT MOD B 110
(No. 1 in Fig. 9.15.1 / 9.15.2) at the at service BLITZDUCTOR CT‚ BCT MOD B 110 919 510
1
service entrance and BLITZDUC- entrance + Base part BCT BAS 919 506
TOR CT type BCT MOD MD HR 5 at bus station BLITZDUCTOR CT‚ BCT MOD MD HF 5 919 570
2
(no. 2 in Fig. 9.15.1 / 9.15.2) at the + Base part BCT BAS 919 506
bus sharing unit is not possible, a
combined SPD type BLITZDUC- Table 9.15.1 Surge protection for bus lines of PROFIBUS DP / PROFIBUS FMS
TOR CT BCT MOD BP HR 5 (Part No.
919 670) and base part BCT BAS
(Part No. 919 506) must be installed
directly at the unit.
Conductors for ... SPDs Part No.
Combined SPDs for three-phase and
single-phase systems: 3-phase TN-C system DEHNventil DV TNC 255 900 373
If the cable length between lightning 3-phase TN-S system DEHNventil DV TNS 255 900 374
current arresters (No. 4 in Fig. 9.15.1 /
9.15.2) and surge arresters (No. 5 in Fig. 3-phaseTT system DEHNventil DV TT 255 900 375
9.15.1 / 9.15.2) is less than ≤ 15 m, it is Single-phase TN system DEHNventil DV 2P TN 255 900 371
recommended to use the combined
Single-phase TT system DEHNventil DV 2P TT 255 900 370
SPD DEHNventil TNC, TN or TT (Table
9.15.2). Table 9.15.2 Selection of combined lightning current and surge arresters for three-phase systems

Surge protection for PROFIBUS PA bus

cables

non-hazardous area hazardous area

switchgear cabinet and/or
services management room
230/400 V
4 5 6
PROFIBUS PA 5 5 5
1 3 5

equipotential bonding

Fig. 9.15.2 Use of surge protective devices in an intrinsically safe PROFIBUS PA

PROFIBUS PA
No. in SPD Type Part No.
Fig.
9.15.2
at bus station BLITZDUCTOR CT‚ BCT MOD MD EX 24 919 580
5
+ Base part BCT BAS EX 919 507
or
BLITZDUCTOR CT‚ BCT MOD MD EX 30 919 581
+ Base part BCT BAS EX 919 507
or

9 Table 9.15.3
DEHNpipe, DPI MD EX 24 M 2S
Surge protection for bus lines of PROFIBUS PA
929 941

220 LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE www.dehn.de

 No. in Conductors for ...
SPDs Part No.
Fig. 9.15.1
and 9.15.2
Lightning current arresters
3-phase TN-C system DEHNbloc‚ DB 3 255 – Phase L1/L2/L3 to PEN 900 110
4
3-phase TN-S system DEHNbloc‚ DB 3 255 – Phase L1/L2/L3 to PE 900 110
+ DEHNbloc‚ DB 1 255 – N to PE 900 111
3-phase TT system DEHNbloc‚ DB 3 255 – Phase L1/L2/L3 to N 900 110
+ DEHNgap B/n, DGP BN 255 – N to PE 900 132
Single-phase TN-S system 2x DEHNbloc‚ DB 1 255 – Phase L1 + N to PE 900 111
Single-phase TN-C system DEHNbloc‚ DB 1 255 – Phase L to PEN 900 111
Single-phase TT system DEHNbloc‚ DB 1 255 – Phase L to N 900 111
+ DEHNgap B/n, DGP BN 255 – N to PE 900 132
Surge arresters
3-phase TN-C system DEHNguard‚ DG TNC 230 400 900 510
5
3-phase TN-S system DEHNguard‚ DG TNS 230 400 900 530
3-phase TT system DEHNguard‚ DG TT 230 400 900 520
Single-phase TN system DEHNguard‚ DG TN 230 900 506
Single-phase TT system DEHNguard‚ DG TT 230 900 508
Surge arresters for terminal devices
for 230 V supply DEHNrail, DR 230 FML 901 100
6
for 24 V dc supply DEHNrail, DR 24 FML 901 104
Table 9.15.4 Surge protection for power supply

Building without external lightning Shielding of cables

protection system
If there is no external lightning protec-
tion system, the bus sharing units must
be connected to surge protective
devices. Here, the use of lightning cur-
rent arresters on the power supply and
data cables is not required. The light-
ning current arrester with No. (4) in
Fig. 9.15.2 is not required. Nor is the
lightning current arrester with No. (1)
for the bus line.
The PROFIBUS cable is a two-wire,
shielded cable, the cable shield of
which is normally earthed at both ends.
This earthing can be easily performed
via BLITZDUCTOR CT surge protective
device by means of EMC spring termi-
nal, Part No. 919 508. If it is not possible
to earth the cable shield at both cable
ends directly, an indirect shield earth-
ing is possible with the base part of
BLITZDUCTOR CT via gas discharge
tubes. For this purpose, the gas dis-
charge tube, Part No. 919 502, has to be
inserted into the plug-in unit of the
base part of BLITZDUCTOR CT.

www.dehn.de LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE 221

9

222 LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE www.dehn.de

9.16 Surge protection for telecommunication accesses
Introduction
Beside the power supply line, telecom-
munication lines are the most impor-
tant line connection to the "outside".
For the high-technological process in
industrial plants and offices, an always
functioning interface to the "outside
world" is essential for survival today.
The user faces difficult problems when
this service is unavailable. The damage
to one's image due to surge-related
equipment trouble of the network ter-
mination NT (NTBA, NTPM, or data net-
work terminating unit DNAE) is only
one aspect of these incidents. High
downtime costs arise for the user for a
short time, since customer's orders can
not be handled, for example, or com-
pany records can only be updated local-
ly, and can no longer be provided
nationwide. Regarding the question of
protection-worthiness, the focus is not
on the protection of the hardware but
on the permanent availability of an
important service by the fixed-network
operator.
According to the statistics of the dam-
age insurers of electronic devices, the
most frequent cause of damage are
surges.
The most relevant type of the forma-
tion is the surge caused by direct or dis-
tant lightning effects. Surges due to
direct lightning strokes into a building
or structure is the severest load but the
rarer case.
Telecommunication lines often cover a
surface of a few km2 as network.
With a frequency of lightning strokes
of approximately 1 to 5 lightning
strokes per km2 and year in Germany,
frequent surge inductions have to be
expected for large area networks.
A complete lightning protection system
including external and internal light-
ning protection measures is the safest
way to protect a building or structure
against the effects of lightning dis-
charges.
This total measure, however, is the duty
of the owner of the structure and also
comprises the complete lightning
equipotential bonding within the
internal lightning protection system
and therefore also the protection of
the telecommunication cables. This is
described the lightning protection
standards DIN V VDE V 0185 Parts 3
and 4.
www.dehn.de
The threat
The connecting cables to the local
exchange as well as the internal house
wiring is implemented by copper cables
whose shielding effect is very low. By
laying cables between several build-
ings, high potential differences can
arise between the building installation
and the incoming cables. A potential
increase on the wires by galvanic and
inductive coupling has to be expected.
When arranging power supply and
communication lines in parallel,
switching surges in the power mains
can also cause interferences to the
telecommunication lines. Proceeding
from cases of damage in installations,
surge protective devices were sought
for the NT, which could also be installed
subsequently.
A common customer preference, but
also a question of reliability of the
offered service, is the use of a surge
protective circuit already at the input
side in order to prevent the penetra-
tion of dangerous surges into the NT
and via the NT. Surge protection for the
a/b wires and the 230 V power supply
of the modem is recommended. The
same applies to telephone systems,
where outputs to extensions must be
additionally protected.
In order to ensure also a lightning or
surge protection for the power supply,
our publication No. DS 614E “DEHN
stops surges”, should be considered,
which can be downloaded from
“www.dehn.de/downloads/Publications”.
Surge protection for analogue lines
Both in the industrial as well as in the
private sector, analogue data transmis-
sion via modem connection is common.
Data from any telephone outlet can be
transferred via the conventional
telecommunication network.
The modem connections
The transmission rate follows the hard-
ware capabilities of the modem. As
plug-in connector, the TAE system with
N-coding is stipulated by German
Telekom.
The telephone system
The telephone system in a company is
one of the most important communica-
tion media. The trunk lines as well as
the extension lines are usually led via
channel distributors.
The LSA-Plus terminal and disconnec-
tion blocks are very common for this
purpose. Terminal equipment is often
connected via TAE sockets with the
coding F (Fig. 9.16.1).
Surge protection for ISDN basic access
With ISDN (Integrated Services Digital
Network), various services in a common
public network are provided. Both
voice as well as data can be transfered
by digital transmission. A network ter-
mination (NT) is the transfer interface
for the subscriber. The supply line of
the digital local exchange is a balanced
pair of lines. Additionally, the NT can
be powered with 230 V.
The basic access
The basic access includes 2 B channels
with 64 kBit/s each and one D channel
with 16 kBit/s. The NT is powered by
the Uk0 interface. The subscriber inter-
face is called S0 and, as 4-wire bus line,
can be up to 150 m, and as point-to-
point connection, up to 1,000 m long.
Digital terminal equipment like tele-
phones, fax machines, or private auto-
matic branch exchanges (PABX) can be
connected to it (Fig. 9.16.2).
Surge protection for ADSL with ana-
logue port or ISDN access
Requirements for an ADSL connection
Additionally to the conventional tele-
phone extension, an ADSL connection
requires, according to access version, a
network interface card or ATM card in
the PC and a particular ADSL modem
plus a splitter for the separation of
telephone and data communication
traffic. The telephone extension can
alternatively be installed with ana-
logue or ISDN access.
The splitter separates the analogous
voice signal or the digital ISDN signal of
the ADSL data under consideration of
all important system parameters like
impedances, attenuation, levels, etc.
Consequently it fulfils the function of a
crossover network. The splitter is con-
nected at its input side to the TAE tele-
phone outlet. At its output side, it pro-
vides the higher frequency signals of
the ADSL frequency band for the ADSL
modem on the one hand, and on the
other hand, it controls the communica-
tion in the low frequency range with
the NTBA or the analogous terminal
9
equipment. Since the splitter should be
LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE 223
 telecommunication consumer No. Type Part No.
network BLITZDUCTOR® CT 919 647+
BCT MOD BD 110 + BCT BAS 919 506
2
1 DEHNconnect DCO RK MD 110 919 943
UV modem DPL DPL 1 F / ARD 110 907 145

4 BLITZDUCTOR® VT BVT TC 1 918 411

2 FAX Protector FAX PRO TAE FN 909 957

1 3 DEHNlink DLI TC 1 I 929 027
NT 1) NF/F telephone 3
DSM DSM TC 1 SK 924 271
DEHNguard TNS 900 530
4 DG TNS 230 400
2
1)
fax machine Network Termination

Fig. 9.16.1 Lightning and surge protection for analogue connections

telecommunication consumer No. Type Part No.

network BLITZDUCTOR® CT 919 647+
BCT MOD BD 110 + BCT BAS 919 506
1
DEHNconnect DCO RK MD 110 919 943
RJ 45
4 DPL DPL 1 F / ARD 110 907 145
PC 2 NT-Protector NT PRO 909 958
BLITZDUCTOR® VT BVT ISDN 918 410
UK0 S0
3 DEHNlink DLI ISDN I 929 024
1 2 3 RJ 45 4 DSM DSM ISDN SK 924 270
NT 1)
NF/F ISDN telephone 4
NTBA ISDN-Protector ISDN PRO 909 954

5 DEHNguard TNS 900 530

DG TNS 230 400
UV SDB 1)
Network Termination

5 *BLITZDUCTOR® CT and NT Protector have been officially

approved by German Telekom for protection of NTBAs

Fig. 9.16.2 Lightning and surge protection for ISDN connections

compact and cost-effective, it is usually
designed in passive form, i.e. without
own power supply.
ADSL modems are manufactured in dif-
ferent types. External devices very
often use a separate splitter. The ADSL
modem is connected to the PC via an
Ethernet (10 MBit/s), ATM25, or a USB
interface. Additionally, the modem
requires a 230 V supply voltage.
In order to ensure also a lightning or
surge protection for the power supply,
our publication No. DS 614E "DEHN
stops surges", should be considered
(Figs. 9.16.3 and 9.16.4).
Surge protection for data transmission
ISDN primary rate access
ISDN (Integrated Services Digital Net-
work) is used to provide different ser-
vices in a common public network.
Both voice as well as data can be trans-
fered by digital transmission. A net-
work termination unit (NT) is the trans-
fer interface for the subscriber. The
supply line of the digital local exchange
is a 4-wire line. Additionally, the NT is
powered with 230 V.
The primary rate access
The primary rate access (NTPM) has 30
B channels with 64 kBit/s and one
D channel with 64 kBit/s. Via the pri-
mary rate access, data transmission can
be handled up to 2.048 MBit/s. The NT
is powered by the U2m interface – the
subscriber interface is called S2m. PABX
with a high number of extensions or
data transmission lines with high data
volumes (Fig. 9.16.5) are connected to
this interface.

224 LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE www.dehn.de

 telecommunication consumer No. Type Part No.
Ethernet 10 MBit
network
or ATM 25 BLITZDUCTOR¤ CT 919 647+
BCT MOD BD 110 + BCT BAS 919 506
230 V~ 1 DEHNconnect DCO RK MD 110 919 943

3 DPL DPL 1 F / ARD 110 907 145

RJ 45 3
ADSL modem PC 2 NT-Protector NT PRO 909 958
3 DATA Protector DATA PRO 4 TP 909 955
DEHNlink DLI TC 1 I 929 027
4
1 2 4 4 DSM DSM TC 1 SK 924 271
NT 1) splitter analogue
DEHNguard TNS 900 530
telephone 5
DG TNS 230 400
UV
1)
Network Termination
5

Fig. 9.16.3 Lightning and surge protection for ADSL with analogue connections

telecommunication consumer No. Type Part No.

network Ethernet 10 MBit
BLITZDUCTOR® CT 919 647+
or ATM 25
BCT MOD BD 110 + BCT BAS 919 506
1
230 V~ DEHNconnect DCO RK MD 110 919 943
DPL DPL 1 F / ARD 110 907 145
3 RJ 45 3
PC 2 NT Protector NT PRO 909 958
ADSL
3 DATA Protector DATA PRO 4 TP 909 955
modem
4 ISDN Protector ISDN PRO 909 954
DEHNlink DLI ISDN I 929 024
S0 5
DSM DSM ISDN SK 924 270
4 RJ 45
1 2 NTBA 5
NT 1) ISDN DEHNguard TNS 900 530
splitter 6
telephone DG TNS 230 400
1)
Network Termination
UV *BLITZDUCTOR® CT and NT Protector have been officially
approved by German Telekom for protection of NTBAs
6

Fig. 9.16.4 Lightning and surge protection for ISDN and ADSL connections

telecommunication consumer No. Type Part No.

network
UV analogue BLITZDUCTOR® CT 919 675+
1 BCT MOD BD HFD 24 + BCT BAS 919 506
telephone
4 BLITZDUCTOR® CT 919 510+
3 3 BCT MOD B 110 + BCT BAS 919 506
BLITZDUCTOR® CT 919 575+
2 BCT MOD MD HFD 24 + BCT BAS 919 506

U2m S2m- 5 DPL DPL 1 F ATP 5 907 144

DEHNlink DLI TC 1 I 929 027
3
1 2 2 2 DSM DSM TC 1 SK 924 271
NT 1) NTPM TC system
4 DEHNguard TNS 900 530
DG TNS 230 400
5 SFL Protector SFL PRO 912 260
1)
Network Termination

Fig. 9.16.5 Surge protection for telecommunications systems “ISDN primary multiplex connection”

www.dehn.de LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE 225

9

226 LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE www.dehn.de

General Key to Symbols used in Diagrams
Symbol* Description Symbol* Description Symbol* Description
Lightning equipotential
PEN conductor Semiconductor bonding
Lightning current arrester

Lightning equipotential
N conductor Fuse (general) bonding
Lightning current arrester

Local equipotential
PE conductor Gas discharge tube bonding
(basic) Surge arrester

Resistor, Local equipotential

Movable conductor, Decoupling element bonding
e.g. expansion piece (general) Surge arrester
(SPD Type 1)

Local equipotential
Expansion loop Transformer bonding
(at concrete joints) Surge arrester
(SPD Type 2, SPD Type 3)

Adjustable Zener diode, unipolar Isolating spark gap

resistor

J Thermistor, adjustable Capacitor Isolating spark gap

Socket Combined surge protective

(of a socket outlet Inductor device for power supply
or a plug-in connection) and IT systems

Suppressordiode Interface Surge arrester

bipolar for hazardous areas

Earth (general) Clamp Varistor

External lightning protection

Local equipotential
Lamp bonding Equipotential
Surge arrester bonding bar

*) according to DIN V VDE V 0185-3 (VDE V 0185 Part 3): 2002-11 and DIN EN 60617: 1997-08

Trademarks – "DEHNventil"

– "BLITZDUCTOR" – “HVI”

– “BLITZPLANER” – ...MIT SICHERHEIT DEHN.

– "DEHNALU-DRAHT
– "DEHNbloc" and our logo
– "DEHNfix"
– "DEHNgrip"
– "DEHNguard"
– "DEHNport"
– "DEHNQUICK”
are registered trademarks of
– "DEHNsnap" DEHN + SÖHNE GmbH + Co.KG.

6 LIGHTNING PROTECTION GUIDE www.dehn.de